COURSE  I 


-*VTS' 


Jyj_SOji;BlAKE_MAN-] 


*• 


/  / 


ELEMENTARY  COURSE 


GEOGRAPHY: 


DESIGNED    FOR 


PRIMARY    AND    INTERMEDIATE   GRADES, 


A  COMPLETE  SHORTER  COURSE. 


WILLIAM    SWINTON, 

AUTHOR  OF   ''COMPLETE  COURSE    IN   GEOGRAPHY,"    "WORD-BOOK   SERIES,"    "LANGUAGE  SERIES,' 
"OUTLINES  OF  HISTORY,"   ETC. 


"Geography  is  the  peg  upon  which   the   greatest    quantity  of  useful    and  entertaining   scientific  information 
may  be  suspended."  —  Huxley. 


IVISON,    BLAKEMAN,   TAYLOR,   AND   COMPANY, 

NEW   YORK   AND   CHICAGO. 


SWINTONS  GEOGRAPHIES. 


Sj^^ijzfon's    GeogvcLijlhicctl    Cozwse   coinprises  two 
hooks :  — 

1 -ELEMENTARY  COURSE   IN   GEOGRAPHY;  Designed  as 

a  Class-Book  for  Primarv  and  Intermediate  Grades,  and  as  a 
Complete  Shorter  Course  for  Ungraded  Schools.     128  pages  8vo. 

2— COMPLETE  COURSE   IN  GEOGRAPHY;  Physical,  indus- 

trial,  and  Political  ;  with  a  Special  Geography  for  each  State  in 
the  Union.  Designed  as  a  Class-Book  for  Intermediate  and 
Grammar  Grades,      i  36  pages  4to. 


*.,,*  These  two  text-books  do  not  bear  the  usual  relation  of  a  Primary  to  a  Gram- 
mar-School  book  ;  that  is,  the  Elemext.\RY  is  not  a  mere  condensation  of  the 
Complete.  Each  is  an  independent  book,  individual  in  its  plan  and  method,  and 
constructed  with  philosophic  reference  to  the  mental  capacity  of  youth.  They  may 
therefore  be  used  cither  separately  or  together. 


COPYRIGHT,    1875.      IVISOX,    I!!,.\KEM.\N,    TAYI.OIi,    AND    COMPANY. 


PREFACE 


A  BRIEF  examination  of  this  text-bouk  will  show 
what  it  might  require  a  somewhat  lengthy  explanation 
to  set  forth  :  namely,  that  in  plan  and  place  it  iliiiers 
to  a  considerable  degree  from  any  geographical  school- 
book  lieretofore  iu  the  market.  The  author  will  have 
failed,  however,  in  rightly  interpreting  the  tendency  of 
geographical  instruction  as  exemplified  in  our  larger 
cities  if  it  does  not  meet  a  want  deeply  felt. 

The  Elementary  Geography  is  designed  to  be  truly 
a  primary  manual  ;  so  that  it  may  be  begun  just  as 
soon  as  any  text-book  instruction  ought  to  be  begun. 
But  it  does  not  stop  here,  for  the  matter  is  grailually 
toneil  up,  and  a  sufficiency  of  matter  given,  to  make  it 
coverall  the  ground  occupied  by  so-called  "Intermediate 
Geographies"  or  "Shorter  Courses."  Personal  inter- 
course and  an  extended  correspondence  with  teachers 
and  school  superintendents  leave  no  doubt  in  the  au- 
thor's mind  that  there  is  a  positive  call  for  a  text-book 
which  shall  be  tit  for  use  during  one  or  two  years  of 
our  Primary  and  .ine  or  two  years  of  our  Grammar 
School  course.  And  if  the  author  is  able  to  look  with 
any  confidence  to  a  favorable  reception  for  a  geography 
of  this  type,  it  is  because  he  has  heard  the  desire  for 
such  a  book' expressed  a  thousand  times. 

There  are  many  features  of  the  Elementary  Geog- 
raphy which  will  come  to  view  only  on  that  minute 
examination  which  a  text-book  receives  in  the  class 
room.  In  the  mean  time  there  are  two  aims  which  have 
been  so  prominent  in  the  author's  mind,  and  which 
liave  so  moulded  the  method  and  matter  of  this  book, 
that  a  specific  mention  of  them  here  may  be  permitted. 

First.  To  supply  teachers  with  a  detailed  and  prac- 
tical guide  in  the  difficult  but  needful  labor  of  com- 
bining effective  oral  instruction  with  the  task-work 
assigned  to  the  pupil.  Such  a  combination  is  de- 
manded by  the  latest  Coiirses  of  Study  in  most  of  our 
large  cities  ;  but,  so  far  as  the  author  knows,  this  is  the 
only  text-book  by  means  of  which  the  teachers  of 
Primary  classes  can  do  the  work  marked  out  in  these 
Courses  of  Study.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  Elemen- 
tary Geography  is  in  a  large  degree  objective  and 
inductive  in  its  method.  The  mode  of  unfolding  a 
geographical  topic  is  somewhat  as  follows  :  — 

1.  In  place  of  enunciating  a  principle  in  generalized 
abstract  terms,  a  series  of  questions  leading  up  to  the 
principle  and  addressed  to  the  perceptive  faculty  of  the 


young  scholar  is  asked,  —  (juestions  the  answers  to  which 
will  be  supplied  by  the  ])Upirs  own  senses. 

2.  Then,  wlien  the  mind  of  the  pupil  is  awakened, 
comes  the  oral  work  of  the  teacher,  —  explanations, 
illustrations,  suggestive  (jheries,  etc.  Tlie  character  of 
this  work  is  indicated  in  explicit  terms  at  the  exact 
point  where  it  should  come  in. 

3.  Finally,  the  pupil  having  by  an  easy  inductive 
process  formed  a  true  conce])tion  (though  perhaps  still 
without  ability  to  put  it  into  language),  the  principle  is 
enunciated.  At  this  point  a  specific  question  is  asked 
and  the  answer  is  given  ;  and  as  this  is  the  part  of  the 
lesson  to  be  memorized,  the  answers  are  printed  in 
bold-faced  type  so  that  the  pupil  can  make  no  mis- 
take about  the  matter. 

Secondly.  To  unite,  in  the  descriptive  geography  of 
countries,  reading  and  recitation  matter.  The  author 
was  led  to  adopt  this  plan  as  a  compromise  between 
two  extreme  methods  of  treatment.  The  one  is  the 
hard,  curt,  matter-of-fact  style  of  question  and  answer, 
which  characterizes  most  primary  geographies.  The 
other  style,  the  opposite  of  this,  is  exemplified  in  a  few 
class-books  that  have  appeared  as  the  result  of  a  reac- 
tion from  the  Gradgrind  method  :  it  consists  in  pre- 
senting to  the  pupil  flowing  descriptions  and  animated 
narratives.  These,  though  charming  as  mere  reading 
lessons,  fail  in  leaving  that  precise  and  definite  knowl- 
edge which  in  our  public  schools  must  be  obtained  as 
a  necessity  in  examinations  for  promotion. 

In  this  manual  it  is  sought  to  combine  the  defi- 
niteness  of  tlie  question-and-answer  method  with  the 
attractiveness  of  the  reading  lesson.  They  belong 
together,  and  their  union  should  help  to  make  the 
study  of  geography  both  enlivening  and  profitable. 
The  selection  of  the  right  kind  of  matter  for  the  reading 
lessons  has  been  no  easy  task.  The  author  has,  how- 
ever, aimed  to  give  what  was  at  once  useful  and 
interesting ;  and  he  feels  confident  that  the  prominence 
given  to'  industrial  topics  is  quite  in  place  in  a  text- 
book designed  for  American  youth. 

In  conclusion  the  author  would  say  that  the  Ele- 
mentary Geography  is  in  no  respect  a  condensation 
of  his  Complete  Course,  and  that  either  may  be  used 
without  the  other. 

■WILLIAM  s^vI^•TO^^ 

Cambridge,  Mass.,  August,  1875. 


54  * 


CONTENTS 


Part  I. -PRIMARY  LESSONS. 

Section  1.     THINGS  AROUND  US    . 

Lesson  I.  What  we  are  to  study 

"      II.  Local  Geography  . 

"    III.  Local  Geography 

"     IV.  To  TELL  Direction 

"       V.  To  TELL  Distance 

"     VI.  Review  and  Test  Questions 

"   VII.  Lines  and  Angles 

"VIII.  A  Picture  and  a  Plan  . 

"     IX.  Plan  of  the  School  Grounds 

"      X.  Maps  of  Countries 

"    XL  The  Horizon 

"  XII.  Shape  of  the  Earth 

"XIII.  Size  of  the  Earth     . 

"  XIV.  Our  Planet    .... 

"   XV.  Review  and  Test  Questions 


Section  II.    LAND  AND  WATER     . 

Lesson  I.  The  Earth's  Surface 

"      II.  The  Continents     . 

"    III.  The  Oceans 

"    IV.  Peninsulas  and  Capes  . 

"      V.  Bays,  Gulfs,  and  Seas 

"    VI.  An  Isthmus  and  a  Strait 

"  VII.  Plains,  Mountains,  and  Valleys 

"VIII.  Some  Things  about  Plains  . 

"     IX.  Islands  and  Lakes    . 

"      X.  Rivers 

"    XL  History  of  a  River  . 

"  XII.  Review  and  Test  Questions 


Section  III.    OUR  WORLD      . 

Lesson  I.  On  what  the  Earth  turns   . 

"      II.  North  and  Sotuth  Poles  . 

"    III.  The  Equator 

"     IV.  Situation  North  or  South 

"      V.  Review  and  Test  Questions 

"    VI.  Hot  Weather  and  Cold  . 


Lesson  VIL  Climate  — A  Journey  . 

"     VIII.  Zones  of  Climate 

"        IX.  Globe  Exercise  on  Climate 

"  X.  Climate  by  Height  . 

•'        XI.  Plants 

"       XII.  Plants  useful  to  Man 

"     XIII.  Animals  .        .        .        . 

"     XIV.  Animals  by  Zones 

"       XV.  Review  and  Test  Questions 

Section  IV.   MAN   ON   THE  EARTH 

Lesson  I.  Races  op  Men 

"      II.  Wants  of  Man  . 

"    III.  Our  Wants  :  Food 

"     IV.  Our  Wants  :  Clothing 

"      V.  Our  Wants  :  Shelter  . 

"     VI.  Occupations  of  Men 

"  VII.  Kinds  of  Occupations  . 

"VIII.  Divisions  of  Countries 


Part  II. -DESCRIPTION  OF  COUNTRIES. 

NORTH   AMERICA 34 

Nature  of  North  America        ...  34 

Lands  North  of  the  United  States     .        .  39 

Lands  South  of  the  United  States          .  45 

THE   UNITED   STATES 53 

General  Description         ....  53 

New  England 59 

The  Middle  States 65 

The  Southern  States 75 

The  Western  States 81 

Pacific  Highlands  and  Slope       ...  91 

SOUTH   AMERICA 95 

EUROPE 101 

ASIA 113 

AFRICA 121 

POLYNESIA 125 

GENERAL  REVIEW 127 


LIST    OF    MAPS 


PAGE 

MAP   OF  COUNTRIES   BY   CLIMATE        .        .  25 

HEMISPHERE   MAP 33 

NORTH   AMERICA 35 

MEXICO,   CENTRAL   AMERICA,    AND    THE 

WEST   INDIES 52 

THE   UNITED   STATES 54,  55 

NEW   ENGLAND 58 

MIDDLE   STATES 67 

SOUTHERN    STATES 74 

TEXAS   AND   NEW   MEXICO  ....  79 


PAGE 

CENTRAL   STATES   {JFestern  Division)  ...     82 
CENTRAL   STATES   [e astern  Division)       .        .         83 

PACIFIC   STATES 90 

SOUTH   AMERICA 94 

EUROPE 100 

BRITISH   ISLES 105 

CENTRAL   EUROPE 107 

ASIA 112 

AFRICA 120 

POLYNESIA 125 


GEOGRAPHY. 


I  N  T  II  ()  L)  U  C  T  ION. 


GEOGRAPHY  IN   A  CUP  OF  COFFEE. 
tS-  This  Lesson  ia  designed  merely  to  be  read  aloud  in  the  class. 


Alicf  and  Ralph  sat  one 
raoining  at  brc  ikfast  with 
their  parents  and  their  Uncle 
'^  John  Uncle  John  was  cip- 
taiii  of  a  meichant  ship,  and 
foi  thirty  years  had  followed 
the  sea.  The  children  loved  to  hear  him  tell  stories  ; 
for  he  had  been  all  round  the  world,  and  had  seen 
many  strange  sights.  His  stories  were  not  generally 
what  are  called  "  sailor's  yarns  " :  he  was  fond  of  tell- 
ing things  that  were  useful  and  true;  and  sometimes 
he  surprised  the  children  hy  bringing  up  a  subject 
that  tliey  thought  was  not  at  all  interesting,  and 
then  showing  them  that  it  was  just  as  wonderful  as 
any  fiction. 

"  Here 's  this  cup  of  coffee  your  mother  has  just 
poureil  out  for  me,"  said  Captain  John  ;  "  there  is  a 
good  deal  more  in  t/iat  than  you  suppose.  Where  did 
it  come  from,  Alice  ? " 

"  From  the  kitchen,"  replied  Alice. 
"  Ha  !  ha  ! "  laughed  the  sailor  ;   "  there  's  a  matter- 
of-fact  little  housekeeper  for  you  !     But  did  the  coffee 
ff7-oio  in  the  kitchen  1    Molly  the  cook  knows  the  coffee 
came  from  the  grocer's,  and  most  likely  that  is  all  she 


cares  about  it ;  but  you,  Alice,  who  will  one  day  be 
mistress  of  a  house,  my  dear,  and  be  cheated  by  the 
grocers,  unless  you  learn  something  about  the  goods 
you  buy,  ought  to  know  better." 

"  O  Uncle  ! "  cried  Ralph,  "  I  have  seen  bags  of 
coffee  at  the  store  marked  'Old  Java';  and  I  know 
there  is  an  island  called  Java  near  the  coast  of  Asia  : 
that 's  where  it  comes  from  !  " 

"  Perhaps  it  did  come  from  Java,"  rejilied  the  Cap- 
tain; "but  labels  do  not  always  tell  the  truth,  and 
most  likely  it  was  Rio  coffee,  because  almost  all  our 
coffee  comes  from  Rio."  [He  pronounced  the  word 
ree'o.] 

"  You  don't  know  where  Rio  is  1 "  he  asked.  "  Why, 
Rio  Janeiro,  the  capital  city  of  Brazil,  in  South 
America.  See  here,"  said  the  Captain,  taking  his  fork 
and  marking  on  the  table-cloth  as  if  he  were  tracing 
a  map  :  "  here  is  the  great  seaport  of  New  York. 
Three  years  ago  we  sailed  from  here  to  Rio  for  a  cargo 
of  coffee,  taking  out  New  England  calicoes  and  hard- 
ware in  exchange.  This  is  the  course  we  held,  —  a 
southerly  course  down  the  Atlantic,  past  these  islands 
where  oranges  and  bananas  grow  —  " 


Map  to  illustrate  the  Geography  in  a  Cup  ol  Cofiee, 


GEOGRAPHY  IN  A  CUP  OF  COFFEE. 


"  'riuil  8*lfie  West  Indies,"  interruptiMl  Ealph. 
"  Yes  ;  iiiid  across  the  line  —  " 
"  Tlie  line  !      What  line  %  "  inquired  Alice. 
"  \Vliy,   the  Equator,"  replied  the  Captain.      "  Not 
that   there   is   any   real   line  on  the  sea   or  the  land 
eitlier  ;  but  when  ships  pass  through  the  ijlace  where 
tlie   Equator    i.s,   we    call    it    crossing   the  line.      The 
sailors  have  a  great  deal  of  fun  when  they  cross  the 
line.       Some    of   them   dress   up   oddly  and   get   into 
a  boat,  and  then   pretend   to  hail  the  ship.      One  of 
the  sailors  represents  Neptune,  who  was  said  by  the 
Greeks  to  be  the  god  of  the  sea.     They  give  a  little 
present  to  the  captain,   and  dance  on  the  deck,  and 
have  very  rough  sports.     Perhaps  you  know  that  for 
a  lon<T  di'itance  on  each  side  of  the  Equator,  as  this 
^^-^^r^—r^  line  is  called,  the  weather 

is  always  very  hot.     Well, 
we   were   at   last    off   the 
-■"  f"        oast  of  Brazil,   and  soon 

1 1 1 jpped  anchor  in  the 
beautiful  harbor  of  Eio 
Janeiro.  It  took  us  seven- 
teen days  to  make  the 
voyage  from  New  York, 
• — a  distance,  as  we  reck- 
oned it,  of  about  five  thousand  miles." 

"  And  it  was  there  you  visited  the  coffee  plantation 
we  have  heard  you  speak  of?"  inquired  the  children's 
father. 

"  Yes ;  while  our  ship  was  loading  I  accepted  the 
invitation  of  a  friend  of  mine  to  go  to  his  plantation. 


Harbor  of  Rio. 


Coffee-Plant. 

It  was  in  February  ;  the  cclfee-berry  was  ripe,  and  the 
gathering  had  begun." 

"0   Uncle!  Fchnuir;/  f"  exclaimed  Alice.      "Isn't 


that  a  sailor's  yarn  ?    Why,  the  snow  is  on  the   ground 
in  February' !  " 

"  My  little  skeptic,  you  will  have  to  begin  studyin"- 
geography  ;  then  you  will  learn  that  in  the  countries 
south  of  the  line  I  told  you  about  the  seasons  are 
just  the  opposite  of  ours.  Our  winter  is  their  sum- 
mer, and  their   siunmer  is  our  winter.      Well,   as   I 


> 

Flcklng  the  Coffee  Berry 

was  saying,  the  coffee-bushes,  —  and  handsome  bushes 
they  are  ;  about  as  large  as  small  plum-trees,  with  leaves 
of  dark,  shining  green,  and  white  flowers,  —  the  coffee- 
bushes  were  full  of  ripened  fruit.  Get  me  a  coffee- 
bean,  Ralph.  Y''ou  see  this  kernel ;  it  has  a  flat  side, 
eh  1  Now,  there  was  a  twin-grain  that  fitted  this  one, 
and  the  two,  as  they  grew  on  the  bush,  were  shut  up 
in  a  soft  red  pulp  like  a  cherry.  The  negroes  gather 
these  berries  in  deep  baskets,  and  lay  them  out  on  large 
flat  stones,  where  the  grains  are  spread  out  to  dry  after 
the  red  juicy  part  is  rubbed  off.  In  Brazil  there  are 
thousands  of  these  plantations,  where  great  quantities 
of  the  dried  coft'ee  are  put  up  in  bags  and  sent  to 
Rio  Janeiro  to  be  shipped  to  all  parts  of  the  world." 

"  Well,  Uncle,  you  returned  to  New  York  with  your 
cargo.     What  did  you  do  with  it  then  1 " 

"  Yes ;  it  was  taken  by  a  wholesale  merchant,  who 
sold  it  by  the  bag  to  retailers;  and  if  this  coft'ee,"  said 
Uncle  John,  taking  a  sip,  —  "  if  this  coffee  did  not  come 
in  my  ship,  it  came  the  same  way  in  some  other." 

"  Now,  Uncle,"  said  Ralph,  "  as  you  have  been  all 
over  the  world,  and  know  where  everything  grows, 
please  tell  us  where  the  sugar  we  put  in  our  coffee  to 
sweeten  it  conies  from." 

"  AVith  pleasure,  my  lad.  Many  plants  contain  sugar, 
but  not  enough  to  pay  for  getting  it  out.  In  France 
and  Germany  millions  of  pounds  of  sugar  are  made 
from  the  common  sugar-beet ;  but  most  of  our  sugar  is 
made  from  the  sugar-cane." 

"  I  have  seen  a  picture  of  a  field  of  sugar-cane,  and 
the  negroes  working  in  it.  Uncle,"  said  Alice. 

"  Probably  it  was  a  scene  in  the  island  of  Cuba,  one 
of  tlie  West  Indies.  Half  of  all  the  sugar  used  in  the 
world  comes  from  there.  Or  it  may  have  been  a  scene 
in  Louisiana,  which  you  know  is  one  of  the  United 


^1^^?:; 


GEOGRAPHY   IN  A   CUP   OF   COFFEE. 


bagar  Mm 

Stutes,  through  which  runs  the  great  Mississipin  l\iver. 
New  Orleans,  not  far  from  its  mouth,  is  a  place  where 
a  great  deal  of  sugar  is  sold.  But  wherever  it  was,  a 
field  of  sugar-canes  in  blossom,  with  the  jointed  stems 
rising  twelve  or  fifteen  feet  high,  is  one  of  the  prettiest 
sights  I  ever  saw." 

"What  is  the  difference,  Uncle,"  asked  lialph,  "be- 
tween brown  sugar  and  white  sugar  ?  Do  tlu^y  come 
from  ditt'erent  kinds  of  cane  1 " 

"  Not  at  all :  let  me  tell  you.  When  the  cane  is 
right  for  cutting  down,  it  is  stripped  of  its  tops  and 
leaves,  cut  up  into  short  pieces,  tied  into  bundles,  and 
taken  to  the  mill.  Here  the  canes  are  crushed  be- 
tween iron  rollers,  somewhat  as  apples  are  in  making 
cider ;  and  the  juice  is  taken  and  boiled  into  syrup 
in  large  shallow  pans.  Next  it  is  stirred  in  coolers 
until  it  grains,  or  becomes  granulated.  Then  it  is 
put  into  hogsheads  baving  holes  bored  in  the  bottom, 
and  these  are  placed  endwise  over  a  large  cistern  and 
left  to  drain.  In  this  state  it  is  brown  sugar,  and  the 
drainings  are  molasses.  Now,  white  sugar  is  merely 
brown  sugar  refined,  or  boUed  over  again,  and  worked 
white." 

"  Why  does  n't  the  sugar-cane  grow  here  ^ "  asked 
Alice. 

"  For  the  simple  reason,"  replied  the  Captain,  "  that 
the  sugar-cane  is  a  very  tender  plant,  and  will  grow 
only  where  there  is  little  or  no  frost.  When  you 
come  to  study  geography  you  will  know  what  I  mean 
when  I  say  that  the  sugar-cane  thrives  only  within 
the  tropics,  or  on  their  borders." 

The  Captain  now  lifted  his  silver  spoon,  and,  looking 
at  it,  said  :  "  As  you  bave  set  me  to  talking,  I  may 
as  well  tell  you  that  this  spoon,  with  which  we  stir 


our  cottee,  has  a  family  history.  AVe  get  the  .spoon 
from  the  jeweler's,  to  be  sure,  as  we  get  our  coffee 
from  the  grocer's ;  but  what  of  the  metal  before  the 
sdversmith  wrought  it  into  this  useful  shape  ?  I  think 
that  more  than  likely  it  came  from  here  [pointing  on 
Ins  imaginary  map  to  near  the  Pacific  coast  of  the 
United  States],  in  the  far  western  part  of  our  country. 
In  those  mountains  which  we  call,  after  the  Spaniards, 
the  Sierra  Nevada,  or  Snowy  Eange,  are  the  richest 
bilver-mines  in  the  world.  And  some  time  I  will  de- 
scribe to  you  how  the  ore  is  taken  out  from  mines 
deep  down  in  the  earth,  —  how  it  is  crushed  by  the 
giant  force  of  machines  called  stamp-mills,  —  and  how 
it  is  moulded  into  bars,  and  made  ready  for  coining 
into  money  or  for  making  into  silver-ware." 

"  Can't  you  teU  the  children  about  the  cups  we  are 
drinking  from,"  said  the  Captain's  sister,  a  little  proud- 
ly. "  You  gave  me  this  set  of  cups  and  saucers  ten 
years  ago,  when  you  came  home  from  a  voyage  to 
China,  and  the  children  have  often  asked  me  about 
them." 

"  Well,"  continued  the  Captain,  "  these  did  come 
from  China,  though  most  of  the  ware  called  China 
ware  has  nothing  Chinese  about  it  but  the  name.  Nor 
indeed  is  there  any  need  of  our  going  to  that  far-off 
land  for  our  crockery,  when  such  excellent  ware  is 
made  in  our  own  country.  Still,  the  name  reminds 
us  that  the  Chinese  first  tauglit  us  the  art  of  making 
cups  and  saucers,  which,  as  you  know,  are  made  of  a 
fine  white  clay,  ornamented  and  baked,  but  requiring 
great  skill  in  making.  This  queer,  ingenious  people, 
though  they  use  but  little  coft'ee,  have  for  hundreds 
and  perhaps  thousands  of  yeare  been  drinking  tea. 
From  them  we  learned  the  use  of  the  fragrant  herb, 
and  all  the  world  has  still  to  go  to  the  Flowery  Land, 
as  they  call  their  country,  for  its  tea." 

"  Now,  children,"  said  the  father,  "  you  see  your 
uncle  has  shown  you  that  for  this  simple  cup  of  coffee 
we  have  dra.wn  on  a  large  part  of  the  world." 

"  Yes,"  continued  the  Captain,  "  if  we  could  at  one 
view  see  all  the  hands,  besides  Molly's,  that  have  been 
at  work  in  getting  this  cup  of  coffee  ready  for  us,  we 
should  see  a  great  multitude.  The  agriculturist,  the 
navigator,  the  miner,  the  artisan,  the  merchant,  have 
all  had  a  part  in  the  work.  Would  n't  it  be  a  sight 
indeed  to  see  them  all  at  work  at  one  time  getting 
up  a  cup  of  coffee  !  What  a  panorama  it,  woidd  be  ! 
Now,  children,  is  n't  there  more  geography  in  the  cup 
of  coffee  than  yuu  had  any  idea  of  1 " 


PEIMAEY    LESSONS. 


Part   I. -PRIMARY   LESSONS 


To  THE  Teacher.  — A  brief  examination  of  the  arrangement  of  tlie  matter  in  these  Lessons  will  enable  the  Teacher  to  explain 
to  the  pupils  what  is  runuired  of  them  in  preparing  a  Lesson.  First,  it  will  be  noticed  (see  Lesson  IV.  etc.)  that  certain  answers 
are  printed  In  heavy-faced  type.  These  form  the  only  part  to  be  committed  to  memory.  Second,  there  are  oial  questions,  the 
answers  to  which,  the  pupUs  will  be  able  to  give  in  their  own  language.  Third,  tliere  are  suggestions  to  the  teacher  ;  these  are  in 
smaller  type,  and  enclosed  in  brackets. 

IL  — LOCAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

[For  City  Classes.] 

1.  What  Ls  the  name  ul'  the  city  in  which  you  live! 
2.  In  what  county  i.s  it!  .  3.  In  what  State!  4.  Is 
this  city  situated  on  the  sea-coast,  or  on  a  river  or 
lake ! 

5.  Can  any  mountain  be  seen  from  this  place  ?  6.  Is 
it  a  large  city  or  a  small  one  1  7.  Do  you  know  the 
number  of  people  living  in  it  t  8.  What  is  the  name 
of  the  principal  street  in  this  city  ?  9.  In  what  street 
is  our  school-house  situated  t 

10.  In  what  street  is  your  home'!  11.  Point  in 
the  direction  of  the  City  Hall?  —  of  the  Post-Office. 
1 2.  Does  any  railroad  pass  through  this  city  1  1 3.  Have 
you  ever  seen  any  other  city  except  your  own  1  1 4.  How 
did  you  travel  to  that  city  ? 

l.'i.   Is  it  a  larger  or  a  smaller  city  than  your  own'! 

16.  How   far   is   it   to  the   city   which    you   visited] 

17.  Can  you  tell  the  name  of  any  railroad  that  ends 
in  (or  passes  through)  your  city  1  18.  What  place  in 
the  country  did  you  ever  visit!  19.  How  does  the 
country  diifer  from  the  city? 

20.  Give  a  short  account  of  the  longest  journey  you 
ever  made,  —  telling  how  you  went,  what  places  you 
visited,  and  what  you  saw-. 

Exercise.  —  On  slates  or  paper,  write  a  short  geographi- 
cal de.?(-ription,  by  filling  the  blanks  in  the  following  sen- 
tences:—I  live  in  the  city    of  ,  -county,  State 

of This  place  is   sittiated   on   the River.     It  is 

a city,  containing,  I  believe,   inhabitants.     The 

name  of  the  principal  street  is Our  school  is  situated 

in Street.     Among  the  public  buildings  in  this  city 

are ,   ,  etc [name  of  the  city]   is  noted  for 

.....    ,  etc. 


Sect.  I.     THINGS  AROUND   US. 

I. -WHAT  WE   ARE  TO   STUDY. 

1.  What  is  thix  stadj/  which  ire  are  noiv  to  take  up? 
We  take  up  the  study  of  Geography. 

Teacher.    I  will  pronounce,  and  you  may  spell,  —  Geog- 
raphy. 

I  will  spell,  and  you  may  pronounce,  —  G  e  i>  graph  y. 

2.  Where  do  you  live '!     Is  it  in  a  city,  or  is  it  in 
the  country '! 

T.    Geography  tells  how  many  people  live  in  the  same 
place  with  you,  and  how  they  make  their  living. 

3.  What  is  the  name  of  the  State  in  which  you  live '! 
T.    Geography  tells  us  about  the  different  parts  of  oiu' 

State,  and  how  we  may  travel  from  one  place  in  it  to  another. 

4.  Do  you  know  the  name  of  any  other  State '! 
T.   Geography  tells  about  all  the  States  in  our  country. 

5.  What   is  the  name  of  Our  Country  1     Do  you 
know  the  name  of  any  other  country  besides  our  own  '! 

T.   Geography  tells  about  our  own  coimtry,  and  about 
all  other  countries  in  the  world. 

6.  Did  you  ever  see  an  island  ! 
T.    Geography  tells  about  all  the  islands  in  the  world. 

7.  Did  you  ever  see  a  mountain  1 
T.   Geography  tells  about  the  great  mountains  of  the 

world,   some  of  them  several  miles   high   and   thousands 
of  miles  long. 

8.  Did  you  ever  see  any  part  of  the  ocean  1 
T.   Geography  tells  about  the  ocean,  which  is  so  large 

that  steamships  may  saU  on  it  for  weeks  without  coming 
to  land. 

9.  Did  you  ever  see  a  lake '! 
T.   Geography  tells  about  lakes. 

10.  Did  you  ever  see  a  river '] 
T.    Geography  tells  about   the   rivers  of  all  countries ; 

anil   this   is  very  mteresting,  because  most   of  the   jjreat 
cities  of  the  world  are  built  on  the  banks  of  rivers. 

11.  Did  you  ever  see  a  map  1 

T.    Geography   tells   us   how   to   use   niajis,    and   these 
show  us  all  the  countries  and  places  in  the  world. 

12.  Whid  does  Geoc/ra/ihi/  tell  uhoiit  ? 
Geography  tells   about  the  outside,  or  surface  of 

the  earth,  on  ■which  ■we  live. 


in. —  LOCAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

I  For  Country  Classes.] 

1.  What  is  the  name  of  tiie  town  (or  township)  in 
which  you  live!  2.  In  what  county  is  it?  3.  In 
what  vState'!  4.  How  far  is  it  from  your  liomc  to 
the  school-house? 


LOCAL   GEOGEAPHY. 


TO   TELL   DIRECTION. 


5.  Point  in  the  direction  of  your  home.  6.  What 
I'iver,  mountain,  or  hill,  lake  or  pond,  is  there  in  this 
place?  7.  Does  any  railroad  jiass  through  this  place '! 
8.  To  what  markets  do  the  farmers  in  this  neighbor- 
hood send  their  jiroduce  ?  9.  Wliat  towns  near  lun-e 
have  you  ever  visited  '( 

1 0.  Name  any  town  near  this.  1 1 .  What  city  have 
you  ever  seen?  12.  How  does  it  differ  from  this 
place  1  1 .3.  Tell  the  names  of  any  cities  in  this  State. 
1 4.  How  far  is  it  from  this  place  to  the  nearest  city  1 

15.  Give  a  short  account  of  the  longest  journey  you 
ever  made,  —  telling  how  you  went,  what  places  you 
visited,  and  what  you  saw. 

Exercise.  —  On  slates  or  paper,  write  a  short  geograph- 
ical description,  by  filling  the  blanks  in  the  following  sen- 
tences :  —  I  live  in  the  town  (or  township)  of  .....   .... 

county.    State    of  ....     The  name   of  our   village   is  ... . 

Other  villages  are The  principal  river  in  this  town  is 

called Most  of  the  people  in  this  place  make  their 

living  by  ... .  There  is  a  railroad  depot  at  ....  The 
trains  run  to  [name  of  nearest  large  city]. 


IV.  — TO   TELL  DIRECTION. 

1.  Point  toward  the  nearest  church.     Point  toward 
the  post-office.     Point  toward  the  river  (if  any  near  by). 

[The  teacher  may 
explain  that  by 
1 "  anting  toward  a 
plare  we  show  where 
It  is ;  then  inquire 
li'iw  we  may  icU  a 
I'lrson  where  a  place 
ii  .some  distance 
Kiiii  us  is.  Let  the 
;  - Mcher  give  the 
ninie  DIRECTION, 
:iiid  define  it.] 


2.    Ilotv  do  you 
tell  where  one  place  Ix  n'ith  rei/nrd  to  antither  place  ? 

We  tell  where  one  place  is  with  regard  to  another 
by  stating  the  direction  of  the  one  from  the  other. 

3.  What  inords  do  we  vse  to  name  the  dirertions  I 

To  name  the  directions  we  use  the  words  North, 
South,  East,  West. 

4.  Did  you  ever  see  the  sun  rise  or  set?  Point  to 
where  you  saw  the  sun  rise  or  set.  Let  any  scholar 
who  has  seen  the  sun  rise  stand  up  with  his  right 
shoulder  toward  the  place  where  it  rose.  Now  point 
to  the  right.     In  that  direction  is  east. 

5.  Where  is  east  ? 

East  is  the  direction  w^here  the  sun  rises. 

6.  Where  is  jcest  / 

West  is  the  direction  w^here  the  sun  sets. 


7.  Where  is  north? 

North  is  the  direction  before  us  when  the  right 
arm  is  stretched  toward  the  east. 

8.  JVkerc  is  south  I 

South  is  the  direction  behind  us  when  w^e  are 
facing  toward  the  north. 

9.  Point  half-imii  beticven  the  north  <ind  the  east  ■ 
ivhat  direction  is  that  ? 

Half-way  between  north  and  east  is  northeast. 

10.  Point  half-way  hetween  the  north  and  the  west ; 
ivhat  direction  is  that  1 

Half-way  between  north  and  west  is  northwest. 

11.  Point  half-way  between  the  south  and  the  east ; 
■what  direction   is  that  / 

Half-way  between  south  and  east  is  southeast. 

12.  Point  half-way  between  the  south  and  the  luest : 
what  direction  is  tliat  "> 

Half-way  between  south  and  west  is  southwest. 

[Tlie  pupil  may  now  be  told  that  these  names  are  the  names 
of  the  points  of  the  compass.  Tell  the  class  what  a  compass 
is,  —  if  possible,  show  one.  A  compass  is  a  bo.x  which  has  a 
card  in  it  marked  with  these  names  of  directions  and  other 
names  of  intermediate  directions.  Hung  on  a  pivot  above  this 
card  is  a  tnagnelic  needle,  which  has  the  wonderful  property  of 
always  pointing  toward  the  north.] 

13.  Did  you  ever  see  a  pocket  oompa.ssi  A  sur- 
veyor's comjiass  ?     A  mariner's  compass  i 


C^^  The  teacher  wiJl  do  well  to  place  this  diagram  on  the  black- 
board and  drill  the  pupils  on  it. 

Exercise.  —  1.  Point  to  the  east,  —  to  the  west,  —  to 
the  north,  —  to  the  south.  2.  In  which  wall  or  walls  are 
window-s  ?  3.  On  which  wall  is  the  map  hung '/  4.  Which 
walls  have  blackboards  1  5.  Name  some  one  in  the  room 
who  stands  east  from  you,  —  south  from  yon.  6.  Point 
toward  your  home  :  in  what  direction  is  it  \  7.  In  what 
direction  is  the  school-house  fi-om  your  home  ?  8.  Let  a 
pupil  who  lives  north  —  south  —  east,  etc.  from  here  rise. 

f).  [To  a  pupil.']  From  the  middle  of  the  room  walk 
north.  [To  a  second  pupil.]  From  the  middle  of  the  room 
walk  south  [and  so  on,  sending  one  pupil  to  each  of  the 
eight  points  of  the  compass]. 

10.  One  pupil  will  stand  facing  north,  and  eight  pupils 
will  form  a  ring  around  him  ;  each  of  the  eight  pupils  will 
tell  where  he  is  with  regard  to  the  one  in  the  center. 

11.  Let  the  names  North,  Northeast,  SotUh,  Southeast,  etc. 
be  given  to  eight  pupils  ;  then  let  a  ninth,  facing  north, 
call  out  the  names,  and  let  each  pupil  place  himself  in  the 
proper  position  without  hesitation. 


PEIMARY   LESSORS. 


TO   TELL   DISTANCE. 


is  its  direction  from  lieve  ?  6.  What  place  do  you  know 
ten  miles  south  [or  east,  etc.]  from  here  i  7.  Reckoning  a 
railroad  train  as  going  at  tlie  rate  of  25  miles  per  hour, 
what  is  the  distance  of  the  longest  journey  you  ever  took 
by  the  cars  ? 


VI.  — REVIEW  AND  TEST  QUESTIONS. 


Measuring  Distances 

1    Ho«  txi  1^  it  to  jour 
home  ^    What  do  you  sup- 
pobe  is  the  distance  acioss 
this  room?     What  is  the 
length  of  your  desk?  What 
is  the  length  of  this  pen- 
cil ?    What  is  your  height  1 
2.   IIoio  may  we  tell  how 
far  one  place  is  from   an- 
other ? 
We  tell  how  far  one  place  is  from  another  by  tell- 
ing the  distance  from  the  one  place  to  the  other. 

3.  What  measure  do  carpenters  use  ?  Did  you  ever 
see  a  foot-rule?     How  many  inches  in  a  foot? 

4.  What  measure  do  dry-goods  clerks  use  ?  Did  you 
ever  see  a  yardstick  1    How  many  feet  in  a  yard  ? 

[The  exercise  may  be  enlivened  by  the  teacher's  placing  on 
the  blackboard  two  marks  at  various  distances  apart,  as  a  foot, 
eighteen  inches,  a  yard,  seven  feet,  etc.,  and  then  calling  on  the 
pupils  to  guess  the  distance  ;  also  by  referring  to  the  length 
in  inches  of  various  objects,  the  pupils  guessing  and  then  meas- 
uring. ] 

6.  When  we  wish  to  tell  a  person  how  far  it  is 
from  one  city  to  another,  do  we  not  state  how  many 
miles  it  is  from  the  one  city  to  the  other?  Do  you 
know  how  many  feet  there  are  in  a  mile  ?  \The  teacher 
will  tell.]  How  many  feet  in  half  a  mile  ?  In  a  quar- 
ter of  a  mile  ? 

6.  What  is  the  length  of  your  ordinary  steps,  or 
paces  f  If  it  is  18  inches,  how  many  steps,  or  paces, 
would  it  take  to  make  a  yard  ?  At  this  rate,  it  would 
take  how  many  steps,  or  paces,  to  make  a  mile  ? 

7.  Could  you  tell  the  probable  distance  between  the 
school-house  and  your  home  by  counting  tlie  number 
of  steps  ?  Could  you  tell  it  by  the  time  that  it  takes 
you  to  walk  it  ?  At  what  rate  do  you  walk  at  your 
usual  gait  ? 

Exercise.  —  1.  What  is  the  length,  and  what  the  breadth, 
of  the  school-room  in  yaccs  ?  —  infect?  2.  How  far  is  it 
from  your  home  to  the  school-house  ?  3.  About  how  long 
is  the  longest  street  in  the  place  where  you  live  ?  4.  Men- 
tion a  city,  town,  or  village  three  miles  from  here.     5.  What 


About  what  have  we  been  studying  aU  the  week  ? 

What  is  the  study  called  that  tells  us  about  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth  ? 

What  is  the  surface  of  the  earth  ? 

What  are  the  names  of  the  four  principal  directions  ? 

What  are  the  names  of  the  four  middle  directions  ? 

What  do  you  mean  by  points  of  the  compass  ? 

What  is  the  opposite  direction  from  east  ?  — from  west  ? 

What  is  the  opposite  direction  from  south  ?  — from 
north  ? 

Point  to  the  ceiling  :   in  what  direction  is  that  ? 

Point  to  the  floor  ;   in  what  direction  is  that  ? 

What  do  we  mean  when  we  speak  of  the  distance  of 


pla 


fron 


othe 


12.    Name  all  the  measures  of  distance  that  you  know. 


VIL  — LINES   AND   ANGLES. 

Teacher's  Note.  —  If  the  pupil  has  had  no  elementary 
training  in  drawing  lines,  angles,  and  common  geometiical 
figures,  some  days'  practice  slioidd  now  be  spent  on  the  matter. 
It  will  not  be  necessary  to  give  formal  definitions,  as  the  ability 
rapidly  to  recognize  and  reproduce  the  given  line,  etc.  is  all 
that  is  of  practical  importance.  The  teacher  will  do  well  to 
begin  by  drawing  the  lines,  etc.  on  the  blackboard  ;  then,  by 
a  conversational  lesson,  elicit  what  the  pupils  know  about 
them. 

1.  Lines.  —  Lines  may  be  straight  or  curved. 


Which  is  the  longer  1  —  the  snorter  ?    Mark  two  points  on  the  slate, 
and  see  if  it  is  possible  to  draw  any  shorter  line  than  a  straight  line. 

2.  Parallel  Lines. —  Lines  may  be  drawn  exactly 
the  same  distance  apart.     They  are  parallel  lines. 


Farallel  Lines. 

Draw  two  straight  lines  that  are  parallel.  Draw  two  carved  lines 
that  are  parallel.  If  you  were  to  make  these  two  lines  very  long, 
would  they  ever  meet? 

3.  Lines  by  Direction,  —  A  line  may  be  drawn 
straight  up  and  down,  straight  across,  or  slantingly. 
The  first  is  called  a  vertical,  the  second  a  hori- 
zontal, and  the  third  an  oblique  line. 


HOW   MAPS   ARE   MADE. 


Oblique.  Horizontal.  Vertical. 

4.  Angles.  —  Two  lines  that  come  together,  but  run 
in  different  directions,  form  an  opening  called  an  angle. 


Draw  angles,  some  with  very  small  openings  and  some  with  very 
large  openings  Put  together  a  horizontal  and  a  vertical  line  ;  these 
two  lines  will  form  a  square  comer,  and  such  an  angle  is  called  a 
"right  angle." 

5.  Triangles.  —  Figures  having  three  sides  are  called 

TRIANGLES. 


Draw  three  triangles  of  different  shapes. 

6.  Circles.  —  A  curved  line  may  be  drawn  in  such  a 
way  that  it  bends  equally  in  every  part.  In  this  way 
we  form  a  circle.     The  line  is  called  the  cikcumfer- 


ENCE ;  a  straight  line  drawn  from  one  side  to  the  other 
is  called  the  diameter.  The  center  is  the  point  which 
is  exactly  the  same  distance  from  every  part  of  the 
circumference. 

7.  Sphere.  —  Any  thing  which  is  exactly  round  like 
an  ivory  ball  or  a  soap-bubble  is  called  a  sphere  oi 
globe. 


8.  A  Hemisphere  i.s  the  hulf  of  a  sphere  or  globe. 

9.  Circumference  and  Diameter.  —  The  circumfer- 
ence of  a  sphere  or  globe  is  its  measure  around  ;  the 
diameter  is  its  measure  throuyh. 


VIII.  — A  PICTURE  AND  A  PLAN. 

[An  oral  le.sson,  soiiiewliut  as  follows,  will  be  the  most  inter- 
esting mode  of  developing  this  subjeet.] 

Here  is  a  picture  of  the  inside,  or  interior,  of  a  school- 
room.   Tell  me  the  various  objects  you  see  represented. 


—  A  Plctore. 


In  this  picture  ex-cry  part  of  it  is  really  equally  far 
off  and  equally  near  to  us ;  but  this  does  not  seem  to  be 
so  :  the  part  opposite  our  eye  appears  to  be  the  farthest 
off,  and  the  different  objects  in  the  school-room  are 
shown  as  in  the  various  positions  in  wiiich  we  should 
see  them  should  we  stand  at  the  door  and  look  in. 
Such  a  view  is  said  to  he  in  perspective. 

Now,  if  we  could  lift  the  roof  off  the  school-room  and 
look  down,  what  part  would  be  under  our  eye  ?  The 
ground,  or  floor,  an,"  all  the  objects  on  it.  Correct. 
And  if  a  drawing  of  the  school-room  were  made  as  we 
should  then  see  it,  we  should  have  what  is  called  a 
(jroiind-plrtn,  as  given  here. 


Q    O 


t 

r     ^ 

o  o 
r     "  1 

U     L' 

r 

L 

1 

1 

[            i 

. ) 

O 

1 

O 

1        r 
o          ? 

[It  will  ;iiM  interest  if  tlie  te.iilier  reproduces  tins  on  the 
blackboiird.  She  will  do  well,  by  questioning,  to  elicit  from  the 
pupils  how  the  ground-plan  is  to  be  drawn  ;  as,  "  How  shall  I 
draw  the  walls  ?  "  By  four  lines.  "  How  shall  I  draw  the 
windows  ? "    B)'  notches  in  the  lines  representing  the  walls,  etc.] 

Exercise.  —  Copy  on  slates  or  paper  the  flan  of  the 
school-room.  For  additional  practice,  the  pupils  may  be 
required  to  draw  a  plan  of  their  school-room.     They  should 


PRIMARY   LESSONS. 


be  shown  that  it  is  necessary  to  draw  it  to  some  definite 
scale.  Thus,  suppose  that  the  room  is  shown  to  be  40  X  30 
feet:  pupils  will  readily  understand  that  it  would  be  im- 
practicable to  draw  lines  30  or  40  feet  in  length.  Let  the 
scale  be  1  inch  to  5  feet ;  then  the  line  representing  the 
longest  side  of  the  school-room  will  be  8  inches  in  length, 
and  that  representing  its  width  6  inches. 


IX.— PLAN   OF  THE   SCHOOL-GROUNDS. 

[The  teacher  may  develop  the  subject  orally  somewhat  as  fol- 
lows.] 

We  have  learned  liow  to  draw  the  plan  of  the  school- 
room. Now  we  shall  take  something  larger,  the  school- 
grounds,  and  try  to  make  a  plan  of  them. 

Suppose  the  school-grounds  look  as  we  see  them  rep- 
resented in  this  picture.  We  wish  to  make  a  map  of 
them. 


Picture  of  the  School  grounds 

First  we  must  find  out,  by  measuring,  the  length 
and  breadth  of  the  school-grounds.  Say  that  we  find 
the  length  to  be  70  yards  and  the  breadth  50  yards. 
Of  course  we  cannot  on  the  slate  or  blackboard  make 
lines  70  or  .50  yards  long  ;  so  we  must  draw  it  to  some 
sca/e. 

It  is  easy  to  understand  what  is  meant  by  a  scale 
in  maps.  We  have  all  seen  a  photograph  of  a  man 
who  was  six  feet  tall ;  but  was  the  figure  in  the  photo- 
graph si.x  feet  in  length  1  No ;  perhaps  it  was  only 
three  inches.  Now  if  the  man  was  six  feet  (72  inches) 
in  height,  and  the  picture  only  3  inches,  we  may  say 
that  the  picture  was  on  a  scale  of  3  inches  to  72,  or 
1   inch  to  24. 

It  will  be  convenient  to  draw  the  map  of  the 
school-grounds  on  a  scale  of  one  incli  to  10  yards. 
And  hence,  as  they  were  found  to  be  70  yards  long 
and  50  yards  wide,  our  lines  representing  the  longest 
sides  will  be  7  inches,  and  those  representing  the 
breadth,  5  inches. 

When  we  drew  the  plan  of  the  school-room  we 
did  not  make  pictures  of  the  objects  on  the  floor ;  we 


represented  the  objects  by  Unes  and  marks.      We  draw 
the  map  of  the  school-grounds  by  using  similar  signs. 


Flan  of  the  School-grounds. 

[The  teacher  should  require  this  to  be  copied.  Also  have 
it  drawn  on  the  blackboard  on  an  enlarged  scale.] 

Exercise.  —  Let  the  school-grounds  be  measured  by  some 
of  the  pupils  before  or  after  school,  and  a  plan  or  map 
of  thLin  be  drawn  on  the  blackboard  by  the  teacher,  un- 
der the  direction  of  the  pupils.  It  should  be  drawn  on  a 
■-(  lie  adapted  to  the  size  of  the  blackboard,  and  then  copied 
by  the  pupils  on  the  slates  on  some  reduced  scale,  say  ons 
louith  ol  that  on  the  blackboard. 


X.  — MAPS  OF  COUNTRIES. 

[It  will  be  easy  for  the  teacher  now  to  impart  a  coirect  idea 
ol  wh^t  1  map  is.  Maps  are  plans  of  the  land  and  water.  As 
in  drawing  the  plan  of  the  school-room  and  school-grounds  we 
lepresented  the  windows,  desks,  walks,  etc.  by  lines  which  do 
not  look  much  like  the  things  themselves,  so  we  represent 
mountains  and  rivers  and  towns  by  signs  that  we  can  easily 
recognize  when  we  see  them.] 

1.  Can  you  draw  a  map  ?    No.    Can  you  1  you  1  you '] 
Why,  we  reaUy  drew  a  map  when  we  made  the  pla7i 

of  the  school-room. 

2.  What  is  a  map  ? 

A  map  is  a  representation  of  any  part  of  the 
earth's  surface  as  it  would  be  seen  by  a  person 
looking  down  from  a  great  height. 

3.  What  are  the  points  of  direction  on  maps  ? 

The  top  of  the  map  is  north ;  the  bottom,  south ; 
the  right-hand  side,  east ;  the  left-hand  side,  west. 

[The  teacher  will  do  well  here  to  forestall  certain  eiroiieous 
ideas  which  many  pupils  are  apt  to  get  in  regard  to  maps.  As 
a  map  is  a  representation  of  a  portion  of  the  earth's  surface  as 
it  would  appear  to  a  person  elevated  at  a  distance  above  it,  the 
map  should,  when  used  for  the  first  time,  be  laid  upon  the  floor 
or  upon  a  table,  with  the  top  in  the  direction  of  the  north  side 
of  the  school-room.  In  this  way  the  learner  will  not  fall  into 
the  notion  that  north  is  in  the  direction  of  the  ceiling,  because 
the  top  of  the  map  is  in  that  direction.] 

Exercise.  —  Let  a  wall  map  be  hung  in  sight  of  the  class 
and  a  lively  exercise  had  in  pointing  out  direction  on  it. 


THE  nOinZOX.  — SHAPE  OF  THE  EARTH. 


Horizons  by  Height. 

XI. —THE    HORIZON. 

1.  Point  toward  the  sky.  Were  you  ever  out  in  the 
open  country,  or  on  a  lake  or  ocean,  where  you  could 
see  all  around  you  1  Was  there  a  place  where  the  sky 
seemed  to  come  down  to  the  earth  (or  water)  1 

2.  Did  the  sky  seem  to  come  down  to  the  earth  at 
the  same  distance  all  around  you?  Then  the  line 
where  the  sky  and  earth  seemed  to  meet  was  a  circle. 

3.  How  far  do  you  think  you  can  see  straight  be- 
fore you  in  the  open  country  1  Do  you  suppose  that 
a  man  six  feet  high  can  see  farther  than  that  ?  Do 
you  think  that  if  you  were  to  go  on  top  of  a  high 
building  you  could  see  farther  than  if  you  were  on 
the  ground  l  Who  wll  see  the  sun  rise  first,  —  a  shep- 
herd on  the  hill-top  or  a  ploughman  in  the  plain  below  1 
Why  does  the  shepherd  see  farther  1 

[Let  the  teacher  now  give  the  name  hokizon,  and  define  it 
as  the  line  where  the  earth  and  .sky  seem  to  meet. 
I  will  pronounce,  and  you  may  spell,  —  Horizon. 
I  will  spell,  and  yon  may  pronounce,  — Horison.] 

4.  ]\'//n(  /.s  f/ie  horizon  ? 

The  horizon  is  the  line  where  the 
earth  and  sky  seem  to  meet. 

Exercise.  —  In  the  drawing  at  the  top        -  C^t-. 
of  this  Lesson  we  see  three  men,  one  on  .:-V  -_j* 

the  level  ground,  a  second  on  a  hill-toji,  'KzaaE 

and  a  third  on  the  top  of  a  high  moun- 
tain. Notice  where  the  lines  leading  from 
the  eye  of  each  touclies  the  earth.  Tlici] 
is  the  horizon  for  each.  *- 

1.  What  part  of  the  church  will  the 
observer  on  the  level  ground  see,  —  the  -- 
spire  or  the  building  itself  ?    Which  spec- 
tators will  see  the  whole  building  ? 

2.  Will    the    observer    on    the    level  

ground  see  any  part  of  the  sailing  vessel 
or  of  the  steamer  1    Why  not  ? 

.3.  Which  part  of  the  sailing  vessel 
will  the  observer  on  the  hill-top  see? 
Which  spectator  will  be  able  to  see  the 
hull  as  well  as  the  masts  of  the  sailing 
vessel  ?     Why  is  hetible  to  see  the  hull  ] 


XII. —SHAPE  OF  THE  EARTH. 

Teai'HEu's  Note.  —  Children  know  prac- 
tically oidy  wimt  is  within  llicir  ouii  hori- 
zon. Hence  to  enlarge  this  liorizon,  so  that 
tlicy  may  be  able  to  imagine  other  horizons 
than  their  own,  is  to  lay  the  foundation  of 
sound  geographical  knowledge. 

1.  Did  you  ever  travel  some  miles 
away  from  here?  Did  the  sky  still 
appear  to  come  down  to  the  earth  1 
Was  it  the  same  horizon  you  saw  at 
home,  or  a  different  one?  The  hori- 
zon you  saw  at  home  appeared  to  be  the  end  of  the 
earth  :  but  was  it  ? 

2.  If  we  travel  a  whole  day,  docs  tlie  sky  still 
seem  to  close  around  us  1  In  changing  our  place,  as 
we  take  a  long  journey,  do  we  change  our  horizon  1 
Hut  is  there  a  horizon  still  around  us? 

3.  If  a  liy  were  to  alight  on  an  apple  hung  by  a 
string,  and  were  to  walk  all  over  it,  would  it  ever 
come  to  the  end  of  the  apple?  Why  not?  Do  you 
suppose  we  could  ever  travel  so  far  that  the  line  of 
the  horizon  would  be  the  end  of  the  earth  1 

[Develop  orally  somewhat  as  follows  :  —  Wc  may  change  our 
horizon  day  after  day,  but  still  we  do  not  come  to  the  end  of 
the  earth  ;  though,  in  olden  times,  many  very  wise  men  be- 
lieved that  if  they  went  far  enough  they  would  come  to  the  end 
of  the  earth.  About  three  hundred  and  fifty  years  ago  a  navi- 
gator named  Magellan  set  out  from  Spain  and  sailed  westward 
across  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and  then  across  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
and  continued  to  sail  in  the  same  general  direction  till,  after 
more  than  three  years,  liis  ships  arrived  at  the  very  port  from 
which  they  had  set  out.  This  was  the  first  time  the  earth  was 
sailed  around,  or  circumnavitjated  ;  and  it  proved  that  the  earth 
is  round.'\ 


10 


PiaMAEY   LESSONS. 


4.  JV/i(it  Ix  the  shape  of  the  earth  ? 
The  earth  is  round. 

5.  Te<ii-her  shoiviiiy  a  penny :  what  is  the  shape  of 
this  i)enny  2  Showing  a  lead-pencil :  what  is  the  sliape 
of  this  lead-peucil  'i  i>hou>lii</  a  ball  or  an  orange : 
what  is  the  shape  of  this  ball  (or  orange)  1 

[These  questions  will  lead  the  pupil  to  infer  in  what  sense 
the  earth  is  round.  State,  now,  that  any  thing  of  the  shape  of 
a  ball  is  called  a  gtobe  or  S}>here,  and  that  our  eartli  is  a  great 
gloLe.  Showing  a  terrestrial  ylolc :  now,  here  is  a  small  globe 
that  represents  the  shape  of  the  earth.  It  is  called  a  terrestrial 
globe,  whicli  means  a  globe  of  the  earth  ;  but  we  may  call  it 
the  school  globe.] 

^W  The  importance  of  introducing  at  the  earliest  stage  an  arti- 
ficial globe  as  an  aid  to  geographical  study  cannot  lie  overstated. 

6.  What  is  the  exact  shape  of  the  eartli  I 

The  earth  is  round,  nearly  like  a  globe,  or  sphere. 


XIII. —  SIZE  OF  THE  EARTH. 

1.  Wliat  distance  do  ymi  walk  every  day  to  school  \ 
How  far  is  it  from  tlie  most  eastern  part  of  your  State 
to  the  most  western  %  [Let  the  teacher  tell.]  How  far 
is  it  from  the  most  nortliern  point  of  your  State  to  the 
most  southern  I     [Let  the  teacher  tell.] 

2.  If  you  were  to  make  a  journey  in  the  cars  quite 
across  our  country,  from  New  York  to  San  Francisco, 
what  would  the  distance  be'?     [Let  the  teacher  tell.] 

[We  have  learned  that  in  shape  the  world  is  round  like  a 
ball.  It  would  be  very  interesting  to  know  the  .si;*  of  our 
earth,  or  terrestrial  globe,  would  it  not  ?  The  teacher  may 
then  show  that  we  shall  tiiid  out  its  size  by  measuring  around 
it  and  measuring  through  it.  Recall  the  definition  of  circum- 
ference and  diameter.  Then  state  that  learned  men  have  dis- 
covered ways  of  finding  out  the  length  of  the  circumference 
and  of  the  diameter  of  our  globe,  the  earth.  They  find  that 
it  is  nearly  25,000  miles  in  circumference  and  nearly  8,000 
miles  in  diameter.     This  is  the  SIZE  of  the  earth.] 

3.  What  is  the  size  of  the  earth  ? 

The  earth's  circumference  is  nearly  25,000  miles, 
and  its  diameter  nearly  8,000  miles. 

4.  If  the  earth  were  all  dry  land,  and  one  were  to 
attempt  to  walk  around  it,  journeying  at  tlie  rate  of 
twenty-five  miles  a  day,  how  many  days  would  the 
journey  require  ?  A  railroad-train,  moving  constantly 
night  and  day,  at  the  rate  of  twenty  miles  an  hour, 
wotdd  take  how  many  days  to  go  round  the  globe '? 


XIV.  — OUR  PLANET. 

[For  Reading.] 

1.  We  have  learned  about  the  shape  of  the  earth, 
and  its  size :  it  is  a  great  globe.  The  earth  seems  to 
be  at  rest.  It  is  firm  under  our  feet.  Yet  it  is  all  the 
time  moving  very  rapidly  indeed. 


2.  Did  you  ever  blow  soap-bubbles  1  A  soap-bubble 
floats  in  the  air.  So  does  a  balloon.  Our  earth  floats 
in  the  heavens  much  the  same  as  a  soai)-bubble  does  in 
the  air.  But  the  earth  does  not  stay  still  while  float- 
ing. It  is  all  the  time  swimming  througli  space.  In 
wliat  direction  "i     Toward  what  1 

3.  You  have  seen  one  of  the  brilliant  stars  called 
planets.  We  may  notice  that  they  change  their  place 
in  the  sky,  while  the  fixed  stars  do  not  change  their 
place.  Astronomers  who  watch  the  planets  know  that 
they  move  around  the  sun  in  a  great,  sweeping  circle. 
Some  planets  wheel  around  the  sun  in  a  few  months, 
otliers  take  several  years. 

4.  (Jur  earth  is  a  planet,  and  wlieels,  or  revolves, 
around  the  sun.  We  do  not  feel  it,  but  we  and  all 
lliat  is  on  tlie  eartli  are  really  sweejnng  through  the 
lieavens  at  the  rate  of  1,000  miles  every  hour. 

5.  Do  you  think  you  could  make  a  soap-bubble 
turn  around  while  it  floats  in  the  air?  You  might 
perhaps  blow  it  so  that  it  would  turn  round.  Y'ou 
could  also  make  a  toy  balloon  turn  round  by  twisting 
the  string.  Our  earth  turns  constantly  round  in  this 
way  before  the  sun.  The  light  of  the  sun  makes  day 
in  the  part  of  the  earth  where  it  sliines ;  the  other  part 
is  in  the  shadow,  and  we  say  it  is  night.  Every  part  of 
the  earth  is  tlius  brought  round  by  turn  so  as  to  receive 
tlie  sunlight.  It  takes  24  hours,  or  one  day,  for  the 
earth  to  turn  completely  round,  or  rotate. 

G.  Now,  how  long  does  it  take  the  eartli  to  revolve, 
or  move,  around  the  sun  1  It  takes  3G5  days.  When 
you  learn  more  about  Geography,  you  will  understand 
that  it  is  owing  to  the  earth's  revolving  around  the  sun 
that  we  have  the  change  of  seasons. 

7.  Thus  we  see  that  the  earth  is  constantly  moving, 
and  that  it  has  two  motions.  It  turns  round  on  itself 
and  wheels  around  the  sun.  Did  you  ever  see  a  top 
spinning  round  on  the  peg,  and  at  the  same  time  mov- 
ing in  a  circle  around  some  object  on  the  floor  ?  This 
will  help  you  to  understand  the  two  motions  of  the  earth. 

8.  There  is  another  thing  now  that  I  shall  ask  you 
about.  Some  pupils  are  puzzled  to  understand  how  it 
is  that,  since  the  earth  is  round  and  floats  in  space,  the 
people  on  the  other  side  of  the  earth  from  us  do  not 
fall  downward.  This  is  easily  explained.  What  is 
doii'u  ?  Down  is  always  toward  the  center  of  the 
earth.  So  you  see  there  is  no  more  reason  why  they 
should  fall  downward  than  that  we  should  fall  upward. 

IFor  Recitation. 1 

1.  What  is  the  earth  .? 

The  earth  is  a  planet  of  the  solar  system. 

2.  III)!/'  muni/  motions  has  the  earth  ? 

The  earth  has  two  motions:  it  turns  around  every 
24  hours,  and  it  revolves  around  the  sun  in  365 
days. 


DIVISIONS   OF   LAND   AND   WATER. 


11 


XV. —  REVIEW   AND   TEST   QUESTIONS. 


I. 

When   we   draw  an   object  as  it  appears  to  us  when 

we  look  at  it,  what  is  the  drawing  called? 

2. 

When  we  represent  a  building  as  it  would  appear  to 

us  if  we  looked  down  upon  it,  what  do  we  call  the 

drawing? 

3- 

When  we  represent  the  school-grounds,  or  the  whole 

city   [or  town]  or  State,  as   it  would  appear  if  we 

looked  down  upon  it,  what  do  we  call  the  drawing  ? 

4- 

Which  part  of  the  map  shows  direction  North  ?  South  ? 

East?    West? 

5- 

What  is  the  horizon  ? 

6. 

What  is  the  shape  of  the  earth?    What  object  repre- 

sents the  shape  of  the  earth  ? 

7- 

What  is  the  name  of  the  navigator  who  first  circum- 

navigated the  earth  ? 

8. 

Do  we  often  read  of  persons  making  a  tour  round  the 

world  ?     How  long,  do  you  suppose,  would  it  take  ? 

9- 

What  is  "measure  around"  called? 

lO. 

What  is  "measure  through"  called? 

II. 

Give  the  earth's  circumference  and  diameter. 

"■ 

What  two  motions  has  the  earth  ? 

Sect.  II. -LAND  AND  WATER. 

I. —THE   EARTH'S  SURFACE. 

(For  Reading.) 

1.  The  earth's  surface  is  its  outside.  We  are  now  to 
learn  of  what  the  earth's  surface  consists.  Where  do 
people  live  and  build  their  houses  ?  You  say  on  the 
land,  and  that  is  riglit.  The  solid  land  is  the  dwelling- 
place  of  man. 

2.  Now,  where  do  fislies  live,  and  on  what  do  ships 
sail  1  You  say  that  fishes  live  in  the  water  and  ships 
sail  on  the  water,  and  that  is  right.  This  shows  us 
that  the  earth's  surface  consists  of  land  and  water. 

3.  There  was  a  time,  many  ages  ago,  long  before  man 
was  created,  when  the  whole  face  of  the  earth  was 
covered  with  deep  waters.  The  dry  land  was  gradu- 
ally raised  up,  and 
plants  and  animals 
appeared.   Perhaps 

you  will  now  un-     ^B^^^^^Si^^^^"  \ 

derstand  what  I  am 
going  to  tell  you. 

AU  the  land  on  the  ^^^^^^^^~  V^  T  ^i 

earth's    surface    is  ^^^^HhE  t^' 

merely  part  of  the    ^^^^^^B~  P/L/~ 

crust  of  the  earth 
which  has  become 
pushed   up    above 

the  surrounding  western  HemUph, 


water;  and  if  the  bed  of  the  ocean  were  laid  bare,  we 
sliould  .see  hollows  and  heights  such  as  we  observe  on 
the  land. 

4.  Tlie  laud  on  the  earth's  surface  does  not  consist 
of  one  mass,  but  of  two  very  large  parts  and  many 
hundreds  of  smaller  parts.  The  two  large  parts  are 
called  coiitiuents,  for  the  reason  that  each  part  is  not 
broken  up  into  islands,  but  is  continuous  land.  Our  own 
country  is  on  one  of  these  continents,  called  America. 
America  is  also  called  the  Western  Continent,  or  New 
World.  The  other  continent  is  called  the  Eastern  Con- 
tinent, or  Old  World.  All  the  parts  of  land  smaller 
than  one  of  the  two  continents  are  called  islands. 

5.  Around  the  two  continents  rolls  the  "deep  and 
dark-blue  ocean."  This  immense  body  of  water  is  the 
(ireat  Sea.  It  is  very  large,  three  times  as  large  as  all 
the  land  on  the  eartli,  so  that,  after  all,  only  one  quarter 
of  the  earth's  surface  has  been  raised  above  tlie  water. 

6.  The  lands  are  fixed  and  solid,  but  the  Ocean  is 
flowing  and  moving ;  hence  it  is  really  one  body.  Still, 
tlie  lands  partly  divide  the  Ocean  :  they  form  a  sort 
of  rim  around  portions  of  it.  To  these  portions  of  the 
Great  Sea,  or  Ocean,  different  names  are  given  ;  hence 
we  speak  of  tlie  Atlantic  Ocean,  the  Pacific  Ocean,  etc. 

(For  Recitation.] 

1.  Of  whnt  is  the  earth's  surface  made  vp  ? 

The  earth's  surface  is  made  up  of  land  and  ■water. 

2.  WJidt  is  shiivm  in.  this  picture? 

The  two  halves,  or  hemispheres,  of  the  earth's  sur- 
face, w^ith  the  land  and  w^ater  upon  each. 

3.  II(ja'  much  of  the  earth's  surface  is  laud,  and  how 
much  UHiter  ? 

About  one  quarter  of  the  earth's  surface  is  land, 
and  three  quarters  are  -water. 

4.  Of  what  does  the  laud  of  the  earth's  surface  con- 
sist ? 

The  land  of  the  earth's  surface  consists  of  two 
very  large  parts,  called  Continents,  and  of  smaller 
parts,  called  Islands. 

5.  What  are  the  names  of  the  two  continents  1 
One     is    called 

the  Eastern  Con- 
tinent, or  Old 
World ;  the  other, 
the  'Western  Con- 
tinent, or  Ne-w 
'World. 

6.  What  is  the 
inline  of  the  f/reai 
body  of  water  ? 

The  great  body 
of  w^ater  is  called 
the  Ocean,  or  Sea. 


PlU]\rAi;Y   LESSON.S. 


II.  — THE   CONTINENTS. 

Teacher'.s  Note.  —  Tlie  best  mode 
of  introducing  young  pupils  to  the 
study  of  the  land  and  water  surface  of 
the  earth  is  to  exhiliit  to  them  tlie  ur- 
lifidal  globe.  Ignorant  as  they  are  of 
the  principles  of  map-projection,  the 
young  nearly  always  get  confused  or 
erroneous  notions  from  the  ordinary 
"M.ap  of  the  Two  Hemispheres."  In 
order  to  avoid  this,  and  as  the  best 
substitute  for  an  artificial  globe,  four 
glohular  maps  are  here  given.  They 
represent  the  artificial  globe  turned  so 
as  to  show,  first  the  two  great  land- 
masses  of  the  earth,  and  next  the  two 
water-hemispheres. 

1.  What  does  the  Western  Con- 
tinent consist  of? 

The  Western  Continent  con- 
sists of  twro  Grand  Divisions, 
called  North  and  South  Amer- 
ica. 

2.  Wh((t  grent  parts,  or  Grand 
Divisions,  does  the  Eastern  Con- 
tinent contain  ? 

The  Eastern  Continent  con- 
tains three  Grand  Divisions, 
called  Asia,  Africa,  and  Europe. 

Exercise.  —  1.  [/r/Z/t  optn  hook.'\ 
Which  is  nearest  the  North  Pole, 
North  America  or  South  America  ] 
AVhich  is  nearest  the  South  Pole  ? 

2.  In  what  direction  from  South 
America  is  North  America  ?  In 
what  direction  from  North  Ajuerica 
is  South  America  ? 

3.  Which  extends  farthest  east, 
North  America  or  South  America? 
Which  extends  farthest  we.st  ? 

4.  Where  is  North  America  broad- 
est l  Where  is  South  America 
broadest  I  In  what  direction  do 
North  and  South  America  taper  I 

5.  What  ocean  east  of  the  Ameri- 
can continent  ?     What  ocean  west  \ 

6.  Do  we  live  in  North  America 
or  South  America  ? 

7.  Which  part  of  the  Old  World 
appears  to  be  largest  ?  Which  ap- 
pears to  be  the  second  in  size  ? 
Which  seems  to  be  the  smallest  ! 

8.  Which  of  the  three  Grand  Di- 
visions extends  farthest  east  ?  Which 
extends  farthest  south  ?  Which  part 
of  the  Old  World  is  Europe  ? 

j^"  Let  the  teacher  ask  the  same  ques- 
tions, with  variations,  using  the  school- 
globe,  or  the  wall-map  of  the  hemisphere. 


The  Extern  Hemisphere,  or  Old  Worli 


THE   OCEAZS^S. 


13 


in. —  THE   OCEANS. 

[Kecall  to  the  ijupils'  minds  that  wc 
have  learned  that  the  great  body  of  salt 
water  which  forms  three  quarters  of  the 
surface  of  the  earth  Is  called  the  Ocean. 
But  the  Ocean  is  not  all  in  one  gieat 
body,  because  the  Western  Continent  and 
the  Eastern  Continent  divide  the  Ocean 
into  several  parts.  Show  this  on  the 
globe  or  hemisphere-map.] 

1.  With  open  book :  Point  to  the 
Western  Continent.  Point  to  the 
Eastern  Continent.  Point  to  the 
water  between  the  two.  There  is 
a  name  marked  on  this  great  body 
of  water  ;  what  name  is  it  ? 

[Correct;  this  is  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 
All  the  people  in  our  country  who  came 
from  England,  Ireland,  and  Scotland,  or 
from  Germany  or  Erance,  had  to  cross 
this  ocean  in  ships  to  come  to  the  United 
States.  This  ocean  is  veiy  broad,  and 
it  takes  a  swift  steamer  ten  days  to 
cross  it.] 

2.  What  name  is  marked  on  the 
Ocean  between  the  western  part  of 
the  A\^estern  and  the  eastern  part 
of  the  Eastern  Continent  ? 

[The  Pacific  Ocean  is  much  broader 
than  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  It  is  the 
largest  ocean  on  the  surface  of  the  earth. 
When  people  in  our  country  visit  China, 
they  start  from  San  Francisco  and  cross 
this  ocean.  The  tea  which  we  drink  is 
brought  in  steamers  that  cross  the  Pacific 
Ocean  from  China  to  San  Francisco. 
1 1  takes  about  three  weeks  to  make  the 
\  nyage.] 

3.  W/iiif  oci'diif  have  ve  learned 

We  have  learned  about  the 
Atlantic  OceEiu  and  the  Pacific 
Ocean. 


is^m  4.     Whfit     other    ocean    can    you 


The  Pacific  Ocean. 


The  Indian  Ocean. 

5.    Whirr   ix  this  ocean  i 
The    Indian    Ocean   is    to    the 
south  of  Asia. 

[These  are  the  three  great  oceans  on 
the  surface  of  the  earth.  You  will  also 
read  about  the  Arctic  Ocean  and  the 
Antarctic  Ocean ;  very  little  is  known 
about  these  seas,  which  lie  near  the 
Poles.  You  will  learn  more  about  them 
hereafter. 


14 


PRIMARY    LESSONS. 


''^^ 


^-^^s- 


Bird's-eye  View  of  the  Atlantic  Coast  from  Boston  to  Philadelphia. 

IV.  —  PENINSULAS  AND  CAPES. 

E;^^  By  means  of  a  trayful  of  sand  and  some  plastic  clay  very 
instmctive  objectrlessons,  which  will  impart  to  the  pupils  a  vivid 
notion  of  the  divisions  of  land  and  water,  may  be  given. 

1.  Have  you  ever  been  at  tlie  sea-shore  'i  Did  you 
find  the  edges  of  the  land,  wliere  they  toucli  tlie  water, 
even  nr  jagged  and  irregular  ? 

2.  U'/iiit  is  meant  hy  the  coaxt,  or  fhore  ? 

The  coast,  or  shore,  means  that  part  of  the  land 
Twhich  borders  on  the  water. 

3.  Uluit  do  )iv  see  in  the  jnctiire  ? 

We  see  the  sea-shore,  or  coast,  along  the  Atlantic 
Ocean  from  Boston  to  Philadelphia. 

4.  Wltid  is  shown  in  the  other  draining  ? 
A  map  of  the  same  coast. 

1^^  The  teacher  will  do  well  to  put  the  map-sketch  on  the  black- 
board on  a  larger  scale. 

5.  With  open  book :  Point  to  wliere  the  land  juts  out 
or  extends  into  the  water.  Point  to  where  the  water 
runs  into  the  land. 

[Pupils  should  be  shown  that  it  is  very  convenient  to  have 
names  for  the  parts  of  the  land  that  jut  out  or  project  into 
the  water,  and  also  for  the  parts  of  the  water"  that  run  into 
the  land.  Now,  a  part  of  the  land  which  projects  into  the 
water,  so  that  the  water  nearly  surrounds  it,  is  called  a  Pen- 

IN.SUI.A. 

I  will  spell,  and  you  may  pronounce,  —  Pcnhufula. 

I  will  pronounce,  and  you  may  spell,  —  Peninsu! a  . j 

6.  What  is  a  peiiiiisnla  ? 

A  peninsula  is  a  part  of  the  laud  nearly  sur- 
rounded by  -water. 

7.  Is  an  island  entirely  surrounded  Ijy  water]  Is 
a  peiunsula  entirely  surrounded  by  water? 


r     L     A     A/     T     /      C 

O      C      £     A      N 


1.  A  Bay  ;  Massachusetts  Bay 

2.  A  Bay  :  Cape  Cod  Bay. 

3.  A  Cape  ;  Cape  Cod. 

\.  A  PeninBOla :  Cape  Cod  ?e: 
6.  A  Bay  ;  Buzzard  Hay. 


Map  of  the  aame  Coast. 

C.  A  Sound : 


.  A  Bay  :  New  Vo 


Long  Island  Sound. 


8.  Is  a  peninsula  the  same  as  an  island  ?  Is  it 
nearly  the  same  as  an  island  %  How  might  a  peninsula 
be  made  into  an  island  ? 

9.  Witli  open  hook :  Point  to  any  peninsulas  on  the 
map  of  the  coa.st  from  Bo-ston  to  Philadelphia. 

[Let  the  teacher  now  show  on  the  blackboard  the  difference 
between  a  peninsula  and  a  cape,  making  it  plain  that  a  cape 
is  a  mere  point  or  tongue  of  land  extending  into  the  water.] 

10.  What  is  a  cape  ? 

A  cape  is  a  point  of  land  extending  into  the 
■water. 

11.  Tlie  portion  of  land  nearly  surrounded  by  ^\'ate^, 

and  numbered  4,  is  a  peninsula;   what  is  its   name? 

The  points  of  land   marked   3  and  8  are  capes;  what 

are  their  names  ? 

G^^  At  the  top  of  the  next  page  is  a  picture  and  a  map  of  a  pen- 
insula.   Pupils  may  copy  the  map. 


BAYS   AND   GULFS.  — ISTHMUS   AND    STRAIT. 


15 


V.  —  BAYS.  —  GULFS.  —  SEAS. 

1.  A  Poninsirfa  is  laiul  nearly  surrcmnded  by  water  : 
now,  point  out  on  the  Eird's-eye  View  of  the  Coast  a 
place  where  the  water  runs  into  the  land.  From  the 
number  on  the  map  can  you  tell  what  the  name  of  the 
body  of  water  is  i 

2.  How  many  bays  do  you  find  on  the  map  t  Point 
to  each  on  the  Bird's-eye  View.  Trace  the  line  where 
the  land  and  water  meet.  Is  the  land  all  around  the 
bay  t  Is  the  bay  entirely  enclosed  by  the  land,  or  only 
partly  enclosed  ? 

[Let  the  tcaclier  now  (1)  show  on  the  wall-map  Hndson  Bay 
and  other  bays;  (2)  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  Gulf  of  California,  and 
other  gulfs  ;  (3)  the  Caribbean  Sea,  Okhotsk  Sea,  and  other  seas. 
It  will  be  easy  to  bring  the  pupils  to  draw  for  themselves  the 
conclusion  that  there  is  something  in  common  between  bays, 
gulfs,  and  seas,  namely,  that  they  are  all  more  or  less  enclosed 
by  the  land.  The  term  harbor,  also,  may  be  introduced,  and 
defined  as  a  small  bay  in  which  ships  may  lie  at  anchor.] 

3.  What  is  a  hai/,  gulf,  or  sea  ? 

A  bay,  gulf,  or  sea  is  a  part  of  the  ^vater  more  or 
less  surrounded  by  the  land. 

4.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  bay  ?  —  a  gulf  1 

5.  Do  you  live  in  a  seaport  city  1  What  is  the 
name  of  the  harbor  1     What  do  you  find  there  t 

1^"  Pupils  may  copy  the  map  of  the  bay. 


VI.  — AJSf  ISTHMUS  AND  A  STRAIT. 

[Let  the  teacher  show  on  the  wall-map  the  peninsula  of  the 
Moreu,  the  Spanish  peninsula,  etc. ;  then  (luestion  as  follows.] 

1.  Point  to  the  peninsula  on  the  map.  Point  to 
the  mainland  with  which  it  is  united.  '  What  joins  the 
peninsula  to  the  mainland  1  Point  out  the  strip  of 
land  that  joins  the  peninsula  to  the  mainland. 

2.  What  joins  your  head  to  your  body  1  Is  not  the 
neck  smaller  than  either  the  head  or  the  body  ? 

[As  the  head  is  joined  to  the  body  by  the  neck,  so  the  pen- 
insula is  joined  to  the  mainland  by  what  we  may  call  a  neck 
of  land.  The  name  given  to  su(di  a  part  of  land  is  Istu.mus, 
and  this  word  in  Greek  means  neck. 

I  will  spell,  and  you  may  jironounce,  —  Isthmus. 

I  will  pronounce,  and  you  may  spell,  —  Isthmu s.] 

3.  What  -is  an  isthnuis  ? 

An  isthmus  is  a  narrow  neck  of  land  connecting 
twro  larger  bodies  of  land. 

[The  teacher  will  do  well  to  point  out  on  the  map  the  Isthmus 
of  Panama  and  the  Isthmus  of  Suez,  stating  that  these  are  the 
two  most  famous  isthmuses  in  the  world,  and  telling  why.] 

4.  With  open  hook :  See  if  you  can  find  on  the  map 
of  the  coast  (page  14)  any  narrow  passage  of  water. 
Does  it  not  correspond  to  an  isthmus  ? 

[The  teacher  should  make  sure  that  the  pupils  see  the  cor- 
respondence. Then  give  the  word  Strait,  meaning  narrow 
passage.  ] 


16 


PKIMARY   LESSON,S. 


5.    What  is  a  strait  ? 

A  strait  is  a  narro-w  passage  of  -wrater  connecting 
two  larger  parts  of  vsrater. 


1 


Picture  of  a  Strai* 

W//at  (ithcr  itiiiiiex  tire  \ometime''   ii^J  fai    btiait  ^ 
A  channel,  ■which  is  a  m^ide  strait,  and  a  sound 
iirhich  is  a  shallo'w  strait. 


VII.  —  PLAINS.  —  MOUNTAINS.  —  VALLEYS. 

[The  aim  in  this  lesson  should  be  to  call  out  the  pupil's 
personal  perception  of  the  differences  in  elevation  presented 
liy  the  surface  in  his  own  locality,  as  a  preparation  for  the 
definition  of  the  three  relief-forms,  —  plains,  mountains,  and 
valleys.  The  skillful  teacher  will,  of  course,  vary  the  questions, 
so  as  to  put  to  the  best  use  the  features  of  local  geography.] 

1.  Ls  the  surface  of  a  pond  or  lake  in  calm  weather 
level,  or  are  some  parts  higher  than  others  1  Did  you 
ever  see  any  place  where  the  surface  of  the  laud  was 
nearly  as  level  as  a  still  pond  or  lake? 

2.  When  you  walk  out  into  the  open  country  near 
here  do  you  notice  that  the  j^round  is  all  on  the  same 
level,  or  are  some  parts  of  the  surface  higher  than 
<ithcrs'?     Wliat  ditt'erences  have  you  ever  noticed? 

Plain    Monntalna    and  VaUev 


7.  Is  an  isthmus  land  or  water  'I  Is  a  strait  land 
or  water?  What  is  a  passage  of  water  joining  two 
larger  parts  of  water  called  ?  What  is  a  neck  of  land 
joining  two  larger  parts  of  land  called  ? 


Map  of  an  IsthmTls 
may  copy  the  maps  of  the  isthmus  and  strait. 


To  the  Pupil.  —  In  this  picture  you  see  that  the  ground  to 
the  left  is  loio  and  levd  and  hroad ;  a  river  winds  its  way 
through  it.  To  the  right  are  two  portions  of  livjh,  broken 
ground.  Between  these  is  enclosed  a  portion  of  low,  narrow 
ground,  through  wliich  also  a  river  runs.  If  you  could  cut 
down  through  the  ground  from  the  clump  of  trees  on  the  river 
across  to  the  mountain  on  the  right,  and  you  were  then  to  make 
a  drawing  of  the  face  of  the  cutting,  you  would  have  a  section 
of  the  country,  as  in  the  drawing  below  the  picture. 

3.  What  is  a  plain  ? 

A  plain  is  a  great  tract  of  low  and  nearly  level 
laud. 

4.  Can  you  see  any  plain  fmm  where  you  live? 
Did  you  ever  see  a  plain  ?  Did  j-ou  ever  see  a  prairie? 
Did  you  ever  see  a  meadow  ? 

6.  W/iat  is  a  mountain  ? 

A  Mountain  is  a  great  ridge  of  land  rising  above 
the  surrounding  country.  A  hill  is  lower  than  a 
mountain. 

6. "Are  there  any  hills  near  this  place?  What  are 
they  caUod  ?     Are  there  any  mountains  near  here  ? 

7.  What  is  a  table-land,  or  plateau  ? 

A  table-land,  or  plateau,  is  a  high  plain. 


PLAINS,    VALLEYS,   AND   MOUNTAINS. 


17 


[If  thought  advisable,  tlie  teacher  may  here  introduce  the 
tenns  mounlain-ranye  and  mounlain-si/slem,  and  give  some 
explanation.  ] 

8.  What  is  a  valley  ? 

A  valley  is  a  low  place  between  hills  or  moun- 
tains. 

9.  Point  toward  any  valley  that  you  can  see  from 
this  place.  Is  it  a  small  valley,  which  you  can  see  at 
one  view,  or  is  it  part  of  a  great  valley  1  What  higher 
ground  encloses  this  vaUey  'i 


they  could  find  nothing  to  eat.    The  desert  of  sand  is  a 
frightful  solitude,  silent,  like  the  grave. 

4.  Yet  even  in  the  desert  there  are  here  and  there 
green  spots,  where  palm-trees  grow  and  wells  of  water 
are  found.  Such  a  spot  is  called  an  oasis,  and  when 
the  weary  caravans  come  to  one  of  these  tlicy  are  much 
rejoiced.  An  old  writer  once  said  that  the  Great  Des- 
ert, Sahara,  was  like  a  leopard's  skin,  which  has  black 
spots  on  a  yellow  ground.  The  yellow  ground  was  tlio 
sand  of  the  desert ;  the  spots  were  the  oases. 


VIII.  — SOME  THINGS  ABOUT  PLAINS. 

(For  Reading.) 

1.  You  will  like  to  read  a  little  about  the  ditterent 
kinds  of  plains.  We  begin  with  one  kind  found  in 
some  parts  of  our  own  country.  These  are  great  level 
or  wave-like  plains,  which  are  called  2>rairies.  Perhaps 
some  of  the  pupils  who  study  this  book  live  in  a 
prairie  country.  Those  who  do  need  not  be  told  that  a 
prairie  is  an  immense  plain  or  common  that  reaches  fjr 
miles  and  mUes.  Long  grass  grows  on  it.  It  is  like 
a  waving  sea  of  grass.  And  in  the  spring  it  is  covered 
with  a  profusion  of  beautiful  wild-flowers. 

2.  In  the  great  prairies  or  "  Plains  "  in  the  far  west- 
ern part  of  our  country  you  may  see  great  herds  of 
buflalo,  which  feed  on  the  grass.  Sometimes  the 
prairie  takes  fire  and  burns  the  grass  for  many  miles. 
All  living  creatures  then  flee  in  dismay,  for  there  is 
scarcely  anything  in  the  world  so  terrible,  or  so  out  of 
the  power  of  man  to  control,  as  a  prairie  on  fire. 


An  Oasis  in  the  Desert 


3.  In  some  parts  of  the  world  there  are  vast  sandy 
plains.  These  are  called  deserts.  One  of  them  is  in 
Arabia  ;  but  the  gTeatest  of  all  is  in  Africa.  It  is 
called  the  Saha'ra,  which  means  "  the  ocean  without 
water."  As  there  is  neither  rain  nor  dew  in  the  desert, 
you  will  not  wonder  that  no  green  thing  can  grow 
there.  There  is  no  grass  to  tread  upon.  You  have 
nothing  but  the  hot,  burning  sand  under  your  feet. 
The  camel  can  cross  the  desert,  for  he  can  go  for  days 
without  water ;  but  no  animals  live  in  the  desert,  for 


Lassoing  Wild  Cattle  on  the  Pampa& 

5.  In  South  America  there  are  some  very  large 
plains  which  are  called  llaiios  [lan'i/oce]  and  others 
which  are  called  pampas.  During  the  hot  weather 
the  llanos  are  so  parched  that  they  are  almost  like 
deserts,  but  every  year  they  are  flooded  by  the  rains 
and  covered  with  long  grass,  like  the  prairies.  On 
the  pampas  there  grows  a  very  beautiful  sort  of  grass 
called  pampas  grass.  The  flower  is  feathery,  like  a 
reed,  and  of  a  silvery-white  color.  Perhaps  you  may 
have  seen  some  of  it. 

6.  The  wild  horses  gallop  about  these  great  South 
American  plains,  and  vast  herds  of  wild  cattle  roam  over 
these  pastures.  The  people  go  out  on  horseback  to  catch 
the  cattle,  and  this  they  do  by  means  of  a  long  rope 
or  strip  of  leather  with  a  slip-knot  at  one  end.  This 
is  called  a  lasso.  When  a  man  has  eaten  all  he  has 
at  home,  he  has  only  to  ride  out,  with  his  lasso  in  his 
hand,  among  the  wild  cattle.  He  can  soon  throw  his 
lasso  over  the  horns  of  'one  of  them,  and  bring  it  to 
"round. 


IX.  — ISLANDS  AND  LAKES. 

1.  What  island  have  you  ever  seen?   Is  it  surrounded 
by  the  sea,  or  by  the  waters  of  a  river  or  lake  1 

2.  Do  you  live  on  the  Western  Continent,  or  on  one 
of  the  islands  belonging  to  ifi 


IS 


PEIMAEY   LESSONS. 


3.  Name  any  islands  you  have  ever  lieard  of.  What 
is  the  largest. i.sland  you  have  heard  of? 

4.  Do  you  think  the  English  live  on  an  island  ?  Do 
you  know  the  name  of  a  large  island  from  which  we 
obtain  oranges  and  sugar '] 

5.  What  is  a».  island  ? 

An  island  is  a  portion  of  land  entirely  surrounded 
by  -water. 

6.  You  have  seen  a  ])ond ;  have  you  ever  seen  a 
large  pond,  called  a  lake  ?  What  was  there  all  around 
the  lake  1  An  island  is  land  surrounded  by  water ; 
what  is  a  lake  1 

7.  Is  a  lake  in  the  sea  or  on  the  land?  Then  is  it 
not  an  inland  slieet  of  water?  _ 

8.  What  is  a  lake  1 

A  lake  is  an  inland  sheet  of  water. 

[The  teacher  may  give  ,nn  oral  explanation  of  what  is  meant 
by  tlie  liead  of  a  lake  and  the  fool  of  a  lake.  ] 

9.  What  is  the  difference  between  an.  island  and  a 
lake  ? 

An  island  is  land  entirely  surrounded  by  water, 
and  a  lake  is  w^ater  entirely  surrounded  by  land. 

lE^"  Pupils  may  copy  the  maps  of  the  island  and  the  lake. 


Map  of  the  same  Itake. 

X.  —  RIVERS. 

1.  What  river  flows  through  or  near  this  place  1  Is 
it  a  large  or  a  small  river  ? 

2.  Is  a  river  water  or  land  ?  Is  a  river  in  the  sea  or 
on  the  land  ? 

3.  Is  a  river  standing  water  or  running  water? 
What  does  it  run  into  ? 

4.  What  is  a  river  ? 

A  river  is  a  stream  of  -water  flo-wiug  into  some 
other  body  of  -water. 

5.  What  is  the  source  of  a  river  ? 

The  source  of  a  river  is  w^here  it  rises. 

6.  W/iat  is  the  month  of  a  river  ? 

The  mouth  of  a  river  is  -where  it  flows  into  some 
other  body  of  water,  or  empties. 

7.  Do  you  know  where  the  source  of  the  river  near 
here  is  ?     Do  you  know  where  its  mouth  is  ? 

[It  will  be  well  to  call  attention  to  the  difference  between 
a  main  river  and  the  branches  that  feed  it.  Show  the  re- 
semblance to  the  trunk  and  branches  of  a  tree.  Call  out  any 
local  names  for  brooks  and  rivulets.     E.xplain  TribularyS\ 

8.  Does  the  river  near  here  flov/  into  some  other 

ri^x-r  ? 

tS"  Pupils  may  draw  the  map  of  a  river  which  has  two  branches 
and  flows  into  a  bay. 


HISTORY   OF   A   RIVER. 


19 


XL  — HISTORY  OF  A  EIVER. 
FFor  Reading.] 


^  '^k 


•Stii-iaa^ 


River  from  Source  to  Month. 

1     Every    scholar    lias 

seen  a  river  ;  but  perhaps 

very  few  have  ever  seen 

a   river   from    its    begin- 

__  ning  to  its  end.      Lot  us 

inquire   into   the    history 

of  a  river  by  tracing  tlie  course  of  the  one  sliown  in 

the  picture. 

2.  How  far  can  we  follow  it  up  as  a  silver  thread? 
We  can  follow  it  into  the  heart  of  the  hills.  Now, 
the  beginning,  or  source,  of  a  river  is  always  a  spring 
in  the  hills  or  mountains.  Who  knows  how  such  a 
spring  is  fed  1  It  is  fed  by  rain  or  snow  falling  on 
the  tops  of  the  hills  or  mountains. 

3.  The  rain  or  snow  falls  on  the  hill-tops,  and  part 
of  the  water  sinks  into  the  soil  and  rocks  through  little 
chinks  or  crevices,  so  that  at  last  the  water  fills  up  any 
hollow  it  finds.  ,  When  the  water  has  filled  such  an 
underground  basin,  it  bubbles  out  in  a  spring,  and  runs 
down  the  hdlside,  —  for  you  must  remember  that  water 
always  seeks  the  lowest  level.  It  runs  down  the  hill- 
side in  rills  or  rivulets.  These,  coming  together,  form 
streams  called  brooks,  creeks,  or  branches,  and  these  in 
their  turn  unite  to  form  the  larger  stream  called  a  river. 

4.  Returning  to  the  picture,  we  see  that  the  tiny 
stream  foUoivs  t/ie  slope  of  the  land,  bending  several 
times  around  the  foot 
of  the  mountains. 
Then  we  see  a  place 
where  it  fills  a  hol- 
low in  the  land,  thus 
forming  a  lake.  From 
the  foot  of  the  lake 
the  river  again  flows 
on.  It  is  soon  joined 
by  anotlier  stream, 
whicli,  as  it  contrih 
utes  its  water  to  tlie 
first  river,  is  called  a 
tributary,  as  we  have 
already  learned.    The  ^j  t^ere  faiis : 


a  draws  op  vapor  i 


united  current,  always  following  the  slope  of  the  land, 
in  a  little  while  falls  over  a  precipice,  thus  forming  a 
waterfall,  or  cataract.      It  then  flows  onward,  till  at 
last  it  joins  the  arm  of  the  sea. 

5.    But  this  is  not  the  wliole  story  of  the 
river.     You   have  read  that  the   river  at  last 
Tills  into  the  ocean.     Now  you  will  learn  somc- 
hing  quite  strange.     The  river  not  only  flows 
i^p"  '"to  the  ocean,  but  it  comes  up  from  the  ocean. 
G.    You  liave  read  that  the  spring,  whicli  is 
the  source  of  the  river,  is  made  by  water  trick- 
ling into  the  soil  on  hills  or  mountains.     This 
water  comes  from  the  rain  that  falls  on  the  hills  and 
mountains.     But  where  does  the  rain  come  from? 

7.  The  heat  of  the  sun  is  all  the  time  drawing  up 
from  the  surface  of  the  sea  a  great  deal  of  moisture 
in  the  form  of  vapor,  or  mist.  When  the  vapor  be- 
comes cooler  it  takes  the  form  of  clouds.  These  clouds 
are  like  cisterns,  and  they  let  fall  their  water  in  rain  or 
snow,  when  they  are  blown  to  where  it  is  colder,  as 
against  the  chilly  tops  of  mountains. 

8.  Perhaps  you  do  not  understand  why  the  clouds 
must  touch  something  colder  before  they  will  give 
out  their  water.  You  will  understand  by  an  illustra- 
tion or  two.  You  have  seen  drops  of  water  gather 
on  the  outside  of  a  pitcher  of  ice-water,  and  you 
have  seen  moisture  settle  on  the  inside  of  the  win- 
dow-panes. The  water  which  settles  on  the  outside 
of  the  pitcher  of  ice-water  or  on  the  window-pane 
comes  from  the  air  in  the  room,  and  it  settles  on  the 
pitcher  and  the  window  because  the  surface  of  the 
pitcher  and  the  window  is  colder  than  the  air.  Some- 
times in  summer  the  ground  at  night  grows  colder  than 
the  air,  and  then  the  dew  settles  down  in  drops  upon 
the  grass ;  but  no  dew  wiU  faU  when  the  ground  is 
warmer  than  the  air.  When  the  vapor  thus  falls  in 
water  it  is  said  to  be  condensed. 

9.  Now  we  know  why  it  is  that  the  mountain-tops 
condense  the  vapor 
which  is  carried 
against  them  in 
clouds,  —  it  is  be- 
cause the  mountam- 
tops  are  colder  than 
•he  cloud.s.  And  we 
ilso  see  how  it  is  that 
the  river  comes  from 
the  sea  and  goes  back 
to  the  sea,  thus  per- 
forming a  wonderful 
round  of  circulation, 
to  fulfill  the  wise  pur- 
pose of  the  Creator. 


uds  to  the  mountain-tops. 


20 


PRIMAKY   LESSONS. 


The  Earth's  surface  is  divided  into 


and 


XII.  — REVIEW  AND  TEST  QUESTIONS. 

-By  Size /Continents. 

1  Islands. 

r  Plains. 
By  Height i  Valleys. 

'^  Mountains. 

f  Peninsulas. 
-By  Form J  Capes. 

l-  Isthmuses. 


I  Atlantic. 
Pacific. 
Indian. 
Arctic. 
'-  Antarctic. 
C  Seas. 

Waters  partly  inland J  Gulfs  or  Bays. 

I  Straits. 


~ Waters  wholly  inland. 


f  Lakes. 
1  Rivers. 


I.     QUESTIONS    ON    THE    TABLE. 

1.  What  are  the  two  great  divisions  ot  the  earth's  surface  ? 

2.  How  many  parts  are  land  and  how  many  water  ? 

3.  What  are  the  two  great  divisions  of  land  called  ? 

4.  What  are  the  names  of  the  two  continents  ? 

5.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  continent  and  an  island  ? 

1.  Plains  and  valleys  are  both  low  giound:  what,  then,  is  the 
difference  between  them  ?  2.   What  is  a  mountain  ? 

3.  What  are  the  three  divisions  of  land  with  regard  to  shape  ? 

4.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  peninsula  and  a  cape  ? 

5.  What  is  an  isthmus  ? 

6.  What  division  of  water  corresponds  with  an  isthmus  ? 

1.  Wliat  names  are  given  to  the  five  oceans  ? 

2.  What  three  divisions  of  water  are  partly  inland  ? 

3.  What  three  div'sions  of  water  are  wholly  inland  ? 

4.  With  what  division  of  land  does  a  gulf  or  bay  correspond  ? 

5.  What  is  the  difference  between  an  island  and  a  lake  ? 

6.  What  is  a  river  ?   What  is  its  beginning  called  ?    Its  ending? 


II.     QUESTIONS    ON    THE    MAP. 

1.  What  continent  do  North  and  South  America  form  ? 

2.  What  three  Grand  Divisions  in   the  Eastern  Continent  ? 

3.  What  ocean  between  the  eastern  part  of  the  Western  Con- 
tinent and  the  western  part  of  the  Eastern  Continent  ? 

4.  What  ocean  west  of  North  and  South  America  ? 

5.  What  ocean  east  of  Asia  ? 

6.  In  what  direction  from  Asia  is  the  Indian  Ocean  ? 

7.  Point  to  the  Arctic  Ocean,  —  to  the  Antarctic  Ocean. 

8.  Whiit  is  the  largest  island  named  on  the  map  ? 

9.  Point  to  a  sea  between  Europe  and  Africa  ;  it  is  called  the 
Mediterranean  Sea. 

10.  Do  you  see  a  narrow  passage  of  water  joining  the  Medi- 
teri'anean  Sea  with  the  Atlantic  Ocean  ?  What  is  a  narrow 
passage  of  water  joining  two  larger  bodies  of  water  called? 
The  name  of  this  passage  is  the  Strait  of  Gibraltar. 

11.  Do  you  see  the  narrow  neck  of  land  joining  North  and 
South  America  ?  What  is  a  narrow  neck  of  land  joining  two 
larger  bodies  of  land  called  ?  The  name  of  Ihis  neck  of  land 
is  the  Isthmus  of  Panama. 


AXES,    POLES,   AND    EUUATOK. 


21 


seot.  1 1 1. -our  world. 

L  — ON   WHAT  THE   EARTH  TURNS. 

1.  W/ifit  have  we  learned  about  the  earth  ? 

We  have  learned  that  the  earth  is  a  planet,  that  it 
turns  around  every  24  hours,  and  that  it  revolves 
around  the  suu  in  a  year  of  365  days. 

[In  explaining  what  is  meant  by  the  earth's  axis,  it  will  be 
well  to  recur  to  the  subject  of  day  and  night.  Let  the  teacher 
cause  the  school  globe  to  rotate  in  front  of  the  light  ;  it  wiU 
then  be  easy  for  the  pupils  to  answer  such  questions  u  these 
that  follow.] 

2.  When  I  place  this  globe  before  the  light,  how 
much  of  it  receives  the  light]  Wliich  half  is  in  its 
own  shadow?  Now,  as  I  turn  the  globe,  is  there  not 
always  one  half  which  is  in  tlie  light,  while  the  other 
half  is  in  the  shadow  1 

3.  If  we  suppose  the  earth  to  spin  round  in  front 
of  the  sun,  how  much  will  have  daylight  at  one  time  1 
What  of  the  opposite  half  of  the  earth  1 

4.  But  is  it  not  the  sun  which  appears  to  wheel 
round  in  the  heavens,  and  not  the  earth  which  turns 
round  in  front  of  the  sun?  Do  we  not  speak  of  the 
sm\  rising  &.m\  seltiay  ?  In  wliat  direction  is  sunrise? 
—  sunset  ? 

[Let  one  of  the  pupils  cause  the  school  globe  to  rotate  before 
the  light ;  then  let  another  carry  the  light  around  the  station- 
ary globe,  showing  that  in  either  way  every  point  is  in  succes- 
sion illuminated.  Inquire:  "Which  is  the  easier  method  of 
lighting  every  part  of  tlie  globe  by  turn  ?  Is  it  not,  then,  more 
likely  that  the  earth  turns  round  in  front  of  tlie  sun  than  that 
the  sun  wheels  around  the  earth  ? "  Announce  this  rotation  as 
a  fact  about  which  there  can  be  no  doubt.  State  that  the  earth 
turns  round  from  west  to  east,  thus  causing  th»  sun  to  S8»m  to 
rise  in  the  east  and  set  in  the  west.  ] 

5.  What  causes  day  and  night  ? 

The  earth  turns  around,  one  half  of  its  surface  be- 
ing always  toward  the  sun ;  this  half  has  then  day 
and  the  other  night. 

6.  //"(''  nfteii  ill"!  the  eiirth  turn  completely  around  ? 
The  earth  turns  completely  around  in  twenty-four 

hours. 

7.  M'hi/  does  the  run  apjiear  to  rife  in  the  east  and 
set  in  the  ivest  ? 

Because  the  earth  turns  round  on  itself  from  -west 
to  east. 

8.  On  what  does  a  wheel  turn  1 

[The  earth  does  not  turn  on  an  axle,  as  a  wheel  does.  ] 

9.  On  what  does  a  top  that  is  set  spinning  turn  ? 
[The  earth  does  not  turn  on  a  peg,  or  pivot,  as  a  spinning- 
top  does.] 

10.  On  what  does  a  soap-bubble  which  you  blow  so 
as  to  make  it  revolve  turn,  or  on  what  does  a  small 
round  india-rubber  balloon  turn  when  you  cause  it  to 


revolve?     Have  these  any  axle  to  turn  on,  like  the 
wheel  ?     Have  they  any  peg,  like  the  top  ? 

[You  do  not  know  what  the  balloon  or  the  soap-bubble, 
turns  on  ?  Well,  each  turns  on  itself.  Still,  can  you  nut 
think  of  a  line  on  which  it  moves  ?  This  line,  since  you 
merely  imagine  it,  is  an  imaginary  line.  The  earth  turns  on 
an  imaginary  line.     This  is  called  the  earth's  axis.] 

11.  On  what  does  the  earth  turn  round,  or  rotate  ? 
The  earth  turns  round,  or  rotates,  on  its  axis. 

12.  What  is  the  axi.'^  of  the  earth  ? 

The  axis  of  the  earth  is  the  imaginary  line  on 
w^hich  the  earth  rotates. 


IL  — NORTH  AND  SOUTH  POLES. 

[If  the  teacher  has  made  it  plain  to  the  pupils  that  the  axis  of 
the  earth  is  the  imaginary  line  on  which  the  earth  rotates,  it 
wUl  be  easy  for  them  to  understand  that  there  are  two  points 
which  do  not  move  at  all,  but  may  turn  on  themselves.  The 
teacher  should  guard  against  the  juipil's  forming  a  material  con- 
ception from  the  word  "[lole,"  by  stating  that  this  is  a  Greek 
word  meaning  turning-point.] 

1.  What    are   the    Poles   of  the 
earth  ? 

The  Poles  are  the  ends  of  the 
earth's  axis. 

2.  What  pupils  have  ever  seen 
tlie  North  Star  ? 


.■"PjUPQ/- 


[Let  the  teacher  put  the  pupils  in 
the  way  of  observing  the  North  Star.  "'-th  F" 

Then  tell  them  that  there  is  a  part  of  the  earth  where,  if  we 
were  there,  we  should  see  the  North  Star  shining  directly  above 
our  heads.  This  point  directly  under  the  North  Star  is  called 
the  North  Pule.  It  is  the  most  northern  of  tlie  two  turning- 
points  of  the  earth's  axis. 

3.  What  names 
are  given  to  the 
Poles  ? 

The  North  Pole 
and  the  South 
Pole. 

4.  What  is  the 
Xorth  Pole  ?  II 

The  North  Pole 
Is  the  end  of  the 
earth's  axis  near- 
est to  the  North 
Star.  It  is  the 
most  northern 
point  on  the  earth. 

5.  What  is  the 
South  Pole  ? 

The  South  Pole 
is  the  opposite 
end  of  the  earth's  axis,  and  is  the  part  of  the  earth 
farthest  from  the  North  Star. 


PKIMAEY   LESSONS. 


"6.  What,  llteii,  is  realty  meant  by  direction  North 
and  tioidh  I 

North  is  tOTward  the  North  Pole;  South  is  toward 
the  South  Pole. 

NyfE.  —  As  far  as  we  know,  no  liunian  being  lias  ever  yet 
lieen  at  either  the  Korth  or  .South  Pole.  Many  brave  explorers 
liave  sailed  northward  into  the  icy  seas  to  reach  the  North  Pole, 
but  have  been  driven  back  by  the  cold,  unable  to  force  their 
way  to  it.  Other  gallant  captains  have  never  returned,  hav- 
ing perished  in  the  regions  of  eternal  snow  and  ice.  In  another 
part  of  the  book  the  pupil  will  find  an  account  of  tlie  Polar 
Expeditions  of  Franklin,  Kane,  and  others. 


III. —  THE   EQUATOR. 

[The  best  preparation  for  understanding  what  the  Equator  is, 
and  vhal  it  is  for,  is  to  begin  by  pointing  it  out  on  the  scliool- 
globe.     Sucli  questions  as  the  following  may  be  asked.] 

1.  What  is  the  shajje  of  tlie  school-globe]  "What 
does  this  globe  represent  1  Turn  the  globe  once  :  on 
what  does  it  turn  ] 

2.  Place  your  finger  on  the  most  northerly  point  of 
the  globe  :  what  is  that  point  called '?  AVhat  i.s  the 
l)oint  directly  opposite  called? 

3.  Put  your  finger  half-way  between  the  Poles,  on 
the  black  line  which  extends  entirelj-  around  the  globe. 
This  circle  is  called  the  Equator. 

4.  Is  this  circle  any  nearer  to  the  North  Pole  than 
it  is  to  the  South  Pole,  or  is  it  just  midway  between 
the  two  ] 

[This  line  is  called  the  EqU-ITOR,  because  it  dii-idi-s  thr  siirfare 
of  the  earth  equally  br.tinccti  the  North  and  South  Pole.  That 
half  of  the  earth's  surface  which  is  between  the  Equator  and  the 
North  Pole  is  called  the  Northern  Hemisphere  ;  the  other  half 
is  called  the  Southern  Hemisphere.] 

5.  W/iat  ix  the  E'piiitor  o»  the 
sehool^o/ohe  i 

The  Equator  is  a  circle  around 
the  globe,  niid'way  between  the 
Poles. 

6.  What  dejea  it  represent  / 
It  represents  the  earth's  sur- 
face as  divided  into  a  Northern 
and  a  Southern  hemisphere. 

[You  must  not  suppose  tliere  is  any  such  line  drawn  on  the 
earth  itself.  Still,  we  may  think  of,  or  imngine,  such  a  line  ; 
and  I  will  tell  you  why  it  is  very  useful  to  imagine  such  a  line, 
and  why  we  mark  it  on  maps  and  globes.  The  sun  shines  on 
tlic  earth  in  such  a  way  that  tliere  is  a  broad  belt  lehere  the 
iveatjter  is  very  hot  all  tlie  year  round,  and  the  Equator  is  just 
ill  tlie  middle  of  this  belt.'] 

7.     What  does  the  Equator  marl-  ? 

The  Equator,  half-way  between  the  Poles,  marks 
the  middle  of  a  broad  belt  around  the  earth,  where 
the  sun  is  very  hot  all  the  year  round. 


IV.  -  SITUATION  OF  PLACES. 

CFor  Reading.] 

1.  If  a  fly  should  aliglit  on  an  orange,  and  we 
wished  to  tell  a  person  exactly  on  what  part  of  the 
orange  the  fly  is,  do  you  think  it  would  be  easy  to 
do  so?  Certainly  it  woidd  not,  for  wo  have  nothing 
to  go  by  in  telling  where  the  fly  is. 

2.  When  we  wish  to  tell  a  person  where  a  particular 
house  or  building  in  a  city  is,  we  say  that  it  is  in  a 
certain  street,  between  such  and  such  streets.  Thus 
you  have  often  heard  persons  making  a  statement 
something  like  this  :  "  The  post-oftice  is  on  the  right- 
hand  side  of  Main  Street,  between  Pine  and  Poplar." 
In  like  manner,  to  help  us  tell  the  location  of  places, 
all  school-globes  and  maps  have  certain  lines  drawn  up 
and  down  and  across  them. 

3.  The  half  of  the  earth's  surface  which  is  between 
the  Equator  and  the  North  Pole  is  called  the  Northern 
Hemisphere  ;  the  other  half,  between  the  Equator  and 
tlie  South  Pole,  is  called  the  Southern  Hemisphere. 
Now,  you  will   notice  that  there   are   several  circles 

drawn  around  the 
school-globe,  both 
to  the  north  of  the 
Equator  and  south 
of  it,  as  in  this  di- 
agram. They  are 
drawn  parallel  with 
the  Equator,  and 
are  called  parallels 
of  latitude.  By 
means  of  these 
lines  we  can  tell  the 
latitude  of  a  place, 

tliat  is,  its  distance  from  tlie  Equator  toward  the  North 

Pole  or  toward  the  South  Pole. 

4.  I  will  tell  you  how  this  is  done.  We  suppose 
the  distance  fi-om  the  Equator  to  the  North  Pole  to  be 
divided  into  90  parts,  called  degrees,  and  the  same 
from  the  Eipiator  to  the  South  Pole.  If  a  school-globe 
or  a  map  were  large  enough,  we  might  draw  so  many 
of  these  jiarallel  circles  that  each  one  of  the  90  degrees 
would  be  between  two  circles,  but  generally  on  globes 
the  space  between  two  circles  represents  ten  of  the 
90  degrees.  Each  degree  is  a  distance  of  nearly  70 
ordinary  miles ;  hence,  as  from  the  Equator  to  either 
Pole  is  90  degrees,  the  distance  is  about  6,300  miles. 

5.  We  reckon  latitude  from  the  Equator,  where 
latitude  is  0,  that  is,  where  it  begins,  and  count  north- 
ward to  the  North  Pole  90  degrees.  We  count  the 
same  number  from  the  Equator  to  the  South  Pole. 
A  place  or  a  country  which  lies  to  the  north  of  the 
Equator  is  said  to  be  in  north  latitude,  and  one  whieli 


Parallels  of  Latitude. 


ABOUT   THE   WEATHER. 


23 


MeridlanB  of  Longitude. 


lies  to  the  south  of  the  Equator  is  said  to  be  iu  south 
latitude. 

6.  It  is  not  enough  that  we  are  able  to  speak  of  a 
place  as  north  or  south  from  the  Equator :  we  must 
have  the  means  of  denoting  its  position  east  or  west. 
For  this  purpose  we  draw  a  number  of  semicircles 
from  the  North  to  the  South  Pole,  called  Meridians. 
With  these  we  measure  longitude,  which  means  lo- 
cality east  or  west  from  some  fixed  point. 

7.  But  ea-st  or 
west  from  what  ? 
We  must  fix  upon 
some  meridian  as 
the  starting-point 
for  reckoning.  On 
many  American 
maps  the  meridian 
of  Washington,  the 
capital  of  our  coun- 
try, is  chosen  ;  but 
the  meridian  most 
used  is  that  of 
Green  wicli,  near 
London,  where  there  is  a  famous  naval  observatory. 
Calling  the  meridian  of  Greenwich  zero,  we  count  lon- 
gitude eastward  180  degrees,  that  is,  lialf-way  round 
the  globe,  and  also  westward  the  same  distance. 

v.  — LATITUDE    AND    LONGITUDE. 

1.  What  is  the  latitvde  of  a  place  ? 

The  latitude  of  a  place  is  its  distance  in  degrees  north 
or  south  of  the  Equator. 

Note.  —  A  degree  (marked  °)  is  the  360th  part  of  any  circle. 
The  60th  part  of  a  degree  is  called  a  minute  (marked  ')• 

2.  How  is  latitude  reckoned  1 

Latitude  is  reckoned  thus  :  North  latitude,  from  the 
Equator,  where  the  latitude  is  zero,  to  the  North  Pole, 
which  is  iu  90°  north  latitude  ;  South  latitude,  from 
the  Equator  to  the  South  Pole,  which  is  in  90°  south 
latitude. 

3.  What  is  ike  longitude  of  a  place  ? 

The  longitude  of  a  place  is  its  distance  east  or  west 
from  some  given  meridian,  called  the  jii-st  meritlian. 

4.  Hoiv  is  longitude  reckoned  ? 

Longitude  is  reckoned  from  the  first  meridian  botli 
eastward  and  westward  180°,  or  half-way  around  the 
globe. 

Note.  —  The  length  of  every  degree  of  latitude  is  69 J  miles. 
The  length  of  a  degree  of  longitude  is  not  uniform  :  it  is  69J 
miles  at  the  Equator  ;  but  the  degrees  constantly  lessen  from 
the  Equator  to  the  Poles,  where  they  cease  to  have  any  length. 


Direct  aod  Slanting  Rays. 


VI.  — HOT  WEATHER  AND   COLD. 
L     Wliere  does  our  heat  romt'  from  ? 
Our  heat  comes  from  the  rays  of  the  sun. 

2.  Is  not  the  weather  sometimes  very  hot  where  we 
live,  and  sometimes  very  cold  l  What  is  our  hot  sea- 
son called  ?     What  is  our  cold  season  called  ? 

3.  Wliich  is  the  hottest  time  of  the  day,  —  noon  or 
morning  or  evening  % 

[The  teacher  may  explain  that  the  reason  why  it  is  hotter  at 
'noon  than  in  the  morning  or  evening  is  the  reason  why  it  is 
hotter  in  summer  than  in  winter ;  and  the  reason  why  it  is 
hotter  at  noon  and  in  summer  than  it  is  in  the  morning  and 
in  winter  is  tlic  reascm  why  in  some  parts  of  the  world  it  is 
11.1  va lis  very  hot  and  in  other  parts  always  very  cold.'\ 

4.  When  do  the  sunbeams 
</nv  the  most  hnif  ? 

The  sunbeams  give  the 
moat  heat  wrhen  they  fall 
most  directly  upon  any 
part  of  the  earth. 

5.  When  do  the  sunbeainx 
i/ivi'  the  least  heat  ? 

The  sunbeams  give  the 
least  heat  virhen  they  fall 
the  most  slantingly. 

Note.  —  This  cut  shows  why  the  sun's  rays  give  most  heat 
when  they  .shine  directly  overhead,  and  less  and  less  heat  ac- 
cording as  they  fall  in  a  slanting  manner.  A  represents  four 
rays.  When  the  sun  shines  directly,  all  four  fall  upon  the  .same 
space  on  wliich  only  the  three  slanting  rays,  B,  fall,  and  only 
the  one  still  more  slanting  ray,  C,  falls.  The  more  sunbeams 
the  greater  heat. 

6.  At  what  time  of  the  day  do  the  sun's  rays  fall 
most  dii'ectly,  or  from  most  nearly  over  our  heads'? 
At  what  time  of  the  day  do  the  sun's  rays  slant  off 
the  most?  Why,  then,  is  it  hotter  at  noon  than  in 
the  morning  1  Wliy  is  it  cooler  in  the  evening  than 
at  noon  1 

[The  teacher  may  continue  the  oral  explanation  somewhat  as 
follows :  "  Now,  just  as  the  sunbeams  fall  more  directly  at  noon 
than  in  the  morning  or  evening,  so  they  fall  more  directly  dur- 
ing the  summer  season  than  during  the  winter  season."  State 
that  the  part  of  the  world  where  we  live  is  in  summer  tipped 
toward  the  sun,  and  therefore  his  beams  fall  directly  upon 
us  ;  our  part  of  the  world  is  in  winter  turned  partly  away 
from  the  sun,  and  hence  his  beams  then  fall  upon  us  in  a 
slanting  manner.] 

7.  Wh;/  do  we  receive  most  heat  from  the  sun  in  sum- 
mer, and  least  heat  in  winter  ? 

■We  receive  most  heat  from  the  sun  in  summer 
because  then  his  rays  are  most  direct,  and  least 
heat  in  winter  because  then  his  rays  are  most 
slanting. 

8.  WJi;/  is  it  ahrai/s  hot  in  places  near  the  Equator? 
It  is  always  hot  near  the  Equator,  because  the 

sun  always  shines  nearly  directly  there. 


24 


PEIMAEY   LESSONS. 


9.    Will/  is  it  ahcays  cold  in  places  near  the  Poles  ? 

It  is  always  cold  in  places  near  the  Poles,  because 
there  the  sun  does  not  shine  for  months,  and  when 
it  does  shine,  the  rays  always  fall  very  slantingly. 


VII.  —  CLIMATE.  —  A  JOURNEY. 


[For  Reading.: 


the  sun  does  not  rise  at  all.  The  long,  freezing  polar 
night  has  set  in,  and  we  have  only  the  light  of  the 
moon  and  stars.  We  dress  in  the  warm  fur  of  the  seal, 
and  remain  shut  up  in  our  cabin,  except  when  occasion- 
ally taking  a  sledge-ride  with  our  teams  of  Esquimaux 


Scene  In  the  Hot  Lands. 

1.  We  are  now  to  learn  about  the  climate  in  differ- 
ent parts  of  the  globe  ;  and  in  order  the  better  to  un- 
derstand the  subject  we  will  imagine  ourselves  trav- 
elers, and  suppose  that  we  are  in  the  region  of  the 
Equator,  near  the  mouth  of  the  Amazon  Eiver,  in 
South  America. 

2.  It  is  in  the  month  of  January,  but  the  sun  at 
noon  is  nearly  overhead,  and  the  weather  is  very  hot. 
We  begin  to  travel  northward  by  land.  We  pass 
through  forests  of  palms  and  many  other  kinds  of  trees 
new  to  us ;  the  woods  abound  in  monkeys,  parrots, 
humming-birds,  and  many  other  birds  of  brilliant 
plumage.  We  pass  by  plantations  of  bananas,  oranges, 
coffee,  sugar-cane,  and  cotton.  We  reach  the  Isthmus 
of  Panama  in  March,  and  find  no  marked  change 
in  climate,  plants,  or  animals.  We  take  a  steamer 
on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Isthmus,  at  Aspinwall,  and 
reach  Ifew  York  near  the  close  of  the  month,  just  as 
the  snow  is  melting  away  after  a  long,  cold  winter. 

3.  We  now  join  an  exploring  expedition  for  the 
Arctic  Ocean,  or  North  Polar  Sea.  As  we  sail  north 
over  the  Atlantic  up  Baffin  Bay,  and  along  the  shores 
of  Greenland,  the  days  grow  longer  and  longer  as  we 
proceed  far  up  in  the  icy  seas.  Finally  the  sun  does 
not  set  at  all.  It  circles  round  and  round  in  the  sky, 
making  a  continual  day  two  months  long.  Our  way 
is  blocked  by  the  ice,  and  we  land  on  the  coast  of 
Greenland. 

4.  Nothing  is  growing  on  the  land  except  a  few 
■  mosses  ;  the  mountains  are  covered  with  ice  and  snow. 

Our  ship  is  suddenly  caught  in  the  ice,  and  we  are 
forced  to  winter  here.  First,  we  have  a  short  night 
two  hours  long;   then  the  nights  grow  longer,   until 


Scene  In  the  Land  oi  Ice. 

dogs.     We  are  near  the  spot  where  the  gallant  Kane 
passed  two  winters  and  summers. 

5.  After  a  cheerless  night  of  two  months,  the  wel- 
come face  of  the  sun  is  again  seen ;  the  nights  grow 
shorter  and  the  days  longer,  until  we  have  no  night 
at  all.  Our  sliip  is  thawed  out,  and  we  set  saU  for 
New  York. 


VIII.  — ZONES  OF   CLIMATE. 
1^"  A  school-globe  should  be  used  to  illxistrate  this  lesson. 
L   What  is  meant  hy  the  climate  of  a  place  ? 
The  climate  of  a  place  means  the  kind  of  wreather, 
■whether  hot  or  cold,  w^et  or  dry,  at  that  place. 

2.  Where  is  the  hottest  }xirt  of  the  earth's  surface  ? 
The   hottest   part  of  the   earth's   surface   is  in  a 

broad  belt,   3,000  miles  wide,   extending   on   each 
side  of  the  Equator. 

3.  What  is  this  belt  called  ? 
It  is  called  the  Torrid  Zone. 

Note.  —  Torrid  means  scorching  or  roasting.     Zmie  means 
belt. 


CLIMATE. 


25 


'  ''^    '    1^*     ^i)- 


^^viTHTEM 


F     \ 


The  Zones :  Soutu  Polar  View. 

4.  Where  are  the  coldest  jxtris  of  the  earth  ? 

The  coldest  parts  are  in  the  region  of  the  Poles. 

5.  What  names  are  given  to  these  paiis  ? 

•  The  region   around  the  North   Pole  is  called  the 
North  Frigid  Zone,  and  that  around  the  South  Pole 
is  called  the  South  Frigid  Zone. 
Note.  —  Frujid  nieaiis  cold  or  freezing. 

6.  What  is  the  name  of  the  belt,  or  zone,  between  the 
North  Frigid  and  the  Torrid,  Zone  ? 

The  North  Temperate  Zone. 
Note.  —  Temperate  means  moderate. 

7.  What  is  the  name  of  the  zone  between  the  South 
Frigid,  and  the  Torrid  Zone  ? 

The  South  Temperate  Zone. 

[Tlie  teacher  may  now  give  the  names  of  the  boundai-y  circles 
of  climate,  —  the  Tropics  of  Cancer  and  Capricorn,  and  the 
Arctic  and  Antarctic  Circles,  pointing  out  these  circles  on  the 
school-globe,  and  showing  them  on  the  wall-map  of  the  hemi- 
spheres. ] 


IX.  — GLOBE  AND  MAP  EXERCISE  ON  CLIMATE. 

K^^^  If  there  is  no  globe  in  school,  these  questions  may  be  answered 
from  an  outline  map  of  the  hemispheres. 

1.  Point  out  on  the  school-globe  the  circle  tailed  the 
Tropic  of  Cancer,  and  the  cii'cle  called  the  Tropic  of 
Capricorn.     What  zone  is  between  these  % 

2.  Add  23^  to  23i,  and  tell  how  many  degrees  in 
width  i.s  the  Torrid  Zone.  Each  degree  is  70  miles; 
what,  then,  is  the  width  of  the  Torrid  Zone  in  miles? 

3.  Which  of  the  Grand  Divisions  of  land  are  partly 
in  this  zone  1  The  greater  parts  of  which  two  grand 
ilivisions  are  in  this  zone  ? 

4.  Point  out  the  Arctic  Circle  1  Which  zone  lies 
within  this  circle,  around  the  Xorth  Pole?  What 
lands  are  partly  within  the  North  Frigid  Zone  ? 

5.  Point  out  the  Antarctic  Circle.  What  zone  lies 
within  this  circle  and  around  the  South  Pole  1 

6.  Point  out  the  North  Temperate  Zone  :  between 
what  two  circles  is  it  ?  Which  of  the  Grand  Divisions 
are  mostly  in  this  zone  t  In  which  zone  is  the  United 
States  t 

7.  Between  what  two  dotted  circles  is  the  South 
Temperate  Zone?  Which  of  the  Grand  Divisions  ex- 
tend into  this  zone? 

8.  Study  carefully  the  map  given  below,  and  bring 
in  for  to-morrow,  written  out  on  paper,  the  names  of 
the  hottest  countries  ;  for  the  next  day,  the  names  of 
the  temperate  countries  ;  and  for  the  day  following,  the 
names  of  the  coldest  countries. 


R    A   T     E  C 


T>  E  _?._..2^— 1    ^    1 _^_:.,..__.^..4..-^^-. 


- Tropic  qf  Caprvcom 


Mercator  Map.  showing  Countries  by  Climate. 


2G 


PKIMAIiY    LESSONS. 


X.  — CLIMATE  BY  HEIGHT. 

[For  Reading.] 

L  We  have  not  leanii'd  all  about  climate  merely 
because  we  have  learned  that  places  at  or  near  the 
Equator  are  hottest,  and  that  tlie  heat  becomes  less  and 
less  according  as  we  go  toward  either  Pole ;  for  it  is 
not  always  the  case  that  places  in  the  Torrid  Zone  have 
a  scorching  climate.  In  some  parts  of  the  Torrid  Zone 
it  is  quite  mild,  in  other  parts  it  is  cold,  in  stiU  other 
parts  there  is  perpetual  snow. 

2.  You  may  noti<;e  on  the  map  of  .South  America 
(see  page  94)  the  Andes  Mountains,  in  the  western 
part.  Now,  on  their  summits,  right  at  the  Equator, 
lies  snow  which  never  melts.  Could  any  part  of  the 
world  be  hotter  than  the  scorching  plains  of  Equatorial 
Africa?  Surely  not;  and  yet  Mount  Kilimanjaro', 
which  is  crossed  by  the  Equator,  wears  a  white  crown 
of  snow  all  the  year  round.     How  is  this  % 

3.  We  have,  most  of  us,  climbed  a  mountain  in  sum- 
mer-time. Even  though  the  weather  was  quite  hot  at 
the  foot  of  the  mountain,  we  found,  if  the  mountain  was 
a  lofty  one,  that  when  we  reached  the  summit  the  air 
was  cool.  If  we  had  taken  a  thermometer  with  us,  we 
sliould  have  noticed  that  the  heat,  or  tempei-ature,  as  it 
is  called,  was  many  degrees  less  than  in  the  plain  be- 
low. Perhaps  some  pupils  have  been  to  the  top  of 
Mount  Washington,  which  is  in  the  White  Mountains 
of  New  Hampshire.  Those  who  have  done  so  know 
that  in  the  hottest  July  day  the  air  is  so  chilly  that 
fires  and  overcoats  are  needed  to  keep  one  comfortable 
on  the  chilly  summit. 

4.  This  shows  us  that,  as  we  ascend  heights,  the  air 
becomes  cool,  cooler,  cold,  colder,  till  at  last  we  reach 
the  line  of  perpetual  snow.  This  is  a  regular  rule,  or, 
as  men  of  science  say,  a  law  of  nature.  And  it  will 
greatly  help  us  to  understand  about  different  countries 
if  we  remember  this  rule.  It  will  help  us,  for  instance, 
to  understand  how  in  Mexico,  a  country  to  the  south 
of  us,  the  coast  has  the  burning  climate  of  the  Torrid 
Zone,  while  the  interior,  wliich  is  a  high  table-land, 
enjoys  everlasting  spring.  How  strange  it  is  that, 
by  ascending  a  mountain  three  miles  high,  we  can, 
even  at  the  Equator,  pass  through  all  climates,  from 
that  of  the  Torrid  to  that  of  the  Frigid  Zone ! 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  What  effect  has  height,  or  altitude,  on  the  climate 
of  a  place  ? 

Heat  always  becomes  less  as  we  ascend  heights. 

2.  On  ivhat  two  things,  then,  does  the  climate  of  a 
place  greatli/  depend  ? 

The  climate  of  a  place  depends  greatly  on  latitude, 
or  distance  from  the  Equator,  and  ou  altitude,  or 
height  into  the  sky. 


XI.  —  PLANTS. 

[Di'velop  orally  suniewliat  as  follows  :  1  will  name  a  grain, 
corn :  yon  may  name  another.  1  will  name  a  vegetable,  poUUucs: 
you  may  name  another.  1  will  name  a  tree,  tlic  2nne-trce :  you 
may  name  another.  Corn  grows  from  the  ground  ;  what  else 
glows  from  the  ground  ?  Things  that  grow  from  the  ground  are 
called  plants.  All  the  plants  found  iu  a  country  are  called  the 
vcgclatiou  of  that  country.] 

1.  What  are  plants  ? 

Plants  are  all  things  ■which  grow^  from  the  ground. 

2.  Name  all  the  kinds  of  grain  that  ;;ro\v  in  the 
State  in  which  you  resiele  ;  —  all  the  kinds  of  vege- 
tables. Name  the  kinds  of  fruit  that  grow  in  your 
part  of  the  country  ;  —  the  wild  berries. 

3.  Name  all  the  kinds  of  trees  growing  in  your  part 
of  the  country.  Name  live  garden  flowers,  —  five  wild 
flowers.  Name  two  kinds  of  grasses  which  the  farmers 
raise. 

4.  What  kinds  of  fruits  from  the  Torrid  Zone  have 
you  ever  eaten  %  What  spices  have  you  tasted  %  From 
wliat  countries  do  we  obtain  our  coffee  ]  Do  tea  and 
coffee  grow  in  this  country  ? 

[The  question  whether  all  kimls  of  plants  can  grow  where  we 
live  should  now  be  raised.  "  Can  we  grow  oranges  here  in  the 
open  air  ?  No.  Where,  then,  —  in  a  hot-house  ?  Yes.  We  can 
grow  oranges  in  a  hot-house,  because  there  is  a  great  amount 
of  heat  in  the  hot-house,  and  the  orange-tree  is  a  plant  that 
will  not  Hpen  without  a  great  amount  of  heat."  Now  state 
that  there  are  some  parts  of  the  world  whicli  we  may  call 
natural  hot-houses,  and  of  course  in  these  countries  oranges 
will  grow  in  the  open  air.] 

5.  It  is  very  hot  in  the  great  desert  in  Afrii;a,  yet 
scarcely  anything  grows  there  ?  Can  you  think  of  any 
reason  for  this?  Can  we  make  flowers  grow  in  our 
gardens  or  grain  in  our  fields,  unless  they  get  water  1 

Q.  What  two  things  are  required  in  order  that  plants 
mall  groin  i 

Plants  require  heat  and  moisture. 

7.  Wliat  rule  regarding  the  growth  of  plants  can  you 
give  ? 

The  hotter  and  more  moist  a  country  is  the  more 
rapidly  do  plants  grow^. 

8.  In  wliat  zone  are  the  hottest  parts  of  the  earth? 
What  kind  of  vegetation  may  we  expect  to  find  there  ? 

9.  Where  are  the  coldest  parts  of  the  earth  ?  Do 
you  suppose  in  the  Arctic  Region  there  can  be  many 
plants  ?    Do  you  suppose  there  can  be  any  large  plants  ? 

10.  In  which  zone  do  we  live  ?  In  our  part  of  the 
world  do  many  different  kinds  of  plants  grow?  Can 
we  raise  all  kinds  of  plants  ?     M''hy  not  ? 

11.  Whrit  of  vegetation  in  the  Torrid  Zone  ? 

The  Torrid  Zone  is  noted  for  its  luxuriant  vege- 
tation, especially  in  those  parts  where  rains  are 
abundant. 


PLANTS. 


'The  Palm. 
The  Maliog.-iny. 
The  India-rubber. 
The  Banian,  etc. 


Food  Plants . 


{Nutmeg. 
Cinnamon. 
I'cpiioi'. 
Cloves,  etc. 


Rice. 
Banana-s. 
Dates. 
Cocoa-nuts. 
Sugar-cane,  etc. 


12.    What  of  vegetation  in  the  Temperate  Zones  ? 
The  Temperate  Zones  produce  a  great  variety  of 
useful  plants,  such  as  are  found  in  our  own  country. 


Forest  Trees. 


'  The  Pine. 
The  Oak. 
The  Kim. 
The  Maple. 
The  Beech,  etc. 


Clnthing-mak-  | 
iiig  riants.      1 


Cotton. 
Fla.x. 
Hemp,  etc. 


Wheat. 
Corn. 
Food  Pl.ints.    \  liye. 

Potatoes. 

Garden  Vegetables, 


r  Apples. 

Pears. 
Fruits  . .  J  Peaches. 

Plums. 
I- Grapes. 

13.    What  of  vefjetatloii.  in  the  Frigid  Zones  ? 
The  only  vegetation  of  these  icy  regions  consists 
of  a  few  mosses  and  dwarfed  w^illows  and  birches. 


Xn.  — PLANTS  USEFUL  TO  MAN. 
CFor    Readlng.J 


1.  How  many 
plants  there  are 
which  are  useful  to 
man,  and  in  how 
many  ways  they  are 
useful !  First  we 
have  plants  which 
supply  us  with  food. 
Among  these  the 
ruost  important  are 
the  grains,  as  wheat, 
corn,  rice,  etc.  Next 
to  the  grains  are  tlie 
roots  and  vegetables 
we  eat.  Such  are  the 
potato,  Irish  and 
sweet,  the  yam,  so 
much  used  in  hot 
countries,  together 
with  the  beet,  rad- 
ish, onion,  cucum- 
ber, asparagus,  to- 
mato, cauliflower, 
pease,  beans,  etc. 

2.  The  fruits  of 
the  earth  likewise  minister  to  the  wants  of  man.  You 
have  all  eaten  the  common  fruits  that  grow  in  the  Tem- 
perate Zone,  such  as  apples,  pears,  and  peaches  ;  and  no 
doubt  you  have  eaten  various  tropical  fruits,  as  the 
orange,  banana,  pineapple,  etc.  Fruits  are  a  great  arti- 
cle of  food  in  hot  countries.  Thus  the  date,  which  is  the 
fruit  of  a  palm-tree,  is  to  the  people  of  Africa  what 
corn  and  wheat  are  to  us  ;  the  banana  is  the  chief  arti- 
cle of  food  in  the  hot  countries  of  America  ;  and  the 
bread-fruit  tree  supplies  the  islanders  of  the  Pacific 
Ocean  with  their  principal  sustenance. 

3.  Many  plants  furnish  condiments  and  spices  used 


Plants  by  Zones. 


in  the  preparation 
of  food,  as  sugar, 
the  oil  of  the  olive, 
pepper,  mustard, 
ginger,  cinnamon, 
allspice,  and  va- 
nilla. From  other 
plants  drink.s,  or  bev- 
erages, are  made. 
Some  of  these  are 
not  alcoholic,  as  tea, 
coffee,  and  chocolate ; 
others  are  alcoholic, 
as  wine,  ale,  whis- 
key, gin,  brandy,  etc. 
From  still  another 
class  of  i)lants  we 
derive  our  ilrugs  and 
medicines, — cam- 
phor, opium,  myrrh, 
senna,  sarsaparilla, 
rhubarb,  quinine, 
jalap,  ipecacuanha, 
and  many  others,  — 
but,  as  the  names 
are  long  and  the  thirigs  not  agreeable,  we  need  say 
nothing  about  them. 

4.  Plants  used  for  clothing-material  and  in  the  arts 
come  next  in  importance.  From  the  cotton  plant  we 
get  our  cotton  cloth,  and  from  flax  we  obtain  linen. 
The  various  woods  are  used  in  building  our  houses  and 
ships  and  in  cabinet-work.  Among  the  more  valuable 
woods  are  oak,  teak,  cedar,  mahogany,  rosewood,  laurel, 
and  satin-wood.  We  obtain  dye-stuffs  from  indigo, 
madder,  brazil-wood,  logwood,  etc.  ;  perfumery  from 
various  flowers  and  leaves  ;  india-rubber  from  the  india- 
rubber  tree ;  and  tobacco  from  the  tobacco  plant. 


28 


PKIMARY   LESSONS. 


r/,v 


Xni.  —  ANIMALS. 

[The  tea(;lier  will  find  this  a  good  opportunity  to  engage  the 
pupils  in  a  conversational  lesson  on  wliat  they  know  in  regard 
to  the  natural  history  of  such  foreign  animals  as  they  have  seen. 
The  subject  may  be  developed  somewhat  as  follows  :  Everything 
that  walks,  or  creeps,  or  runs,  or  flies,  or  swims,  or  eats,  is  called 
an  Animal.  There  are  many  thousand  different  kinds  of  animals 
on  the  earth,  and  in  the  air  and  sea.  Some  of  them,  such  as  the 
elephant  and  whale,  are  very  large  ;  others  are  so  small  that  they 
cannot  be  seen  without  a  microscope.  Let  the  teacher  now  give 
tile  classification  of  animals  into  beasts,  birds,  fishes,  etc.] 

1.  Each  pupil  may  name  some  animal  that  lives  in 
this  part  of  the  country,  and  at  the  same  time  tell 
whether  it  is  a  beast,  a  bird,  a  fish,  a  reptile,  or  an 
insect  1 

2.  Pupils  may 
write  on  their  slates 
a  list  of  the  names 
of  aU  the  animals 
which  tliey  have 
seen  in  menageries, 
or  public  parks  or 
gardens,  but  whicli 
do  not  belong  to  our 
part  of  the  world. 

3.  What  animal 
in  Arabia  and  Africa 
takes  the  place  of  the 
horse  1  What  great 
animal  takes  the 
place  of  the  horse  in 
India  1  What  ani- 
mals do  the  Esqui- 
maux use  to  draw 
their  teams  ? 

4.  Wliat  animals 
in  tliis  part  i)f  the 
country  are  used  for 
food?     What  kinds  '^      -- 
of  fish  do  we  catch 

here  for  food  ?     What  other  animals  that  are  used  as 
food  have  you  ever  heard  of? 

5.  Do  you  know  of  any  animals  from  which  we 
obtain  material  for  clothing  1  What  are  our  boots  and 
shoes  made  off     What  is  silk  1     What  is  fur  ? 


{Elephant. 
Rhinoceros. 
Hippopotamus. 
Girafie,  etc. 

r  Ants. 

-         .  Flies. 

Insects . .  < 

I  Scorpions. 
'^Tarantulas,  etc. 

r  Gorilla. 


r  Ostrich. 
■  i  Parrot. 
L  Humming-bii'd,  etc. 


r  Lion. 
Beasts  of  !  Tiger. 


I  Leopard. 
'^  Hyena,  etc. 


r  Crocodile. 
Reptiles.  <  Boa-constrictor. 
L  Anaconda,  etc. 


Z^    \  The  Ape. 
L  Orang-outan 

What  can  you  tell  about  the  animals  of  the  Frigid 


2. 

Zones? 

The  Frigid  Zones  are  remarkable  for  their  scarci- 
ty of  auimal  life. 

Sea  Animals. 

Whale,  Seal,  Walrus. 


ff^'v 


>"^N 


^!^i^^'^^'<z:s:m^ 


'^l^i*  ^*htCA^ 


XIV.  — ANIMALS  BY  ZONES. 

1.  What  can  you  tell  about  the  animals  of  the  Torrid 
Zone  ? 

The  wild  animals  of  the  Torrid  Zone  are  noted  for 
their  size,  strength,  or  fierceness;  the  birds,  for  their 
brilliant  plumage  ;  the  reptiles,  for  their  size  ;  and  the 
insects,  for  their  great  number  and  poisonous  nature. 


Ftir-bearing  Animals. 

W^hite  Bear,  Sable, 
Eimuie,  etc. 

3.  What  of  the 
animal's  of  the  Tem- 
2Jtiute  Zones  ? 

The  Temperate 
Zones  are  noted  for 
the  gieat  number 
of  animals  useful 
to  man 

Domestic  Animals. 

Horse,  Hog,  0.x,  Dog, 
Sheep,  Cat,  etc. 

Wild  Animals. 

Bear,  Wolf,  Buffalo, 
Ileer,  etc. 

Insects 

Bee,  Silk-worm,  Flies, 
Mosquitoes,  etc. 

Birds 

Such  as  are  common 
in  the  United  States. 


XV.  — REVIEW  AND  TEST  QUESTIONS. 


,. 

Why  is  it  hotter  at  noon  than  in  the  morning? 

3. 

In  what  season  does  the  sun  shine  most  directly? 

3- 

What  is  meant  by  the  climate  of  a  place? 

4- 

What  is  the  name  of  the  hottest  zone? 

5- 

In  which  zone  do  you  live  ? 

6. 

In  which  hemisphere  is  the  South  Temperate  Zone? 

7. 

Where  are  the  Frigid  Zones? 

8. 

What  has  height  to  do  with  heat? 

9- 

What  do  plants  require  ? 

lO. 

Write  out  the  names  of  the  animals  shown  in   the  pic- 

ture above. 

RACES   OF   MEN. —  WANTS    OF   MAN. 


29 


Sect.  IV. -MAN  ON  THE  EARTH. 

I.— RACES   OF  MEN. 

1.  What  pupils  have  ever  seen  an  Indian?  What 
pupils  have  ever  seen  a  Chinaman'?  Which  has  a 
copper-colored  skin,  and  long,  straight  black  hair? 
Which  has  a  yellow  complexion,  and  eyes  which  turn 
downward  at  the  inner  corners? 

2.  llnw  many  races  are  there  'I 

Five  races :  the  White  Race,  the  Yellov?  Race,  the 
Black  Race,  the  Brown  Race,  and  the  Red  Race. 

[Let  the  teacher  explain  that  tliese  various  races  do  not  all 
hve  in  the  same  manner,  and  are  not  equally  intelligent  or 
j)0werful.  When  races  differ  in  regard  to  their  way  of  living 
and  their  intelligence,  we  say  that  they  differ  in  civilization.] 

3.  What  are  races  that  are  hid  little  civilized  called? 
They  are  called  savages,  or  barbarians. 

4.  What  are  races  that  are  half  civilized  called  ? 
They  are  called  semi-civilized  races. 

5.  What  are  the  most  intelliyeid  and  strongest  races  — 
those  that  lead  the  world  —  called? 

They  are  called  civilized  races. 

6.  Whcd  can  you  say  of  (In  ^        --^., 
White  Race  ? 

The  White  Race,  also 
called  the  Caucasian,  is  the 
most  powerful,  and  includes 
the  greatest  number  of  peo 
pie. 

Note.  —  The  United  States  and 
Europe  are  peopled  chietly  by  this 
race.     They  are  the  most  highly 

civilized  race.  Most  of  the  nations  belonging  to  this  rac 
believe  in  the  Christian  religion. 

7.  What  can  you  say  of  the 
Yellow  Race  7 

The  Yellow^,  or  Mongo- 
lian, Race  ranks  in  numbers 
next  to  the  White  Race. 

NoTK.  —  The  home  of  this  race 
is  principally  in  Asia.  The  Chi- 
nese and  Japanese  belong  to  it. 
Tlie  people  belonging  to  this  race 
are  semi-civilized  nations.     They 

have  wi'itten  languages  and  have  manufactures  and  commerce, 
but  are  not  so  well  educated  or  so  improved  as  the  White  Race. 
They  are  not  Christians. 

8.  What  can  you  say  of  the 
lilack  Race  ? 

The  Black,  or  Negro,  Race 
is  found  chiefly  in  Africa. 

XOTK.  —  Most  of  the  tribes  be- 
longing to  this  race  are  savages, 
though  .some  of  them  are  much 
more  advanced  than  others.    They 


are  generally  superstitious,  and  woi-ship  idols  ;  hence  they  are 
called  savages.  In  the  United  States  are  many  Colored  People 
who  are  Christians  and  are  civilized. 

9.  What  can  you  say  of  the 
Brown  Race  ? 

The  Brown  People,  or 
Malays,  have  their  home 
principally  on  the  islands 
of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

Note.  —  The  Malays  are  few 
in  numbei',  compared  with  the 
White,   Yellow,   or    Black   races.  '  n  ^  , 

They    are    not    much     civilized. 

Sonic  are  savages,  but  others  have  been  converted  to  Christianity 
by  missionaries  from  our  country  and  England. 

10.  What  can  you  say  of 
the  Red  Race. 

The  Indians,  or  Red  Peo- 
ple, live  in  some  parts  of 
North  America  and  of 
South  America. 

Note.  — The  Indians  of  North 
.\merica  are  the  descendants  of 
the  aborigines  who  were  found 
there  on  its  discovery.     As  white 

people  settled  the  colonies  and  States,  the  Indians  were  little 
by  little  driven  westward,  till  now  they  are  almost  entirely 
confiHcd  to  the  region  of  the  Far  West.  They  are  few  in  num- 
ber and  are  mostly  savages  and  pagans.  The  Indiansi  of  South 
.\merica  number  several  millions,  and  many  of  them  are  partly 
civilized. 


II.  — WANTS  OF  MAN. 
[For  Reading.: 

1 .  AVhat  is  there  without  wliich  we  should  very  soon 
die  ?  Why,  food.  We  need  food  to  keep  us  alive ; 
lience  we  call  it  one  of  the  needs,  or  wants,  of  mankind. 

2.  Now  if  you  think  a  little,  j'ou  will  see  that  all  - 
jieople  cannot  have  the  same  kind  of  food.  Indeed,  the 
same  kind  of  food  would  not  be  good  for  the  health  of 
people  in  every  part  of  the  world,  for  food  which  is 
healthful  to  people  in  one  part  may  be  quite  unsuited 
to  those  in  another  part.  Thus,  in  very  hot  countries 
the  best  food  consists  of  vegetable  food,  —  grain  and 
fruits  ;  and  we  find  that  in  such  cduntiies  these  things 
grow  in  great  abundance.  But  the  people  of  very  cold 
climates  could  not  live  on  vegetable  food  alone.  They 
need  such  food  as  will  produce  heat  in  the  body. 
Nothing  produces  heat  so  rapidly  as  animal  food,  and 
especially  oils.  Hence  it  is  that  the  Esquimaux  of  the 
Arctic  Eegion  live  mainly  on  the  fat  of  the  seal,  the  oil 
of  the  whale,  and  such  articles.  To  us  it  is  very  un- 
pleasant to  think  of  eating  such  things,  but  they  are 
the  very  best  food  for  very  cold  climates. 

3.  There  is  another  want  of  mankind.     It  is  clothing. 


30 


PRIMARY   LESSONS. 


True,  in  some  of  the  hottest  parts  of  the  world  people 
require  very  little  clothing ;  yet  even  here  nature 
teaches  them  to  use  some  covering  for  their  bodies. 
In  our  own  country  we  could  not  possibly  do  without 
clothing ;  for  if  we  wore  none  we  should  perish  in  the 
cold  winter.  It  is  the  same  in  all  the  great  countries 
as  in  our  own  ;  for  all  great  nations  live  in  the  Tem])er- 
ate  zones,  and  you  know  that  in  these  zones  the  winters 
are  very  cold.  In  the  far  northern  regions,  and  espe- 
cially in  the  Arctic  zones,  the  very  warmest  clothing 
such  as  the  skins  of  animals,  must  be  used.  These  are 
worn  by  the  Esquimaux  of  North  America  and  by  the 
Laplanders  of  Europe. 

4.  Food  and  clothing  are  two  wants  of  mankind. 
A  third  want  is  that  of  shelter.  Even  the  lower  ani- 
mals construct  for  themselves  some  kind  of  shelter. 
You  have  only  to  think  of  the  house  of  the  beaver,  the 
den  of  tlie  wolf,  the  cell  of  the  bee,  the  nest  of  the 
liird.  Probably  men  in  very  early  times  lived  in  caves 
no  better  than  bears'  dens  ;  and,  even  yet,  the  huts  and 
dwellings  of  many  savage  tribes  are  very  rude.  On 
})age  1 22  you  may  see  a  picture  of  an  African  liut  ; 
on  page  92,  a  picture  of  an  Indian  wigwam  ;  on  page 
44,  a  picture  of  an  Esquimaux  snow-house ;  and  on 
page  95,  a  picture  of  a  dwelling  on  stilts,  such  as 
we  find  in  some  parts  of  South  America. 

5.  In  countries  which  have  made  much  progress  men 
have  learned  to  build  large,  durable,  and  beautiful 
houses.  The  Egyptians  and  the  Greeks  could  build 
splendid  temples,  but  the  dwellings  of  the  people  were 
generally  small  and  mean-looking.  The  knights  an<l 
barons  of  Europe  in  the  Middle  Ages  had  very  strong 
castles,  the  mere  ruins  of  which  strike  a  visitor  with 
wonder  and  awe  ;  yet  the  great  mass  of  the  people 
lived  in  miserable  hovels,  and  even  poor  people  have 
now  more  comforts  in  their  houses  than  gentlemen  had 
then  in  theirs.  Have  yon  ever  seen  a  New  England 
village,  with  its  pretty  white-painted  cottages  nestling 
among  the  trees  ]     It  is  a  very  handsome  sight. 


III. —  OUR  WANTS:  FOOD. 

1.  What  is  the  first,  need  or  want  of  man  f 
The  need  or  want  of  food. 

2.  Name  sometliing  that  we  eat.  Mutton.  Name 
another  article  of  food.  Bread.  Name  six  other  ar- 
ticles of  food.  Write  on  your  slates  this  bill  of  fear 
of  a  Christmas  dinner. 


Bill  of  Fare.. 


Turkey  —  Ci-anl)erries. 
Potatoes —  Celery. 
Salt —  Pepper. 
Mince  Pie  —  Almonds. 
Piaisins —  CoRee. 


3.  How  many  diiferent  articles  of  food  are  named  1 
Rule  your  slates  in  three  columns  and  write  the  arti- 
cles of  animal  food  in  the  first,  the  articles  of  veffe- 
tahle  food  in  the  second,  and  the  article  of  mineral 
food  in  the  third  column. 

4.  ffoto  many  kinds  of  food  are  nsed  bi/  man  ? 
Three  kinds  of   food  are  used  by  man,  —  animal 

food,  vegetable  food,  and  mineral  food. 

5.  Is  the  same  food  eaten  in  all  climates  ? 

In  hot  climates  the  food  used  is  chiefly  vegetable, 
in  cold  climates  chiefly  animal,  and  in  temperate 
climates  both  animal  and  vegetable. 

513^  The  teacher  should  write  this  table  oa  the  blackboard,  and 
make  the  topics  the  basis  of  several  conversational  lessons. 

TABLE   OF  FOOD. 

j  Domestic. ..Meats. 
t  Wild Game.. 


rj-    ,        I  Domestic. .Poultry. 

ends..  J  •' 

1  Wild Game.. 


Forest. 
Prairie. 


Fishes. 


Stalks  and  Leaves, . 


Forest. 
Prairie. 

Lakes. 

Seas. 

Rivers. 

f  Potatoes. 
■      Beets. 
I  Onion.s,  etc. 

[  Sugar. 
I  Tea. 
I  Lettuce. 
I  Cabbage,  etc. 

f  Wheat. 

I.  Corn,  etc. 

I  Apples. 
Peaches, 
Nuts, 
Melons,  etc. 

Note.  —  Water  and  Salt  are  called  inorganic  substances. 


IV. —  OUR  WANTS:  CLOTHING. 

1.    What  is  a  second  need  or  want  of  man? 
The  need  of  clothing. 

E^"  The  following  table  may  be  made  the  basis  of  a  conversational 
Bsson. 

TABLE  OF  CLOTHING-SLATEKIAL. 


Animal. 


Vegetable  . 


I  AVool,  Fur,  Ltatlier. 

I  Silk,  Horns,  Ivory. 

f  Cotton, 

J  Linen. 

1  Caoutchouc. 

i  Gutta-percha. 

firon. 
Brass  (Copper  and  Zinc). 
Steel. 


WANTS   AND    OCCUPATIONS   OF   MAN. 


31 


2.  What  is  wool'?  What  articles  of  dress  are  made 
from  woolen  goods?  [Let  the  teacher  give  some  ac- 
count of  the  processes  of  shearing,  carding,  spinning, 
and  weaving.] 

3.  Is  fur  much  worn  in  this  part  of  the  country? 
What  animals  valuable  for  fur  can  you  name?  In 
what  countries  do  you  suppose  people  dress  in  fur 
garments  ?  [The  teacher  may  give  some  account  of 
the  fur-bearing  animals,  —  where  found,  mode  of  cap- 
ture, etc.] 

4.  What  is  leather?  How  many  kinds  of  leather 
can  you  name?  What  kinds  are  our  boots  and  slioes 
made  of?  Did  you  ever  see  a  tannery?  What  do 
they  do  there? 

5.  What  articles  of  ladies'  dress  are  made  of  silk  ? 
What  articles  of  men's  wear  are  made  of  silk  ?  Give 
one  reason  why  silk  is  such  a  good  material  for  dress. 
Give  a  second  reason.  Give  a  third.  [The  teacher 
should  tell  the  pupils  about  the  silk-worm,  and  the 
process  of  obtaining  silk  from  the  cocoons.] 

6.  You  have  heard  store-keepers  speak  of  calicoes 
and  2^>'ints :  what  article  are  these  made  of  ?  Is  cot- 
ton an  animal  substance  or  a  vegetable  substance? 
Does  cotton  grow  in  this  part  of  our  country?  In 
what  part  of  the  United  States  does  it  grow?  [Let 
the  teacher  briefly  describe  the  process  of  carding, 
spinning,  and  weaving.] 

7.  Are  linen  goods  as  mucli  used  as  cotton  goods  ? 
What  plant  is  linen  made  from?  Is  flax  grown  in 
your  State?  Have  you  ever  seen  it  growing?  [The 
teacher  may  give  some  information  regarding  flax  and 
its  manufacture  into  linen.] 


v.  — OUR  WANTS:  SHELTER. 

1.  W/iat  is  a  third  ivaiit  which  we  feel  and  which  must 
be  supplied  ? 

The  want  of  shelter. 

2.  Do  you  know  of  any  large  building  that  is  now 
going  up  in  this  place  ?  Wliat  is  used  in  its  construc- 
tion ?  Name  as  many  things  as  you  can  think  of  that 
are  used. 

[Tlie  teaclier  may  give  pupils  the  term  b^iildmg-iimtcrial 
slie  will  also  do  well  to  put  tlie  following  table  on  the  black 
board,  and  treat  the  topic  orally.] 

TABLE  OF  BUILDING-MATEKIAIS. 

f  Wood. 
Vegetable J  q„i^„„  _.^„^i  Li„e„  oioths. 

I  Caoutchouc  and  Gutta-percha. 

Mineral 1  ^"'^'^'  Stone,  Iron. 

\  Lead,  Glass,  Paints. 

Animal    ■ Skins. 


VI. 


OCCUPATIONS   OF  MEN. 
[For  Reading. J 

1.  If  we  were  like  some  savage  tribes,  we  should 
have  very  few  wants,  and  these  would  be  easily  sup- 
plied. Suppose  wo  lived  in  a  country  wher',  bread- 
fruit or  banana-trees  grow  in  plenty  and  without 
any  care  from  man,  we  should  only  have  to  pluck  the 
fruit  to  get  what  food  we  wanted.  In  such  a  coun- 
try the  people  can  go  almost  without  clothing,  and 
ivs  for  shelter  they  can  build  huts  of  as  simple  a  kind 
as  the  nest  a  bird  builds  of  straw  and  twigs. 

2.  In  a  land  such  as  this  a  family  might  live  with- 
out needing  the  help  of  any  other  persons.  Every 
man  would  be  his  own  farmer,  mechanic,  and  builder. 

3.  But  in  our  country,  and  in  all  other  countries 
where  the  people  are  powerful  and  rich  and  wise  and 
free,  it  is  very  diiferent.  For  first,  all  great  nations 
live  in  climates  wliere  nature  does  not  furnish  ready 
to  hand  what  we  need  for  our  food,  clothing,  and 
slielter.  We  have  to  exert  ourselves  to  procure  what 
will  supply  our  wants.  And,  secondly,  in  the  strong- 
est and  most  intelligent  nations  the  wants  of  people 
are  much  more  numerous  than  the  wants  of  .savages. 
Just  think  how  many  things  we  require  in  order,  in 
the  first  place  to  Hue,  and  in  the  second  place  to  live 
comfortably  ! 

4.  In  a  civilized  country  a  man  instead  of  being 
liis  own  farmer  and  mechanic  and  builder,  as  in  sav- 
age countries,  does  only  one  thing.  Some  persons 
raise  grain  and  vegetables  and  fruit  and  cattle.  AU 
they  raise  over  and  above  what  they  want  for  them- 
selves they  sell.  Other  persons  are  busy  making  cot- 
ton and  woolen  cloths,  boots  and  shoes,  f;irming  tools, 
and  many  other  things.  The  farmer  needs  these  things, 
and  those  who  make  them  need  the  farmer's  grain  and 
beef  and  pork.  We  shall  learn  about  the  various  oc- 
cupations in  the  next  lesson. 


VIL- KINDS  OF  OCCUPATIONS. 

1,  ^Yhat  is  agriculture  ?  i   "  "^^---^  _—  '-;?^ 
Agriculture  is  the  oc-  .         -;.*■:  ^^ 

cupation  of  people  that 
raise  grain,  vegetables, 
fruit,  or  other  crops. 

Note.  —  All  farmers  are 
ngricuUurisls.  The  raisini; 
of  horses,  cattle,  or  sheep  is 
generally  a  part  of  agricul- 
ture, and  is  called  grazing. 

2.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  farm  ?  Do  you  know  any 
farmers?  Are  there  any  agriculturists  near  the  place 
where  you  live? 


32 


PKIMAEY    LESSONS. 


Manufactories 


A  machine  shop  ? 
A  foundry  ? 
A  blacksmith's  shop  i 
A  furniture  factory  ? 


3.  What  is  viantifac 
turinrf  i 

Manufacturing  is  th 
occupation  of  peopl 
Tvho  make  articles  o 
use  or  ornament,  eithe 
by  hand  or  by  the  aic 
of  machinery. 

Note.  —  Machinery  i 
generally  moved  by  wind 
water,  or  steam. 

4.  Are  there  any  manufactories  in  or  near  tlie  place 
where  you  live  ?  What  articles  are  made  tlierc  1  Have 
you  ever  seen  any  of  the  following 

A  cotton  factory  ?    A  shoe  sliop  ? 

A  woolen  mill  ? 

A  flour  mill  ? 
I  A  saw  mill  ? 
[  A  tannery  ? 

5.  What  is  commerce  ? 
Commerce  is  the  oc 

cupation  of  people  whr 
exchange  the  produc 
of  one  country,  or  pai 
of  a  country,  with  those 
of  another. 

6.  W/iat  ((re  exports  i 
Exports  are  the  pro 

ducts    sent    out    of    a 
country. 

7.  What  are  imports  ^ 

Imports  are  the  products  brought  into  a  country. 

8.  Are  there  any  miyohants  or  traders  in  your  place  '>. 
What  articles  do  they  buy  or  sell  1 

9.  )Yhat  is  mining  ? 
Mining  is  the  occu 

pation  of  people  who 
obtain  from  the  eartl 
coal,  iron,  gold,  or  oth 
er  minerals  or  metals. 

10.  Have  you  eve 
seen  a  stone-quarry 
Have  you  ever  seen  au\ 
of  the  following  kinds  ol 

A  coal  mine  ?  A  gold  mine  ? 

An  iron  mine  ?         A  silver  mine  ? 
A  lead  mine  ?  A  copper  mine  ? 

11.  What  other  occupations  can  yon.  name  ? 

Many  people  are  engaged  in  other  pursuits,  such 
as  lumbering,  fishing,  building  railroads,  quarrying 
stone,  teaching,  practicing  law  and  medicine. 

12.  Do  you  know  of  any  persons  who  are  lawyers'? 
—  doctors  ?  —  ministers  ?  —  teachers  ?  —  musicians  ?  — 
painters  f  —  editors  ?  Is  either  of  your  parents,  or  are 
any  of  your  brothers  or  sisters,  or  relatives,  engaged 
in  any  of  the  occupations  named  in  this  lesson  1 


VIII.— DIVISIONS  OF  COUNTRIES. 

1.  [7^0/-  Ciji/  Classes.^     What  is  the   name  of  this 
iti/ ?     Do   you    know   what   county  it   is   in?     What 

"^/'I'c  is  this  county  in  1 

2.  [For  Country  Classes.'\  What  is  the  name  of 
this  town  [or  township']  1  Do  you  know  what  county 
it  is  in  1     What  State  is  this  county  in  1 

[It  will  be  well  for  the  teacher  here  to  draw  out  the  distinc- 
tion between  divisions  like  hills,  valleys,  lakes,  and  rivers,  on 
the  one  hand,  and  states,  countries,  cities,  etc.,  on  the  other. 
Did  man  make  the  first?  No,  they  are  there  naturally:  then 
we  may  call  them  natural  divisions.  But  do  you  think  a  coun- 
try or  a  state  is  a  division  made  by  nature  ?  Istt  not  a  division 
made  for  their  own  convenience  by  the  people  living  there  ? 
You  are  right ;  these  divisions  are  nuide  by  man,  and  they  are 
called  political  divisions.] 

3.  Can  you  think  of  any  reason  why  it  is  conven- 
ient to  divide  up  a  State  into  counties  and  towns,  and 
to  have  names  for  each  division '!  You  may  have  a 
relative  living  in  some  distant  part  of  this  State  :  how 
could  you  tell  another  person  where  that  relative 
lived,  iiidess  you  could  name  the  city  or  town  or 
county  1 

4.  Wliat  are  the  principal  political  dirixio/is  ? 

The  principal  political  divisions  are  Towns  (or 
Townships),  Cities,  Counties,  States,  and  Countries 
or  Nations. 

5.  In  what  country  do  we  live  1  Look  on  the  map 
of  North  America  (page  35),  and  tell  what  country 
is  north  of  the  United  States.  Tell  what  country  is 
south  of  the  United  States. 

[Here  let  the  teacher  e.xplain  that  in  some  countries  the  peo- 
pli-  choose  persons  to  make  laws,  and  other  persons  to  do  the 
\  irious  kinds  of  public  business.  This  is  the  case  in  the  United 
Mates.  We  say  that  a  country  in  which  this  is  done  is  a  Ee- 
I  ublican  government,  or  a  Republic.^ 

6.  What  is  a  Bepiihlic  ? 

A  Republic  is  a  country  in  which  the  people 
choose  persons  to  make  their  laws  and  carry  them 
out. 

7.  What  is  the  chief  officer  who  carries  out  the  laws 
called  ? 

The  chief  ofBcer  is  called  the  President. 

[Continue  the  oral  development  somewhat  as  follows  :  In 
some  countries  the  people  are  governed  by  a  king  or  queen. 
The  king  or  queen  is  not  chosen  by  the  people,  as  the  President 
in  our  country  is,  but  rules  by  right  of  birth.  Sometimes  the 
king  is  called  an  Emperor,  and  in  this  case  the  country,  instead 
of  being  called  a  kingdom,  is  called  an  Empire.  This  kind  of 
government  is  called  a  Monarchy.  England  is  a  monarchy  ; 
the  Queen  of  England  is  Victoria.  Germany  is  an  Empiie  ; 
the  Emperor  is  named  William  I.] 

8.  Wliat  is  a.  Kingdom  ? 

A  Kingdom  is  a  country  in  w^hich  the  people  are 
under  a  king. 


KEVIEW    STUDY    OF   THE   HEMISPHKKE    MAP«. 


33 


^5  -5  -i 


i:   s 


4;  ■-  -'  ■*' 
'■o  ~  g  ^  § 


5    t    ?   c: 
■§  -S  -5  «,. 


~  '^  "s  ^  ?=^ 

?  -.  ■<  -*^  sC; 


5'< 

■?  V  =-■ 


^t1 


^  c;  ?  8 
:iv  ?  -  -~ 


^ "-  •'■-  '^ .  •». 

=-  ^  ■$  ^.  "^v  -^ 

v  *  '^  •-    '^    '^ 

^  ^-  -^  jt    b.^ 


"^-S  '^  ^  ■?: 


M  =:   ^^ 


1.    ll-'hat  two  Grand  Di 
three  Oiand  Divisions  of 
island  in  the  Eastern  Hem 
5.    Wliat  ocean  between  A 
Grand  Diiiision  ' 

I .    Which  0/  the  two  ( 
Northern  Hemisphere  ? 
or  in  the  Soutlicrn   Hem 
Old  World  is  eirtirelv  in 
in  the  Southern  Heniisph 
in  the  Southern  Ihmisplu 

NOKTH   AMEIilCA. 


PART  II. -DESCRIPTION   OF   COUNTRIES. 


NORTH    AMERICA. 


Tcj  riiii  Teachek.  —  The  attention  of  tlie  teaehev  is  called  to  tlie  fact  that  in  the  descriptive  text  of  countries  each  lesson  is 
divided  into  two  parts,  — one  part  for  reading,  and  the  other  for  recitation.  It  is  earnestly  recommended  that  the  reading  lessons 
be  read  aloud  in  the  class.  They  may  form  the  basis  of  occasional  conversational  exercises,  and  onxie  a  week  the  pupils  may  Ije 
'  required  to  take  niie  of  the  more  interestiiii;  les3on^s,  and  witli  closed  books  w  rite  out  an  abstract  from  memory. 


NATURE    OF    NORTH    AMERICA. 
LESSON    I 

EARLY     HISTORY. 

[For   Reading. I 

I.  Situation. 

1.  W\'  are  iiuw  to  Inarn  about  the  ditfereiit  coun- 
tries iu  the  worid,  and  we  shall  begin  with  the  part 
in  which  i.s  our  own  cuiintiy,  —  tlte  United  States. 
Tlds  part  of  tlie  globe  is  called  Xorth  America.  It  i.s 
joined  to  Soiitli  America  by  a  narrow  neck  of  land,  and 
the  whole  is  named  America,  m-  tlie  Xew  "Wurld. 

II.  History. 

2.  It  might  piu 
zle  one  to  think 
wh}'  it  is  called  tin 
New  World,  unle.^ 
lie  were  told  th 
only  four  centuii. 
ago  tlie  people  of  Eu 
rope  did  not  know 
that  there  was  a  con 
tinent  beyond  tin 
Atlantic.  Youha\i 
all  road  tlie  story  ot 
Columbus.  He  be 
lieved  the  earth  to 
be  round,  and  In 
thought  that  b\ 
sailing  ivestwar 
from  Europe  ovci 
the  Atlantic  Ueean 
he  would  come  1 1 
the  East  Indies.  He 
was  quite  right  in 
this ;  but  wdiat  he 
did  not  guess  was  that  a  great  continent  was  just  in 
the  way.  So  Columbus  never  reached  the  East  Indies, 
but  he  discovered  America,  and  the  islands  which  he 
first  found  have  ever  since  been  called  the  West  Indies. 

3.  We  cannot  help  thinking  that  the  New  W^orld 
should  have  been  called  after  Columbus.  But  nobody 
gave  much  thought  to  the  matter  at  the  time,  and  it  was 


by  a  kind  of  accident  that  it  afterwards  took  the  name 
of  America.  This  word  is  deri\-ed  from  Americus  Ves- 
piicius,  the  name  of  an  Italian  who,  a  few  years  after 
the  voyage  of  Columbus,  visited  the  coast  of  South 
America  and   wrote  a  descrijitiou  of  it. 

III.   Settlements. 

i.  When  it  w^as  told  in  Europe  that  there  was  a 
Xew  World  beyond  the  Atlantic,  many  persons  has- 
tened over  to  see  this  wonderful  country.  The  Span- 
iards were  the  leaders  in  this.  They  said  that  all  the 
i.i-wlv  fmnnl  lands  lielunged  to  them,  because  Columbus 
had  taken  possession 
( if  the  islands  for  the 
king  and  queen  of 
Siiain.  In  a  short 
time  the  vSpaniards 
had  settled  on  all 
I  he  large  islands, 
and  they  then  began 
[>>  explore  the  niain- 
lai'onnd  the  Gulf 
ijf  ]\Iexico.  At  first 
all  the  people  they 
met  were  like  the 
natives  of  the  isl- 
a  n  d  s ,  —  d  a  r  k  - 
skinned  savages. 
But  when  they  land- 
'■i\  on  the  coast  of 
the  country  wliieh 
\vr  call  Mexico,  they 
und  that  the  land 
w  as  inhabited  by  a 
civilized  race,  and 
learnecl  that  in  the 
interior  were  large 
cities  and  great  store  of  gold  and  silver.  So  a  daring  sol- 
dier named  Cortez  fitted  out  a  small  army  wdiich  con- 
quered the  country.  In  this  way  the  Spaniards  went  on 
seizing  and  settling  in  different  parts,  till  they  had  all 
the  southern  se«ion  of  North  America,  all  the  West 
Indies,  and  some  rich  countries  in  South  America. 
5.   For  about  a  hundred  years  the  Spaniards  were 


"'■  ^.'  "I  V>,  V-:.-..  9  i*      '"*■■%■•  *\\.  ■ 


<.  Pt.Con^epC  ""iH-. 


NOETH 
1  AMERICA. 


1  Inch  -  JOO  Miles 


4'3  Longitude  West 


^■Gracj.  J  oio^ 


^-  i 

from  'W^shtDKtqn  IjS 


Oopyiiaht.lRTB.by  Ivison  Blakeiii.in.Tiis  lur"*  Co.  New  York 


36 


NOETH   AMERICA. 


almost  the  only  white  people  in  America.  Then  several 
other  nations  of  Europe  began  to  think  it  was  not  right 
that  the  Spaniards  should  own  all  the  New  World. 
The  English  were  by  this  time  a  great  seafaring  people, 
and  from  time  to  time  English  ships  crossed  the  Atlan- 
tic and  tried  to  plant  colonies  on  the  coast  of  America 
to  the  north  of  where  the  Spaniards  had  settled.  These 
attempts  and  various  others  all  failed,  till  finally,  about 
the  beginning  of  the  17th  century,  a  party  of  English- 
men formed  a  settlement  in  Virginia,  at  a  place  which 
they  named  Jamestown  in  honor  of  their  king,  James  I. 
This  colony  took  root  and  flourished. 

6.  About  the  same  time  Henry  Hudson,  an  English 
sea-captain,  who  was  in  the  service  of  a  great  trading 
company  in  Holland,  discovered  the  noble  river  which 
in  his  honor  we  call  the  Hudson.  The  Hollanders,  or 
Dutch,  immediately  claimed  the  region  round  about  as 
theirs ;  so  they  sent  out  people  and  founded  New 
Amsterdam,  which  afterwards  became  New  York,  as 
well  as  other  places  along  the  river  and  on  the  coast. 
Soon  afterwards  (in  1620)  the  Pilgrim  Fathers,  about 
whom  you  have  read,  landed  still  farther  to  the  north, 
and  began  the  settlements  which  were  afterwards  called 
New  England. 

7.  The  French  were  not  behind  the  English  in  claim- 
ing their  share  of  the  New  World.  The  French  navi- 
gators explored  the  country  to  the  north  of  New  Eng- 
land, and  about  the  time  when  tlie  English  landed  in 
Virginia  a  French  settlement  was  made  on  the  St. 
Lawrence  Eiver  at  Quebec.  In  course  of  time  the 
French  made  other  colonies  up  the  St.  Lawrence  and 
along  the  Great  Lakes,  and  carried  their  trading  and  mis- 
sionary posts  into  the  great  Valley  of  the  Mississippi. 

8.  We  thus  see  that  by  the  early  part  of  the  17th 
century  four  European  nations  had  colonies  in  Nortli 
America,  —  the  Spanish,  English,  Dutch,  and  French. 
But  in  the  next  century  the  Dutch  were  forced  to  give 
up  their  part  of  the  country  to  the  English,  and  a  few 
years  before  the  breaking  out  of  the  American  Revolu- 
tion the  French  also  were  conquered  in  a  long  war,  and 
compelled  to  yield  to  the  English. 

9.  Our  own  country  in  the  early  days  consisted  of 
thirteen  English  colonies.  They  occupied  the  Atlantic 
coast  from  Maine  to  Georgia.  In  1776  the.se  colonies 
declared  their  independence,  and  they  won  it  after  a 
long  war.  They  became  the  United  States  of  America. 
But  the  English  people  who  lived  alijng  the  St.  Law- 
rence did  not  separate  from  England,  and  so  that  part 
of  North  America  and  most  of  the  great  region  stretch- 
ing to  the  Arctic  Ocean  is  still  under  British  rule, 
and  is  called  British  America,  or  Canada. 

1 0.  Now  it  is  very  easy  by  lookiiig  at  the  map  to 
see  who  are  the  owners  of  North  America.  Our  coun- 
try occupies  tlie  middle  part.  The  British  hold  all 
that  lies  to  the  north  of  us,  except  Alaska.  Our 
southern  neighbors  are  the  Mexicans  and  the  people 
of  Central  America  and  the  West  Indies. 


IFor  Recitation.! 

1.  Of  what  does  North  Ammca  form  a  part  ? 

It  forms  the  northern  Grand  Division  of  the 
We.stern  Continent. 

Map,  —  {See  page  35.)  1.  What  Grand  Division  forms  the  southern 
part  of  the  Western  Continent?  2.  What  is  an  isthmus?  3.  What 
isthmus  joins  North  and  South  America  ? 

2.  Bii  vham  was  A7)u:rii:a  discovered  and  ivhen  ? 
America  was  discovered  by  Christopher  Colum- 
bus in  1492. 

3.  If'hat  part  did  he  first  discover  ? 

The  islands  between  North  and  South  America, 
called  the  West  Indies. 

4.  Uliat  white  people  were  the  first  to  settle  in  America? 
The  Spaniards  were  the  first  white  settlers. 

5.  In  what  parts  did  they  settle  ? 

The  Spaniards  settled  in  the  West  Indies,  in 
the  southern  part  of  North  America,  and  in  South 
America. 

6.  IVhatpart  of  North  America  vxis  settled  by  the  English? 
The  shore  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean  north  of  where 

the  Spaniards  settled. 

7.  What  were  the  first  English  settlements  ? 
Jamestown,  Virginia,   founded    in    1607 ;    and 

Plymouth,  Massachusetts,  founded  in  1620. 

8.  IVTiat  other  people  made  settlements  in  early  times  ? 
The  Dutch  and  the  French. 

9.  lVh.at  part  of  North  America  does  our  country  occupy  ? 
The  United  States  occupies  the  middle  part  of 

North  America. 

.|y|2ip,  —{See  page  35.)  1.  What  country  north  of  the  United  States? 
2.  What  country  south  of  the  United  States?  3.  Is  Central  America 
north  of  Mexico  or  south  of  it  ?    4.  Where  are  the  West  nidies  ? 


LESSON    II. 

SIZE,    MOUNTAINS,    AND    PLAINS. 

[For  Reading.: 

I.   Size  of  Nortli  America. 

1.  Let  us  first  try  to  form  an  idea  of  the  size  of 
North  America.  If  a  person  starts  from  New  York 
City,  on  the  Atlantic  coast,  and  travels  westward  in 
the  railroad-cars,  night  and  day,  it  will  take  him  seven 
days  and  nights  to  reach  San  Francisco,  on  the  Pacific 
coast.  He  will  then  have  traveled  across  our  country 
from  east  to  west,  and  will  have  made  a  journey  of 
more  than  3,000  miles.  Now  what  is  the  distance 
in  the  other  direction,  or  from  north  to  south  1  There 
is  a  great  river  which  flows  from  north  to  south 
through  nearly  the  whole  of  the  United  States.  This 
is  the  Mississippi.  It  rises  in  a  beautiful  lake  called 
Itasca  Lake,  far  up  in  the  most  northern  part  of  our 
country.  If  you  were  to  drop  a  chip  in  here,  it  would 
float  a  distance  of  2,800  nules  before  reaching  the 
mouth  of  the  Mississippi. 


GENERAL   DESCRIPTIOiSr   OF   NORTH  AMERICA. 


37 


2.  This  shows  that  our  own  country  is  very  large, 
and  yet  it  is  only  a  part  of  North  America.  We 
mif'ht  take  the  map  of  the  United  States  and  place  it 
over  the  region  of  North  America  lying  north  of  the 
United  States,  and  it  would  no  more  than  cover  it.  The 
part  of  North  America  which  is  soutli  of  the  United 
States  is  narrower.  Still,  tliis  part  is  about  one  third 
as  large  as  the  United  States.  Thus  we  see  that  North 
America  is  a  very  extensive  region. 

3.  The  waters  of  the  ocean  surround  North  America. 
If  we  were  to  sail  to  the  eastward  we  should  be  sailing 
on  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and  should  by  going  far  enough 
reach  Europe  or  Africa.  On  the  other  hand,  if  we 
were  to  sail  from  the  western  coast  of  America  we 
should  cross  the  Pacific  Ocean,  which  would  bring  us 
to  China  and  Japan  and  other  eastern  parts  of  Asia. 

II.   Great  Mountains  of  North  America. 

4.  The  greatest  mountains  of  North  America  are  in 
the  western  part.  The  greatest  of  all  are  called  the 
Rocky  Mountain  System.  These  mountains  are  called 
a  si/stem,  because  they  are  not  one  long,  narrow,  un- 
broken row,  but  consist  of  a  great  number  of  ridges  of 
various  heights.  These  often  cross  one  another,  and 
form  a  wide-spreading  higliland  several  hundred  miles 
in  breadth.  From  north  to  south  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains stretch  the  whole  length  of  North  America,  over 
four  thousand  miles. 

5.  In  the  eastern  part  of  North  America  is  another 
series  of  mountain  chains  and  ridges.  Perhaps  you 
have  heard  of  the  Green  or  the  White  Mountains,  of 
the  Catskills,  the  Blue  Ridge,  or  the  Cumberland 
Mountains.  Now,  these  mountains  aU  belong  to  this 
mountain  system  which  is  called  the  Alleghany,  or 
the  Alleghanies.  The  Alleghanies  are  much  shorter 
tlian  the  Rocky  Mountains,  because  the  eastern  coast 
of  North  America  is  very  much  shorter  than  the  west- 
ern coast.  They  are  also  much  lower,  the  highest 
peak  of  the  Alleghanies  being  only  one  third  as  high 
as  some  of  the  lofty  summits  of  the  Rocky  Mountain'^, 

III.   Central  Plain. 

6.  The  part  of  North  America  between  the  Rocky 
Mountains  on  the  west  and  the  Alleghanies  on  the 
east  consists  of  plains  and  valleys,  which  extend  from 
the  frozen  coast  of  the  Arctic  Ocean  to  the  warm 
waters  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico.  The  southern  part  of 
this  great  plain  is  called  the  Valley  of  the  Mississippi. 
This  takes  in  not  only  the  region  along  the  Mississippi 
River,  but  the  vast  country  through  which  aU  the 
many  branch-streams  of  the  Mississippi  flow.  It  is 
the  second  largest  river-valley  in  the  world,  besides 
being  one  of  the  most  fertile,  and  many  great  States  of 
our  Union  are  here. 

7.  The  northern  part  of  the  Central  Plain  is  called 
the  Arctic  Plain.  This  borders  upon  Hudson  Bay  and 
the  Arctic  Ocean,  and  is  quite  unlike  the  Mississippi 
Valley,  for  it  is  a  cold,  barren, -desolate  region. 


[For    Recitation. 3 

1.  JVhat  is  the  size  of  North  Ainerica  ? 

North  America  extends  fi-om  north  to  south 
about  4,500  miles,  and  from  east  to  west  about 
8,000  miles. 

|y|3p,  —  (Sfe  page  3j)  1.  What  ocean  east  of  North  America? 
2.  What  ocean  west?  3.  What  waters  on  the  north?  4.  What 
gulf  on  the  south?  5.  There  is  a  very  large  bay  in  the  northern 
part  :  what  is  its  name  ?  6.  What  gulf  at  tlie  mouth  of  the  St.  Law- 
rence River?    7.  There  is  a  gulf  west  of  Mexico  :  what  is  its  name? 

2.  ll'hat  is  the  greatest  mountain  system  in  North  America  ? 
The  Eocky  Mountains  are  the  greatest. 

3.  What  mountains  are  in  the  eastern  part  ? 
The  Alleghanies  are  in  the  eastern  part. 

nnap.  — (S«  page  S'>)  1.  In  what  direction  do  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains extend  ?    2.  In  what  direction  do  the  AUeghanies  extend? 

4.  IFhat  is  the  level  country  between  the  two  great  moun- 
tain-walls called  ? 

The  Central  Plain. 

5.  How  is  the  Central  Plain  divided  ? 

It  is  divided  into  the  Mississippi  Valley  in  the 
south,  and  the  Arctic  Plain  in  the  north. 


LESSON    III. 
RIVERS,    LAKES,    AND    CLIMATE. 

[For    Reading.] 
I.  Great  Rivers  of  North  America. 

1.  There  are  many  very  large  rivers  in  North 
America.  The  three  largest  are  the  Mississippi,  the 
Mackenzie,  and  the  St.  Law'rence. 

2.  The  Mississippi,  meaning  in  the  Indian  lan- 
guage the  "  Father  of  Waters,"  is  the  longest  river  on 
the  globe.  We  have  seen  that  a  chip  thrown  into  the 
source  of  the  river  in  Itasca  Lake  would  float  a  distance 


Itasca  Lake,  —  Source  of  the  MlBriiwippL 


New  Orleans,  near  Uouth  of  tbe  MississippL 

of  2,800  miles  before  it  reached  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 
But  if  you  look  at  the  map  you  will  see  that,  while 
this  is  the  length  of  the  river  which  has  the  name  Ivlis- 
sissippi  throughout  its  whole  course,  yet  the  mighty 
stream  is  really  much  longer.  If  we  should  embark 
on  a  steamboat  at  New  Orleans,  which  is  a  large  city 
near  the  mouth  of  the  Mississippi,  we  might  saU  for 


38 


jSrOETH   AMEEICA. 


several  tlays  up  stream,  and  after  going  about  1,200 
miles,  to  a  little  above  the  city  of  St.  Louis,  we  should 
find  the  Missouri  mingling  its  muddy  waters  with  the 
clear  Mississippi.  Conthiuing  up  the  Missouri,  we 
might  steam  on  and  ou  in  a  northwest  direction  for 
2,500  miles  more,  or  about  as  far  as  the  sea-voyage 
from  the  United  States  to  Eui'ope,  tiU  we  reached 
the  very  heart  of  the  liocky  Mountains.  Here  is 
the  true  source  of  the  Mississippi ;  and,  measuring 
from  here  to  its  mouth,  the  Father  of  Waters  is  more 
than  4,000  miles  in  length. 

3.  The  St.  Lawrence  Hows  tlirough  the  country 
that  borders  on  the  nortliern  part  of  the  United  States. 
The  weather  here  is  cold  in  winter,  and  the  river  is 
frozen  for  about  five  months  every  year ;  stQl  it  is  a 
very  useful  river,  because  in  summer  hun<lreds  of  ships 
and  steamers  sail  upon  it. 

4.  It  must  not  be  supposed  because  a  river  is  very 
long  that  it  is  therefore  very  useful.  The  i\Iackenzie 
Eiver  is  2,.500  miles  long,  but  it  flows  through  the 
frozen  belt  of  North  ibnerica  into  the  Arctic  Ocean, 
and  hence  is  of  little  use  to  any  one.  Now  almost 
any  pupil  knows  of  some  river  near  where  he  lives 
which  may  not  be  one  tenth  part  as  long  as  the 
Mackenzie,  and  yet  wliich  is  of  very  great  use,  either 
because  it  makes  things  grow,  or  because  vessels  sail 
on  it,  or  because  it  is  used  to  move  the  machinery  of 
mills. 

II.   Great  Lakes  of  North  America. 

5.  In  no  other  part  of  the  globe  are  the  fresh-water 
lakes  found  upon  so  grand  a  scale  as  in  the  northern 
half  of  Xorth  America.  Between  Canada  and  the 
northern  part  of  the  United  States  are  five  of  these 
vast  sheets  of  water,  which  are  usually  called  the  Great 
Lakes.  They  are,  in  fact,  fresh-water  seas,  and  as  they 
border  upon  a  rich  and  thickly  settled  part  of  our  coun- 
try they  are  of  great  importance  to  trade.  Hundreds 
of  steamers  and  other  lake  craft  are  constantly  pljTng 
updU  their  waters. 


The  Great  Lakes  of  North  America. 


C.  Tlie  largest  of  these  Great  Lakes  is  Lake  Superior. 
Into  this  lake  might  be  put  the  whole  of  Ireland, 
or  the  States  of  ilassachusetts,  Vermont,  New 
Hampshire,  Connecticut,  and  Ehode  Island.  Lake 
Huron    is  joined  to    Lake   Su])erior,    Lakes  ]\Iichigan 


and  Erie  to  Lake  Huron,  and  Lake  Ontario  to  Lake 
Erie.  Each  lake  eastward  from  Lake  Superior  is  in 
turn  lower  than  the  other,  so  that  these  Great  Lakes  lie 
on  a  series  of  terraces,  like  the  steps  in  a  stair.  The 
terrace  on  which  Lake  Erie  lies  is  more  than  300  feet 
higher  than  that  on  wliich  Lake  Ontario  lies.  The 
water  of  Lake  Erie  is  carried  into  Lake  Ontario  bj'  the 
Niagara  Eiver,  in  the  course  of  which,  midway  between 
the  two  lakes,  are  the  famous  Falls  of  Niagara,  which, 
though  not  the  loftiest,  are  the  greatest  cataract  on  the 
face  of  the  earth.  You  wiU  see  a  fine  picture  of  the 
great  Falls  on  page  34. 

III.  Climate. 

7.  There  are  great  differences  of  climate  in  the  difi'er- 
ent  parts  of  North  America.  In  our  country,  which 
occupies  the  middle  part,  we  have  generally  hot  sum- 
mers and  cold  winters.  But  in  the  parts  south  of  our 
country,  and  even  in  the  most  southern  part  of  our  own 
country,  the  weather  is  all  the  year  round  nearly  as  hot 
as  our  hottest  summer  days.  And  in  the  far  northern 
parts  the  weather  is  nearly  the  whole  time  colder  than 
our  coldest  winter  days.  In  our  country  we  have  snow 
in  mnter,  and  the  frost  is  then  in  the  ground  for  some 
months.  In  the  southern  parts  of  North  America  the 
people  never  see  snow,  the  frost  is  never  in  the  ground, 
and  there  is  no  such  thing  as  skating ;  while  in  the 
regions  of  the  far  north  the  snow,  except  for  a  few 
weeks,  lies  throughout  the  year,  so  that  the  very  houses 
are  built  of  it,  and  the  frost  is  never  out  of  the  ground. 
Now,  climate  has  much  to  do  with  the  vegetation  of 
a  country  ;  but  we  shall  learn  fully  about  this  and  other 
matters  when  we  come  to  the  different  countries  of 
North  America. 

[For  Recitation. J 

1.  niiat  limy  he  said  of  the  rivers  of  Xorth  America  ? 
The  rivers  are  noted  for  their  great  length. 

2.  JVliat  are  the  three  largest  rivers  in  North  America  ? 
The  Mi.ssissippi,  St.  Lawrence,  and  Mackenzie. 

N\SLp,  —  (S^fP°^^3f'.)  1.  Whicli  two  of  these  rivers  rise  in  the  Rocky 
Mountains  ?  2.  Where  does  the  St.  Lawrence  rise  ?  3.  Where  does  each 
empty '?  4.  Which  of  the  three  has  very  large  branches  ?  5.  What  is 
the  greatest  branch  of  the  Mississippi  flowing  from  the  Alleghany 
Mountains?  — from  the  Rocky  Mountains?  6.  In  what  direction  does 
the  Mississippi  flow  ?  —  the  St.  Lawrence  ?  —  the  Mackenzie  ? 

3.  nil  at  chain  of  five  great  lakes  in  North  America  1 
Lakes    Superior,    llichigan,    Huron,    Erie,    and 

Ontario. 

4.  MHiat  can  you  saij  of  Niagara  Falls  ? 

Niagara  Falls  are  a  great  cataract  formed  by  a 
precipice  in  the  channel  of  Niagara  Eiver,  which 
connects  Lakes  Erie  and  Ontario. 

5.  JJliat  of  the  climate  of  North  America  ? 

The  countries  have  a  cold,  moderate,  or  hot 
climate,  according  to  the  zone  they  are  in. 

PI\gip,'-{Sef  pa^e  35.)  1.  Into  what  river  does  the  water  of  the  Great 
Lakes  flow  ?  2.  Which  is  the  largest  and  most  western  ?  3.  Which 
most  eastern  ?  —  the  most  southern  ?  4.  What  three  large  lakes  in 
the  northern  part  of  America?    5.  What  river  drains  these? 


LANDS    NOETH   OF   THE   UNITED    STATES. 


39 


LANDS  NORTH  OP  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

LESSON    I. 

DOMINION    OP    CANADA. 

[For     Reading. J 

I.  Northern  Neighbors. 

1.  Our  neighboi-.s  ou  thu  unrth  ure  the  people  of 
Canada.  They  are  truly  "  neigliliors,"  or  near  ones,  to 
us,  for  wo  can  almost  shake  hands  with  them  acro-ss 
the  St.  Lawrence  Eiver.  If  you  have  ever  been  at 
Niagara  FaUs  you  know  that  there  is  what  is  called 
the  Americaii  side  (that  is,  our  side)  and  the  Canadian 
side.  So  if  we  were  to  sail  on  Lake  Superior,  and  our 
boat  should  go  the  least  to  the  north  of  the  middle  of 
the  lake,  we  should  be  sailing  in  waters  over  which 
Queen  Victoria  rules. 

II.  The  St.  Lawrence. 

2.  We  have  ah-eady  learned  the  name  of  the  great 
river  in  Canada.  The  St.  Lawrence  is  one  of  the 
grandest  rivers  on  the  globe.  See  what  feeds  it.  Not 
tiny  springs,  but  those  five  Great  Lakes  which  we  have 
read  about,  and  which  are  real  fresh-water  seas. 

3.  The  St.  Lawrence  rises  in  Lake  Onta'rio.  This 
upper  part  of  the  river  is  very  beautiful.      It  i,-;  callcil 


Scene  among  the  Thousand  lales. 

the  Lake  of  the  Thousand  Islands,  on  account  of  the 
large  number  of  richly  wooded  islets  which  stud  it.  As 
the  steamer  winds  in  and  out  among  these  the  traveler 
almost  fancies  himself  in  fairy-land.  Below  this  part 
the  St.  Lawrence  flows  smoothly  till  it  comes  to  the 
Rapids,  and  here  it  boils  and  foams  along.  When 
the  St.  Lawrence  flows  past  the  handsome  city  of  Mon- 
treal [mon-tre-au>l"\  it  is  a  stream  two  miles  wide. 
And  so  it  keeps  on  its  course  for  several  hundreil 
miles,  broadening  still  more  when  it  has  passed  the 
ancient  city  of  Quebec',  till  at  last  it  mingles  its  waters 
with  those  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. 

4.  The  Valley  of  the  St.  La%^Tence  and  the  shores  of 
the  Great  Lakes  are  the  home  of  nearly  all  the  people 
of  Canada.  And  they  have  their  best  friend  in  the 
river.     It  not  only  makes  their  soil  fertile,  but  it  is  the 


I  great  natural  highway  on  which  their  trade  is  carried 
on.  You  sec  floating  down  stream  vast  rafts  of  timber 
which  will  be  put  into  ships  at  Quebec  and  sent  to 
Europe,  and  hundi'eds  of  vessels  laden  with  grain  to 
feed  the  people  of  England.  But  in  the  winter  months 
the  great  river  is  in  the  grasp  of  the  Ice-King.  It  is 
then  all  frozen  fast,  and  vessels  nnist  wait  till  spriiig 
comes  to  break  uji  the  ice. 

III.  On  the  Great  Lakes. 

.5.  Canada  is  not  divitletl  into  States,  as  our  country 
is,  but  in  place  of  Stattis  it  has  divisions  which  are 
called  provinces.  And  first  is  the  one  which  borders 
on  the  Great  Lakes  :  it  is  called  Ontario.  You  see  that 
on  the  American  side  of  tlie  lakes  are  New  York  and 
Pennsylvania  and  Ohio  and  Michigan  ;  so  pupils  who 
live  in  any  of  these  States  will  know  very  well  wliat 
kind  of  climate  this  part  of  Canada  lias,  for  it  is  (juite 
like  the  cluuate  of  tlieir  own  States. 

G.  The  peoj)le  of  (Jntario  are  mostly  descendants  of 
settlers  from  England,  Scotland,  and  Ireland.  Tliey  are 
intelligent,  go-ahead  folk,  —  good  farmers  and  skillful 
mechanics  and  busy  merchants.  They  have  excellent 
common  schools  and  fine  colleges  and  universities. 
Their  largest  to\vn  is  Toron'to ;  it  is  on  Lake  Ontario, 
and  is  a  handsom<',  finely  built  citv. 

IV.  Valley  of  the  St.  Lawrence. 

7.  The  province  of  Quebec  extends  on  both  sides  of 
the  St.  Lawrence  River  from  the  Ottawa  Eiver  to  the 
<  ndf  of  St.  Lawrence.  You  will  see  by  the  map  that 
the  river  St.  La-\vi'ence  in  its  way  to  the  ocean  runs  to 
the  north  of  east ;  and  of  course  the  farther  north  it 
extends  the  more  it  goes  into  the  cold  zone.  And,  in 
f  ict,  the  winters  in  this  part  of  Canada  are  very  cold. 

8  I  will  tell  you  about  the  seasons.  The  summers 
lie  very  hot;  then  comes  the  fall,  when  the  leaves 
turn,  and  the  forests  glow  with  colore  which  no  painter 
I  ould  put  on  his  canvas.  Follows  the  six  months' 
\\  inter.  Everything  now  changes.  A  great  blanket  of 
snow,  six  feet  deep,  covers  the  fields  and  the  roads. 
The  river-trade  ceases.  Wheels  give  place  to  run- 
ners. You  think  it  must  be  dreary  1  No  :  not  at 
all.  The  dry  keen  air  is  wonderfidly  bracing,  and 
1  enjoyment.     What 


Canadian  Sleighing  Scene.  * 

coasting  and  sleighing  !  And  what  fun  and  laughter  as, 
wrapped  in  warm  buffalo-robes,  they  skim  along  over 
the  smooth  hard  snow  to  the  merrv  tinkle  of  the  bells  ! 


40 


NOETH   AMERICA. 


CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  JVhat  country  lies  north  of  the  United  States  ? 
British  America. 

2.  JF]wt  other  name  is  given  to  most  of  this  country  ? 
It  i.s  called  the  Dominion  of  Canada. 

Map.  —  iSrc  pufic  i^o.)  1.  What  parallel  forms  the  boundary  between 
the  United  States  and  Canada  in  the  western  half?  Ans.  The  49th  par- 
allel of  latitude.  2.  What  waters  ai'e  the  boundary  in  the  eastern  part  ? 
3.  What  river  carries  off  the  water  of  the  Great  Lakes  ?  4.  Into  what 
does  the  St.  Lawrence  flow? 

3.  JFhcre  is  the  most  thickly  settled  part  of  Canada  ? 
The  most  thickly  settled  part  is  in  the  Valley  of 

tlie  St.  Lawrence  and  near  the  Great  Lakes. 

4.  ]Vhat  names  are  given  to  the  divisions  of  Canada  ? 
Tlie  divisions  of  Canada  are  called  Provinces. 

5.  What  is  the  LaJce  and  what  the  River  Province  ? 

The  Lake  Province  is  called  Ontario ;  and  the 
Eiver  Province,  Quebec. 

Map.  —  (5*'6  ?*«?«  '^^. )  The  Ottawa  River  separates  these  provinces ; 
into  what  does  the  Ottawa  flow? 

6.  llliat  is  the  climate  of  Canada  ? 

The  western  part  has  a  climate  like  our  northern 
States,  but  the  Valley  of  the  St.  Lawrence  has  very 
cold  winters,  and  the  St.  Lawrence  Eiver  is  frozen 
over  for  five  months  every  year. 

7.  Jlliat  of  the  occupations  and  trade  of  the  Canadians  ? 

The  Canadians  are  occupied  in  agriculture,  lum- 
bering, and  manufacturing;  and  they  ship  great 
quantities  of  wheat,  butter  and  cheese,  lumber, 
furs,  and  pot  and  pearl  ashes. 


LESSON    II. 

CANADA   (CoxTiOTEB). 
CFor  Reading.] 

I.  The  Habitans. 

1.  Tlio  Valley  of  the  St.  Lawrence  was  first  settled 
by  the  French.  And  to  a  large  degree  the  names,  tra- 
ditions, population,  and  manners  and  customs  are  still 
French.  This  is  seen  most  in  tlie  country  parts,  among 
the  small  farmers,  called  habitans.  Woidd  it  not  look 
queer  for  gentlemen  to  wear  the  knee-breeches  and 
cocked  hats  and  ruffles  whicli  our  forefathers  wore  two 
hundred  years  agol  Yet  something  hke  this  you  see 
in  Canada,  for  the  French  Canadian  habitans  are  in 
speech  and  dress  and  ways  of  thinking  very  much 
what  their  ancestors  were  before  they  came  over  from 
Normandy  two  or  three  centuries  ago.  Tliey  speak 
a  sort  of  old-fashioned  French,  saying,  //  fait  fret,  for 
//  fait  frold  ("  It  is  cold  ").  You  would  smile  to  see 
the  men  in  their  blue  bonnets,  like  nightcaps,  and  the 
women  in  their  white  Xorman  caps,  and  both  men  and 
women  wearing  wooden  shoes!  They  are  a  gay,  pohte, 
simple-hearted  folk,  generally  quite  ignorant,  and  caring 
little  for  all  the  great  new  things  that  are  setting  the 
world  astir. 


2.  Of  course  you  must  understand  this  as  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  peasants.  The  educated  people  are  quite 
different.  And  you  must  not  think  that  all  Canadians 
belong  to  the  French  race  ;  for  though  these  form  the 
largest  part,  yet  there  are  many  thousands  of  English, 
Scotch,  and  Irish  Canadians.  These  are  a  highly  in- 
telligent, progressive  people,  and  have  built  railroads 
and  telegraphs,  and  estalalished  excellent  schools,  and 
are  making  Canada  a  very  prosperous  country. 

II.   Cities. 

3.  Montreal  is  the  largest  city  in  this  province,  and 
the  largest  in  all  Canada.  The  name  means  roi)al  mount, 
so  called  from  a  noble  wooded  mountain  at  the  base 
of  which  it  is  built.  It  is  a  busy,  money-making  place. 
There  are  few  cities  in  America  that  can  show  hand- 
somer houses  and  stores  and  cliurches  than  Montreal. 
Its  docks  and  its  wharves,  which  are  well  worth  seeing. 


are  crowded  with  ships,  and  the  city  sends  more  grain 
over  the  sea  than  any  other  American  city  except  New 
York.  A  splendid  iron  bridge,  two  miles  long,  here 
crosses  the  St.  Lawrence. 

4.  The  city  of  Quebec  also  is  in  this  province.  This 
is  an  interesting  place,  because  it  is  walled, — and  cities 
with  walls  are  rare  in  America.  You  may  have  read  of 
the  great  fight  between  the  French  and  English  on  the 
Plains  of  Abraham,  —  the  battle  in  which  Wolfe  died 
in  the  arms  of  victory,  and  which  won  Canada  for  the 
British.  It  was  fought  more  than  a  hundred  years  ago. 
The  Plains  of  Abraham  are  on  a  high  bluff  back  of  the 
city  of  Quebec. 

III.  Around  the  Gulf.  ^ 

5.  We  have  read  about  the  Lake  Province  (Ontario) 
and  the  Eiver  Province  (Quebec) ;  and  now  we  must 
learn  a  little  about   three   other   provinces,  which  we 


LANDS   NORTH   OF  THE   UNITED    STATES. 


41 


may  call  the  Gulf  provinces,  because  the  Gulf  of  St. 
Lawrence  washes  their  shores. 

6.  First  is  New  Bruns'wick.  There  is  noble  scenery 
liere.  There  are  also  vast  forests,  and  on  this  account 
a  great  business  of  tlie  people  is  getting  out  logs  and 
sawing  them  into  lumber  in  the  numerous  saw-mills 
along  the  river-banks.  Many  are  engaged  in  fishing 
for  cod,  mackerel,  and  salmon  in  the  neighboring  waters. 
Others,  again,  raise  grain  and  make  butter  and  cheese. 
They  are  principally  English-speaking  people  here. 
The  largest  city  is  St.  John.     It  has  a  fine  harbor. 

7.  Nova  Scotia  means  New  Scotland;  but  its  old 
name  was  Aca'dia.  It  was  a  Frencli  colony,  where 
dwelt  a  happy,  peaceful  people  ;  but,  during  one  of  the 
wars  between  the  English  and  the  French  in  the  last 
century,  the  English  army  burned  the  Acadian  villages, 
and,  kidnapping  the  simple  peasants,  scattered  them  in 
other  colonies.  English  settlements  were  then  planted 
there,  and  the  name  was  changed  to  Nova  Scotia. 

8.  It  is  a  land  beautiful  with  forest,  hill,  and  lake, 
and  enjoys  a  deliglitfui  climate,  milder  than  the 
other  parts  of  Canada.  The  principal  occupations  of 
tlie  people  are  nuning  coal,  fishing,  and  farming.  Did 
you  ever  hear  of  Halifax  1  This  is  the  chief  city 
of  Nova  Scotia.  It  has  a  very  fine  harbor,  and  almost 
any  time  you  may  see  English  men-of-war  there. 

9.  Prince  Edward  Island  is  the  next  province  of 
Canada.  You  might  easily  guess  what  must  be  the 
leading  business  of  the  people  here.  Fishing'?  Yes. 
This  is  carried  on  to  a  great  extent 

IV.   Government. 

10.  The  five  provinces  which  you  have  read  about 
—  with  two  others  which  are  so  thinly  inhabited  that 
we  need  not  take  any  heed  of  them  —  form  the  "  Do- 
minion of  Canada."  But  you  must  remember  that  this 
is  not  an  independent  country.  The  people  are  under 
the  government  of  England.  Still  they  are  quite  free. 
They  make  their  own  laws ;  only,  in  place  of  calling 
the  body  of  men  wdiom  they  choose  to  make  the  laws 
by  the  name  of  Congress,  they  speak  of  their  Parlia- 
ment. They  do  not  elect  any  President  as  we  do  ; 
but,  instead,  they  have  a  Governor-General,  who  is 
sent  out  by  the  queen  of  England. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  By  whom  was  Canada  first  settled  ? 
Canada  was  first  settled  by  the  French. 

2.  IVliat  is  the  largest  city  in  Canada  ? 
The  largest  city  is  Montreal. 

3.  llHiat  old  city  m  the  lower  part  of  the  St.  Laxv-renci  .' 
The  city  of  Quebec. 

4.  Jlliat  large  city  on  Lake  Ontario  ? 
The  city  of  Toronto. 

Mlkp.—(Scc  jiac/e  SS.)  1,  On  what  lake  is  Toronto  ?  2.  On  what  river 
are  Montreal  and  Quebec  7  3.  Are  there  any  large  places  far  back 
from  the  river  ? 


5.  What  three  provinces  are  near  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ? 
The  Gulf  provinces  are  New  Brunswick,  Nova 

Scotia,  and  Prince  Edward  Island. 

6.  What  are  the  chief  occupations  ? 

The  chief  occupations  are  farming,  dairying, 
lumbering,  and  the  fisheries. 

Map*  -  {^■'-■'.' ;>"f;c  .S'.; )  1.  On  which  state  in  our  country  does  New 
Brunswick  border  ?  2.  Which  of  the  Gulf  provinces  is  a  peninsula  ? 
3-  Where  is  Halifax  ? 

7.  U'hat  of  the  government  of  Canada  ? 

Tlie  provinces  are  colonies  of  England ;  but 
they  are  nearly  independent.  They  are  united 
in  a  confederation,  and  Iiave  a  Parliament  to 
make  their  own  laws. 

8.  Jlliat  is  the  capital  of  the  united  provinces,  or  Dominion 
of  Canada  ? 

The  capital  is  Ot'tawa. 


LESSON    III. 
NEWFOUNDLAND    AND    THE    FUR    COUNTRY. 

[For  Reading.] 

I.  Description. 

1.  The  large  island  of  Newfoundland  is  in  the  GuK 
of  St.  Lawi-ence,  and  it  belongs  to  the  English.  It 
does  not  form  part  of  Canada,  but  is  a  British  prov- 
ince by  itself.  It  is  an  almost  barren  land,  with  small 
firs  and  birches  for  its  only  vegetation.  The  cold,  gray 
coast  is  shrouded  nearly  always  in  thick  fogs.  Great 
icebergs,  borne  by  the  ocean  currents  from  the  Ai'ctic 
lands,  float  by ;  and  many  a  good  ship  striking  against 
these  in  the  mist  has  gone  to  the  bottom,  -mth.  aU  on 
board. 

II.  The  Fisheries. 

2.  Yet  Newfoundkmd  has  great  wealth,  —  not  the 
wealth  of  mines  or  forests  or  of  the  soil,  but  the  wealth 
of  the  waters.  Ofl'  the  coast  are  elevations  in  the  ocean 
extending  hundreds  of  miles.  Tliese  are  called  the 
Banks  of  Newfoundland,  and  they  are  the  feeding-place 
of  immense  shoals  of  codfish.  Any  summer  you  may 
see  hundreds  of  American  and  French  and  English 
smacks  engaged  in  taking  the.se  fish. 


Cod  fisbmg  on  the  Banks  of  Newfoundland. 


42 


NORTH   AMEEICA. 


3.  The  Ijest  coiltisliiug  season  is  in  the  early  sjjring. 
From  February  to  April  the  crews  of  the  fishing-smacks 
are  employed  from  morning  till  night  in  boats  contain- 
ing from  two  to  four  men  each.  Sometimes  a  good 
fisherman  will  catch  several  hundred  cod  in  a  day;  but 
it  is  hard  work,  as  they  are  caught  with  a  hook  and 
line,  and  some  of  them  are  very  heavy.  They  often 
bite  so  fast  that  a  boat  is  loaded  in  two  or  three  hours. 
On  the  shore,  stages  or  platforms  are  set  up.  Here  the 
fish  are  cured,  that  is,  are  cleaned,  salted,  and  di-ied. 
They  are  then  tied  in  bundles  and  put  in  warehouses, 
to  be  shipped  to  all  parts  of  the  civilized  world. 

4.  The  only  town  of  any  size  in  Newfoundland  is 
St.  John's.  The  great  business  here  is  curing  fish  and 
extracting  oil  from  them.  At  Cape  Race  in  Newfound- 
land is  the  American  end  of  a  telegraphic  cable  which 
goes  from  Ireland  all  the  way  under  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

5.  We  have  learned  only  about  the  settled  parts  of 
British  America.  Now  you  must  know  that  all  the 
A'ast  country  north  of  these  settled  parts,  to  the  Polar 
Sea  and  westward  to  beyond  the  Rocky  jMountains, 
belongs  also  to  the  Dominion  of  Canada.  The  name 
given  to  this  is  The  N^orthu'est  TerritQry.  But  a  few 
years  ago  it  was  called  the  Hudson  Bay  Territory. 

6.  More  than  two  hundred  years  ago  the  king  of 
England  gave  to  an  English  company,  called  the  Hud- 
son Bay  Company,  the  authority  over  all  this  region. 
The  business  of  the  Company  was  to  employ  people  to 
hunt  for  furs.  For  the  whole  country  around  Hudson 
Bay  and  far  north  to  where  the  Frigid  Zone  begins  is 
covered  with  vast  forests  which  arc  the  home  of  valu- 


Fur  bearing  Ammals  of  British  America 

able  fui  bearing  animals.     Among  these  aie  the  sable, 
ermine,  marten,  and  beaver. 

7.  The  Company  employs  hundreds  of  hunters  — 
Indians  and  Canadians  and  half-breeds  —  to  trap  or 
shoot  these  animals  and  bring  in  the  skins  to  the  trad- 
ing-stations called  forts.  Agents  of  the  Company,  gen- 
erally Scotchmen,  stay  here,   and  when  the  hunting 


season  is  over  and  the  trappers  come  in  with  their  furs, 
the  agents  take  the  furs  and  give  the  hunters  in  ex- 
change things  which  they  want,  as  cloth,  powder,  knives, 
tobacco,  and  rum.  It  is  a  very  paying  business  for 
the  Company,  for  they  generally  give  a  twonty-five-ccnt 
knife  for  three  martens'  skins  worth  twenty-five  dollars. 
8.  The  Company  was  long  the  king  of  all  this  great 
territory.  But  a  few  years  ago  the  English  government 
took  away  its  power,  and  gave  the  authority  over  all 
the  land  to  Canada.  Still  the  fur  business  is  very 
largely  carried  on.  You  may  notice  on  the  map  the 
name  Fort  York,  on  Hudson  Bay.  This  is  the  principal 
trading-station,  and  is  visited  every  summer  by  ships 
from  England  to  bring  supplies  and  take  away  furs. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  can  you  say  of  Xcirfoiindlaud  ? 
Newfoundland  is  a  large  island  in  the  Gulf  of 

St.  Lawrence.  It  is  dreary  and  barren;  but  is 
noted  for  the  cod-fisheries  on  the  Bunks.  It  forms 
a  sei)arate  British  province. 

lyi £ip.  —  { ^^  P^S^  3^)  1-  What  is  tlie  principal  city  in  Newfound- 
land ?    2.  Where  is  Cape  Race  ? 

2.  What  name  is  given  to  the  yrcat  extent  of  country  north 
of  the  settled  imrt  of  Canada  ' 

■  The  country  north  of  the  settled  part  is  called 
the  Northwest  Territory,  formerly  Hudson  Bay 
Territory. 

3.  To  whom  does  it  belong  ? 

It  belongs  to  England,  but  is  under  the  rule  of 
Canada. 

4.  Jf'hat  kind  of  a  country  is  it  ? 

Much  of  it  is  cold  and  barren ;  but  it  contains 
great  forests,  and  is  noted  for  its  large  fur-trade. 

Map.  —  iSeepagtSo.)  1.  Where  is  Hudson  Bay  ?  2.  What  laige 
river  flows  into  this  bay  ?  3  Are  the  names  of  any  cities  found  in 
the  counti-y  drained  hy  the  Mackenzie  River? 


LESSON  IV. 
THE  AECTIC  REGIONS. 

[For    Reading.] 
I.  The  Northwest  Passage. 

1.  Did  you  ever  read  the  accounts  of  the  exploring 
expechtions  to  the  Polar  regions  of  North  America, 
made  by  the  brave  Englishman  Sir  John  Franklin,  or 
by  the  Americans  Dr.  Kane  and  Captain  Hall  ?  If  you 
read  the  newspapers  at  the  present  time,  you  will  learn 
about  other  parties  wliich  are  now  engaged  in  explor- 
ing those  regions.  Perhaps  you  may  ask  what  people 
wish  to  do  by  going  on  long,  dangerous  joiu-neys  to 
these  icy  lands.     I  will  tell  you. 

2.  You  know  that  when  Columbus  sailed  on  his  fhst 
voyage  he  wished  to  reach  the  eastern  part  of  Asia, 
called  the  East  Indies.      He  found  the  New  "World 


LANDS   NORTH   OF   THE   UNITED    STATES. 


43 


wliile  on  his  way,  and  never  reached  India.  But  im  i 
still  wished  to  sail  to  Eastern  Asia;  so  the  navigalci 
wlio  came  after  Columbus  tried  to  see  how  they  couli 
pass  around  America  so  as  to  sail  to  Asia.  A  Per 
tuguese  navigator  named  Magellan  found  that  he  couli 
do  this  by  passing  very  tar  to  the  south  and  sailiiiL; 
around  the  southern  end  of  South  America.  But  it 
was  a  very  long  voyage  to  cross  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
and  people  were  disappointed  because  it  was  so  much 
farther  to  India  than  they  had  supposed. 

3.  Then  navigators  began  to  ask  if  they  could  not  go 
around  America  by  its  northern  end.  If  they  could  do 
tliis  it  would  save  several  thousand  miles  in  the  voyage 
from  Europe  to  Eastern  Asia.  It  was  thought  that  a 
way  might  be  made  for  ships  to  sail  along  the  extreme 
northern  coast  of  America  and  come  out  into  the  Pacific 
Ocean.     This  was  called  the  "  Northwest  Passage." 

4.  First  one  brave  man  and  then  another  wont  to 
try.  This  was  long  ago,  —  two  or  three  hundred  years 
since.  They  found  out  a  great  many  straits  and  bays, 
and  they  named  them  after  themselves.  There  is 
"  Baffin  Bay,"  and  "  Hudson  Bay,"  and  "  Davis  Strait." 

5.  The  brave  men  always  met  with  an  enemy  that 
made  them  turn  back  in  the  end.  I  mean  the  cold. 
It  is  the  Icy  Zone,  and  the  sea  is  frozen  over.  If 
the  ice  melts  a  little,  there  are  stiU  great  dangers. 
There  are  huge  floating  hergs,  or  mountains  of  ice,  and 
if. these  were  to  come  against  the  ship  they  would 
knock  it  all  to  pieces.  Then  there  are  great  floating 
fields  of  ice  called  floes.  Dm-ing  the  few  weeks  of 
summer  a  ship  may  find  a  channel  between  these  great 
ice-fields  ;  but  soon  the  frost  comes  on  again  and  the 
ship  is  "  nipped  "  in  the  ice,  and  has  to  stay  there  tiU 
the  next  short  summer  comes  and  thaws  it  out.  And 
sometimes  the  ships  never  get  out  at  all.  This  was 
the  case  with  the  ships  of  the  brave  Captain  Franklin 
who,  some  years  ago,  went  on  a  voyage  to  the  Arctic 
Eegion.  He  and  all  his  party  —  one  hundred  and 
twenty-nine  souls  —  perished  in  the  ice  and  snow. 

6.  Thanks  to  all  the  searching,  and  the  brave  cap- 
tains who  have  gone  in  ships  to  look  for  it,  a  Northwest 
Passage  through  the  icebound  straits  and  islands  which 
lie  to  the  north  of  the  American  continent  has  been 
found.  But  it  turns  out  not  to  be  of  any  use,  for  ships 
can  very  seldom  go  through  on  account  of  the  ice- 
blockade. 

III.  Polar  Explorations. 

7.  Besides  trying  to  find  a  Northwest  Passage, 
there  is  another  thing  that  has  led  many  brave  navi- 
gators to  the  far-off  frozen  lands  of  North  America. 
This  is  the  wish  to  reach  the  North  Pole.  Now,  you 
know  of  course  that  there  is  no  such  object  as  the  North 
Pole.  It  is  merely  a  point  on  the  earth's  surface,  and 
a  navigator  would  know  that  he  was  there  only  by 
observing  with  his  instruments  and  seeing  that  he  was 
in  north  latitude  90  degrees. 


8.  The  most  interesting  expeditions  toward  the 
North  Pole  have  becm  made  by  the  American  explor- 
ers. Dr.  Kane,  Dr.  Hayes,  ami  Cajjtain  Hall,  luich 
of  these  explorers  sailed  up  Baffin  Bay  and  then  up 
a  narrow  jiassage  called  Smith  Sound  and  Kennedy 
Channel,  between  Greenland  and  the  land  to  the  west. 
When  the  ships  could  go  no  farther  on  account  of  the 
ice,  small  parties  of  men  took  sledges  drawn  by  Esqui- 
maux dogs  and  succeeded  in  reaching  within  about  500 
miles  of  the  North  Pole. 

9.  Now,  what  do  you  suppose  lies  beyond  the  places 
which  they  reached  1  People  were  very  much  surprised 
when  these  explorers  came  back  and  told  that  they  at 
last  got  to  the  end  of  the  icy  land  and  saw  stretching 
beyond  a  great  njien  sea.  The  tides  ebbed  and  flowed 
in  this  sea.  The  climate  was  much  milder  here,  and 
bears,  birds,  and  seals  were  found  in  abundance.  Hence 
it  cannot  now  be  doubted  that  around  the  North  Pole 
is  a  great  body  of  water  which  never  freezes,  and  which 
is  called  the  "  Open  Polar  Sea."  It  is  very  likely  that 
we  shall  soon  learn  more  about  this  sea,  and  also  that 
the  North  Pole  itseK  will  be  reached,  because  new  ex- 
peditions, better  fitted  out  than  the  former  ones,  have 
lately  been  sent  to  tlu;  Arctic  Region  from  various 
countries  in  Europe. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  UHiat  is  the  Arctic  Region  1 

The  Arctic  Eegion  is  the  most  northern  part  of 
British  America,  within  the  Frigid  Zone. 

fl\np,  —  (SeepageZi.)  1-  At  what  circle  does  the  Frigid  Zone  be- 
gin ?  Ans-  At  the  Arctic  Circle.  2.  In  what  latitude  ia  this?  Ans. 
North  latitude  66i°.  3.  What  ocean  or  sea  north  of  North  America  ? 
4.  Are  there  any  islands  beyond  the  mainland?  5.  What  bay  on 
the  east?    6.  What  strait  between  America  and  Asia? 

2.  IVliat  can  yoii  tell  about  the  Northwest  Passage  ? 
The  Northwest   Passage   is   a  channel  around 

North  America  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific. 
It  was  sought  for  a  long  time,  and  it  has  been 
proved  that  there  is  such  a  passage;  but  it  is 
of  no  iise,  because  nearl.y  always  blocked  up  by 
ice. 

3.  IJliat  can  you  saij  about  polar  expeditions  ? 

Many  expeditions  have  been  sent  out  by  differ- 
ent countries  to  reach  the  Nortli  Pole.  No  party 
has  ever  reached  that  point ;  but  it  is  believed 
that  around  the  Pole  is  an  open  sea. 


44 


NORTH   AMERICA. 


LESSON    V. 

GREENLAND    AND    ALASKA. 

[For  Reading.] 
id. 

"  ^^  1     Look  it  the  map  and 

obseive   the   region    named 

Lib'ixdcr       It  is  a  rugged 

ind  dubohte  coast.     To  the 

eist  of  Labrador 

I'?  a  great  inlet  of 

this  ocean  leading 

northward.       On 

the  other  side  of 

tlie  inlet,   named 

Davis  Strait  and 

Baffin      Bay,      is 

Gieenland. 

Esquimaux  spear  ni,  tli->  Walrus  n     r^  l  i 

2.  Greenland 
belongs  to  the  Danes,  who  long  ago  made  a  number 
of  small  settlements  along  the  western  coast.  You 
may  notice  the  names  of  some  of  these  on  the  map, 
and  among  them  Upernavik  \oop' er-nav-ilc\,  which  is 
one  of  the  most  northerly  places  inhabited  by  man. 
Greenland  is  believed  to  be  an  island,  though  no  trav- 
eler has  ever  explored  it  far  enough  north  to  teU  ex- 
actly. It  is  a  desolate  country,  and  one  of  the  cold- 
est on  the  face  of  the  earth.  Snow  and  great  slow- 
moving  ice-rivers  called  glaciers  cover  the  land,  while 
huge  icebergs  float  in  the  waters.  The  summer  lasts 
only  a  few  weeks,  and  for  months  the  sun  is  not 
seen.  Yet  this  dreary  country  has  a  wealth  of  its 
own,  —  the  wealth  of  the  waters.  Cod  and  herring  and 
whale  abound,  as  do  also  eider-ducks  and  other  water- 
fowl, while  great  herds  of  seals  fn.nuent  the  shores. 


Esqulmaus   Dress  and  Huts- 

3.  The  native  inhabitants  of  Greenland  are  called 
Esquimaux  [es'A-e-mo],  and  they  are  found  in  all  the 
northern  parts  of  America.  They  are  quite  a  different 
race  from  the  North  American  Indians,  and  resemble 
the  inhabitants  of  the  polar  regions  of  Asia  and  Europe. 
Tiie  native  Esquimaux,  except  those  who  have  been 
improved  a  little  by  the  missionaries,  are  a  filthy,  de- 


graded, and  ignorant  people.  They  live  in  small  oven- 
shaped  huts  built  of  blocks  of  snow.  Their  chief 
food,  and  the  one  best  suited  to  tlie  climate,  is  the 
blubber  of  the  whale  and  seal,  togetlier  with  dried 
fish,  oil,  and  bear's  meat.  They  are  clothed,  men  and 
women  alike,  in  skins  from  head  to  foot.  The  princi- 
pal occupations  of  the  Esquimaux  are  spearing  seals 
from  their  canoes,  which  they  handle  with  great  skill, 
or  scudding  over  the  frozen  ground,  in  sleds  drawn  by 
teams  of  dogs,  in  pursuit  of  wild  animals,  which  they 
kill  for  their  skins  and  flesh. 

II.  Alaska. 

4.  Do  you  think  any  part  of  the  United  States  lies 
in  the  for  northern  icy  region?  Yes,  we  have  a  posses- 
sion there  ten  times  the  size  of  the  State  of  Pennsyl- 
vania. Look  on  the  map  of  North  America  (page  35), 
and  you  will  see  that  in  the  northwestern  part  is 
a  large  territory  shaped  somewhat  like  a  closed  hand 
with  the  index  finger  pointing  toward  Asia  ;  and 
between  this  long  hnger  and  Asia  are  a  number  of 
islands  that  seem  like  stepping-stones  from  the  New 
World  to  the  Old. 

5.  This  territory  is  called  Alas'ka.  It  used  to  be- 
long to  Russia,  but  in  the  year  1864  was  bought  from 
that  country  by  the  United  States.  As  Alaska  is  as 
ixc  north  as  Greenland,  you  may  think,  perhaps,  that 
it  is  as  dreary  and  barren  as  that  country.  But  this 
is  not  the  case  ;  for  while  Greenland  has  scarcely  any 
vegetation,  there  are  large  forests  in  Alaska. 

6.  Two  races  inhabit  Alaska,  —  Indians,  and  a  peo- 
ple called  Aleuts',  who  resemble  the  Esquimaux.  The 
occupations  of  these  two  races  are  quite  different.  The 
Indians,  who  live  on  the  mountains,  hunt  the  fur- 
bearing  animals  found  in  the  forests,  just  as  they  do  in 
the  fur  country  around  Hudson  Bay.  The  Aleuts,  who 
live  on  the  coast  and  on  the  islands,  are  occupied  in 
killing  the  fur  seals,  which  come  up  from  the  sea  in 
groat  numbers  to  bask  in  the  sun  on  the  different 
island.s. 

7.  The  few  white  people  who  live  in  Alaska  are 
soldiers  kept  there  by  our  government,  and  a  small 
number  of  persons  employed  by  American  trading  com- 
panies. The  only  place  that  can  be  called  a  town  is 
Sitka. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  To  whom  does  Greenland  belong  ? 
Greenland  belongs  to  the  Danes. 

Map.  —  {See  pnge  3-'.)    1.  In  what  direction  from  the  mainland  of 
North  America  is  Greenland  ?    2.  What  water  between  the  two? 

2.  WTiat  can  you  say  about  it  ? 

It  is  a  great  barren  island  inhabited  by  Es- 
quimaux. 

3.  What  territory  in  the  Arctic  Region  belongs  to  the 
United  States  ? 

The  territory  of  Alaska,  valuable  for  its  furs  and 
fisheries. 


LANDS   SOUTH   OF  THE   UNITED    STATES. 


45 


■i.-'i^:- 


Collecting  the  Cochineal  Insect. 


The  Table-land  of  Mexico. 


Grand  Square,  City  of  Mexico. 


LANDS  SOUTH  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


LESSON  I. 

MEXICO  AND   THE   MEXICANS. 

[For  Reading.] 

L  From  the  frosts  and  snow.s  of  Canada  we  now  go 
to  a  land  where  it  is  always  summer,  —  a  land  of  rich 
forests  and  bright  flowers,  inhabited  by  a  people  who 
difler  greatly  from  us  in  language,  manners,  and  mode 
of  living.  This  country  is  called  Mexico,  and  a  glance 
at  the  map  will  show  that  it  lies  south  of  the  west- 
ern part  of  the  United  States.  The  people  wlio  live 
here  are  called  Mexicans. 

I.  History. 

2.  At  the  time  when  America  was  discovered  by 
Columbus,  Mexico  was  inhabited  by  a  native  Indian 
people  called  Az'tecs.  They  were  far  above  the  wild 
Indians  of  North  America  or  the  peacefiU  savages  whom 
the  Spaniards  had  met  in  the  "West  Indies.  They  had 
large  cities,  adorned  with  grand  temples  and  palaces. 
They  cultivated  the  soil  with  skill,  and  made  cot- 
ton cloth  and  earthenware  and  vessels  of  gold  and 
silver. 

3.  Under  the  leadership  of  a  bold  but  cruel  cap- 
tain named  Cor'tez,  a  band  of  Spaniards  sailed  from 
the  West  Indies  in  1519  to  take  this  country.  They 
were  few  in  number,  but  they  had  cannon  and  guns, 
horses  and  coats  of  mail,  so  the  natives  with  their 
bows  and  arrows  were  no  match  for  them.  After 
much  fighting,  the  Spaniards  reached  the  capital  where 
the  king  Montezuma  lived.  Several  battles  followed 
in  which  the  Spaniards  were  successful,  so  that  after 
a  few  years  they  became  masters  of  the  whole  coun- 
try. 

4.  Mexico  now  belonged  to  the  king  of  Spain.    After 


that  time  large  numbers  of  Spaniards  moved  to  Mexico, 
for  the  land  w^as  rich  in  gold  and  silver.  I\lany 
mingled  with  the  natives,  who,  as  time  passed,  adopted 
the  language  and  religion  of  the  Spaniards  ;  and  though 
many  years  ago  the  Mexicans  declared  their  indepen- 
dence of  Spain,  yet  they  have  kept  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage, dress,  manners,  and  customs  to  this  day. 

II.  Nature  of  the  Country. 

5.  If  we  were  to  journey  into  Mexico,  following  the 
route  taken  by  the  Spanish  conquerors,  from  the  sea- 
coast  at  Vera  Cruz  [ya^/rah-kruoz^  to  the  capital  city 
of  Me.xico,  we  should  pass  first  across  a  belt  of  low 
land.  The  people  call  this  part  the  tierra  caltente 
[te-aii-'rah  kal-e-en'tij],  or  hot  region.  These  low,  hot 
lands  are  found  all  along  the  coast,  both  on  the  shore 
of  the  Golf  of  Mexico  and  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

6.  We  can  be  at  no  loss  to  understand  why  the 
weather  here  is  very  hot,  for  the  southern  half  of  Jlex- 
ico  is  \vithin  the  Torrid  Zone,  and  the  northern  half 
is  very  near  it.  The  climate  in  the  low  lands  is  not 
only  very  hot  but  exceedinglj'  unhealthy,  and  that 
terrible  disease,  yellow  fever,  is  very  common.  The 
plants  of  the  low  lands  are  tropical.  Here  are  forests 
of  palms  and  mahogany-trees ;  and  on  the  plantations 
the  people  cultivate  the  coffee-plant  and  the  cacao-tree, 
the  banana,  indigo,  sugar-cane,  and  cotton. 

7.  As  we  leave  the  coast  the  country  becomes  broken 
and  rugged,  and  we  find  ourselves  going  up  a  steep 
and  precipitous  road,  with  towering  mountains  on  the 
one  hand  and  gloomy  gorges  on  the  other.  At  last, 
after  ascending  a  series  of  mountain  terraces  we  reach 
a  broad  table-land.  This  is  what  is  called  the  plateau 
of  Mexico,  and  forms  the  greater  part  of  the  surface  of 
the  country.  It  is  from  a  mile  to  a  mile  and  a  half 
abo'i'e  the  low  plains  on  the  coast. 

8.  The  name  "  table-land  "  might  lead  you  to  think 
that  the  country  here  is  quite  flat.  But  this  is  not  so. 
Many  parts  are  ridged  by  great  mountain-chains.     These 


4G 


NOETH   AMERICA. 


form  a  part  of  the  Eocky  Mountain  system  of  North 
America,  and  the  main  ehain  bears  the  name  Sierra 
Madre  [se-ai/'ah  viah'dni>i\,  which  means  in  S^ianish 
viother-chain. 

9.  When  we  liave  reached  the  table-land  we  find 
that  the  climate  is  very  different  from  that  of  the  1o\f 
coast  plains.  We  left  the  Torrid  Zone  a  little  while 
ago,  and  now  we  are  in  a  temperate  climate.  If  you 
remember  that  heat  always  grows  less  and  less  as  we 
ascend  above  the  sea,  you  will  have  no  difiiculty  in 
accounting  for  the  fact.  The  weather  on  the  plateau 
is  delightful,  being  neither  hot  enough  to  be  oppressive 
nor  cold  enough  to  pinch  with  frost.  In  fact,  there 
are  in  Mexico  only  two  seasons,  —  the  rainy  season, 
which  commences  in  June  and  lasts  till  November; 
and  the  dry  season,  during  the  other  months. 

10.  Journeying  across  the  Mexican  plateau  toward 
the  City  of  Mexico,  we  pass  in  turn  over  vast  parched 
plains  and  great  grassy  prairies.  The  eye  is  much 
struck  by  a  kind  of  vegetation  which  is  found  all  over 
the  table-land.  It  consists  of  different  kinds  of  a 
thorny  plant  caUed  the  racfiis  ;  these  are  of  aU  shapes 
and  sizes,  and  some  of  them  are  very  useful.  Wo 
notice  also  many  fields  of  Indian  corn,  for.  this  grain 
forms  the  principal  food  of  the  Mexicans,  and  occasion- 
ally we  pass  a  stock-farm,  or  rancho.  Tlie  houses  strike 
ns  as  quite  peculiar ;  for  they  are  very  low  and  are  built 
of  sun-dried  mud,  called  ado' be.  They  are  covered  ^vith 
tiles,  and  have  no  chimneys,  for  the  winters  are  not  cold 
enough  to  mak^  fires  necessary. 

III.   The  Capital. 

1 1.  When  we  have  made  half  the  journey  across  the 
Mexican  plateau  we  reach  the  City  of  Mexico,  the  capi- 
tal of  the  country.  It  is  no  wonder  that  the  compan- 
ions of  Cortez  were  filled  with  surprise  and  delight 
when  the  ancient  city  (wliich  occupied  nearly  the  site 
of  the  present  capital)  burst  upon  theii-  view,  for  a 
grander  scene  cannot  be  imagined.  Think  of  a  lovely 
oval-sliaped  valley,  dotted  with  gardens,  orange-groves, 

and  sparkling 
lakes,  and  sur- 
rounded by  moun- 
tains glittering  in 
eternal  snow.  Two 
<if  the  peaks  are 
famous  volcanoes, 
and  are  among  the 
loftiest  mountains 
in  North  America. 
The  one  is  called 
Pop  ocat'apetl, 
wliich  means  smok- 
ing mountain,  and 
the  other  Iztacci- 
huatl  [ces-tahl-se-hwatl'],  or  the  woman  iti  white.  Such 
is  tlie  landscajie  amid  which  the  Mexican  capital  rests, 
like  a  picture  in  a  frame. 


[For  Recitation.] 

1.  Jl'hire  is  Mexico  i 

Mexico  is  iu  the  narrow  part  of  North  America, 
south  of  the  United  States. 

Map. — {^V'-f  iini7c  .5:?,)  1.  What  gulf  on  the  east?  — ou  the  west? 
3.  What  country  north  ?  —  south  ? 

2.  What  is  the  nature  of  the  surface  ? 

There  are  low  plains  on  the  coast ;  but  the  most 
of  the  country  is  a  high  table-laud,  on  which  are 
lofty  mountains. 

Map.  —(Sec  page  53.)  1.  Wliat  is  the  principal  mountain-chain  in 
IVIexico?  2.  It  is  a  part  of  what  mountain-system?  Ans.  The  Rocky 
Mountains. 

3.  IFhat  of  the  climate  ? 

The  climate  in  the  lowlands  is  very  hot,  because 
the  country  is  in  or  near  the  Torrid  Zone  ;  but  on 
the  table-land  the  climate  is  temi^erate.  There  are 
only  two  seasons,  —  the  rainy  and  the  dry. 

4.  Jlliat  is  the  capital  of  Mexico  ? 
The  capital  is  the  Git}'  of  Mexico. 

Map. —(•''<■«  J"!5«  53.)  1-  Iu  what  part  of  Mexico  is  the  capital? 
2.  The  two  principal  seaports  are  Vera  Cruz  and  Acapulco  [ak-ah- 
2><n>l'ku] :  on  which  coast  is  Vera  Cruz  ?  —  Acapulco  ? 


street  Scene  in  Mexico. 


LESSON    II. 

MEXICO   (Continued). 


[For  Reading.] 


I.  Products. 

1.  The  plants  and  flowers  of  Mexico  are  very 
numerous  and  very  beautiful.  The  weU-known  dahUa 
and  several  of  the  fuchsias  are  native  to  this  country. 
So  also  is  a  beautiful  convolvidus,  the  root  of  which  fur- 
nishes the  medicine  called  jalap,  —  a  word  derived  from 
Jalapa,  a  town  near  wliich  the  plant  grows  wUd. 

2.  We  have  already  learned  that  the  cactus  species 
is  very  iilentiful.  One  of  the  most  interesting  plants 
of  this  species  is  the  cochineal  cactus,  which  is  much 
cultivated  for  the  sake  of  the  cochineal  insect  which 
feeds  upon  its  leaves.  These  insects  are  scraped  from 
the  plants  into  bags,  killed  by  boiling  water,  and  then 
dried  in  the  sun.  Their  tiny  bodies,  when  rubbed  to 
powder,  yield  a  brilliant  crimson  dye  called  cochineal. 
You  may  see  a  picture  of  cochineal  picking,  on  page  45. 

■3.  Another  valuable  plant  is  the  aga've,  or  American 
aloe,  which  is  very  common  in  Mexico.  Its  leaves, 
which  are  from  six  to  eight  feet  long,  supply  the  natives 
with  covering  for  the  walls  and  roofs  of  their  dwellings  ; 
its  fibers  furnish  a  strong  thread  or  twine  which  is  made 
into  ropes,  la.ssos,  and  nets  ;  its  roots  are  eaten  as  food  ; 
and  from  its  juice  a  hquor  is  made  called  pulque,  of 
which  the  Mexicans  are  very  fond.  It  is  somewhat 
like  cider,  and  when  "  hard  "  enough  it  intoxicates. 

4.  One  of  the  most  useful  trees  of  Mexico  is  the 
cacao-tree,  from  which  cocoa  and  chocolate  are  ob- 
tained. It  produces  a  cucumber-shaped  beny,  six  or 
eight  inches  in  length,  within  which  are  many  seeds 


LANDS   SOUTH   OF   THE   UNITED    STATES. 


47 


about  as  large  as  an  almontl.  At  the  proper  time  the 
fruit  or  berry  is  cut  open,  and  the  seeds,  which  arc  about 
an  inch  long,  arc  taken  out  and  <Iried.  They  are  then 
called  cocoa-shell,  and  in  this  condition  are  shipped  to 
all  parts  of  the  world.  But  before  they  arc  used  the 
seeds  have  to  be  roasted  like  coffee-bemes,  and  then 
crushed  under  a  roller  till  they  become  a  fine  powder. 
In  j)reparing  chocolate  the  powder  is  made  into  a  paste 
by  grinding  between  hot  stones ;  some  spices,  vanilla, 
cinnamon,  etc.,  ■with  a  certain  quantity  of  sugar,  are 
added,  and  then,  while  hot,  the  paste  is  put  in  molds 
to  harden. 

5.  Indian  corn  and  beans  are  cultivated  Ln  aU  parts 
of  Mexico,  and  form  the  principal  food  of  the  people. 
Instead  of  bread  they  have  corn-cakes,  which  they  call 
"  tortillas  "  \tor-teel' yahs'\ ;  these  are  made  of  coarsely 
pounded  corn  steeped  in  boiling  water,  roUed  into  thin 
sheets,  and  baked  before  an  open  fire.  A  national 
dish  consists  of  beans,  called  "frijoles"  \_fre-ho' lays\, 
highly  spiced  with  Chili  pepper-pods. 

II.  Ocoupatious. 

6.  We  must  now  inquire  what  are  the  principal 
occupations  of  the  Mexicans.  Many  people  are  en- 
gaged in  stock-raising,  and  we  find  that  hides  are 
largely  exported.  Many  others  are  engaged  in  farm- 
ing. In  this  pursuit  the  Mexicans  are  greatly  fe- 
vered, for  the  soil  is  rich  and  produces  the  plants 
and  fruits  and  grains  both  of  the  Torrid  and  the 
Temperate  zones.  But  though  the  people  easily  raise 
all  the  corn  and  beans  they  need,  agriculture  is  car- 
ried on  in  a  very  rude  manner. 

7.  The  manufactures  of  the  Mexicans  are  very  few, 
and  consist  chiefly  of  coarse  articles  of  clothing,  leather 
goods,  and  soap ;  hence  they  have  to  import  their  ma- 
chinery, hardware,  cloths,  and  indeed  most  of  the  man- 
ufactiu'ed  articles  they  require. 

8.  Mexico  has  long  been  famous  for  its  mines  of 
gold  and  sUver.  These  were  worked  by  the  natives 
for  centuries  before  the  greedy  Spaniards  seized  the 
country  and  worked  the  mines  for  their  own  benefit. 
Hundreds  of  millions  of  dollars'  worth  of  gold  and 
silver  have  been  taken  from  the  mines,  and  yet  they 
are  still  rich ;  but  the  country  has  been  in  so  unsettled 
a  state  for  many  years  past,  that  the  same  attention  is 
not  now  given  to  mining. 

9.  The  principal  things  which  the  Mexicans  send 
out  in  the  way  of  commerce  are  silver,  copper,  cochi- 
neal, hides,  and  some  medicinal  herbs.  The  trade  of 
the  interior  is  carried  on  by  means  of  pack-mules, 
because  the  roads  are  so  bad  that  scarcely  any  of  them 
are  passable  for  wagons  or  carriages. 

III.  Baces  and  GoveTnment. 

10.  The  population  of  Mexico  is  very  mixed.  We 
may  count  three  principal  classes  :  1.  The  whites  or 
crefoles,    who    are    chiefly   descended   from    the    early 


Spanish  settlers.  These  are  few  in  number,  but  are 
the  aristocracy  of  the  country.  2.  Indians  of  the 
co[)per- colored  race,  who  form  more  than  half  the 
po]julation  :  those  generally  live  in  villages  and  follow 
farming,  ami  they  arc  a  poor,  miserable,  ignorant  peo- 
ple. 3.  The  mixed  races,  called  mesti'zos :  they  are  a 
sort  of  middle  class,  and  are  planters,  merchants,  sol- 
diers, artisans,  etc. 

11.  The  Mexican  government  is  a  republic  like  our 
own  ;  but  the  people  do  not  enjoy  peace  and  liberty  as 
we  do,  for  the  laws  are  very  often  not  heeded  at  all. 
In  many  parts  it  is  dangerous  to  travel  on  account  of 
robbers.  In  Mexico  there  are  few  schools,  newspapers, 
telegraphs,  or  railroads ;  hence  it  cannot  be  said  that 
the  people  in  general  are  highly  civilized. 

IV.  Character  of  the  People. 

12.  The  Mexicans  love  dancing  to  the  music  of  the 
guitar ;  they  are  also  very  fond  of  bull-tights  and  cock- 
fights. Everybody  smokes,  and  even  the  ladies  pufl' 
their  cigarettoes.  The  common  head-dress  of  a  woman 
is  a  scarf  or  mantle  instead  of  a  bonnet.  The  ladies  of 
the  better  class  are  very  handsome,  but  they  have  very 
little  education.  The  gentlemen  wear  a  gay  dress,  con- 
sisting of  a  velvet  jacket,  profusely  embroidered  with 
gold  and  silver,  and  pantaloons  open  from  the  knee 
down  and  set  with  large  buttons.  With  their  broad- 
brimmed  sombreros,  scarlet  sashes,  and  jingling  spurs, 
and  mounted  on  their  spirited  little  horses,  they  look 
like  very  dashing  fellows  indeed ;  but,  for  all  that,  do 
you  think  they  are  nearly  as  useful  beings  as  one  of  our 
honest  farmers  or  mechanics  ! 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  IVhat  are  the  vegetable  producti  of  Mexico  ] 

The  lowlands  of  Mexico  yield  tropical  plants, 
as  coffee,  eaca'o,  sugar,  cotton,  indigo,  etc. ;  the 
table-land  yields  the  plants  of  the  Temperate 
Zone,  with  many  peculiar  plants,  as  the  cactus, 
etc. 

2.  IVliat  are  the  principal  occtipations  of  tlu  Mexicans  ? 

The  principal  occupations  are  agi-icnlture,  stock- 
raising,  and  mining ;  but  all  industries  are  in  a 
backward  state. 

3.  IJ'liat  of  the  population  of  Mexico  ? 

More  than  half  the  people  are  Indians  ;  the  rest 
are  Creoles  and  mixed  races. 

4.  How  is  Mexico  governed  ? 

The  Mexican  government  is  a  republic  like  that 
of  the  United  States ;  but  the  laws  are  not  well 
heeded,  and  often  there  are  revolutions. 

5.  Arc  the  people  civilized  ' 

The  people  of  Mexico  generally  are  not  edu- 
cated; they  have  few  manufactures,  railroads,  or 
books :  hence  they  are  not  a  highly  civilized 
people. 


48 


NORTH   AMEEICA. 


LESSON    III. 


CENTEAL    AMERICA. 


[For    Reading.] 


I.  Situation  and  Divisions. 

1.  To  the  south  of  Mexico,  as  we  see  by  looking  at 
the  map  of  North  America,  the  land  e.xtends  quite  un- 
evenly. First  it  narrows,  then  it  broadens,  and  again 
it  tapers  till  it  is  no  more  than  a  naiTow  neck.  This  is 
called  the  Isthmus  of  Panama,  and  here  North  America 
ends  and  South  America  begins.  Now  the  land  lying 
between  Mexico  and  tlie  Isthmus  of  Panama  is  called 
Central  America. 

2.  This  region  is  not  all  one  country  belonging  to 
one  people.  It  is  divided  between  five  different  gov- 
ernments, each  of  which  is  a  republic  like  Mexico.  But 
these  are  not  large  countries,  for  the  whole  of  Central 
America  is  not  as  large  as  California,  and  all  the  people 
in  tliem  put  together  are  not  more  than  half  as  many 
people  as  there  are  in  the  State  of  New  York. 

3.  The  people  of  the  five  countries  of  Central  Amer- 
ica are  like  the  Mexicans  in  origin  and  mixture,  in  lan- 
guage, in  religion,  and  in  education,  —  or  ratlier  in 
want  of  education. 

II.  Nature  of  the  Country. 

4.  Central  America  resembles  Mexico  very  much. 
It  has  the  same  low  plains  along  the  sea-shore  on 
either  side,  the  same  high  table-lands  in  the  interior, 
and  these  table-lands  are  crossed  by  many  lofty  moun- 
tains. The  climate  in  the  low  plains  is  very  hot  and 
unhealthful ;  but  on  the  high  lands  the  weather  is 
balmy  and  spring-like. 

5.  Central  America  is  a  country  of  volcanoes  with 
ever-smoking  craters,  and  of  terrible  earthquakes  which 
often  bring  destruction  to  whole  cities.  We  read  in 
history  some  awful  examples  of  this.  In  the  year  1854 
the  city  of  San  Salvador',  in  the  republic  of  the  same 
name,  was  thrown  to  the  ground;  every  building  except 
one,  and  nearly  five  thousand  persons,  perished  in  the 
ruins. 

III.  Columbus  and  Central  America. 

6.  It  is  interesting  to  learn  that  Central  America  was 
first  discovered  and  explored  by  Columbus.  This  was 
ten  years  after  he  first  touched  land  in  the  New  World. 
He  had  by  that  time  found  that  there  was  a  great  con- 
tinent which  stopped  him  from  reaching  the  true  India; 
but  lie  tliouglit  that  if  lie  sailed  southward  from  the 
island  of  Jamaica  he  would  come  to  a  strait  that  would 
let  his  ships  pass  through.  He  called  this  passage  the 
Gates  of  Ocean.  Well,  lie  set  sail ;  but  of  course,  as 
you  see  by  looking  at  the  map  of  North  America,  he 
found  no  strait,  but  in  place  of  it  this  isthrriMs,  which 
we  call  Central  America.  He  coasted  along  this  region 
for  a  long  distance,  but  could  find  no  way  through. 


7.  So  Columbus  did  not  unbar  the  Gates  of  Ocean. 
Still  you  will  see  by  looking  at  the  map  that  he  reached 
the  place  where  America  is  the  very  narrowest,  —  the 
very  nan-owest  in  the  whole  distance  of  9,000  miles 
from  the  frozen  sea  on  the  north  to  the  stormy  waters 
that  dash  against  Cape  Horn  on  tlie  soutli.  A  railroad 
has  been  built  across  the  isthmus  from  Aspinwall  to 
Panama.  This  is  the  route  taken  by  many  passengers 
in  going  from  New  York  to  California,  and  also  the 
route  by  which  large  quantities  of  goods  are  sent.  Ves- 
sels that  go  all  the  way  from  New  York  to  San  Fran- 
cisco have  to  go  round  Cape  Horn  ;  some  day  a  water- 
highway  —  a  ship  canal  —  will  be  made  across  Central 
America,  and  then  vessels  sailing  from  New  York  to 
San  Francisco  wUl  save  ten  thousand  miles. 

IV.   Countries  and  their  Products. 

8.  Guatemala  [(/wah-te-mah'la],  the  most  northerly 
and  the  largest  state  of  Central  America,  is  a  very 
beautiful  country.  A  large  quantity  of  cochineal  is 
made  here.  This  is  the  principal  article  which  the 
people  send  out  by  way  of  trade. 

9.  Hondu'ras  is  celebrated  for  its  forests  of  mahogany 
and  other  valuable  woods.  The  mahogany-tree  is  very 
large  and  has  splendid  foliage.  It  may  be  called  the 
king  of  the  forest.  It  is  a  very  slow-growing  tree, 
and  its  increase  during  the  whole  lifetime  of  a  man 
can  hardly  be  seen. 


Getting  out  Mahoganjr 


10.  The  mahogany-cutters  of  Honduras  generally  go 
in  parties  or  gangs  of  about  fifty  men,  with  a  captain 
or  hunter  at  the  head  of  each.     The  business  of  the 


LANDS   SOUTH   OF  THE  UNITED    STATES. 


49 


hunter  is  to  search  out  the  mahogany-trees  fit  for  cut- 
ting. When  a  good  place  has  been  found  the  ax-nien 
build  huts  for  themselves  and  go  to  work.  After  the 
trees  are  cut  down  they  are  sawed  into  logs  of  vari- 
ous lengths,  and  squared  by  the  ax.  These  are  put 
on  trucks  which  are  drawn  by  several  yoke  of  oxen, 
and  carried  to  the  nearest  river.  Then  when  the 
rains  come  to  swell  the  streams  the  logs  are  floated 
down  to  the  sea,  and  are  Sent  in  ships  to  various  parts 
of  the  world. 

11.  You  may  notice  to  the  nortli  of  the  Bay  of  Hon 
duras  a  small  strip  of  country.  It  goes  by  the  name  of 
Balize  [ba-leez'^,  or  British  Honduras,  because  it  belongs 
to  the  English.  This  part  of  the  country  is  inhabited 
chiefly  by  negi-oes,  who  are  paid  by  English  merchants 
to  get  out  mahogany  timber.  The  ordinary  houses  in  the 
town  of  Balize  are  built  on  piles  of  mahogany  timber. 

12.  San  Salvador  is  interesting  chiefly  because  it 
produces  a  large  amount  of  indigo.  Indigo  is  used 
in  the  laundry  and  is  also  greatly  used  in  dyeing  cotton 
and  woolen  goods.  It  is  made  from  a  shrub  called 
the  indigo-plant.  This  is  cut  and  placed  in  layers  in 
a  large  vessel  covered  with  water ;  different  things  arc 
then  done  to  it  tUl  a  blue  sediment  is  left,  and  this 
is  made  up  into  cakes  and  sold. 

13.  The  people  of  Nicaragua  are  nearl}'  all  Indians 
or  half-breeds  ;  they  make  their  liveliliood  by  shipping 
various  woods  and  drugs  that  grow  in  their  country. 
The  largest  city  is  named  Leon ;  it  has  many  line 
buildings.  The  name  of  the  most  southerly  of  the  hve 
countries  of  Central  America  is  Costa  Rica  [re'X-a]. 
This  means  "  rich  coast."  A  very  excellent  article  of 
coffee  is  produced  liere. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  IVhere  is  Central  Americi '? 

Central  America  occupies  the  narrow  country 
south  of  Mexico. 

Map.  — (5^c  page  52.)  1.  What  waters  east  of  Centi-al  America?  — 
west  ?  2.  What  country  north?  3-  What  is  the  name  of  the  narrow 
neck  of  land  that  connects  it  with  South  America  ? 

2.  What  kind  of  a  co^mtry  is  it .' 

It  resembles  Mexico,  having  the  low,  hot  plains 
on  the  coast,  and  lofty  table-lands  in  the  interior. 
It  is  often  visited  by  violent  earthquakes. 

3.  JIow  is  a  divided  ? 

It  is  divided  into  four  countries,  —  Guatemala, 
Honduras,  San  Salvador,  Nicaragua,  and  Costa 
Eica. 

4.  IFhat  of  the  people  ? 

The  people  consist  principally  of  Indians,  Span- 
ish whites,  negroes,  and  mixed  races. 

5.  For  what  products  are  these  countries  noted  ? 

Guatemala  for  cochineal,  Honduras  for  mahog- 
any, San  Salvador  for  indigo,  and  Costa  Eica  for 
cofl'ee. 


6.  What  of  the  governments  of  the  five  Central  American 
states  ? 

They  are  all  republics,  like  Mexico. 

Map.  — {See  pa(ie  52.)  1.  The  largest  city  in  Central  America  Is  New 
Guatemala:  where  is  it?  2.  The  capital  of  what  republic  has  the  same 
name  as  the  republic  itself?  3.  Of  which  country  is  Managua  the 
capital? 


LESSON    IV. 


THE    WEST    INDIES. 


[For  Reading.] 
I.   Situation. 

1.  We  leave  the  mainland  of  America  and  we  .sail 

among  the  tropical  isles.     A  sky  of  cloudless  azure,  a 

sea  of  brilliant  blue,  the  air  sweet  with  spicy  smells 

wafted  from  sunny  islands  where  the  splendid   palm 

waves,  and  where  groves  of  orange-trees,  bananas,  and 

pineapples  greet  the  eye. 


Scene  In  the  West  Indies. 

2.  These  islands  are  called  the  West  Indies.  They 
were  so  called  bj'  Columbus,  who  thought,  when  he 
reached  San  Salvador  and  knelt  upon  the  ground  in 
prayer  and  set  up  the  flag  of  Spain,  that  he  had  reached 
the  outlying  western  islantls  that  fringed  the  shores  of 
India.  Sometimes  they  are  called  the  Antilles  [ant-eel']. 
This  name  means  "  opposite  isles,"  because  they  are 
opposite  the  mainland  of  America.  You  may  have 
seen  or  heard  the  expression  "  Queen  of  the  Antilles." 
By  this  you  must  understand  Cuba,  which  is  the  largest 
and  finest  of  the  West  India  Islands. 

3.  Notice  these  islands  on  the  map.  A  few  are 
(juite  large,  while  others  are  small.  You  see  that 
they  stretch  in  a  sort  of  curve  from  Florida  to  the 
mouth  of  the  Orino'co  Eiver.  Do  they  not  look  like 
stepping-stones  from  North  America  to  South  America  1 

II.   Climate. 

4.  Are  the  West  Indies  in  the  hot  belt  of  the  earth, 
or  the  cold  belt  1  Of  course  they  are  in  the  hot  belt, 
for  they  lie  near  the  Equator.  You  may  think,  then, 
that  the  weather  in  these  islands  mu.st  be  burninc;  hot. 


50 


Is^ORTH   AMEEICA. 


But  tliis  is  not  so ;  for  on  most  of  them  there  are 
lofty  mountains,  and  these  highland  parts  have  a 
balmy  climate.  There  is  another  reason  why  the 
weather  is  pleasant.  These  islands  are  set  in  the 
midst  of  the  ocean,  and  the  people  get  refreshing  sea- 
breezes. 

5.  Sometimes  the  breezes  are  too  refreshing  ;  for  the 
West  Indies  are  in  a  part  of  the  world  where  nature 
brews  awful  wind-storms,  called  hurricanes.  It  is  said 
that  these  winds  are  so  named  because  they  hurry 
away  or  carry  off  the  sugar-ca?ie  growing  in  the  fields. 
Often  they  cause  fearful  destruction,  uprooting  crops 
and  blowing  down  liouses  and  ingulfing  ships. 

6.  There  is  no  winter  in  tlie  West  Indies.  The  peo 
pie  there  never  see  snow  fall,  and  they  have  no  ice 
except  what  is  brought  there  in  ships.  Instead  of  oui 
four  seasons  they  have  two  seasons,  —  the  rainy  and 
the  dry.  The  rainy  season  is  in  our  summer  and 
autumn ;  during  the  other  months  scarcely  any  lam 
falls.  As  these  islands  have  both  continuous  summti 
heat  and  great  abundance  of  moisture,  you  can  guess  at 
the  kind  of  vegetation  that  grows  there.  It  consists  ot 
palms  and  tree-ferns,  the  sugar-cane  and  tobacco-plant 
oranges,  bananas,  and  the  other  plants  and  fruits  th  it 
ripen  only  in  climes  where  the  sunbeams  fall  warm  il 
the  year  round. 

III.  Inhabitants. 

7.  What  people  live  in  the  West  Indies?  Do  tlitse 
islands  all  form  one  country  %  Let  us  see.  You  know 
that  when  Coliunbus  first  visited  these  islands  they 
were  inhabited  by  a  peaceful,  gentle-hearted  race  of 
bronze-colored,  half-naked  people,  whom  he  called 
Indians.  But  the  Spaniards  came  and  settled  on  the 
islands.  They  were  cruel  task-masters.  They  made 
slaves  of  the  natives,  and  forced  them  to  work  so  hard 
in  the  mines  and  on  the  plantations  that  in  a  few 
generations  they  all  died.  Then  tlie  Spaniards  brought 
.shiploads  of  negroes  whom  they  stole  from  Africa  and 
kept  as  slaves  to  work  for  them.  And  to  the  present 
day  the  blacks  form  three  fourths  of  the  population  of 
the  West  Indies. 

8.  At  fir.st  all  the  islands  of  the  West  Indies  belonged 
to  Spain  ;  but  after  a  time  some  stronger  nations  took 
certain  of  the  islands  and  made  them  colonies  of  their 
own.  Thus  England  took  the  large  island  of  Jamaica 
and  a  great  many  of  the  smaller  islands.  So  France, 
too,  got  a  share.  And  on  one  of  the  islands,  named 
Hay'ti,  the  blacks  last  century  grew  tired  of  being 
under  foreign  masters  ;  so  they  set  up  a  government  of 
their  own,  or  rather  two  goveriunents,  and  these  flourish 
to  tlie  present  day. 

9.  Now  we  understand  who  are  the  people  and  what 
are  the  countries  of  the  West  Indies.  All  the  islands, 
except  Hayti,  are  held  as  colonies  by  various  nations  of 
Europe.  By  far  the  greater  number  of  the  people  are 
blacks.     On  the  islands  which  the  Spaniards  own  the 


blacks  are  slaves.  Of  the  whites  the  most  part  are 
people  of  Spanish  descent,  though  there  are  English 
settlers  in  the  islands  held  by  Britain,  and  French  set- 
tlers in  those  held  by  France.  There  are  also  in  the 
various  islands  many  mulattoes,  and  other  persons  of 
mixed  blood.  And  in  Cuba  there  are  quite  a  number 
of  Chinese  laborers,  called  coolies. 

IV.   West  India  Products. 

10.  Let  us  now  see  wliat  arc  tlio  productions  wliich 
the  people  of  the  West  Indies  raise  and  sell  by  way  of 
trade.  These  are  very  valuable  and  important,  and  we 
are  using  some  of  them  every  day.     Perhaps  you  may 


have  seen  on  grocers'  stores  the  sign  "  West  India 
Goods."  Tliis  is  a  name  for  certain  kinds  of  groceries, 
such  as  sugar,  molasses,  ginger,  allspice,  indigo,  and 
other  articles.  Now  all  these  are  grown  or  made  in 
tlu^  West  Indies. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  Of  what  do  the  JFest  Indies  consist  '? 

The  West  Indies  consist  of  several  large  islands 
and  various  groups  of  islands  lying  between  North 
and  South  America. 

Map.  —  {Sa^  ■iKinp.''>'2.)  1.  What  ocean  north  ?  2.  What  sea  is  partly 
enclosed  between  the  West  Indies  and  South  America?  3.  In  what 
zone  are  most  of  these  islands  ? 

2.  Illiut  is  their  climate  ? 

The  climate  is  tropical,  marked  by  great  lieat 
and  moisture.  There  are  but  two  seasons,  —  the 
rainy  and  the  dry. 

3.  Uliat  are  some  of  the  commercial  products  ? 

Some  of  the  commercial  products  are  sugar, 
tobacco,  coffee,  and  cotton ;  oranges,  bananas,  and 
pineapples  ;  ginger,  allspice,  and  indigo. 

4.  What  of  the  popidat.ion  ? 

The  white  population  consists  of  Spaniards, 
English,  and  French,  with  their  descendants ; 
three  fourths  of  the  people  are  Blacks ;  there 
are  also  many  people  of  mixed  descent. 


LANDS    SOUTH    OF  THE    UNITED    STx\.TES. 


61 


LESSON    V. 

THE    LARGER    ISLANDS. 


I.   Cuba. 

L  Tlie  i.-^land  t 
of  sugar.  It  is  s 
world  is  made 
there.  In  tlie  tirst 
chapter  of  this 
book  you  read 
.some  account  of 
iiow.sugaris  made. 
In  the  picture  here 
given  you  see  a 
sugar  -  plantation, 
and  the  men  cut- 
ting the  canes, 
bu  Hilling  them 
up,  and  hauling 
them  off  to  the 
mill  to  be  crushed. 
Tiiere  are  hun- 
dreds of  great 
sugar-  plantations 
all  over  the  island 
of  Cuba ;  and  if 
you  were  to  visit 
the  seaport  of  Ha- 
vana, you  would 
see  the  wharves 
piled   high    with 

huge   hogsheads  of  sugar  ready   to   be  shi| 
United  States  and  other  parts  of  the  world. 

2.  In  Havana  you  would  also  have  pointed  out  to  !  Havana  rest  tlie  bones 
you  very  large  factories  where  million.s  of  cigars  are  I  discoverer  of  America, 
made  every  year.     You  may  have 
heard   the  expression  "  a  fragrant 
Havana."     This  means  a  Havana 
cigar,   for  the  finest   cigars   which 


oranges.  Tliese  are  of  the  finest  quality.  Bananas  are 
another  fruit  which  we  receive  from  Cuba  and  other 
West  India  Islands.  The  Ijanana  is  a  great  article  of 
cultivation,  not  only  in  these  islands,  but  in  all  parts 
of  the  hot  belt  of  America.  It  is,  in  fact,  a  principal 
article  of  food  there.  The  people  Ihid  it  very  eco- 
^^^,^    nomical  to  grow, 


■d  t( 


the  i  bor  is  guarded   Iiy  a 
I  will  interest   vou   t(j 


because  it  pro- 
duces so  plenti- 
fully. The  same 
space  of  ground 
which  will  yield 
only  ^/t/rt/ypounds 
of  wheat  or  one 
hundred  pounds 
I  if  jiotatoes  will 
afford  four  thou- 
sand pounds  of 
bananas. 

-1.     Havana    is 
tlu!      capital      of 
Cuba,    and    here 
lives    the   person 
who  governs   tHe 
island  f.ir  the  king 
..f   Spain  :    he    is 
rallcl     the     Ca],- 
tain-(ieneral.       It 
is     a      hanil.siinie 
city.       The      en- 
trance to  the  har- 
fortress  named   Jloro  Castle.     It 
know   that  in   the    Cathedral   of 
f  Columbus,    the    illustrious 


gentlemen  smoke  are  made  there. 
Perhaps  you  may  think  that  as  this 
tobacco  all  passes  off  in  .smoke,  it 
is  no  great  matter.  But  I  am  going 
to  tell  you  a  curious  fact.  We,  the 
people  of  the  United  States,  spend 
every  year  more  money  on  cigars 
than  we  do  on  books.  And  another 
thing  of  importance  to  remember  : 
we  pay  more  money  to  the  mer- 
chants of  Cuba  for  sugar  and  cigars 
and  other  things  than  we  do  to 
those  of  any  other  country  (except 
Great  Britain)  for  all  the  goods  we 
buy. 

3.  We  shall  not  forget  that  we 
also  receive  tropical  fruits  from 
Cuba  when   we   think  of   Havana 


5.  The  island  of  Porto  Rico  [rtU-o] 
also  belongs  to  Si)ain.  Like  Cuba, 
it  is  inhabited  by  Sjianiards  and  ne- 
groes, and  produces  the  same  arti- 
cles for  which  (.'uba  is  noted. 


The  Banana-Tn 


II.  Jamaica. 

li.  The  island  of  Jamaica  belongs 
to  the  English,  who  took  it  from 
the  Spaniards  more  than  two  hun- 
dred years  ago.  The  wealthy  peo- 
ple are  English  plantei*,  who  live 
in  fine  style.  These  are  not  very 
numerous,  however  ;  and  there  are 
only  about  twelve  thousand  whites 
on  the  whole  island.  The  negroes 
and  mulattoes  number  half  a  mil- 
lion. These  were  once  slaves,  but 
many  yeare  ago  the  British  Parlia- 
ment made  them  all  free.  The 
capital  and  principal  city  is  named 
Kingst'in.     There  are  many  sugar- 


52 


NUKTH    AMEEICA. 


plantations  in  Jamaica.  Besides  sugar,  the  people 
make  large  quantities  of  molasses,  which  is  a  liquid 
drained  from  brown  sugar  through  holes  in  the  casks. 
They  also  make  a  great  deal  of  Jamaica  rum,  which 
is  distilled  either  from  sugar  or  molasses. 

7.  The  fragrant  pimento-tree  grows  in  great  abun- 
dance in  Jamaica.  The  unripe  berries  of  this  plant, 
dried  in  the  sun,  form  what  we  caU  allspice,  or  Jamaica 
pepper.  Another  condiment  which  we  owe  to  this 
island  is  Jamaica  ginger.  It  consists  of  the  dried  root 
of  a  rush-like  plant,  and  is  much  used  in  cooking  and 
as  medicine. 

III.  Hayti. 

8.  The  island  of  Hayti  was  discovered  in  \VJ'2  l.)y 
Columbus,  who  called  it  Hisjianio'la,  or  Little  Spain. 
Here,  at  Isabella,  was  founded  the  first  Spanish  colony 
in  the  New  Worlil.  It  is  a  country  of  splendid  forests 
and  rich  tropical  \erdure ;  but  it  is  in  a  backward 
state. 

9.  This  island  is  peopled  by  the  Blacks,  who  rule 
themselves.  They  have  two  republics,  —  one  called 
the  Republic  of  Hayti  and  the  other  the  Domini'can 
Republic.  The  soil  is  so  fertile  that  all  kinds  of 
plants  grow  easily.  But  agriculture  is  carried  on  in 
a  very  rude  way.  The  principal  articles  that  are 
shipped  from  Hayti  are  coffee,  sugar,  cacao,  cotton, 
and  tobacco. 

IV.  Other  Islands. 

10.  We  have  now  read  about  four  islands,  —  Cuba, 
Hayti,  Jamaica,  and   Pc^to  Rico.      These  islands  are 


quite  the  largest  in  the  West  Indies,  and  on  this 
account  are  often  called  the  Greater  Antilles.  There 
are  more  than  a  thousand  other  smaller  islands  and 
islets.  These  belong  to  various  European  nations. 
There  is  mnch  that  is  interesting  about  these  islands, 
but  you  must  find  this  information  in  books  of  travel. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  four  larfie  islirnds  uiy  cuHrd  the  "  Ch'eater  An- 
tilles "  .?        ' 

The  Greater  Antilles  are  Cuba,  Hayti,  Porto 
Eico,  and  Jamaica. 

H\»p.  —  l,Sec  mapbdou:)  1.  Whicli  is  the  largest  island?  2.  What 
circle  just  north  of  Cuba?  3.  Meastire  by  the  scale  of  miles  the 
length  of  this  island.    4.  Is  it  as  large  as  your  State  or  larger? 

2.  Fm-  H-hat  arc  Cuba  and  Porto  Bico  noted  ' 

They  are  notetl  for  the  production  of  suuar, 
tobacco,  and  tropical  fruits. 

3.  To  whom  do  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico  belong  ? 
To  the  Spaniards. 

4.  mat  is  the  capital  ? 

The  capital  of  Cuba  is  Havana. 

5.  For  wh-at  is  Jatnaica  noted  ? 

Jamaica  is  noted  for  the  production  of  sugar, 
molasses,  rum,  allspice,  and  ginger. 

6.  To  whom  does  it  belong  ? 
To  the  English. 

7.  JFhat  governments  are  in  Hayti  ? 

In  Hayti  are  two  negro  republics. 

Map, — (See  irmphdow.)  1.  Where  is  Jamaica?  2.  In  what  direc- 
tion from  Cuba  is  Hayti  ?    3.  Which  is  the  most  eastern  of  the  Greater 


Mexico. 
Centhal  Amekica, 

AND  THE 

AVest  Indies. 

SCALE.  1  Inch^'jm  Miles 


TOBAYAG 

CEXTKAX<^r^v-E8lCA 


v>. 


;  lioniritudp  from 


A  y^  ^ 


THE    UNITED    STATES. 


53 


THE    UNITED    STATES, 


GENERAL    DESCRIPTION. 


LESSON    I. 

WHERE    OUR    COUNTRY     IS. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  Why  is  Our  Country  called  "  The  United  States  "  ? 

Our  Country  is  called  "  The  United  States  "  be- 
cause it  consists  of  a  number  of  States  united  under 
one  general  government. 

2.  JFhat  part  of  Xortli  America  does  Our  Country  occupy  ' 
The  United  States  occupies  the  middle  part  of 

North  America,  and  extends  from  the  Atlantic  to 
the  Pacific  Ocean. 

3.  nimt  country  on  tlie  north,  and  xchat  other  country  to 
the  south  of  the  United  States  ? 

North  of  the  United  States  is  the  Dominion  of 
Canada,  and  south  of  it  is  Mexico. 

4.  IFhich  parts  of  its  houmdary  are  formed  by  the  ocean  ? 
The  Atlantic  Ocean  forms  the  whole  eastern 

boundary,  and  the  Pacific  Ocean  the  whole  western 


boundary.  About  one  half  of  the  southern  Ixjuu- 
dary  is  formed  by  the  (iulf  of  Mexico,  which  is  a 
part  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

5.  iriiat  can  you  say  of  the  sea-coast  of  the  United  States  ? 

The  long  line  of  sea-coast  is  indented  with  many 
bays,  gulfs,  and  harbors. 


To  Draw  the  Outline  Map. 

Te.^cheu'.s  Note.  —  In  the  case  of  young  pupils  the  teacher 
should  show  them,  by  reference  to  the  map  of  the  United  States 
on  the  ne.xt  two  pages,  or  to  a  wall-map  of  the  United  States, 
that  the  sketch  given  below  i.-*  such  an  outline  or  skeleton  of  the 
United  States  as  they  might  draw  on  their  slates  if  they  left  off 
everything  except  the  boundary  lines. 

The  judicious  teacher  will,  of  couree,  not  impose  on  pupils  the 
task  of  drawing  this  at  once.  It  should  Vie  tiiken  up  only  in 
connection  with  the  text.  Thus  during  the  week  spent  on  Xew 
England,  pupils  should  learn  to  draw  the  New  England  coast ; 
and  so  with  the  Jliddle  States,  etc.,  till  the  entire  boundary  circuit 
of  the  United  States  has  been  made.  It  will  be  well  at  the  same 
time  for  the  teaclier  to  begin  on  the  blackboaid  a  skeleton-map 
on  a  large  scale,  to  be  filled  up  as  the  lessons  advance,  and  made 
tbe  ba-sis  of  suitable  questioning. 


Ontllne  Map  showing  the  Coafit-Llne  and  Boundaries  of  tbe  United  States. 


THE    UNITED   STATES. 


A, 


•  View  of  the  Surface  of  the  United  States 


LESSON    I  I. 
DIVISIONS     OF     OUR    COUNTRV. 

[For  Recitation.: 

1.  What  are  the  principal  mmmtains  of  the  United  States  ? 
The    principal    mouutaius    are   the   Alleghany 

Mouutaius  in  the  East,  and  the  Rocky  ani^l  Sierra 
[sc-ai/ra]  Nevada  Mountains  in  the  West. 

2.  JVhat  three  great  natural  divisions  of  the  United  States 
are  made  by  the  Alleghany  and  Rocky  Mountains  ? 

The  Alleghany  and  Rocky  Mountains  separate 
the  United  States  into  three  great  divisions, — 
tlie  Atlantic  Slope,  Pacific  Slope,  and  Mississippi 
Valley. 

3.  What  is  included  in  the  Atlantic  Slope  .? 

The  Atlantic  Slope  includes  all  the  land  sloping 
from  the  tops  of  the  Alleghany  Mountains  to  the 
Atlantic  Ocean. 

4.  Into  what  do  the.  rivers  in  this  division  ftmv  ? 

The  rivers  in  this  division  How  into  the  Atlantic 
Ocean. 

5.  What  is  included  in  the  Pacific  Slope  ? 

The  Pacific  Slope  includes  all  the  land  sloping 
from  the  Rocky  Mountains  to  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

6.  Into  what  do  the  rivers  in  this  division  flow  '. 

Most  of  the  rivers  in  this  division  flow  into  the 
Pacific  Ocean. 

7.  What  is  included  in  the  Mississip2n  Valley  ? 

The  Mississippi  Valley  includes  the  great  region 
between  the  Alleghany  and  the  Rocky  Mountains. 


Map  Exercise.  —  1.  Compare  map  given  above  with 
the  map  of  the  United  Sfaites  (pages  54,  55),  and  point  out 
the  Alleghany  Mountains.  2.  Are  these  mountains  in  the 
eastern  or  we.stern  part  of  Our  Country  ?  3.  Point  to  the 
Rocky  Mountain.s.  4.  Point  to  the  Sierra  Nevada  Moun- 
tains. 5.  AVhich  are  farthest  we.st.  the  Rocky  or  the  Sierra 
Nevada  Mountains  ?  6.  Point  to  the  great  Mississippi  Val- 
lev.  7.  What  mountains  on  the  east  of  it  ? — on  the  west 
of  it  ? 


LESSON    III. 
GREAT    RIVERS     OP     THE    UNITED     STATES. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  Describe  the  greatest  river  of  the  United  States. 

The  Mississippi,  the  greatest  river  of  the  United 
States,  rises  in  Lake  Itasca,  in  the  Central  Plain  of 
North  America,  and  flows  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
receiving  in  its  course  many  large  tributaries. 

2.  How  are  the  other  principal  rivers  of  the  United  States 
divided  ? 

They  are  divided  into  four  clas.ses :  1.  The  riv- 
ers flowing  from  the  Alleghany  Mountains.into  the 
Atlantic  Ocean ;  2.  The  rivers  flowing  from  the 
Alleghany  Mountains  into  the  Mississippi ;  3.  The 
rivers  flowing  from  the  Rocky  Mountains  into  the 
Mississippi ;  and  4.  The  rivers  flowing  from  the 
Rocky  Mountains  into  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

Map  Exercise.  —  1.  The  following  are  six  large  rivers 
flowing  from  the  Alleghanies  into  the  Atlantic  Ocean  : 
the  Connecticut,  the  Hudson,  Susquehanna,  Potomac, 
James,   and   Savannah   rivere.      Tell   by   looking  on  the 


THE  i;xitj:d  states. 


map  of  the  United  States  in  what  State  each  empties  into 
the  Atlantic.  See  how  many  of  the.se  rivers  you  can  find 
in  the  bird's-eye  view  of  surface  on  the  previous*  pagf,  and 
on  the  river  map  given  below. 

2.  The  largest  river  flowing  from  the  Alleghany  Moun- 
tains into  the  Mississippi  is  the  Ohio  :  point  it  out  on  the 
map  of  tlie  United  States,  on  the  bird's-eye  view,  and  on 
the  river  map.  Name  three  of  the  largest  tri1>utaries  of 
the  Ohio. 

3.  The  largest  tributaries  of  the  Mississippi  flowing  from 
the  Rocky  Mountains  are  the  Missouri,  Red,  and  Arkansas 
rivers.  'Trace  them  on  the  three  maps.  Name  any  large 
tributaries  of  eacli  of  these  rivers. 

4.  The  Rio  Grande  flows  from  the  Rocky  Mountains  : 
where  is  its  mouth  ? 

5.  The  largest  rivers  flowing  from  the  Rocky  Mountains 
into  the  Pacific  Ocean  are  the  Columbia  and  Colunido. 
Trace  the  course  of  each  on  the  different  maps. 


LESSON    IV. 


CLIMATE    AND    OCCUPATIONS. 


1.    Uliat  of  the  diniale  nf  Our  Hountnj  ? 

Our  Country  is  iu  the  Temperate  Zone  and  has 
a  temperate  climate.  In  the  northern  part  the 
winters  are  Ions  ami  colil,  but  in  tlie  soutliern  part 
snow  seldom  falls. 


2.  ll'hal  of  agriculture  in  the  United  States  ' 
Agriculture  is  largely  can-ied  on.  The  farm- 
products  in  tlie  North  are  grain,  fruits,  and  vege- 
tables ;  in  the  Soutli  are  cotton,  sugar,  rice,  and 
tobacco.  All  parts  of  the  country  raise  great  num- 
bers of  horses,  i^attle,  sheep,  and  hogs. 

3.  What  of  mining  ! 

In  the  mountains  of  tlie  Atlantic  Slojic  Ihcn^  are 
rich  mines  of  coal  and  iron ;  in  the  mountains  of 
the  Pacific  Slope  are  mines  of  gold,  silver",  and 
quicksilver.  In  the  uigioii  near  the  Great  Lakes 
are  mines  of  copper  and  lead. 

4.  ]\'Jiat  nf  manufacturing  ? 

^Manufacturing  is  most  largely  carried  on  in  the 
ea.stcrn  section  of  our  country. 

5.  IVhat  of  commerce  f 

The  United  States  carries  on  an  immense  com- 
merce. The  leading  exports  are  cotton,  tobacco, 
beef  and  pork,  petroleum,  gold  and  silver.  The 
leading  imports  are  cotton,  woolen,  silk,  and  linen 
goods,  fancy  goods,  and  groceries,  including  coft'ee, 
tea,  etc. 

6.  Hon-  mny  the  United  Stntra  lie  conveniently  divided  1 
The  United  States  may  be  dix'ided  into  five  sec- 
tions, —  New   England,   the    Middle   States,   the 
SoTithern   States,   tlie   Western  or  Central  States, 
;ni  1  llif  Tfnckv  ^Inmiiain  or  racilic  States. 


Outline  Map  showing  the  Rivers  of  the  United  States. 


NfeW  ENGLAND. 


59 


NEW   ENGLAND 


New  England  Coast  and  Mountain  St.L:uLr:, 

LESSON    I. 
THE   NEW  ENGLAND  STATES. 

[For  Reading.] 
I.  The  First  Explorer. 

1.  More  tlian  two  hundred  and 
fifty  years  ago  the  famous  Captain 
John  Smith,  whom  you  have  read 
about  in  your  histories  as  being  the 

chief  man  in  settling  Virginia,  made  a  voyage  from 
England  to  a  then  almost  unknown  jsart  of  tlie  coast 
of  America  lying  far  to  the  north  of  Virginia.  He 
wrote  that  he  came  "  to  take  whales,  and  also  to 
make  trials  of  a  mine  of  gold  and  copper." 

2.  Captain  Smith  made  a  landing  at  an  island  near 
the  coast  of  what  we  call  the  State  of  i\Iaino.  But  as 
he  did  not  meet  with  success  in  the  search  for  whales, 
lie  left  his  ships  and  with  eight  men  in  a  small  boat 
began  to  explore  the  neighboring  coast.     Yon  must  re- 


member that  this  was  several  years 
before  the  landing  of  the  Pilgrim 
Fathers.  Smith  not  only  explored 
tlic  coast,  but  he  made  a  map  of  it, 
and  to  the  whole  region  he  gave  the 
name  of  New  England.  This  name 
it  still  bears,  after  many  generations 
havf!  passed  away. 


II.  First  Settlements. 

;!.  Oulj'  fmr  years  after  Captain 
Smith's  visit,  the  Mayflower  brouglit 
to  tliis  same  coast  a  band  of  Pil- 
grims who  sought  free  homes  in  the 
New  World.  They  made  a  settle- 
ment (1()2())  at  the  place  which 
Smith  called  Plymouth  \plim' uthi, 
and  which  is  still  called  by  that 
name.  In  spite  of  many  sufferings, 
they  thrived  in  their  new  home. 
Their  children  prospered  after  them, 
and  spread  out  to  seek  new  land  ; 
and  as  many  other  fomUies  came  over  year  by  year  in 
ships  to  New  England,  the  Indians  were  gradually 
driven  off,  and  the  country  was  settled  by  white  people. 
4.  This  was  the  time  when  our  countiy  was  under 
the  king  of  England.  As  time  passed  there  came  to  be 
several  settlements  or  colonies  in  New  England,  and 
they  were  aU  under  the  power  of  Great  Britain,  which 
was  called  the  "  mother  country."  Then  came  the  time, 
about  a  hundred  j'ears  ago,  when  these  colonies  said 
they  wanted  to  live  without  being  under  English  rulei-s. 


MAP   STUDIES. 


^P*  At  tlie  first  recitation,  the  tcaclier  will  allow  the  pupils  to 
answer  with  open  books  ;  at  the  see(}nd,  they  may  be  required  to 
anmoer  from  m^nwry,  or  from  an  outline  inap. 

Position  and  Area.  —  1.  By  what  is  this  section 
bounded  on  tlie  north  ?  —  the  east  ?  —  the  south  ?  —  the 
west  ?  2.  Name  the  three  States  that  include  the 
northern  part  of  New  England ;  —  the  southern  part. 
3.  Which  State  is  the  largest?  — the  smallest?  4.  Which 
three  are  nearly  equal  in  size  ?  5.  Which  four  border  on 
Massachusetts?  6.  Which  three  border  on  New  York? 
7.  Which  has  no  sea-coast  ? 

Mountains.  —  1.  In  what  part  of  New  England  is  there 
a  range  of  mountains  ?  2.  In  what  State  is  Mt.  Wash- 
ington ?    3.  In  what  State  are  the  White  Mountains  ? 

Rivers  and  Lakes.  —  1.  Which  is  the  longest  river  ? 
2.  Tell  where  it  rises,  in  what  direction  it  flows,  and 
where  is  its  outlet.  3.  What  river  rising  in  Massachu- 
setts flows  through  Rhode  Island  ?  4.  Name  two  rivers 
in   Maine.      5.   What    lake    with    a   hard   Indian    name 


in  New  Hampshire  ?     6.   What  large   lakes   in   Maine  ? 
7.  What  large  lake  borders  on  Vermont  ? 

Bays  and  Sounds.  —  1.  What  is  the  largest  bay  on 
the  coast  ?  2.  Which  bay  is  situated  farthest  east  ? 
3.  Where  is  Long  Island  Sound?  4.  What  small  bay 
south  of  Rhode  Island  ? 

Capes.  —  1.  Where  is  Cape  Cod  ?  2.  Where  is  Cape 
Ann? 

Of  what  State  is  each  of  these  cities 

(  ArorsTA.         Boston". 

mu     r.      •*  1 9  I  o  S  Pkovidesce, 

The  Capital? ,  Coxcord.      j  ^^^^^^^_ 

(^  Moxtpe'lier.  Haktford. 

In  what  State  is  each  of  these 

I  Boston.  Lowell. 

I  Providence.        Manchester. 
Principal  Cities  ?....-'  New  Haven.       Burlington. 

I  AV'0RCE.STER.  PoETL-iND. 

{woosHer\. 


60 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


Along  with  the  other  English  colonies  in  America  they 
declared  their  independence,  and,  after  a  long  war, 
won  it. 

5.  There  are  now  in  New  England  a  great  many  more 
peoj)le  than  there  were  when  the  United  States  began, 
a  century  ago.     And  not  only  are  there  many  more  peo- 


ple, but  things  have  changed  iii 
every  way.  It  would  take  too  long 
to  tell  all  the  ways  in  which  the 
New  England  of  to-day  differs  from 
the  New  England  of  a  hundred 
years  ago,  so  we  shall  be  satisfied 
with  trying  to  learn  something  about 
the  New  England  States  as  they  are  at  present. 

6.  First  we  should  inquire  what  kind  of  a  country 
New  England  is,  because,  as  we  have  already  learned, 
the  things  which  people  do  to  make  a  living  depend 
very  much  on  what  kind  of  a  country  they  inhabit. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  IJ'liat  section  of  our  country  are  we  now  to  learn  about  ? 
We  are  to  learn  about  New  England. 

2.  Hoto  did  it  come  to  be  called  New  England  1 

It  was  first  called  New  England  by  Captain 
John  Smith,  who  made  a  map  of  it. 

3.  Where  were  the  first  settlements  made  in  New  England.  ? 
The  first  settlements  in  New  England  were  made 

at  Plymouth  and  around  Massachusetts  Bay. 

Map.  —  (.See  pcu/c  SS.)  Point  to  Plymouth  on  the  map  of  New  Eng- 
land.   Point  to  Massachusetts  Bay. 

4.  JFhat  of  the  shx  of  New  England  comixircd  with  other 
sections  ? 

New  England  is  the  smallest  section  of  the 
United  States. 

Wl  a  p.  —  (See  page  58  )  Point  on  the  map  of  the  United  States  (pages 
54,  55)  to  New  England.  Are  there  not  single  States  in  some  parts  of 
the  United  States  which  appear  to  be  as  large  as  the  whole  of  New 
England  ?    Which  ones  ? 

5.  Jfniij  is  New  England  an  important  section  ? 

New  England  is  important  on  account  of  its 
manufactures,  wealth,  and  population. 


LESSON    II. 

NEW    ENGLAND   {Contimdep). 

T     -,.        .  [For  Reading.] 

I.  Climate.  ^ 

1.  If  you  look  at  New  England  on  the  map  of  the 
United  States,  you  will  see  that  it  is  one  of  the  most 
northern  parts  of  our  country.    Hence 
^s^^=  -^ve  may  expect  the  winters  there  to 

be  cold.  You  would  not  be  dis- 
appointed in  this.  The  winters  last 
four  or  five  months,  so  that  the  chil- 
dren have  plenty  of  coasting  and 
skating.  But  the  winter  cold  fur- 
idshes  business  as  well  as  fun.  The 
thick  ice  on  the  ponds  and  lakes  is 
cut  into  great  blocks  and  stored  away 
till  summer,  when  it  is  used  by  the 
people  or  shipped  off  to  be  sold  in 
the  hotter  southern  parts  of  our 
country. 

II.  Occupations  on  the  Sea-coast. 

2.  The  New  England  States  are, 
all  except  one,  seaboard  States  ;  that 
is,  they  border  on  the  sea-coast.  From 
this  fact  we  may  expect  that  some 
New-Englanders  will  be  engaged  in 
fishing.  And  this  is  the  case.  The 
sea  otf  the  coast,  and  especially  farther 
north,  on  the  "  Banks  "  of  Newfound- 
land, abounds  in  mackerel  and  codfish,  and  in  the 
fishing  season  hundreds  of  vessels  are  fitted  out  in  the 
seaports  to  catch  these  fish.  Catching  these  fish  and 
selling  them  —  some  fresh,  but  most  of  them  dried 
and  salted  —  are  a  great  business  in  New  England. 

III.  Surface  of  the  Country. 

3.  Now  let  us  look  inland  from  the  coast.  It  takes 
only  a  glance  at  the  map  to  show  us  that  the  face  of 
the  country  is  hilly  and  mountainous.  Not  that  it  is 
all  of  this  kind,  for  you  see  that  it  is  mostly  that  half 
which  is  away  from  the  coast  that  is  very  hilly  or 
mountainous.  Still,  we  may  say  that  on  the  whole 
New  England  is  a  hiyldand  country,  with  a  s/ope 
toward  the  ocean  and  a  low  coast  plain. 

IV.  New  England  Farming. 

4.  A  rugged  country  is  not  usually  a  good  farming 
region,  and  persons  living  in  such  a  country  generally 
try  to  engage  in  some  other  kind  of  employment 
which  is  more  profitable.  Not  but  what  there  are 
many  fine  farms  in  New  England,  for  there  is  fertile 
soil  spreading  out  from  most  of  the  streams.  And 
then  the  New-Englanders  are  good  farmers,  and  by 
tilling  their  fields  very  carefully  they  raise  better  crops 
than  poor  farmers  do  from  the  best  soil.  But  if  you 
were  asked  what  is  the  most  important  business  of 
the  New  England  people,  you  would  not  say  agricul- 


NEW   ENGLAND. 


61 


tun\  What  the  most  important  business  is  we  shall 
soon  learn ;  but  first  we  must  finish  what  is  to  be 
said  about  tlie  mountains. 

V.  Lumberiug. 

5.  Some  of  these  mountains  arc  eovcrc^l  with  for- 
ests of  pine-trees,  and  hemlock,  and  other  kinds  of 
trees.  This  is  the  case  in  the  hilly  region  in  the 
northern  half  of  the  large  State  of  Maine,  and  also  in 
New  Hampshire.  On  this  account  great  numbers  of 
persons  are  lumbermen.  lu  wnter  they  go  into  the 
forests  and  fell  the  trees,  cutting  them  into  logs. 
These  they  draw  over  the  snow-covered  ground  to 
some  stream,  and  when  it  thaws  in  spring  the  logs 
float  down  to  places  where  they  are  sawed  into  boards 
in  great  saw-mills. 

VI.  Pasture-Mountains. 

6.  But  tliere  are  other  kinds  of  mountains ;  and  if 
wc  should  travel  in  the  cars  from  New  Hampshire  to 
Vermont  we  should  see  a  wonderful  change  in  a  very 
short  time.  In  place  of  rugged  highlands  covered 
with  forests  we  should  see  nicely  rounded  hills,  some 
green  with  grass  and  others  clothed  with  evergreen 
trees.  The  very  name  "  Vermont "  tells  us  this,  for 
the  word  means  green  mountain.  We  may  naturally 
suppose  that  these  mountain-pastures  must  be  good 
places  for  sheep  and  cattle  and  horses.  And  so  they 
are,  —  so  good  that  in  this  State  of  Vermont  sheep 
and  cattle  raising  and  making  butter  and  cheese  bring 
the  people  in  more  money  than  any  other  business  that 
they  follow. 

[For  Recitation.: 

1.  U'liat  kiiid  of  clinuite  has  New  EiKjlaTul  ? 
It  has  hot  summers  and  cold  winters. 

2.  Hotv  many  of  these  States  are  seaboard  States  ? 

All  the  New  England  States  are  seaboard  States, 
except  Vermont. 

Map. — {Slc  patje  ^S.)  What  ocean  on  the  eastern  coast  of  New 
England  ? 

3.  JFhat  occupation  is  followed  by  many  Neiu  England 
people  who  live  on  the  sea-coast  ' 

Many  New-Englanders  are  engaged  in  fishing 
for  cod  and  mackerel. 

4.  Name  some  ports  at  which  fishing-smacks  are  fitted  out. 
Eastport,    Newburyport,    Gloucester    [glos'tci-], 

Marblehead. 

Wl  a  p.  —  (See  page  5S. )  Point  to  each  of  these  places  on  the  map  of 
New  England. 

5.  What  other  occupation  connected  villi  the  sea  can  you 
nanu  ? 

Ship-building,  whicli  is  largely  carried  on  in 
Maine  and  JMassachusetts. 

6.  Mliat  kind  of  surface  has  this  section  ? 

With  the  exception  of  a  lowland  part  along  the 
coast,'  the  surface  of  New  England  is  generally 
hiUy  or  mountainous. 


7.  Is  (ujTiculture  carried  on  in  this  section  ? 

It  is,  but  not  so  largely  as  in  the  southern  and 
western  jjarts  of  the  United  States. 

8.  IVhat  state  is  noted  for  its  dairy-products  ? 
For  dairy-i^roducts  Vermont  is  noted. 

9.  JVhat  can  you  .sa.;/  of  the  forests  ? 

In  many  parts  of  Maine  there  are  large  forests, 
from  which  great  (quantities  of  lumber  are  taken. 


LESSON    III. 
NEW    ENGLAND    (ContixoedI 

CFor  Readin^.l 


How  Cotton  Cloth  is  mode. 

I.  Manufactaring. 

1.  Let  us  look  again  at  the  map  of  New  England. 
Follow  the  rivers  up  to  where  they  rise  in  the  high- 
land part.  These  streams  are  not  great  slow-moving 
currents ;  they  are  mostly  short,  and  they  run  rapidly 
down  the  slope  from  the  mountains.  These  furnish 
water-power,  by  which  we  mean  that  the  current  of 
the  smftly  moving  streams  is  used  to  turn  the  wheels 
of  mills,  —  mills  for  sawng  planks,  and  weaving  cloth, 
and  making  paper,  and  doing  a  thousand  other  useful 
things. 

2.  Now  we  can 
see  what  is  the 
greatest  business  in 
New  England.  It 
is  manufacturing. 
Some  of  the  States 
are  more  engaged 
in  this  than  others, 
hut  in  all  many  peo- 
ple are  busy  in  mills 
and  factories  and 
machine-shops.  The 
making  of  boots 
and  shoes  by  ma- 
chinery is  one  of  the  greatest  trades.  Probably  in 
the  various  factories  enough  are  made  to  supply  every 
man,    woman,   and   child   with   three   pairs   of  boots ' 


How  Boots  ajid  Shoes  : 


62 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


or  shoes  every  year.  You  ^yill  see  on  the  page  before 
this  a  picture  of  how  boots  and  shoes  are  made  in  the 
great  shops  of  New  England.  Another  very  great  busi- 
ness is  weaving  all  kinds  of  cotton  and  woolen  cloths. 
At  the  beginning  of  this  lesson  you  will  see  a  picture 
of  how  this  is  done.  Some  of  the  largest  cotton  and 
woolen  mills  are  on  the  Merrimac  River,  and  it  is  said 
that  the  water-power  supplied  by  it  moves  more  .spin- 
dles than  are  moved  by  any  other  stream  in  the  world. 

3.  You  must  not  think  that  weaving  cotton  and 
woolen  goods  and  making  boots  and  shoes  are  the  only 
kinds  of  manufactures.  They  are  merely  the  largest. 
But  there  is  hardly  any  article,  from  an  anchor  or  a 
steam-engine  down  to  a  pin,  that  is  not  made  by  the 
ingenious  and  industrious  Nevv-Englanders. 

II.  Trade. 

4.  The  people  of  New  England  carry  on  a  large  com- 
merce, because  they  make  a  great  many  more  things 
than  they  can  use.  They  make  them  to  sell.  These 
goods  are  shipped  by  water  or  by  railroad  to  all  parts 
of  our  country  and  to  other  lands,  and  the  people  re- 
ceive in  return  articles  which  they  want,  but  cannot 
grow.  For  instance,  they  ship  cotton  goods  to  the 
Southern  States,  and  receive  from  those  same  States 
the  raw  cotton  which  they  work  up  in  their  mills. 


1.  IFhat  advantage  has  New  England  for  manufacturing  1 
The  rapid  mountain-streams  supply  much  water- 
power  for  running  the  machiuery  of  mills. 

2.  ^Vliat  important  manufactured  articles  can  you  name  ? 
Cotton    and  woolen    goods,    boots    aud    shoes, 

machinery  and  farming-tools. 

3.  JVhat  eight  large  -manufacturing  cities  can  you  name  ? 
Lowell,  Manchester,  Worcester,  Lawrence,  Fall 

Eiver,  Bangor,  Providence,  Hartford. 

Map.  —  (■*«  ?i3e 
f'S  )  Point  out  each  of 
these    places    on   the 

map  of  New  England.  ^  --  _^  ^?^_--    _ 

On  what  river  are 
Concord,  Manches- 
ter, Lowell,  and  Law- 
rence ? 

4.  fFhat  of  the 
commerce    of   New      j^:^ 
England  ?  £. 

The  commerce     -  i 

of  New  Eng- 
land is  large,  -j^  '  ^'  f  ■>- 
and  the  princi-  ~t_J^ 
pal  exports  are 
manufactured 
articles,  togeth- 
er with  lumber, 
fish,  ice,  aud 
OTanite. 


7    i 


LESSON    IV. 

NEW    ENGLAND    (Continbed). 

[For  Reading. 3 

I.  Scenery. 

1.  There  are  many  parts  of  New  England  v^here  the 
scenery  is  very  tine.  The  White  Mountains  are  famous, 
and  are  visited  every  summer  by  thousands  of  tourists. 
In  other  parts  there  are  lovely  lakes  embosomed  among 
the  hiUs.  Then  there  are  parts  of  the  coast  that  are 
grand  and  rocky ;  while  the  islands  off  the  .shore  fur- 
nish fine  sea-views  and  cooling  ocean  breezes.  But,  after 
all,  nothing  more  interesting  meets  the  eye  in  a  New  Eng- 
land landscape  than  one  of  the  thousand  pretty  towns 
or  villages  that  dot  the  valleys  or  nestle  in  the  hills. 

II.  Great  Cities. 

2.  Boston,  the  capital  of  Massachusetts,  is  the  me- 
tropolis of  New  England.  It  is  one  of  the  most  ancient 
towns  in  the  United  States,  and  has  more  the  appear- 
ance of  a  European  than  of  an  American  city.  It  is 
not  only  a  great  manufacturing  and  commercial  center, 
but  is  famous  for  its  literary,  artistic,  aud  benevolent 
institutions. 

3.  Portland  is  the  largest  city  of  Maine,  and  is  noted 
for  having  one  of  the  best  harbors  on  the  Atlantic  coast. 
It  is  connected  by  railroad  with  jSIontreal,  and  in  win- 
ter, when  the  St.  Lawrence  Ptiver  is  frozen,  Portland  is 
the  outlet  for  most  of  the  Canadian  produce. 

4.  The  chief  city  of  New  Hampshire  is  ]Manchester, 
which  is  very  largely  engaged  in  manufacturing  cotton, 
woolen,  and  hnen  goods,  machinery,  etc.  The  chief 
city  of  Vermont  is  Burlington,  called  the  "  Queen  City 
of  Vermont."  It  is  beautifully  situated,  and  is  one  of 
the  greatest  lumber  markets  in  the  country. 

5.  Hartford  also  claims  the  title  of  "  queen  city,"  • — • 
the  "  Queen  City  of  New  England."  It  is  the  capital 
of  the  State  of  Connecticut,  and  is  famous  for  its  manu- 
factures, and  its  benevolent  and  educational  institutions. 

Providence,  next 
t;  to   Boston   the 

if^^St  largest  city  in 

A;-  New  England,  is 

-SS^S^  a  city  of  mills  and 

manufactories. 
Cotton  and  wool- 
en good.?,  jewelry, 
silver-ware,  loco- 
motives, and 
many  other  arti- 
,      '  •  '     '         cles      are      made 

here.   It  is  a  beau- 
tiful, wealthy,  and 
^^^_g^p'      enterprising  city. 


"^- 


City  of  Boston. 


Map. —  (•'^«''  P«?« 
'''*  )  For  a  recitation 
lesson  let  the  pupils 
tell  from  the  map  the 
situation  of  each  of 
these  cities. 


SPECIAL   GEOGHAPHY   FOR   I\'EW   ENGLAND   CLASSES. 


63 


SPECIAL  GEOGRAPHY  FOR  NEW  ENGLAND  CLASSES. 


L-MAP    STUDIES. 

f^~  These  questions  relate  only  to  the  State  in  which  the  pupils  of 
the  class  reside,  and  are  designed  solely  for  New  England  classes. 

Position  and  Area.  —  1.  What  is  the  name  of  your  Stati;  ? 
2.  Ill  vvliat  jiait  of  this  section  of  the  United  States  is  it  situ- 
ated !  3.  How  does  your  State  compare  in  size  witli  the  otlier 
States  of  this  section?  [See  table,  page  64.]  4.  Bound  your 
State.  5.  It  is  crossed  by  what  parallel  or  parallels  of  latitude  ? 
6.  By  what  meridians  ?  7.  Area  of  your  State  in  square  miles  ? 
8.  Popul.ition  1.    [Sec  tiible,  page  64-] 

Mountains.  —  1.  By  what  mountains,  represented  on  the 
map,  is  this  State  crossed  ?  2.  What  is  the  name  of  the  highest 
mountain  in  your  State  ?  [Answer  by  Uie  tcaclier.]  3.  Do  you 
know  the  names  of  any  mountains  not  represented  on  the  nuip  ? 

Rivers.  —  1.  What  is  the  largest  river  of  this  State  ? 
2.  Where  does  it  rise  and  into  what  does  it  ilow  ?  3.  What 
is  the  second  river  in  size  ?  4.  What  boundary  rivers  has  your 
State  ?  5.  Are  there  any  small  rivers  that  you  know  of  not 
represented  on  tlie  map  ? 

Lakes. —  1.  If  your  State  has  any  large  lake,  name  it  and 
tell  in  wliat  part  of  the  State  it  is.     2.  Name  any  small  lakes. 

The  Sea-coast.  —  [For  all  except  Vermont.  ]  1.  Name  any 
bay  or  bays  along  the  coast.  2.  Which  of  these  bays  is  tlie 
largest  ?  3.  Name  any  capes,  points,  or  heads.  4.  What 
islands  lie  olf  the  coast  ?  5.  Name  any  important  seaport  oi- 
sea]iorts. 

Cities.  —  1.  What  is  the  capital  of  this  State  and  where  is  it 
situated  ?  2.  What  is  the  largest  city  ?  3.  Name  any  other 
large  or  important  cities.  4.  Name  the  capital  of  each  New 
England  State.  5.  Name  the  largest  city  in  each  New  England 
State  and  tell  something  about  it. 

Counties,  etc.  —  1.  In  what  county  do  you  live  ?  2.  Wliat 
is  the  name  of  the  county  seat  ?  3.  What  counties  lie  next  to 
yours  ?  4.  Name  as  many  counties  as  you  can.  5.  Is  th 
name  of  the  place  in  which  you  live  down  on  the  map  ?     6.  If 


the  place  in  which  you  live  is  not  represented  on  the  map, 
near  what  large  place  do  you  know  it  to  be  ?  7.  What  railroad 
or  railroads  passes  througli  this  city  [or  town]  ?  8.  Do  you  know 
where  the  e.xpress  trains  run  to  ? 

History.  —  [To  be  givcu  bij  teacher.]  1.  At  what  place  was 
your  State  first  settled  '!  2.  In  what  year  ?  3.  In  what  year  did 
it  become  a  State  ? 

^^  Pupils  may  now  be  required  to  draw  on  the  blackboard  an 
outline  laap  of  their  State. 


II. -LOCAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

^W  Questions  exclusively  for  New  England  classes. 

1.  AVhat  are  the  principal  farm-products  raised  in  your  State  ? 

2.  What  kinds  of  live-.stock  are  kept  ? 

3.  Wliat  do  you  know  about  the  lumber-trade  of  your  part  of 
tlie  State  ? 

4.  Do  you  know  of  any  grauite-iiuarries  or  marble-quarries  in 
your  part  of  New  England  ? 

5.  Do  you  know  of  any  places  where  lime  is  made  ? 

6.  Name  any  fishing-towns  on  the  coast  that  you  hav8  seen 
or  heard  of. 

7.  What  kinds  of  fish  are  caught  by  the  lishennen  ? 

8.  What  manufacturing  towns  or  cities  have  you  seen  or 
lieard  of  in  your  State,  or  in  other  New  England  States  ? 

9.  Is  the  machinery  of  the  mills  moved  by  steam-power  or  by 
water-iiower  ? 

10.  Do  you  know  of  any  places  where  any  of  the  following  ■ 
articles  are  manufactured  :  Cotton  cloth  ?  woolen  goods  ?  boots 
and  shoes  ?  leather?  fmniture?  wagons?  p.iper  ?  farming- tools? 
a.xes  ?  scythes  ?  watches  ?  pins  ?  b\ittons  ?  nails  ?  locomotives  ? 
iron  machinery  ?  stoves  ?  pianos  ?  tin-ware  ?  wooden-ware  ? 

A^ote  for  pupils.  —  If  you  cannot  answer  these  questions,  a.sk 
your  older  brothers  or  sisters,  or  youi'  parents  ;  and  then,  if  you 
cannot  find  out,  )'our  teacher  will  tell  you. 


III.  -  DESCRIPTION  OP  THE  STATES. 

tS^  The  Description  of  States,  thoU!;h  designed  for  New  England 
classes,  may  be  taken  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher  by  other  pupUs 
sufficiently  advanced,  or  by  way  of  review. 

MAINE. 

Description.  —  Maine  (Me.),  or  the  "  Pine-Tree  State," 
occupies  mure  than  half  the  surface  of  New  England.  Its 
greatest  length  is  about  250  niiles  ;  greatest  breadth,  190 
miles.     The  coast  is  rocky  and  has  luany  good  harbors. 

The  central  and  north-western  parts  are  broken  and 
mountainous.     The  highest  mountain  is  Mt.   Katah'din. 

There  are  many  large  rivers  and  lakes  in  this  State. 

The  advantages  possessed  by  this  State  are  its  great 
forests  of  pine  and  hemlock  ;  its  many  large  rivers  and  its 
iminerous  good  luuiiors. 

The  principal  occupations  are  lumbering,  manufac- 
turing, ship-building,  and  the  fisheries. 


The  chief  cities  aie  :  — 

Portland,  tlie  largest  city,  wliicli  lias  a  tiuc  liarbor. 

Augusta,  the  capital. 

Bangok,  on  Penob'scot  River,  is  engaged  in  the  lumber-trade. 

L?:wisTON  and  Auburn,  on  the  Audroscog'giii,  engaged  in  manu- 
facturing cotton  and  woolen  goods,  lumber,  etc. 

Bid'deford  and  Saco  [saw'hi],  on  Saco  River,  manufacturing 
places. 

Bath,  on  the  Kennebec  River,  noted  for  ship-building. 

NEW    HAMPSHIRE. 

Description.  —  New  Hampshire  (N.  H.),  or  the  "  Gran- 
ite State,"  is  a  highland  State.  The  AVhite  Mountains  are 
noted  for  their  grand  scenery.  Mt.  Washington  is  the 
loftiest  summit  in  New  England. 

The  Merrimac,  Connecticut,  and  Piscat'aqua  are  the  most 
important  rivei-s. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  water-power,  its 
forests,  and  its  pasturage. 


64 

The  principal 
occupations  are 
manufacturing, 
iarmiug,  anddairy- 
ini;.  ■ 

The  chief 
cities  are  :  — 

Manchestei 
the     MerrimaCj     tl 
largest   city,  (famo 
for  cotton  and  \\  ool 
manufactures. 

Concord,  the  caj  i 
tal,  a  manufactuu 
city. 

Na.sh'ua  on  tl  I 
Merrimac,  anil  Do\  Lit 
on  Coclie'co  Ili\  l  i 
largely  engaged  ni 
manufacturing. 

Portsmouth,  at 
tlie  mouth  of  Piscat 
acjua  River,  noted  for 
its  fine  liarbor. 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


Cotton-MillB  of  Providence. 


VERMONT. 

Description.  —  A^^nuuUt  (Vt.),  or  the  "  Green  Mountain 
State,"  is  noted  lor  its  niountaiii-cliain,  called  the  Green 
Mountains. 

The  State  has  no  sea-coast ;  but  Lake  Champlain,  more 
than  one  hundred  miles  long,  is  on  the  western  border. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  line  farming  and 
pastnre  lands,  and  its  marl>le-(|uarries. 

The  principal  occupations  are  farming,  raising  sheep, 
liorses,  cattle,  making  butter  and  cheese,  manufacturing, 
and  quarrying  marble. 

The  chief  places  are  :  — 

BuKLIXGToN,  on  Lalfe  Champlain,  the  largest  city. 

JIoNTPELiER,  wliich  is  the  capital. 

Rutland,  noted  for  its  marble-trade. 

St.  Albans,  noted  for  its  manufacture  of  cars  and  its  tr.ade. 

Brattleboro,  on  the  Connecticut,  an  important  manufacturing 
place. 

MASSACHUSETTS. 

Description.  -  Massachusetts  (Mas.s.),  or  the  "  Bay 
State,"  is  one  of  the  richest  and  most  populous  States  in 
the  Union. 

The  western  part  is  mountainous,  the  central  and  north- 
eastern parts  are  hilly,  and  the  southeastern  part  is  gener- 
ally low  and  level. 

The  coast  has  many  bays  and  fine  harbors. 

The  principal  rivers  are  the  Connecticut,  Merrimac,  and 
Housa  tonic. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  facilities  for  man- 
ufacturing anil  cunnnerce. 

The  principal  occupations  are  manufacturing,  agri- 
culture, the  iisheries,  sliipping  granite  and  ice,  and  general 
coinmerce. 

The  chief  cities  are  :  — 

Boston,  the  capital,  largest  city  in  New  England,  and,  next  to 
New  York,  the  greatest  seaport  in  the  United  States. 

Worcester,  a  great  manufacturing  city. 

Lowell,  at  the  junction  of  the  Concord  and  Merrimac  rivers,  .and 


Lawrence,  on  the 
Merrimac  River,  lead- 
ing places  for  cotton 
and  woolen  manufac- 
tures. 

Cambridge,  near 
Boston,  a  manufac- 
turing place  and  seat 
of  Harvard  Univer- 
sity. 

Lynn,  on  Massa- 
clmsetts  Bay,  famous 
lor  the  manufacture 
of  shoes. 

Fall  River,  noted 
for  its  cotton-mills. 

RHODE  ISLAND. 

Description.  — 

11  h  0  d  e  Island 
(R.  I.),  though  the 
smallest  State,  is 
one  of  the  most 
prosperous  and 
thickly  settled, 
manufacturing,  farni- 


The  principal  occupations 

ing,  and  traile. 
The  chief  cities  are  :  — 

Providence,  the  largest  idace,  and  the  second  city  in  New  Eng- 
land, famous  for  its  great  cotton  and  woolen  mills,  and  its  manu- 
facture of  hardware,  plated  ware,  and  other  articles.  It  is  one  of 
t)ie  capitals. 

Newport,  the  other  capital,  noted  for  its  healthful  climate  and 
fine  .sea-bathing. 

CONNECTICUT. 

Description.  —  Connecticut  (Comi.)  has  beautiful  scen- 
ery, varied  by  hill  and  dale.  The  Coimecticut  River  runs 
through  the  State  from  north  to  south. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  good  soil,  its 
water-power,  and  its  nearness  to  the  great  commercial 
metropolis. 

The  principal  occupations  are  farming,  and  manufac- 
turing useful  articles,  as  hats,  boots,  shoes,  carriages,  combs, 
axes,  buttons,  pins,  clocks,  and  many  other  things  called 
"  Yankee  Notions."  These  are  sold  in  almost  all  parts  of 
the  \\orlil. 

The  chief  cities  are  :  — 

Hartford,  on  tlie  Coimecticut,  the  capital  and  a  great  maim- 
facturing  jilace. 

New  Haven,  tlie  largest  city,  and  the  seat  of  Yale  College. 

Bridgeport,     ~| 

Norwich,  [  ^^jj  engaged  in  varied  manufacturing. 

Waterburt, 

New  London, 


AREA  AND  POPULATION  OF  THE  NEW  ENGLAND  STATES. 


Names. 

Area  in  square  miles. 

Population  (1870). 

Maine 

35,000 

627,000 

New  Hanipsliire 

9,300 

318,000 

Vermont 

10,200 

332,000 

massaohusetts 

7,800 

1,457,000 

lihodc  Island 

1,306 

217,000 

Connecticut 

4,700 

537,000 

THE   MIDDLE   STATES. 


65 


THE    MIDDLE    STATES, 


LESSON    I. 

DESCRIPTION    OF    THE    STATES. 

[For    Reading.] 
I.   History. 

1.  Suppose  you  were  to  look  at  a  map  of  the  United 

States  for  the  first  time.     You  are  asked  to  tell  which 


Delaware  Water  Gap.  -    *,,^-^ 

are  the  Middle  States.        : 

You    say,     "  Here    are 

States  on  the  cast,  —  they 

are    toward    the    Atlantic 

Ocean  ;  and  liere  are  States 

on    tlie     west,  —  they     are 

toward  the  Pacific  Ocean.    The 

Middle    States    must    be    those 

between    the    Eastern   and  tlie  portage   r  ge. 

Western  States  :   they  are  those  States  in  the  great 

Valley  of  the  Mississippi  and  its  branches." 

2.  This  ought  to  be  quite  correct ;  but  it  is  not. 
For  when  we  speak  of  the  "  Middle  States  "  we  speak 
as  our  forefathers  spoke.  When  the  early  settlers  came 
to  America,  they  made  their  homes  near  the  sea-coast, 
where  they  landed.  Thus  it  came  to  pass  that  the 
thirteen  English  colonies  which  became  the  United 
States,  one  Imndred  years  ago,  were  all  planted  on  the 
strip  of  country  which  lies  between  the  Atlantic  Ocean 
and  the  Alleghany  Mountains.  This  was  nearly  all 
the  land  which  Our  Country  occupied  at  the  time 
Washington  was  President ;  for  though  a  few  bold 
pioneers  had  climbed  the  mountains  into  the  region 
beyond,  —  the  region  which  is  now  Ohio  and  Ken- 
tucky, —  yet  they  seemed  to  be  quite  lost  in  the  wil- 
derness. 

3.  We  can  understand  that,  in  those  early  days,  it 
was  natural  enough  for  people  to  give  the  name  Mid- 
dle States  to  those  that  lay  between  New  England 
and  the  States  on  the  southern  part  of  the  seaboard. 
The  Middle  States  were  New  York,  New  Jersey,  Penn- 
S3'"lvania,  and  Delaware.     These  States  seemed  to   be 


a  division  or  section  by  th(imselves,  because  not  only 
(lid  they  lie  between  tlio  Northern  and  the  Southern 
States,  but  the  peojjle  who  settled  them  were  quite 
ditleront  from  the  people  who  settled  the  Northern 
or  the  Southern  States.  The  first  settlers  in  the  Mid- 
dle States  were  Hollanders  and  Swedes,  and  English 
Quakers,  while  New  England  was  settled  by 
the  Puritans,  and  the  Southern  States  almost 
entirely  by  English  people. 

II.   Natural  Features. 

4.  Through  the  Middhi  Atlantic  States  sev- 
eral mountain-ranges  stretch  from  northeast  to 
southwest.  These  arc  ranges  or  chains  of  the 
great  Alleghany  Mountain  system,  about  which 
wo  read  in  the  description  of  North  America. 
The  Alleghany  Mountains  are  not  so  lofty  as 
the  giant  ranges  toward  the  Pacific  Ocean  ; 
but  they  are  more  beautiful.  The  Eocky  Jloun- 
tains  are  generally  bare  of  vegetation  ;  barren- 
ness and  desolation  reign  around.  But  the 
rounded  summits  of  the  Alleghanies  are 
clothed  in  majestic  forests,  while  charming 
green  valleys  lie  between  the  hills,  and  pic- 
turesque cascades  tumble  over  the  rocky  ledge.'*. 
Pcrluips  you  may  thinlv  that,  as  the  Alleghany 
Ue^f  ilountains  extend  through  the  Middle  States, 
*^^^  these  moimtains  must  be  like  a  wall  separating 
one  part  from  the  other.  But  this  is  not  the 
case.  A  way  has  been  found  to  make  rail- 
roads over  the  mountains.  And  now  the 
screaming  locomotive,  guided  by  science,  darts  into 
the  recesses  of  the  hiUs  or  slowly  puffs  its  way  up  the 
siuumits,  thus  making  an  easy  pathway  from  the  east- 
ern to  the  western  parts. 

5.  On  tlie  eastern  side  the  mountains  slope  down 
through  a  foot-hill  region  into  a  plain  which  reaches 
to  the  sea-shore.  This  is  called  the  Atlantic  Plain.  It 
is  a  mere  strip  at  the  mouth  of  the  Hudson  Eiver ;  but 
more  southward  it  widens  very  much.  To  the  west  the 
mountains  slope  toward  the  Great  Lakes  and  the  Ohio 
Eiver.  We  tlius  see  that  there  are  three  divisions  of 
the  surface  in  the  Middle  States :  (1)  the  Atlantic 
Plain;  (2)  the  Mountain  region;  (3)  the  Western  slope. 

6.  Most  of  the  large  rivers  of  the  iliddle  States  rise 
beyond  the  mountains.  How  do  they  make  a  channel 
through  the  rocky  barrier  ?  In  the  course  of  ages  they 
have  worn  for  themselves  channels  through  the  moun- 
tains. Tlius  the  Hudson  breaks  fhrougli  at  tlie  High- 
land, the  Delaware  at  the  Delaware  AVater  Gap,  the 
Potomac  at  Harper's  Ferry  ;  and  at  all  these  places  the 
scenery  is  very  grand,  witli  the  frowning  mountain- 
walls  towering  many  hundred  feet  on  each  side  of  the 
stream. 


C6 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


III.  Farming. 

7.  As  the  Middle  States  are  nearer  tlie  Equator  than 
New  England,  they  have  a  milder  climate  than  tliat 
section,  and  the  farmers  can  grow  a  greater  variety 
of  grains,  vegetables,  and  fruits  than  can  be  raised  in 
New  England.  Wheat,  rye,  oats,  corn,  orchard  fruits, 
berries,  grapes,  and  garden  vegetables  all  do  well  in  the 
Middle  States.  Tobacco  is  grown  to  some  extent  in 
all  the  Middle  States,  but  only  Virginia  and  ilaryland 
raise  it  in  large  quantities. 

8.  Still  we  must  not  form  the  idea  that  farming  is 
the  leading  business  of  the  people  in  these  States. 
Much  of  tlie  country  is  too  mountainous  to  be  cul- 
tivate!], and  in  many  parts  the  soil  is  poor.  Besides, 
as  we  shall  soon  see,  there  are  other  occupations  which 
the  people  can  follow  more  profitably  than  they  can 
follow  farming.  It  wUl  show  you  that  agriculture  is 
not  the  chief  business  of  the  Middle  States  when  I 
tell  you  that  in  none  of  these  States  till  we  get  south 
of  Maryland  do  the  people  raise  grain  enough  to  sup- 
ply their  own  wants,  and  hence  they  have  to  import  it 
from  the  West. 

9.  There  is  another  thing  which  may  be  noticed  in 
regard  to  farming  in  the  Middle  States,  which  is,  that 
farmers  are  not  so  much  engaged  in  growing  wheat  and 
corn  as  they  are  in  the  Western  States  ;  but,  instead, 
they  raise  vegetables  and  fruits  and  make  butter  and 
cheese.  You  may  notice  that  in  these  States  there  are 
on  the  coast  many  large  cities,  like  New  York  and 
Philadelphia  and  Baltimore,  —  cities  each  with  from 
half  a  million  to  a  million  of  population.  Now  the 
farmers  in  the  country  find  it  very  profitable  to  raise 
vegetables  and  fruits  for  the  great  masses  of  city  peo- 
ple, who  are  too  busy  as  merchants  and  mechanics  and 
laborers  to  produce  ihe  food  they  need.  The  growing 
of  vegetables  and  fruits  is  called  market-gardening,  and 
this  is  a  sveat  business  in  the  Middle  States. 


[For  necltation.J 

1.  Jl'hich  are  the  Middle  States  ? 

The  Middle  States  are  New  York,  New  Jer.sey, 
Pennsylvania,  Delaware,  Maryland,  Virginia,  and 
West  Virginia. 

2.  Why  are  they  called  Middle  States  ? 

Tlie  name  Middle  States  was  given  to  them 
when  our  whole  country  was  only  a  narrow  strip 
along  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

Map.  —  {Sa' parjc  C7.)  1.  What  ocean  east  of  the  Middle  States? 
2.  Is  irennsylvania  on  the  sea-coast?  3.  What  large  river  gives  it 
easy  communication  with  the  ocean?  4.  One  of  the  States  in  the 
southern  part  has  no  sea-coast ;  which  one  is  it  ?  5.  Which  is  the 
most  northern  of  the  Middle  States?  —  the  most  southern? 

3.  What  mountains  extend  throuyh  the  Middle  States  ? 
The  ranges  of  the  Alleghany  Mountains. 

lyjap,  —  (.Ste  jjogc ';r  )  l.  in  what  direction  do  the  Alleghany  Moun- 
tains extend  ?  2.  Aie  they  nearest  the  coast  in  the  northern  or  in  the 
southern  part  ?  3.  In  what  part  of  New  York  are  the  Adirondack 
Mountains  ?  —  the  Catskill  Mountains  ?  4.  Is  the  Blue  Ridge  an  east- 
ern or  a  western  ridge  ? 

4.  IFIiat  of  the  surface  east  of  the  Alleiihany  Mountains  ? 
The  surface  east  of  the  Alleghany  Mountains 

slopes  to  a  low  region  called  the  Atlantic  Plain. 

5.  IFhat  of  the  surface  west  of  the  mountains  ? 

The  western  part  slopes  toward  the  Great  Lakes 
and  the  Ohio  River. 

6.  In  what  direction  do  most  of  the  rivers  flow  ? 

Most  of  the  rivers  flow  in  a  southerly  or  south- 
easterly direction  into  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

7.  What  of  farming  in  this  section  ? 

Farming  is  carried  ou  more  tlian  in  New  Eng- 
land, but  less  than  in  the  Western  States ;  and 
great  attention  is  given  to  market-gardening  and 
the  production  of  butter,  cheese,  and  wool. 

|\n  a  p.  —  (.Sec  page  67. )  1.  Which  is  the  most  northern  river  in  this 
section  .'  —  the  most  southern  ?  2.  What  large  rivers  between  the 
Hudson  and  the  James  ?  3.  What  river  flows  into  Delaware  Bay  ? 
4.   What  large  rivers  flow  into  Chesapeake  Bay? 


MAP     STUDIES. 


Jli^="  y//.  the  first  recitation  teachers  will  allow  pupils  to  aiiswcr 
Willi,  open  book.  At  tlie  second  recitation,  cither  from  outline 
maps  or  from  m.cmorif. 

Boundaries.  —  1.  Name  from  the  map  the  States  of  this 
section.  2.  What  great  lake  and  river  on  the  north  ? 
3.  What  country  on  the  south  ?  4.  What  section  of  States 
on  the  east  ?  5.  What  ocean  on  the  east  ?  6.  What  States 
on  the  south  ?    7.  What  States  on  the  west  ? 

Mountains.  —  1.  What  mountain-chains  cross  this  sec- 
tion ?  2.  In  what  direction  do  they  extend  ?  3.  Where 
are  the  Adirondacks  ?  —  the  Catskill  Mountains  ? 

Rivers  and  Lakes.  —  1.  What  two  large  lakes  lie  be- 
tween this  section  and  the  Dominion  of  Canada  ?  2.  What 
gi-eat  boundary  river  is  the  outlet  of  Lake  Ontario? 
3.  What  short  boundary  river  flows  north  from  Lake  Erie 
into  Lake  Ontario  ?  4.  What  celebrated  falls  on  this 
river?     5.  What  lake  between  New  York  and  Vermont  ? 

6.  What  boundary  river  between  Ohio  and  West  Virginia  ? 

7.  In  what  State  is  the  Hudson  River,  and  into  what  does 
it  flow  ?  8.  Of  what  States  is  the  Delaware  River  the 
boundary,  and  into  what  bay  does  it  flow  ?    9.  In  what 


State  is  the  Susquehanna,  and  into  what  bay  does  it 
flow?  10.  Of  what  States  is  the  Potomac  the  boundary? 
11.  What  two  rivers  unite  and  form  the  Ohio  River? 

Bays.  —  1.  Where  is  New  York  Bay  ?  2.  Between  what 
States  is  Delaware  Bay  ?  3.  In  what  two  States  is  Chesa- 
peake Bay  ?    4.  What  two  large  rivers  flow  into  this  bay? 

Capes.  —  1.  What  two  capes  at  the  mouth  of  Delaware 
Bay  ?  2.  What  two  at  the  mouth  of  Chesapeake  Bay  ? 
3.  What  cape  or  sandy  point  near  New  York  City  ? 

Of  what  State  is  each  of  these  cities 

/  Ai.EANY.  ANNArOLIS. 

I  H.\rjtisBunG.         Richmond. 

The  Capital ■.  t,.e^-tox.  CuAnLEsroN. 

I  DovKr.. 

In  what  State  is  each  of  these 

New  York.  Buffalo. 

PllILADF.I.PHIA.       PiTTSBUr.GH. 

Chief  Cities  ?...•{  Brooklyn.  K  f-waiik. 

Baltimore.  Richmond. 

''  WA.sHiNnTON.       Wheeling. 


THE    UNITED    STATES. 


LESSON    II 

MIDDLE    STATES    ( 
For  Read  ng  : 
I    Coal  Mining 

1  \\  e  liLii  iKitliui^'  about  luimii, 
in  Ntw  EnL,ldn(l ,  hut  in  the  Muldl 
States  this  is  a  very  great  business.  Ihe  ranges  ot  the 
AHeghanies  contain  two  treasures,  —  a  mineral,  anil  a 
metal  more  valuable  to  man  than  gold  or  silver.  These 
are  the  mineral  coal  and  the  metal  iron.  (Joal  and 
iron  are  found  in  immense  quantities  in  Pennsylvania, 
and  most  of  the  Middle  States  are  abundantly  supplied 
with  one  or  the  other,  —  New  York  and  New  Jersey 
with  iron,  Maryland,  Virginia,  and  West  Virginia  with 
coal.  Still,  we  may  say  that  the  State  of  Pennsyl- 
vania is  the  great  center  for  the  mining  of  coal  and 
iron,  and  it  was  here  that  the  business  began  in  the 
United  States. 

2.  The  two  principal  kinds  of  coal  are  anthracite,  or 
hard  coal,  and  bituminous,  or  soft  coal.  Anthracite  is 
what  is  burnt  in  stoves  and  grates  in  most  of  the 
Eastern  States.  Bituminous  coal  is  used  in  the  East 
and  very  largely  in  the  West,  where  it  is  found  in 
great  beds.  Besides  being  employed  for  heating,  it  is 
used  in  iron  furnaces  and  steam-engines.  Bituminous 
coal  is  found  in  many  parts  of  the  world ;  but  anthra- 
cite is  found  scarcely  anywhere  except  in  Pennsylvania, 
and  that  State  furnishes  three  fourths  of  all  the  anthra- 
cite used  in  the  world. 

3.  A  curious  history  is  that  of  how  hard  coal  first 
came  into  use.  In  the  year  1791,  at  the  time  Wash- 
ington was  President,  a  lonely  hunter,  whose  hut  was 
in  the  great  uninhabited  forest  along  the  Lehigh  Eiver, 
in  Pennsylvania,  was  returning  home  after  a  long  and 
unsuccessful  chase.  He  sat  down  to  rest  at  the  foot  of 
a  fallen  tree,  and  while  doing  so  saw  certain  strange- 
looking  black  stones  at  the  roots  of  tlie  tree.  Philip 
Ginter,  for  that  was  the  hunter's  name,  carried  some 
of  them  to  the  nearest  settlement,  and  from  there  they 
were  sent  to  Philadelphia  to  see  what  the  men  of  sci- 
ence Would  sav  about  them.     The  men  of  science  .said 


Preparing  Coal  for  Market 


they  were  "  stone  coal,"  but  a 
kind  of  coal  which  would  not 
bum.  Those  who  sought  to  have 
it  used  were  called  swindlers. 

4.  At  last,  after  several  years, 
the  owner  of  a  wire-manufactory 
in  Philadelphia  was  persuaded  to 
try  it.  Two  loads  were  brought 
to  the  place,  and  the  firemen 
spent  half  a  day  in  the  attempt 
til  burn  it  without  success.  At 
111  "in  they  closed  the  furnace  doors 
and  went  to  their  dinner,  in  dis- 
gust with  "  stone  coal  "  ;  but 
wlii'ii  they  came  back  they  were 
astduished  to  find  the  doors  red- 
and  the  furnace  in  danger  of 
I  ting.  Now  any  child  knows 
t  the  door  of  a  stove  must  be 
closed  and  the  damper  opened, 
or  the  blower  must  be  put  on  the 
gi-ate,  before  a  fire  of  hard  coal 
can  ha  made  to  burn  ;  but  the 
wisfst  men  did  not  know  the  fact  till  this  accident 
taught  them.  After  this,  hard  coal  soon  came  into  use. 
5.  There  are  now  tens  of  thou.sands  of  persons  in  the 
Middle  States  who  are  employed  in  mining  anthracite 
and  bituminous  coal.  In  connection  with  coal  we  must 
not  forget  petro'leKm,  or  coal-oil,  which  is  used  so  much 
as  a  fluid  to  burn  in  our  lamps,  and  for  many  other 
purposes.  It  is  a  dark-colored  oil,  thicker  than  com- 
mon oils,  and  is  produced  by  nature  in  the  great  coal- 
beds.  To  get  it,  wells  are  sunk  into  tiie  earth  in  the 
same  way  in  which  artesian  wells  are  sunk,  and  the  oil 
rises  to  the  surface.  Petroleum  is  found  in  large  ipian- 
tities  in  Pennsylvania  and  West  Virginia,  and  in  these 
later  years  it  has  been  largely  exported. 

II.  Iron  Mining. 

G.  Iron  ore  is  a  hard  substance  dug  from  the  ground. 
A  part  only  of  this  substance  is  iron  ;  but  by  smeltinf/, 
the  pure  iron  is  separated  from  the  other  parts.  The 
ore,  brought  from  the  mines  in  reddish  stony  lumiis, 
is  put  into  a  furnace  called  a  blast-furnace,  with  layers 
of  coal,  —  first  a  layer  of  coal,  then  one  of  iron,  then 
another  of  coal,  and  so  on.  When  the  furnace  has 
bpcome  very,  very  hot,  the  melted  iron,  together  with 
the  impure  substance  called  slag,  flows  down  to  the 
bottom  of  the  furnace.  But  the  metal,  being  the 
heavier,  sinks  lower  than  the  slag,  which  floats  upon 
the  surface  of  the  melted  mass  and  is  raked  otf.  The 
iron  is  then  drawn  off  below  and  is  made  to  run  into 
rude  molds  of  sand,  where  it  is  cooled.  This  is  what 
is  called  cast-iron,  or  ^yig-iron..  As  the  contents  of  the 
blast-furnace  are  removed,  fresh  coal  and  ore  are  fed 
from  above,  and  the  smelting  goes  on  day  and  night, 
for  years  sometimes,  or  until  the  furnace  is  out  of 
rejiair. 


THE   MIDDLE   STATES. 


09 


3.   What  other  mineral  substances  are  found  in 
the  Middle  States  ? 

Petroleum,  zinc,  plumbago,  and  salt  are 
found  in  the  Middle  States. 


Extracting  the  Ore. 


Working  the  Iron. 

7.  The  cast-iron  is  very 
/  hard  and  brittle,  so  that  it 
cannot  be  wrought  liy  the 
smith  on  his  anvil.  To 
make  it  fit  to  be  drawn 
into  bars  and  hammered 
into  different  shapes,  the  cast-iron,  which  is  still  quite 
impure,  is  melted  over  and  over  again.  It  is  then  beaten 
by  very  heavy  hammers  worked  by  steam,  or  pressed 
between  great  rollers,  till  it  takes  the  shajie  of  what 
moclianics  call  har-iroii,  or  wrougld-iron. 

8.  In  many  places  in  nearly  all  the  Middle  States  one 
may  see  numbers  of  blast-furnaces  ;  and  a  very  inter- 
esting sight  tliey  are,  especially  at  night,  when  they 
look  like  volcanoes,  witli  their  great  volume  of  smoke 
and  blaze  of  fire  issuing  from  the  top.  The  greatest 
iron-making  city  in  our  whole  country  is  Pittsburgh  in 
Pennsylvania. 

9.  Besides  coal  and  iron,  several  other  metals  and 
minerals  are  found  in  the  Middle  States.  Among 
these  are  zinc,  in  New  Jersey ;  slate,  in  Pennsylvania 
and  Virginia  ;  and  lead  and  plumbago,  in  Pennsylva- 
nia, 'i'hen  there  is  that  very  important  mineral, 
salt.  Tliis  is  obtained  in  great  quantities  from  salt- 
springs,  whicli  are  found  in  New  York,  Pennsylvania, 
and  West  Virginia.  It  is  thought  that  the  brine  in 
tliese  springs  comes  from  vast  underground  deposits  of 
rock-salt.  The  brine  is  poured  into  great  shallow  vats, 
and  the  water  evaporated  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  leaving 
the  pure  salt.  Syracuse  in  Now  York  is  the  largest 
salt-manufacturing  place  in  the  Union. 

[For  Recitation.] 

X.  llliat  mineral  and,  metal  arc  found  in  large  quantities 
in  most  of  the  Middle  States  ? 

The  mineral  coal,  and  the  metal  iron. 

2.  In  what  State  are  these  found  the  most  plentifulbi  ? 
Coal  and  iron  are  most  alxiudant  in  Pennsyl- 
vania. 

Map.  —  1-  Find  on  the  map  (paac  G7)  the  follo^ving  great  coal- 
mining places  in  Pennsylvania  :  Scranton,  Mauch  Chunk,  Carboudale, 
Pottsville.  2.  Find  in  Maryland  the  city  of  Cumberland,  a  gi-eat  coal 
C'-'uter.    3.  In  what  mountains  are  aU  these  coal-fields? 


LESSON     III. 
MIDDLE    STATES  (Contixued) 
[For  Reading.] 
Manufacturing,  etc. 

1.  The  business  of  manufacturing  gives 
work  to  hundreds  of  thousands  of  persons 
in  the  Middle  States.  The  rajtid  streams 
flowing  from  the  Alleghany  Mountains  fur- 
nish a  vast  supply  of  power  to  turn  the  wdieels  of  mills 
and  factories.  And  besides  water-|)ower,  the  manufac- 
turers are  able  to  use  steam-power,  because  coal  is  so 
handy  to  them. 

2.  It  would  take  a  whole  page  of  this  book  just  to 
name  the  articles  that  are  made  in  the  busy  mills,  fac- 
tories, foundries,  and  worksliops  of  the  Middle  States. 
When  you  think  of  tlie  great  abundance  of  iron  ore  in 
this  part  of  our  country,  you  will  suppose  that  every 
kind  of  iron-ware  must  be  made  here.  And  this  is 
quite  right.  All  sorts  of  iron  articles,  great  and  small, 
are  manufactured  in  these  States,  — locomotives,  boilers, 
railroad  iron,  shafts,  castings,  stoves,  and  every  descrip- 
tion of  hardware.  Even  steamers  are  now  built  of  iron, 
and  the  city  of  Wilmington,  in  the  little  State  of  Dela- 
ware, is  quite  noted  for  iron  ship-building. 

3.  The  manufacture  of  different  materials  for  cloth- 
ing forms  another  important  branch  of  industry.  It 
includes  cotton  and  woolen  goods,  knit  goods,  ready- 
ina<le  clothing,  bats,  and  boots  and  shoes.  An  aston- 
ishing quantity  of  paper  is  made,  and  this  is  used  in 
books,  magazines,  and  newspapers,  and  also  in  the  way 
of  stationery  and  wrapping-paper.  Furniture  of  all 
kinds  is  manufactured  in  the  Middle  States.  So  also 
are  sewing-machines  and  pianos,  india-rubber  goods 
and  leather  goods,  chemicals,  and  gold  and  silver  ware. 
Nor  must  we  forget  books,  because  in  the  great  cities 
of  the  IVIiddle  States,  especially  New  York  and  Phila- 
delphia, most  of  the  reading  matter  for  tlie  people  of 
the  United  States  is  prepared. 

4.  Of  the  articles  used  as  food,  flour  is  the  one  most 
made  in  the  Middle  States,  and  thouiiands  of  mills  are 
constantly  busy  grinding  up  wheat  into  the  form  fit  for 
making  bread.  Perhaps  you  may  have  seen  barrels  of 
flour  stamped  with  the  name  Genessee,  which  is  a  county 
in  New  York.  The  flour  made  in  Richmond,  Virginia, 
is  also  thought  much  of.  But  the  Middle  States  con- 
sume far  more  flour  than  they  can  produce,  and  hence 
large  quantities  have  to  be  brought  from  the  Western 
States. 

5.  Fishing  is  not  carried  on  in  this  part  as  much  as 
in  New  England,  because  the  people  there  are  much 


70 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


nearer  tlie  great  cod  and  mackerel  fisheries.  Still,  many 
persons  are  employed  in  fishing,  and  the  shad  from  the 
Potomac  River  are  quite  famous.  Gathering  oysters  is 
another  employment.  In  the  shoal  waters  of  Chesa- 
peake Bay  immense  quantities  of  oysters  are  gathered  : 
they  are  put  up  in  cans  and  sent  to  all  parts  of  the 
comitry  away  from  the  seaside. 

6.  And  now,  as  there  is  really  no  end  to  the  story 
of  what  the  people  in  this  section  make,  I  shall  stop 
with  mentioning  two  other  articles  of  manufacture,  — 
prepared  tobacco,  largely  made  in  Maryland  and  Vir- 
ginia ;  and  beer,  brewed  by  the  thousands  of  kegs  in 
the  large  breweries  of  New  York,  New  .Jersey,  and 
Pennsylvania. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  It'hat  can  yuii  say  of  manufacturiiiy  in,  the  Middle 
States  ? 

Manufacturing  is  very  largely  carried  on  in  tlie 
Middle  States. 

Map.  —  (■*«  J'"?'"  W-)  1-  lu  what  part  of  New  York  are  these 
manufacturing  cities :  New  York  City,  Albany,  Troy,  Rochester, 
Syracuse?  2.  In  what  part  of  New  Jersey  are  the  following  large 
manufacturing  cities :  Jersey  City,  Newark.  Trenton  ?  3.  In  what 
part  of  PennsylTania  are  the  following  Large  manufacturing  cities : 
Philadelphia,  Pittsburgh  ?  4.  In  what  part  of  Maryland  and  Dela- 
ware are  the  large  manufacturing  cities  of  Baltimore  and  Wilmington? 
5.  In  what  part  of  Virginia  is  the  large  manufacturing  city  of  Rich- 
mond? 

2.  Uliat  advantages  for  manufaoluring  have  the  Middle 
States  'I 

The  Middle  States  have  abundant  water-power 
and  cheap  coal. 

3.  What  are  the  rtiost  important  manufactures  ? 

The  most  uuportant  manufactures  consist  of  all 
kinds  of  iron-waxe. 

4.  JFliat  is  the  yreatcst  iron-mamifacturing  city  ? 

The  most  important  iron-manufacturing  city  is 
Pittsburgh. 

Map.  —  (See  paijc  67.)  Pittsburgh  is  at  the  point  where  two  rivers 
unite  to  form  the  Ohio  :  what  are  these  two  rivers  ? 

5.  IVhat  other  inanvfactured,  articles  are  made  in  these 
States  ? 

Flour,  furniture,  clothing,  and  tobacco  are  made 
to  a  great  extent. 


LESSON    IV. 

MIDDLE    STATES  (Continded). 

_     ^  TFor  Reading.] 

I.   Commerce. 

1.  You  remember  the  difference  between  foreign  com- 
merce and  domestic  commerce,  ^  foreign  commerce  is 
trade  with  other  countries,  and  dome.stic  commerce  trade 
with  different  parts  of  our  o-ivn  country.  Now  both 
the  foreign  and  the  domestic  commerce  of  the  Middle 


States   is  very  large.     Why  is   the   foreign  commerce 
large  1     I  will  tell  you. 

2.  Our  country  sends  abroad  great  quantities  of 
grain,  cotton,  rice,  sugar,  tobacco,  pork,  cheese,  and  man- 
ufactured articles ;  and  it  receives  in  return  countless 
articles  from  other  countries,  —  groceries,  broadcloths, 
cutlery,  wines,  teas,  cigars,  dye-stuffs,  india-rubber, 
shawls,  laces,  gloves,  etc.  Now  most  of  the  exports, 
or  goods  that  are  sent  away  from  this  country,  and  of 
the  imports,  or  goods  brought  into  it,  pass  through  the 
great  seaports  of  the  Middle  States,  especially  New 
York,  Philadelphia,  and  Baltimore.  About  three 
fourtlis  of  all  the  imports  of  our  country  arrive  first 
at  New  York,  and  nearly  one  half  its  exports  leave 
from  New  York. 

3.  Kegular  lines  of  steamers  sail  between  the  Atlantic 
coast  and  Europe,  and  at  the  wharves  of  the  great  sea- 
ports are  found  the  ships  of  all  nations,  bringing  us  the 
produce  and  merchandise  which  we  buy,  and  carrying 
away  the  goods  we  have  to  sell.  The  Middle  States 
are  covered  with  a  network  of  railroads.  Long  canals 
extend  from  the  East  to  the  West.  On  all  the  navigable 
rivers  are  hundreds  of  steamboats.  And  by  means  of 
these  railroads,  canals,  and  steamboats  the  produce  of 
the  Mississippi  Valley  is  transported  to  the  sea-coast, 
thence  to  be  sent  abroad,  while  the  merchandise  re- 
ceived from  foreign  lands  is  distributed  throughout  the 
States  of  the  interior. 

II.  Great  Cities. 

4.  The  Middle  States  contain  the  three  largest  cities 
in  the  United  States.  These  are  New  York,  Philadel- 
phia, and  Brooklyn. 

5.  New  York  City,  the  commercial  metropohs  of  the 
United  States  and  the  chief  city  of  America,  is  situated 
on  Manhattan  Island,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Hudson 
Eiver.  The  island  is  13i  miles  long  and  from  half  a 
mile  to  2^  miles  wide;  its  southern  point,  17  miles 
from  the  sea,  looks  out  on  the  Bay  of  New  York.  It 
was  visited  by  Henry  Hudson,  commanding  a  vessel  of 
the  Dutch  East  India  Company,  in  1609.  Soon  after, 
the  Dutch  came  over  and  built  houses  and  a  fort,  nam- 
ing the  place  New  Amsterdam.  In  1626  Peter  Min- 
uet, the  first  Dutch  governor,  bought  the  whole  of 
Manhattan  Island  from  the  Indians  for  $  24. 

6.  The  harbor  is  one  of  the  finest  in  the  world.  It 
is  said  that  nearly  20,000  vessels  enter  this  port  every 
year,  so  that  along  the  water-front  you  constantly  see  a 
forest  of  masts.  It  is  wonderful  to  visit  the  wharves 
and  see  the  loading  and  unloading  of  ships  and  steam- 
ers carrying  away  cotton  and  grain  and  wool  and  to- 
bacco from  our  country,  and  bringing  in  the  products 
of  every  clime. 

7.  Broadway,  perhaps  the  grandest  street  in  the 
world,  is  six  miles  long,  and  is  noted  for  its  great 
hotels  and  splendid  marble  and  iron  buildings.  Cen- 
tral Park,  the  finest  in  the  country,  is  2^  miles  long 


THE   MIDDLE   STATES. 


71 


and  haK  a  mile  broad.  The  city  is  supplied  with 
water  by  means  of  an  aijueduot  wliioh  runs  for  forty 
miles  under  ground,  and  is  called  the  Croton  A(|ue- 
duct. 

8.  The  populatiou  of  New  York  City  is  in  round 
numbers  one  million,  but  this  number  is  swelled  by 
multitudes  of  people  who,  though  living  in  adjoining 
cities,  do  business  in  the  metrcjpolis.  It  is  calculated 
that  there  are  1,-500,000  in  New  York  at  noon  on  every 
weck-daJ^ 

9.  Brooklyn,  on  Long  Island,  is  separated  from  New 
York  by  a  strait  f  of  a  mile  wide,  and  called  the  East 
River.  Large  ferry-boats  are  constantly  plying  between 
New  York  and  Brooklyn,  and  the  two  cities  will  soon 
be  joined  by  a  grand  suspension  bridge.  Brooklyn  is 
the  place  of  residence  of  thousands  of  merchants  and 
clerks  who  do  business  in  New  York. 

10.  Philadelphia  is 
in  population  the  sec- 
ond city  in  the  Union. 
It  lies  between  the 
Schuylkill  and  Dela- 
ware rivers ;  though 
not  on  the  coast,  it  has, 
by  means  of  the  broad 
channel  of  the  Dela- 
ware, all  the  advan- 
tages of  a  seaport. 

11.  The  name  of 
Philadelphia,  mean- 
ing brotherly  love,  was 
given  to  the  city  by 
its  founder,  William 
Penn.  The  city  was 
laid  out  in  1682  ;  the 
groves  of  chestnut, 
walnut,  spruce,  and 
other  trees  were  soon 
cleared  away,  leaving 
their  names  to  the 
streets  which  crossed 
their  sites.     In  1774 

the  Eirst  Continental  Congress  met  in  Philadelphia,  and 
in  1776  it  declared  the  independence  of  the  United 
States,  in  Independence  Hall. 

12.  The  chief  wealth  of  the  city  is  in  its  immense 
manufactures.  It  is  the  greatest  manufacturing  city  in 
the  United  States,  there  Deing  in  it  nearly  ten  thousand 
manufactories.  Among  the  principal  things  made  are 
locomotives,  iron  in  every  form,  ships,  cotton  and 
woolen  goods,  umbrellas,  shoes,  carpets,  and  books. 

1 .3.  Visitors  to  Philadelphia  find  it  interesting  to  see 
the  Fairmount  ^Vater- Works,  Laurel  Hill  Cemetery, 
Independence  HaU,  Girard  College,  the  United  States 
Mint,  the  Penitentiary,  the  Navy  Yard,  and  the  vast 
buildings  of  the  Centennial  Celebration. 

14.  The  largest  city  of  New  Jersey  is  Newark,  which, 


though  not  nearly  as  large  as  the  cities  already  named, 
has  over  100,000  population.  There  are  in  Newark 
many  great  maufactories  of  india-rubber  goods,  carriages, 
leather  goods,  papier,  machinery,  thread,  and  jewelry. 

1.5.  Baltimore,  the  leading  city  in  Maryland,  was 
founded  by  Lord  Baltimore,  who  established  the  coliuiy 
of  Maryland.  It  is  a  bright,  handsome  city,  and  tlie 
large  numbiir  of  line  works  of  memorial  art  have  won 
for  it  the  title  of  the  "  Mouumeutal  ('ity."  Various 
important  industries  arc  carried  on  in  lialtimore.  It 
is  the  great  point  for  working  the  ric'h  copper-ores 
brought  from  Lake  Sup(!rior.  It  has  also  many  large 
iron-works,  rolling-mills,  nail-factories,  sugar-refineries, 
and  tanneries.     The  commerce  of  this  city  is  very  great. 

16.  liichiuond,  the  capital  and  leading  city  of  Vir- 
ginia, is  finely  situated  on  the  James  Pivcr.  It  has 
iiumei'ous  flour-mills  and  toljacco  factories. 


vr]K^^^ 


On  the  Wharrea  in  New  Tork  Harbor. 


[For  Recitation.] 

1.  U'hal  of  llw.  rnm- 
merce  of  tlie  Miihlh: 
States  ? 

lioth  the  foreigii 
and  tin;  donie.stic 
commerce  of  the 
Middle  States  is 
very  large. 

2.  Of  what  does  the  for- 
lujn  commerce  consist  ? 

The  foreign  coni- 
Mierce  consists  of 
s  1  ■  nding  abroad  cot- 
1 1  111,  grain,  sugar, 
pork,  tobacco,  and 
I  ither  products  of  the 
country,  and  receiv- 
ing iu  return  articles 
of  use  or  luxury. 

3.  ll'luU  is  tlie  larg- 
est city  of  New  York, 
and  where  is  it  ? 

New  York  City, 
the  largest  city  in  America,  is  on  iLiiihattan 
Island,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Hudson. 

4.  U'liat  is  tlie  largest  city  of  Pennsylvania,  and  where  is  it? 
Philadelphia,  on  the  Delaware  River,  about  60 

miles  from  the  coast. 

5.  TFhat  is  the  largest  city  of  Xew  Jersey,  and  where  is  it  ? 
Newark,  on  Newark  Bay. 

6.  Jl'hat  is  the  largest  city  of  Maryland,  and  where  is  it .' 
Baltimore,  on  an  arm  of  the  Patapsco  River. 

7.  JFhat  is  the  largest  city  of  Delaware  ? 
Wilmington,  on  the  Delaware  River. 

8.  IFhat  is  the  largest  city  of  Virginia,  and  where  is  it  ! 
Richmond,  on  the  James  River. 

9.  What  is  the  largest  city  of  West  Virginia  ? 
WHieeliug,  on  the  Ohio  River. 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


SPECIAL  GEOGRAPHY  FOPt  MIDDLE  STATES  CLASSES. 


I. -MAP  STUDIES. 

|1^~  These  questions  relate  only  to  the  State  in  which  the  pupils  of 
the  class  reside,  and  are  designed  solely  for  classes  in  the  Middle 
States. 

Boundaries.  —  Bound  each  of  tlie  States  in  this  section. 

Position  aud  Area.  —  1.  What  is  the  name  of  your  State  ? 
2.  In  what  part  of  tliis  section  of  the  United  States  is  it  situ- 
ated ?  3.  How  <loes  your  State  compare  in  size  with  the  other 
States  of  tliis  section?  [Sec  table,  jxuje  VS.]  4.  Bound  your 
State.  5.  It  is  crossed  by  what  parallel  or  parallels  of  latitude  V 
6.  By  what  meridians  ?  7.  Area  of  your  State  in  square  miles  '! 
[Sec  tabic,  page  73.]    8.  Population  ? 

Mountains.  —  1.  By  what  mountains,  represented  on  the 
map,  is  this  State  crossed  ?  2.  What  is  the  name  of  the  highest 
mountain  in  your  State?  [Answer  by  the  Icadher.]  3.  Do  you 
knosv  the  names  of  any  mountains  not  represented  on  the  map  ? 

Rivers.  —  1.  Name  the  largest  river  of  this  State.  2.  Where 
does  it  rise  and  into  what  does  it  flow  ?  3.  What  is  the  second 
river  in  size  ?    4.  What  boundaiy  rivers  has  your  State  ? 

Lakes.  —  1.  If  your  State  has  any  large  lake,  name  it  and 
tell  in  what  i>art  of  the  State  it  is.     2.  Name  any  small  lakes. 

The  Sea-coast.  — [For  all  except  IVcsl  Virginia.']  1.  Name 
any  bay  or  liays  slong  the  coast.  2.  Which  of  these  bays  is 
I  tlie  largest '.  3.  Name  any  capes,  points,  or  heads.  4.  What 
!     islands  lie  otf  the  coast?    5.  Name  any  important  seaport. 

Cities.  —  1.  What  is  the  capital  of  this  State  and  where  is  it 
situated  ?  2.  What  is  the  largest  city  ?  3.  Name  any  other 
large  or  important  cities.  4.  Name  the  capital  of  each  of  the 
Middle  States.  5.  Name  the  largest  city  in  each  of  the  Mid- 
dle States,  and  tell  something  about  it. 

Counties,  etc.  —  1.  In  what  county  do  you  live  ?  2.  What 
is  tlie  name  of  the  county  seat?  3.  What  counties  He  next  to 
yours  ?  4.  Name  as  many  counties  as  you  can.  5.  Is  the 
name  of  the  place  in  which  you  live  down  on  the  map  ?  6.  If 
the  place  in  which  you  live  is  not  represented  on  the  map, 
near  what  large  place  do  you  know  it  to  be  ?  7.  What  railroad 
or  railroads  pass  through  this  city  [or  town]  ?  8.  Do  you  know 
where  the  express  trains  run  to  ? 

History.  —  [To  be  yircn  by  teacher.]  1.  At  w'hat  place  was 
your  State  first  settled?  2.  In  wliat  yi'ar  ?  3.  In  what  year  did 
it  become  a  State  ? 


Agricultural 


K^"  Pupils  may  now  be  required  to  draio  on  the  blackboard  an 
outline  map  of  their  State. 

II. -LOCAL  GEOGRAPHY. 

iir^"  Questions  exclusively  for  Middle  States  classes. 

1.  How  many  in  this  class  have  been  in  any  of  the  Middle 
States,  other  than  the  one  in  which  they  live  ? 

2.  What  is  the  surface  of  the  country  in  that  part  of  the 
Middle  States  in  which  you  live  ? 

3.  What  are  the  principal  forest  trees  ? 

4.  What  kinds  of  lumber  are  sawed  from  them  ? 

5.  What  are  the  most  important  farm-products  of  that  part 
of  the  Middle  States  in  which  you  live  ? 

6.  What  kinds  of  live-stock  are  raised  ? 

7.  What  arc  the  dairy  jiroducts  ? 

8.  Do  you  know  of  any  places  especially  noted  for  any  of  the 
following  articles  ? 

(Wheat.     Tobacco.     Apples.     Grapes. 
Rye.  Potatoes.    Pears.       Strawberries. 

Barley.      Hay.  Peaches.   Blackbeiries. 

Oats.  Butter.       Cherries.  Cabbages. 

Corn.        Cheese.       Plums.      Onions,  etc. 

9.  Are  there  any  coal  or  iron  mines  in  your  State  ? 

10.  Can  you  name  any  places  that  have  been  built  up  in  the 
mining  region  ? 

11.  How  is  coal  obtained  ? 

12.  Are  there  any  stone-quarries  near  where  you  live  ? 

13.  What  canals  in  your  part  of  the  country  ? 

14.  What  articles  are  transported  over  them  ? 

15.  Name  any  seaports  or  lake-ports  that  you  know  of? 

16.  What  articles  does  your  part  of  the  country  send  to  New 
York,  Philadelphia,  or  Baltimore  ? 

17.  What  do  you  get  in  return  ? 

18.  Do  you  know  where  the  great  oyster-beds  of  this  section 
are  ? 

19.  What  places  are  famous  for  .shad  ? 

20.  Name  any  places  that  you  have  seen  or  that  you  know 
of  that  nuike  any  of  the  following 

Flour.  Clothing.  Leather  goods. 

Lumber.  Steam-engines.     India-rabber 

Tobacco.  Locomotives.  goods. 

Woolen  goods.     Railroail  iron.       Furniture. 


Manufac- 


Cottou  goods 


Farm-tools. 


III.  -  DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  STATES. 

fc^  The  description  of  States,  though  designed  for  classes  in  the 
Middle  States,  may  be  taken  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher  by  other 
pupils  sufficiently  advanced  or  by  way  of 


NEW    YORK. 

Description.  —  New  York  (N.  Y.),  or  the  "  Empire 
State,"  is  the  first  State  in  the  Union  in  population,  wealth, 
and  commerce. 

The  northern  and  eastern  pnrts  are  hilly  or  mountainous; 
the  western  part  slopes  to  the  Lakes. 

The  Hudson,  the  largest  river,  is  famed  for  its  beauty. 


The  advantages  possesse  1  by  this  State  are  its  fertile 
soil,  central  position  between  the  Great  Lakes  and  the 
Atlantic  Ocean,  fine  navigable  rivers,  and  its  grand  harbor 
of  New  York. 

The  principal  occupations  are  agriculture,  dairying, 
manufacturing,  and  commerce. 

The  chief  cities  are  :  — 

New  Yohk,  the  largest  city  in  America,  and  tlie  commercial 
emporium  of  tlie  New  World.     It  lias  about  1,000,000  inhabitants. 

Brooklyn,  opposite  New  York,  a  place  of  residence  for  people 
doing  business  in  New  York  City. 

Buffalo,  on  L.ike  Erie,  noted  for  its  trade  and  manufactures. 


THE   MIDDLE   STATES. 


■■.i 


RoCHPSTER,  Oil  the  Gcneset-  River,  a  city  of  mills  anil  mannfac- 
tories,  ami  of  great  nurseries  for  fruit  trees  anil  oniameiital  trees. 
Troy,  on  the  Hudson  River,  largely  engagctl  in  inanufacturiiig. 
Albany,  on  the  Hiulson,  the  capital  of  the  State. 

NEW    JERSEY. 

Description.  —  Xi-w  Jei>ey  (N.  .1.)  lii's  lietwet'ii  New 
York,  Peiin.sylvaiiia,  and  the  Atluiitii-  Oci-aii. 

In  the  northern  part  are  hills,  but  most  ol'  the  State 
beloni,'^  to  the   Alhintic   Phlin. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  good  soil,  its  min- 
eral wealth,  and  its  situation  between  the  coal-helds  of 
Pennsylvania  and  the  ureal  ronimereial  center,  New  York. 

The  principal  occupations  are  market-ganleniu;^', 
niiuini;    ii"ii    and    zini',   and    manui'acturhig. 

The  chief  cities  are  :  — 

Newark,  famous  for  the  manufacture  of  intlia-ruliber  poods  and 
leather  goods,  clothing,  jewelry,  etc. 

Jersey  City,  on  the  west  shore  of  New  York  Bay,  a  great  man- 
ufacturing and  commercial  place. 

Patekson,  on  the  Passaic  River,  wliere  are  many  locomotive  and 
steam-engine  works,  cotton  and  silk  factories,  etc. 

Trenton,  on  the  Delaware,  is  the  capital. 

PENNSYLVANIA. 

Description.  —  Pennsylvania  (Penn.),  or  the  ''  Keystone 
State,"  comes  next  to  New  York  in  population.  The  cen- 
tral region  is  crossed  by  various  ridges  of  the  Alleghany 
Mountains  ;  the  western  p;u-t  slopes  to  the  Ohio  valley  and 
the  e;istern  part  is  in  the  Atlantic  Plain. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are,  its  rich  mines  of 
coal  and  iron  and  other  minerals,  its  abundant  water-power, 
excellent  soil,  and  facilities  for  commerce. 

The  principal  occupations  are  raining,  manufacturing, 
agriculture,  and  commerce. 

The  chief  cities  are  :  — 

Philadelchia,  on  Delawaie  River,  the  second  city  in  poimlation 
in  the  Union,  and  in  manufactures  the  first. 

Pittsburgh,  at  the  junction  of  the  Alleghany  and  Monongahela 
rivers,  the  center  of  the  bitumious  coal-trade  and  the  great  iron 
working  city  in  the  country. 

Scrantox,  noted  for  its  coal  and  iron  trade. 

Reading,  on  the  Scliuylkill,  noted  for  extensive  iron-works. 

Harhisbukg,  on  the  Susquehanna,  the  capit.al  of  the  State. 

DELAWARE. 

Description.  —  Delaware  (Del.)  is,  except  Rhode  Island, 
the  smallc.-l  State  in  tlie  Union. 

P.eing  wholly  in  the  Atlantic  Plain,  it  is  a  level  country. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  good  soil,  its  nian- 
ul'arturiiig  facilities,  and  its  fine  water  communicatian. 

The  principal  occupations  are  market -gardening,  man- 
ufacturing, and  ship-luiikling. 

The  chief  cities  are  :  — 

\Vu.MINOTON,  on  tlie  Delaware,  the  largest  city,  noted  for  its 
manufactures. 

Dover,  a  small  place,  the  capital  of  the  State. 

MARYLAND. 

Description. —  Maryland  (Md.)  is  very  irregular  in 
shape  and  surfai-e. 

Chesapeake  Bay  extends  northward  into  the  State,  divid- 
ing it  into  two  parts,  —  the  penin.sula  and  the  mainland. 


The  eastern  part  is  low  and  level  ;  the  western  part  is 
crossed  by  the  lofty  ridges  of  the  AUeghany  ilountains. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  tine  climate,  good 
soil,  abundance  nf  cnal,  and  facilities  for  comniuniaition. 

The  principal  occupations  are  growing  wheat,  tobacco, 
and  other  farm  products,  cual-niiiiing  in  the  western  .sec- 
tion, together  with  manufacturing  and  commerce.  • 

The  chief  cities  ;ue  :  — 

Balti.mori;,  tlie  largest  city,  a  great  market  for  flour,  tobacco, 
and  oysters. 

Ci  .MBERLAND,  the  center  of  the  coal-trade. 

Khedkrick.  a  prosperous  place  ni  a  fine  farming  country. 

AXNAl'OLIS,  llie  capital,  the  seat  of  the  U.  S.  Naval  Academy. 

DISTRICT    OF    COLUMBIA. 

Description,  -lb.-  |ii-triit  of  t'olutubia  is  a  small 
territory  (t;4  .sipiaie  mile.^)  whicli  belongs  not  to  any  State, 
but  to  the  government  of  the  United  States. 

The  importance  of  the  District  comes  from  the  lact  that 
in  it  is  Washington,  the  capital  of  the  United  Stiite.s. 

VVashixoton  is  a  large  and  fine  city,  containing  the  public  build- 
ings in  which  the  govenimeiit  business  of  Our  Country  is  carried 
on.  The  national  legislature  meets  in  the  Capitol,  which  is  thought 
to  be  the  finest  public  building  in  the  world.  Tlie  President  of  the 
United  States  lives  at  tlic  White  House  in  \Va.shington. 

VIRGINIA. 

Description.  — Yiigiiiia  (Ya.)  is  south  of  Maryland, 
from  whii  li  it  is  separated  by  the  Potomac  River. 

The  eastern  section  lielongs  to  the  Atlantic  Plain  ;  the 
western  pait  is  crossed  by  the  Blue  Ridge. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  fine  climate  and 
good  soil,  its  wealth  of  coal  and  other  minerals,  and  its 
great  facilities  for  commerce. 

The  principal  occupation  is  agriculture,  though  min- 
ing and  manufacturing  —  for  which  the  State  is  finely 
adapted  —  are  on  the  increase. 

The  chief  cities  are  :  — 

RicuMONn.  on  James  River,  the  largest  place  and  the  capital, 
noted  for  its  iron-works  and  tobacco  warehouses. 

Norfolk  and  Ports.moi:th,  the  ]irinci)ial  seaports. 

PiCTEitsmiiii,  on  the  Appomatto.\  River,  a  manufacturing  city. 

WEST    VIRGINIA. 

Description.  —  West  Virginia  (W.  Va.)  was  a  part  of 
^'ill:inia  until  1862,  when  it  was  made  a  separate  State. 

This  State  is  crossed  by  the  main  ridge  of  the  Alle- 
glianies.     The  western  part  slopes  to  the  Ohio  valley. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  coal  and  iron,  its 
oil-wrlls  ;iii,l  -.ilt--]uings.  and  its  tine  mimntain-pa.sture.s. 

The  principal  occupations  are  farming  and  mining. 

The  chief  cities  are  ;  — 

Wheeling,  on  the  Oliio  River,  noted  for  its  iron-works. 

Charleston,  the  capital. 


AREA  AND   POPULATION   OF 

THE 

MIDDLE   STATES. 

Names. 

Area  in  square 

miles. 

Population  (1870.) 

'    New  York                   '              «,000 

4,387,000 

Sen  .lersev                                  8,320 

906,000 

PeiinsvlTania                             46,000 

3,5'22,000 

Jlarvlanil                                  "l'^^ 

781,000 

Delaware                                    2,120 

125,000 

Virainia                                   38,348 

1,225,000 

West  Virginia                         23,000 

442,000 

74 


THE    UNITED    STATES. 


THE    SOUTHERN    STATES. 


THE    SOUTHERN    STATES. 


LESSON    I. 

DESCRIPTION    OP    THE    SOUTHERN    STATES. 
[For  Reading.] 


I.  Situation. 

1.  We  now  go 
iVora  the  .section 
wliere  the  chief 
business  of  the 
I'eople  is  making 
things  to  the  sec- 
tion wliere  the 
principal  business 
of  the  people  is  to 
groiv  things, — 
Off  Chariest        Lo  ku  t  Mountain  f^Qn^^  t]ie  land  of 

the  mine,  the  factory,  and  the  foundry  to  the  land  of 
the  cotton,  sugar,  and  rice  field  ;  from  the  States  where 
people  are  gathered  in  great  cities  to  the  States  where 


cities  are  few  and  small,  and  people  live  on  broad 
plantations.  It  is  the  Southern  section  of  the  Unitetl 
States  about  which  we  are  now  to  learn. 

2.  The  map  shows  us  that  in  the  southern  part  of  the 

Atlantic  coast  are  JS'ortli  and  South 
Carolina,    then    Georgia,    and    then 
Florida.      But  v>-e  notice  that,  while 
the   great  peninsula  of  Florida  lias 
A        the  Atlantic  Ocean  on   its  eastern 
tjA  .  coast,  its  western  shore  is  laved  by 
^^      the   warm    waters   of    the   Gulf  of 
Mexico.     Following  westward  along 
the    Gidf   of    Mexico,  we   see   four 
States, —  Alabama,  Mississippi,  Lou- 
^-•''  isiana,  and  Texas.     North  of  Louisi- 

^—  ana,  and  on  the  west  side  of  the  Mississippi 
:  ^  liivcr,  is  Arkansas,  while  east  of  the  Missi.s- 
sippi  is  Tennessee.  Hence  we  may  describe  the 
soutliern  section  of  Our  Country  as  including  the 
South  Atlantic  and  Lower  Mississippi  States. 

II.  Early  History. 

3.  In  the  story  of  the  firsit  settlement  of  this  part  of 
Our  Country  there  is  many  a  romantic  chapter.  Per- 
haps you  have  read  about  that  old  Spanish  dreamer 
Ponce  de  Leon  [poii'lhay  day  hy-ihi'],  who  had  heard 
from  -the  Indians  of  a  certain  fountain  the  waters  of 
which  kept  the  person  who  drank  it  ever  young.  He 
sailed  from  the  West  Indies  to  find  this  fountain,  and, 
though  he  found  it  not,  he  discovered  a  new  land  which 
he  named  Florida.  This  was  in  the  early  times,  only 
twenty  years  after  the  discovery  of  America.  Some 
time  after  this  (l.')6.'))  the  Spaniards  planted  a  colony 


MAP    STUDIES. 


^!^^  At  the  first  recitation  the  teacher  will  allow  the  pupih  to 
an:<wcr  with  02)Cit  books  ;  at  the  second  thetj  may  he  required  to 
answer  from  vicmorij  or  from  an  outline  taap. 

Position.  —  1.  What  ocean  east  of  this  section  ? 
2.  What  waters  south  ?  3.  Beginning  with  Nortli  Caro- 
lina, name  in  order  all  the  States  on  the  Atlantic  coast. 

4.  What  State  borders  both  on  the  Atlantic  and  the  Gulf? 

5.  Name  three  other  Gulf  States.  6.  What  Slates  in  this 
section  are  west  of  the  Mississippi?  7.  What  State 
north  of  Mississippi  and  Alabama  ? 

Mountains.  —  1.  What  mountains  in  the  South  Atlan- 
tic States  ?  2.  What  is  the  highest  mountain  peak  ?  Ans. 
Mt.  Mitchell  in  North'  Carolina  (6,700  feet).  3.  Which 
Southern  States  have  no  mountains  ?  4.  What  mountains 
in  Arkansas  ? 

Rivers  and  Lakes.  —  1.  Which  is  the  largest  river  that 
flows  througli  this  section  ?  2.  What  two  large  western 
branches  has  the  Mississippi  ?  3.  What  two  rivers  flow 
through  Tennessee  ?  4.  In  what  direction  do  most  of  the 
rivers  of  the  South  Atlantic  States  flow  ?    5.  What  boun- 


dary river  between  South  Carolina  and  Georgia  ?  6.  What 
two  rivers  in  South  Carolina?  —  in  North  Carolina? — in 
Alabama  ?    7.  What  lakos  in  Florida  ?  —  in  Louisiana  ? 

The  Sea-coast.  —  1.  Where  is  Cape  Hatteras  ?  —  Cape 
Fear?— Cape  Sable?  2.  What  sounds  on  the  coast  of 
North  Carolina  ?  3.  What  States  border  on  the  Atlantic  ? 
—  on  the  Gulf?  4.  Name  three  bays  on  the  Gulf. 
5.   Which  have  no  sea-coast  ? 

Of  what  State  is  each  of  these  cities 

I  Raleigh  [tokiVj/J.  Montgomery. 
CoLUMIilA.  Jacksox. 

Atlanta.  Nashville. 

Tallahas'.see.        Little  Kock. 
Austin.  New  Oklean.s. 

In  what  State  is  each  of  these 

(New  Op/leans.  Nashville. 

Charleston.  Savankah. 

Memphis.  Atlanta. 

Galveston.  Little  Rock. 


THE    UNITED    STATES. 


in  Elorida  and  founded  St.  Augustine,  the  oldest  city 
in  tlie  United  States. 

4.  Witli  another  part  of  this  coast,  to  the  north  of 
Florida,  is  connected  the  name  of  the  brave  Sir  Walter 
Ealeigh.  He  had  visited  tlie  region  spoken  of,  and 
when  he  told  Queen  Elizabeth  about  it  she  gave  him  a 
grant  of  a  large  part  of  it,  and  he  named  the  country 
"  Virginia."  But  this  Virginia  included  a  great  deal 
more  than  what  we  call  Virginia,  for  it  took  in  a  long 
line  of  coast  both  north  and  south.  Ealeigh  sent  out 
a  party  to  make  a  settlement  on  Eoanoke  Island  (in 
North  CaroHua),  but  they  became  discouraged  and 
returned  to  England  the  next  year.  Then  he  sent  out 
another  colony  ;  but  it  fared  still  worse,  for  when,  two 
or  three  years  afterwards,  a  ship  was.sent  to  see  how  it 
was  getting  on,  not  a  trace  of  it  could  be  found. 
Every  person  in  the  colony  had  been  kUled  lay  the 
Indians.  These  were  the  earliest  English  attempts  to 
colonize  America,  and  were  made  many  years  before 
the  founding  of  Jamestown  or  Plymouth. 

III.  Coast  and  Inland. 

5.  The  C(jast  in  this  section,  both  on  the  Atlantic 
and  the  Gulf  sides,  is  flat  and  marshy.  Along  the 
shore  is  a  chain  of  long,  narrow  sandy  islands,  and 
between  these  and  the  mainland  are  shallow  bays  and 
sounils.  On  the  coast  of  Florida  are  a  number  of  low 
coral  islands,  which  are  called  keys.  The  Southern 
States  are  not  nearly  so  well  supplied  with  good  har- 
bors as  are  the  North  Atlantic  States. 

6.  Looking  at  the  map  we  see  that  the  Alleghany 
Mountains  extend  in  a  southwesterly  direction  through 
the  Carolinas,  Tennessee,  and  Georgia.  In  Alabama 
these  mountains  sink  into  hUls  ;  and  Florida,  though  an 
Atlantic  State,  has  no  mountains  at  all,  but,  on  the  con- 
trary, great  swamps  and  everglades.  The  States  of  Jlis- 
sissippi,  Louisiana,  and  Arkansas  are  also  generally  level ; 
and  Texas,  though  hilly  or  mountainous  in  the  western 
section,  is  so  far  west  that  the  highlands  are  not  a  part 
of  the  AUeghanies  but  of  the  Rocky  Mountains. 

IV.  Climate. 

7.  Tiemembering  that  the  nearer  a  place  is  to  the 
Equator  the  greater  the  ijuantity  of  heat  during  the 
year,  we  shall  easily  understand  that  the  climate  of  the 
Southern  States  must  be  warmer  than  that  of  the  Mid- 
dle States.  True,  no  part  of  the  Southern  States  is  in 
the  Torrid  Zone  ;  but  you  may  notice  that  the  south- 
ern pomt  of  Florida  is  very  near  the  Torrid  Zone. 
And  in  fact  all  the  Southern  States  are  in  what  is 
called  the  warm-temperate  belt,  though,  of  course,  those 
States  which  border  on  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  have  greater 
heat  throughout  the  year  than  Virginia  or  Tennessee. 

8.  It  will  be  plain  that  the  climate  of  tlie  Southern 
States  must  be  warmer  than  that  of  the  Middle  States, 
when  we  learn  that  cotton,  rice,  and  sugar  grow  finely  in 
the  Southern  States.  These  are  semi-tropical  plants  and 
cannot  grow  in  the  northern  part  of  the  Temperate  Zone. 


[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  difference  is  there  betioccn  the  (jreat  business  of  the 
■people  of  New  England  and  the  Middle  States  and  those  of  the 
Southern  States  ? 

In  the  New  England  and  Middle  States  the 
principal  occupation  is  manufacturing ;  in  the 
Southern  States  it  is  agriculture. 

2.  JVIuit  can  you  say  of  the  sea-coast  of  the  Southern  States  ? 
The  sea-coast  is  low  and  flat,  and,  as  there  are 

many  sand-bars,  good  harbors  are  fewer  than  iii 
the  North  Atlantic  States. 

3.  ll'liat  mountains  are  fouiul  in  this  section  ? 

The  Alleghany  Mountains  extend  from  North 
Carolina  into  Alabama ;  the  other  States  are  gen- 
erally level. 

1^  ap,  —(Sec  jKige  Tl,- )  1.  The  mountains  runniBg  from  North  Caro- 
lina into  Alabama  are  ranges  of  the  AUeghanies  :  which  part  of  North 
Carolina,  South  Carolina,  and  Georgia  do  they  traverse  7  2.  Which 
states  have  no  mountains? 

4.  llluit  of  the  climate  of  the  Soiithern  States  ? 

The  Southern  States  have  warm  summers  and 
mild  winters,  because  they  are  near  the  hot  belt  of 
the  earth. 


LESSON    II. 

SOUTHERN    STATES    (CONranED). 

[For  Reading.] 
I.   Cotton. 

1.  Growing  cotton  is  a  very  great  business  in  all 
the  Southern  States,  though  cotton  grows  better  in  the 
more  southerly  States  —  as  South  Carolina,  Georgia, 
Alabama,  and  Mississippi  —  than  it  does  in  the  more 
northerly.  Alabama  and  Mississippi  are  the  two  States 
that  produce  the  most  cotton  of  any  in  the  Union. 

2.  Perhaps  many  pupils  who  live  in  the  Northern 
or  Western  States  have  never  seen  cotton,  except  in 
the  shape  of  "  cotton  goods,"  such  as  calicoes,  prints, 
etc.  But  before  the  cotton  was  spun  and  woven  in 
the  miUs  it  was  a  soft  downy  substance,  somewhat  like 


THE   SOUTHERN    STATES. 


wool,  and  grew  in  the  pods  of  the  cotton-ijlant.  As 
the  seeds  ripen,  the  pods  bui-st  open,  showing  the  snow- 
white  cotton,  which  gradually  pushes  out.  In  the 
autumn  montlis  it  is  ready  for  picking,  un<l  this  is 
done  by  hand.  Lines  of  pickers,  generally  negroes, 
male  and  female,  with  wide-mouthed  sacks  hung  from 
their  shoulders  or  waists,  pass  between  the  rows  of 
plants  and  gather  the  fleecy  cotton  from  the  open  pods. 
It  is  then  j)laced  in  baskets  at  the  end  of  the  rows,  and 
from  there  is  carried  in  wagons  to  what  is  called  the 
gin-house.  But  it  may  be  that  some  pupils  do  not 
know  what  a  "  gin-house  "  is. 

3.  Tlie  cotton,  when  it  comes  from  the  jjod,  is 
mixed  with  the  seeds  of  the  plants,  and  clings  very 
closely  to  the  seeds.  The  first  thing  is  to  get  the  cot- 
ton away  from  the  seeds.  This  is  very  tiresome  to 
do,  and  takes  a  long  time  if  people  do  it  by  hand. 
Now,  formerly  this  was  the  oidy  method  people  had  of 
separating  the  seeds  from  the  cotton.  Then  cotton 
cost  so  much  that  it  was  not  largely  used.  But  near 
the  end  of  the  last  century,  at  the  time  when  Washing- 
ton was  President  of  the  United  States,  a  New  England 
man  named  Eli  Whitney  made  a  machine  which  can 
do  this  work  very  quickly  and  cheaply.  This  was  the 
cotton-gin,  and  a  very  great  invention  it  was,  because 
it  then  became  very  profitable  to  raise  cotton.  After 
this  the  growing  of  cotton  in  the  Southern  States  in- 
creased in  the  most  wonderful  way,  so  that  now  our 
country  produces  more  cotton  than  all  the  rest  of  the 
world.  A  good  deal  of  it  is  manufactured  into  cloth 
in  our  own  country,  but  most  of  it  is  packed  in  bales 
and  sent  to  England,  where  it  keeps  in  motion  thou- 
sands of  busy  looms.  Cotton  is  such  a  great  thing  that 
it  is  sometimes  called  "  King  Cotton." 

i.  There  is  another  thing  in  regard  to  cotton  which 
I  must  tell  you.  In  the  South  most  of  the  laboring 
people  were  formerly  negro  slaves.  AVhen  the  planters 
found  out  that  they  could  make  a  great  deal  of  money 
by  growing  cotton,  they  felt  that  they  needed  more 
and  more  hands  to  do  the  work  in  the  field ;  so  they 
brought  many  negroes  from  other  jsarts  of  the  United 
States  and  also  from  Africa.  And  this  is  the  reason 
why  the  Blades  increased  so  very  rapidly  in  the  cotton 
States ;  so  that,  even  now,  when  there  is  no  longer 
slavery,  the  colored  people  are  more  than  lialf  the  pop- 
ulation in  some  of  these  States. 


5.  In  many  of  the  Southern  States  rice  is  gi-own, 
but  it  is  cultivated  most  largely  in  South  Carolina, 
Georgia,  and  Louisiana.  Indeed,  South  Carolina  was 
the  first  State  in  the  Union  where  rice  was  gTown. 
This  grain  did  not  belong  originally  to  America. 
Nearly  two  hundred  years  ago  a  sea-captain  who  had 
sailed  from  Madagascar  to  Charleston,  South  Carolina, 
brought  with  him  a  bag  of  rice-seed,  which  he  gave  to 
a  gentleman.     The  captain  explained  that  he  had  seen 


it  growing  in  the  East  Indies,  wlierc  people  used  it 
for  food  a  great  deal.  The  gentleman  divided  the  seed 
among  some  of  his  friends,  who  planted  it.  It  was 
found  to  do  very  well,  and  ever  since  it  has  been  grown 
quite  largely. 

6.  Rice  resembles  wheat  in  its  .size-,  color,  and  manner 
of  growth  ;  but,  unlike  wheat,  it  needs  a  low,  moist 
soil.     It  must  be  undi;r  water  when  it  is  first  sown  : 


and,  after  it  sprouts,  the  water  must  be  drained  off 
and  the  ground  kept  dry.  It  is  very  largely  grown  in 
China,  India,  and  indeed  in  all  the  warm  countries 
of  Asia  and  Africa.  It  feeds  more  peojile  than  any 
other  grain.  It  is  said  that  rice  is  the  chief  food  of 
one  third  of  the  human  family. 

III.  Sugar. 

7.  We  have  already  read  about  the  sugar-cane  and 
how  sugar  is  made  from  it.  Now,  do  you  think  the 
sugar-cane  grows  in  any  part  of  our  country  1  It  does. 
This  plant  needs  a  very  warm  climate  to  ripen  it ;  and, 
since  along  the  Gulf  of  IMexico  is  the  hottest  part  of 
the  United  States,  this  is  where  the  sugar-cane  is  grown. 
It  is  cultivated  to  some  extent  in  Florida  and  also  in 
Texas,  but  Louisiana  is  the  great  sugar  State.  As  you 
sail  up  the  Mississippi  River  in  that  State  you  may  see 
hundreds  of  sugar-plantations,  each  one  with  its  "  sugar- 
house,"  where  the  canes  are  crushed  and  sugar  and 
molasses  are  made.  These  articles  are  then  shipped  in 
hogsheads  from  New  Orleans  to  all  the  great  cities  of 
the  North  and  West. 

IV.  Tobacco. 

8.  There  is  another  plant  belonging  to  the  Southern 
States  which  must  not  be  overlooked,  though  it  is  not 
half  as  useful  as  some  of  the  other  Southern  plants  we 
have  been  reading  about.  This  is  tobacco.  The  to- 
bacco-plant is  a  native  of  Amerii:a,  and  was  unknown 
in  Europe  till  the  time  of  Queen  Elizabeth,  when  Sir 
Walter  Ealeigh  carried  some  of  it  to  England  from  Vir- 
crinia.     After  the  settlement  of  the  Southern  States  the 


78 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


cultivation  of  tobacco  spread  from  Virginia  to  other 
colonies,  where  the  climate  was  favorable,  and  now  it 
is  grown  in  North  Carolina,  Tennessee,  Kentucky,  and 
several  other  States. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  plant  for  dolhiiKj-mattrial  is  largely  grown  in  the 
South  1 

Cotton  is  largely  grown  in  all  the  Southern 
States,  but  most  largely  in  Mississippi  and  Ala- 
bama. 

Map-  —  (■^''''  ]>ftffc  r/*. )  On  what  body  of  water  do  Alabama  and  Mis- 
Bissippi  border? 

2.  Where  is  riee  most  largely  grown  1 

Eice  is  most  largely  grown  in  South  Carolina 
aud  Georgia. 

3.  Which  State  j^roduccs  most  sugar  ? 
Louisiana  is  the  greatest  sugar  State. 

4.  What  are  two  other  products  of  the  Southern  States  ? 
nice  and  tobacco  are  other  products  of  the  South. 


LESSON    III. 

SOUTHERN    STATES    (CosTnioED). 
[For  Reading.] 

I.  Wealth  of  the  Forests. 

1.  Along  the  soutlierii  seaboard,  from  North  Caro- 
lina to  Mississippi,  are  great  pine  forests  which  stretch 
for  many  miles  inland  from  the  sea-shore.  These  pine 
woods  yield  great  quantities  of  what  are  called  "  naval 
stores,"  that  is,  tar  and  pitch,  and  also  of  turpentine  and 
rosin. 
'  2.  Turpentine,  which  is  the  sap  or  juice  of  the  pine- 
I    tree,  is  obtained  by  digging  out,  in  the  trunk  of  the 


How  Turpentine  Is  procured. 


tree  near  the  ground,  a  hollow  place  or  cavity,  which 
will  contain  about  a  quart.  These  cavities  are  made  in 
the  winter,  and  in  the  spring  the  sap  begins  to  flow 


aud  tills  them.  It  is  tl.'en  taken  out  and  put  into 
casks ;  it  there  thickens  into  a  jelly-like  state,  and  is 
ready  for  use. 

3.  Tar,  also,  is  made  from  the  pine-tree,  but  in  quite  a 
different  way.  A  great  hollow  is  made  in  the  side  of  a 
bank  of  earth,  and  within  it  billets  of  pine  wood  and 
roots  of  the  pine  are  piled  up  and  then  covered  with 
earth  so  as  to  keep  out  the  air.  The  pile  is  then  tired, 
and  the  tar  runs  down  into  a  cast-iron  pan  at  the  bo"t- 
tom,  and  from  there  flows  through  a  pipe  into  barrels. 
Pitch  is  obtained  by  boiling  down  tar,  and  rosin  by 
distilling  turpentine. 

4.  Besides  yielding  pitch,  tar,  rosin,  and  turpentine, 
the  forests  of  the  Southern  States  supply  great  quanti- 
ties of  valuable  timber,  as  live-oak,  white-oak,  and 
pine.  This  is  much  used  in  building  ships  aud  making 
masts,  and  for  many  other  purposes. 

II.  Other  Products  and  Pursuits. 

5.  Cotton,  tobacco,  rice,  and  sugar  are  said  to  be  the 
great  staples  of  the  Southern  States,  which  means  that 
they  are  the  articles  most  largely  raised  for  sale.  But 
the  Southern  people  raise  other  things  besides  these. 
Thus  you  may  find,  in  almost  all  parts  of  the  South, 
great  fields  of  corn,  wheat,  oats,  sweet-potatoes,  pease, 
beans,  etc.  These  the  people  raise  for  their  own  use, 
and  also  to  some  extent  for  sale. 

6.  Then  there  is  another  business  which  is  followed 
quite  largely,  especially  in  the  western  part  of  the 
Southern  States,  as  in  Texas  and  Arkansas,  and  also  in 
Tennessee.  This  is  stock-raising.  You  find  great 
pastures  or  ranches,  on  which  are  thousands  of  head 
of  cattle.  These  are  shipped  alive  on  the  cars  or  by 
steamer,  and  are  carried  even  as  far  eastward  as  Boston, 
where  they  are  slaughtered  for  beef.  The  raising  of 
sheep,  horses,  mules,  and  hogs  is  also  an  important 
business  in  the  South.  ' 

7.  This  section  has,  besides,  considerable  mineral 
wealth.  Thus,  in  Virginia,  West  Virginia,  North  Caro- 
lina, Tennessee,  and  Alabama  are  rich  mines  of  coal 
and  iron.  In  Virginia,  Louisiana,  and  Arkansas  is 
groat  abundance  of  salt.  And,  although  in  most  of  the 
Southern  States  the  growing  of  the  great  fann-staples 
is  the  chief  business,  yet  mining  is  carried  on  to  a 
considerable  extent  in  some  of  the  States. 

III.  Cities. 

8.  In  States  largely  engaged  in  manufacturing  and 
commerce,  people  gather  together  in  cities  and  towns 
much  more  than  they  do  in  States  where  farming  is  the 
chief  business.  For  this  reason  there  are  not  many 
large  cities  in  the  South. 

9.  The  largest  city  of  the  Southern  States  is  New 
Orleans  in  Louisiana.  It  is  on  the  Mississippi  Eiver, 
100  miles  from  its  mouth.  New  Orleans  is  the  gi-eatest 
cotton  market  in  the  world.  It  is  also  the  largest  sugar 
market  in  the  United  States.     It  is  called,  on  account 


THE   SOUTHERX   STATES. 


79 


of  its  shape,  the  "  Cres- 
cent City."  At  its 
levees,  or  wliarves,  are 
constantly  found  ves- 
sels loading  with  cot- 
ton, sugar,  and  other 
products  for  Europe 
and  other  parts  of  the 
wori.i. 

5^^  Some  description  of 
the  other  Southern  cities 
will  be  found  in  the  Specia 
Geography,  next  page 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  IVTiat  vciluahli 
articles  are  obtained  from 
the  pine  woods  ? 

Pitch,  tar,  turpen- 
tine, and  rosin  are 
largely  made  in  the  "^  ^ 

pine  forests  along 
the  coast  of  the  Southern  States. 

2.  If^Iuit  other  valuable  material  is  obtained 
Southern  forests  ? 


city  of  New  Or 


from  the 


Live-oak  and  oth- 
er timber  for  ship- 
building. 

3.  Xanu  sorne  of  the 
farm  -  products  of  the 
Soutlurn  States. 

Corn,  wheat,  oats, 
swee  t- potatoes, 
pease,  beans,  etc. 

4.   What  of  stock-rais- 

Stock -raising    is 

largely    carried    on, 

•specially     on     the 

jdains  west  of  the 

— --     Mississippi. 

5.  Has  the  South  any 
minerals  ? 

Many  of  the 
Southern  States  are 
rich  in  coal,  iron,  salt,  and  other  minerals. 

Map,  — (See  page  7i.>    As  an  exercise,  let  the  pupils  locate  each  of 
the  cities  named  in  the  Special  Geography,  next  page 


TEXAS, 
NEW  MEXICO.  ETC. 


1   Inch  -  t75  MiUs 


Longltndo  West    from   Wwhington 


THE    UiS"lTED    .STATES. 


SPECIAL  GEOGRAPHY  FOR  SOUTITERX  STATES  CLASSES. 


DESCRIPTION    OF    STATES. 
NORTH    CAROLINA. 

Description. —  North  Carolina  (N.  C),  though  mnimtain- 
OU9  ill  tht-  western  part,  belongs  chiefly  to  the  Atlautio  Plain. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  pine  forests,  ami  a 
soil  tavniiil.li-  i.ii  the  cultivation  of  grain,  tobacco,  etc. 

The  leading  occupations  are  agriculture  and  the  pro- 
duction ni  limber  and  of  pitch,  tar,  and  turpentine. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

Wilmington,  the  principal  seaport. 

Raleigh,  the  capital 

SOUTH    CAROLINA. 

Description.  -  South  Carolina  (S.  C),  or  the  "  Palmetto 
State,"  li.is  a  low  coast  and  a  hUly  "  niidiUe  country''  ;  it  is 
mouiit;ii;)i>us  i)i  the  west. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  a  soil  and  climali- 
suited  to  the  cultivation  of  cotton  and  rice  ;  and  raising 
these  products  is  the  chief  occupation  of  the  people. 

The  chief  cities  are : 

Charleston,  the  best  harbor  in  the  South  Atlantic  States. 

Columbia,  the  capitaL 

GEORGIA. 

Description.  —  Georgia  (Ga.)  is  tlie  most  populous  and 
tlimri-hiiig  ot  i  lie  Southern  States. 

The  natural  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  facilities 
for  raising  cotton,  rice,  and  other  farm  pAducts,  its  supply 
of  coal  and  iron,  and  its  water-power. 

The  leading  occupations  are  agriculture,  mining,  and 
manufacturins:. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

Savannah,  an  important  shipping-point. 

Atlanta,  the  capital,  noted  for  its  iron-works  and  machine-shops. 

FLORIDA. 

Description.  —  Florida  (Fla.)  is  a  long  peninsula  with  a 
level  surface.  The  climate  is  hot  and  moist,  fitting  it  for 
the  cultivation  of  cotton,  sugar,  and  other  semi-tropical 
products.     It  has  valuable  timber. 

The  principal  occupations  aie  the  raising  of  c/im,  cot- 
ton, oranges,  and  the  getting  out  of  timber. 

The  chief  places  are  •. 

Jacksonville,  the  largest  city.     TALLiVHASSEE,  the  capital. 

Kett  West,  strongly  fortified,  and  noted  for  its  naval  station. 

ALABAMA. 

Description.  —  Alabama  (Ala.;  is  mostly  level,  except 
in  the  northern  part,  where  the  Alleghany  Mountains  end. 

Its  advantages  :ire  good  «>\\  and  mineral  riches. 

The  principal  occupations  are  cultivating,  inanufac- 
titring,  and  -hipping  cotton  ;  mining  coal  and  iron,  etc. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

Mobile',  an  important  shipping  place  on  the  Gnlf  of  Mexico. 

MONTGOMERT,  the  Capital,  a  flonrtshing  city. 

MISSISSIPPI. 

Description.  —  Mississippi  (Miss.)  is  generally  level  : 
along  the  rivers  it  is  liable  to  overflow. 


Advantages  and  Occupations.  —  The  soU  of  this 
State  is  finely  adapted  to  the  cultuic  of  cotton,  and  Missis- 
sippi ranks  as  tiie  leading  cotton  State  in  the  Union. 

The  chief  places  are  : 

\"ic.isbci;g  and  X.vrcHEZ.  shipping-points  on  the  Mississijipi. 
.Iacksc>n,  the  capital. 

TENNESSEE. 

Description.  —  Teimessee  (Tenn.)  is  mountainous  in  the 
east,   hilly    or   rolling   in   the   middle,    and   level   iu  the 

Its  advantages  are  its  fine  soil  and  its  mineral  wealth. 

The  principal  occupations  are  mining  and  stock-rais- 
ing in  the  eastern  part,  and  agriculture  in  the  middle  and 
western  parts. 

The  chief  cities  are  ; 

Nashville,  the  iviinial,  and  priiicijial  city  of  Middle  Tennessee. 

Memphis,  a  great  cottoii  and  gr:iin  market  on  the  Mississippi. 

ARKANSAS. 

Situation. —  .\rkansas  (.\rk.)  is  west  of  the  Mississippi, 
and  iiorlli  of  Louisiana. 

Advantages  and  Occupations.  —  This  State  has  a 
rich  soil  ;  farming  and  stock-raising  are  the  chief  pursuits. 

Little  Rock  is  the  capital  and  largest  city. 

LOUISIANA. 

Description.  —  Louisiana  (La.)  occupies  the  low,  level 
ivL:ion  :i].)iig  the  lower  course  of  the  Mississippi. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  fertile  soil  and  its 
facilities  for  transportation. 

The  principal  occupation  is  the  cultivation  of  cotton 
aid  the  sugar-cane. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

New  Orleans,  the  capital,  the  greatest  cotton  and  sugar  ship- 
pin,!;-place  in  the  United  States. 

BaVon  Rouge  [roiah],  on  the  Mississippi  River. 

TEXAS. 

Description.  —  Texas  (Tex.)  is  the  largest  State. 
The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  fertile  soil,  its  fine 
L;ra7iiig  grounds,   and  its  minerals. 

The  chief  occupations  are  agriculture  and  stock-raising. 

The  principal  cities  are  : 

Galveston,  the  largest  city  and  seaport.     Austin,  the  capital. 

AEEA  AND  POPULATION  OF  THE  SOUTHERN  STATES. 


Names. 

Area  in  square  miles. 

Population  (1870). 

\orth  Tarolina 

60,704 

1,071,400 

South  CaroliDs 

34,000 

705,000 

Georfria 

68,000 

1,884,000 

Florida 

59,300 

188,000 

Alabama 

60,722 

997,000 

Mississippi 

47,156 

82S,000 

Tennessee 

45,600 

1,258,500 

Louisiana 

41,346 

727,000 

Arkansas 

52,198 

484,500 

Texas 

274,356 

818,000 

THE   WESTERN,    OK    CENTRAL   STATES. 


THE    WESTERN,    OR    CENTRAL    STATES 


LESSON    I. 

DESCRIPTION     OP     THE     WESTERN 
STATES. 

tFor  Reading.] 

I.   General  Description. 

L  There  i.s  a  part  of  uur  country  wiiicli 
may  be  called  tlie  granary  of  the  Uniteil  States.     It 
is  a  vast  region  where  the  fertile  soil  enables  the  farmer 
to  raise  such  plenty  of   corn  and   wheat  that  he  has 


not  uiily  all  lie  iieetls  for  liini- 
.>;flf.  1ml  iiioH!  tlian  cnoiijih,  .so 
that  hi'  .sends  it  to  feed  the 
|.i-.il.le  of  the  Eastern  States. 
Ill'  al.so  sends  his  corn  and 
wheat  to  load  thousands  of  ves- 
.scls  which  carry  the  f.'Kiin  from 
the  seaports  on  the  Atlantic 
cna.st  t4^th(!  countries  of  Eii- 
ropi^,  whose  peo])le  have  not 
land  enou^li  to  grow  what  they 
ne(»<l  to  eat. 

2.   This   is   a  region  of  great 
li        u      '  States.       And   these   States   are 

^        >       ;:::;'    ,)    Idled  with  a  busy  people,  who, 
in  cloing  things   that   are   new 
and  large,  go  before  the  people 
of  most  other  parts  of  our  coun- 
try.    They  are  noted  for  their 
enter]irise  in  founding  cities  and 
building  railroadsand  othergreat 
]iublic  works,  and  for  their  intel- 
ligences  and    lo\('   of  education.     It  will    help  you  to 
understand   why   this   is  so  when    I    tell   you   a   little 
about  the   historv  of  theses  States. 


MAP    STUDIES. 


Note.  —  On  account  of  the  great  extent  of  tlie  Westeiu 
States,  the  nieip  of  tliis  section  is  presented  in  two  divisions,  — 
the  Eastern  Division,  including  the  Central  Stati'.s  east  of  the 
Mississippi ;  and  the  Western  Division,  including  the  States 
west  of  the  Mississippi.     {,See  next  two  pntjes.) 

1.  Central  States  East  of  the  Mississippi  (pige  83). 
Position.  —  1.  What  three  of  the  Great  Lakes  form  the 
northern  boundary  of  this  division  of  the  Western  States  ? 

2.  Which  one  of  the  Great  Lakes  is  entirely  within  the 
United  States?  3.  What  two  States  in  this  division 
are   farthest   north  ?     4.  Which   State   is   farthest   east  ? 

5.  Which  is   the   most  southern  State  of  this  division  ? 

6.  Beginning  at  the  north,  name  the  States  which  border 
on  the  Mississippi  River. 

Surface.  —  1.  Looking  at  the  map,  do  you  think  the 
surface  is  generally  level  or  mountainous  ?  2.  What 
mountains    in    the     southeastern     part     of     Kentucky  ? 

3.  What  part  of  Michigan  is  mountainous?  4.  Which 
part  of  Wisconsin  is  mountainous  ? 

Rivers.  —  1.  What  great  river  forms  the  western  boun- 
dary of  this  division  of  the  Western  States  ?  2.  What  is 
the  largest  tributary  received  by  the  Mississippi  in  this 
division  ?  3.  What  other  large  tributary  of  the  Missis- 
sippi flows  through  the  State  of  Illinois  ?  4.  What  two 
rivers,  flowing  through  Tennessee,  enter  the  Ohio  River  ? 

In  what  State  is  each  of  these 

(  Cincixxa'ti.  Chic.\'c.o. 

Principal  Cities? \  Louisville.  Detooit'. 

t,  IXDI.iXAP'OLIS.  MiLWAU'kEE. 


Of  what  State  is  each  of  these 


(  CoLEMnCS.  Sl-KINCEIEU). 

The  Capital  ? -;   Fua.nkfoc.t.  Lansinc. 

Inmanai'olis.        JlAni.soN. 

2.  Central  States  West  of  the  Mississippi  (page  ?2). 
Position. —  1.  What  States  are  included  in  this  divis- 
ion?     .Ins.    Minneso'ta,    Iowa.    Missouri,    Kansas,    and 
Nebraska.      2.    What    country    north    of   this    section  ? 

3.  What  great  river  forms  the  largest  part  of  the 
eastern  boundary  ?  4.  Which  are  the  two  most  southern 
of  the  five  States  ? 

Surface.  —  1.  Are  there  any  mountains  in  Minnesota? 
2.  In  which  part  of  Minnesota  is  the  ridge  caled  "The 
Height   of  Land"?     .3.  What    mountains    in    Missouri? 

4.  Looking  at  the  map.  do  you  think  Kansas  and 
Nebraska  are  mountainous  or  level  States  ? 

Rivers.  —  1.   In  what  State  does  the  Mississippi  rise  ? 
in  what  lake  ?    2.  A   great    tributary   of  the   Missis- 
sippi   flows   southwestward    through    Missouri  :   what  is 
its  name  ?    3.  What  tributary  does  the  Missouri  receive 
from  Nebraska  ?  —  from  Kansas  ? 

In  what  State  is  each  of  these 

i'  Mixxeap'olis.  Leavexwouth. 

Principal  Cities ?... -i  Vivm-Qvv.[du-bti.l-c'\   O'maha. 
t  St.  Louis. 
Of  what  State  is  each  of  these 

r  St.  Paul.  Tope'ka. 

The  Capital?... <  Des  Moines  [ffe moi'ji].     Lixcolx. 

I  Jefferson  City. 


t.Keimcy  yebrnska'^"'""r'^ 

"^ T'7"T=1 '""^jI  6^-    \* '^) 

"^         S'      tieavenwarilvl  >r;.,„„rlsj(i   Vi  3 


LLeavenworthli 


8.3 


SECT  IP  N    5. 

Ce]'oiiai  States 

Eastern  Drv7si05J" 


'«      Anjanc 
Canton 

ol 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


Blap  of  the  MlBslssippl  Valley. 

II.   Settlement. 

3.  Many  years  ago  the  Atlantic  States  became  quite 
thickly  settled,  and  people  began  to  ask  about  the 
great  unoccupied  country  west  of  the  Alleghany  Moun- 
tains. At  the  time  when  Washington  was  President, 
there  were  beyond  these  mountains  only  a  few  adven- 
turous pioneers  in  the  Ohio  country,  with  here  and 
there  a  log  fort  in  which  were  some  soldiers  to  protect 
the  western  border  of  the  country  against  the  Indians, 
who  swarmed  in  the  land. 

4.  But  soon  after  American  independence  was  won, 
the  wave  of  emigration  began  to  sweep  over  the  moun- 
tains, and  into  the  great  valley  of  the  Mississippi  Eiver. 
This  was  the  time  when  the  "  West "  began  to  be 
settled,  —  when  all  over  that  region  long  lines  of  slow- 
moving  wagons  were  seen  carrying  the  families  and 
goods  of  hardy  settlers  on  their  way  to  make  new 
clearings  in  the  forest  and  break  up  the  prairies  into 
fertile  fields.  As  they  advanced  onward  the  Indians 
were  driven  before  them  to  seek  new  hunting-grounds 
in  the  farther  west. 

5.  The  people  prospered  in  their  new  homes,  and 
as  time  passed  new  States  were  formed,  till  now  the 
whole  of  the  "  Great  West "  —  that  is,  all  the  country 
between  the  Alleghany  Mountains  and  the  Mississiiipi 
Eiver  —  is  quite  well  settled,  though  not  so  thickly 
as  in  the  Eastern  States.     Now,  it  will  not  be  hard 


for  you  to  ainderstand 
that,  as  the  people  who 
moveil  West  were  the 
most  enterprising  people, 
drawn  from  all  parts  of 
the  country,  and  as  they 
went  from  old  States 
where  there  were  set 
ways  of  doing  things  to 
a  new  region  where  they 
had  to  depend  very  much 
on  their  own  wits,  they 
soon  learned  to  do  things 
which  had  never  been 
done  before.  This  is 
what  is  meant  when  we 
say  that  the  Western 
peoi)le  are  independent 
and  enterprising  and  in- 
ventive. 

III.   Situation. 

().  The  Wp.stern  States 
might  better  be  called 
the  Central  States,  for 
they  are  situated  in  the 
Mississippi  Valley,  which 
is  the  great  central  part 
of  our  country.  If  j'ou 
will  look  on  the  map  of 
the  United  States  you  will  see  the  State  of  Kansas, 
which  is  among  the  tvestenimost  of  the  Wesier7i  States. 
And  yet  Kansas  is  only  the  half-way  house  in  the 
.journey  across  the  United  States,  from  the  Atlantic  to 
the  Pacific  coast.  In  fact,  the  name  "Western  States" 
was  given  to  this  section  at  a  time  when  it  was  really 
the  farthest  west  that  people  had  settled.  But  now 
that  the  Rocky  Mountains  and  beyond  to  the  Pacific 
Ocean  contain  great  States,  you  can  see  that  Central 
States  is  the  proper  name  for  this  part  of  our  broad 
country. 

7.  This  section  is  so  very  large  that  the  pupil  must 
look  long  and  often  at  the  map  of  the  United  States 
so  as  to  be  able  to  form  an  idea  of  its  vastness.  The 
map  of  the  Valley  of  the  Mississippi  given  on  this 
page  wiU  further  help  the  pupil.  The  Central  States 
occupy  the  whole  of  this  great  region,  except  the  cotton 
country  about  which  you  have  learned,  and  which  is  in 
the  southern  part  of  the  Mississippi  Valley. 

IV.  The  States. 

8.  In  this  va.st  region,  you  will  see  by  the  map  of 
the  United  States  (pages  54  and  55)  that  there  are 
three  rows  or  tiers  of  States  :  — 

I.  ^Micliigan  —  Wisconsin  —  Minnesota. 

IT.   Ohio  —  Indiana  —  Illinois  —  Iowa  —  Nebraska. 

III.  Kentucky  —  Missouri  —  Kan.sas. 


THE   WESTERN,  OR   CENTRAL   STATES. 


85 


[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  of  the  iiame  JVestern  States  ? 

The  Western  States  received  their  name  when 
they  formed  the  extreme  western  part  of  our  coun- 
try ;  they  still  bear  it,  though  they  now  occujjy  a 
central  position  in  the  United  States. 

2.  JVliere  is  this  section  situated  "i 

This  section  occupies  the  middle  and  northern 
parts  of  the  Mississippi  Valley  and  the  region 
near  the  Great  Lakes. 

3.  For  what  is  this  section  noted  '!■ 

This  section  is  the  granary  of  the  United  States. 

4.  For  v;hat  are  the  people  distinguished  ? 

The  people  are  distinguished  for  their  enterprise 
and  intellii<ence. 


LESSON    II. 

THE    WESTERN     STATES    ^Co^■TL■i^ED). 

CFor  Reading.] 
I.  The  Prairies. 

1.  The  Western  States,  as  a  whole,  have  a  level 
surflice,  for  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  tliese  States 
are  in  the  plain  or  valley  of  the  jMississip]ji.  Indeed  the 
greater  part  of  this  section,  and  especiallj'  the  middle 
row  of  States,  including  Ohio,  Indiana,  Illinois,  Iowa, 
Kansas,  Nebraska,  consists  oi  prairies. 

2.  Prairies  are  great  tracts  of  land  without  forests, 
but  covered  with  natural  grass.  Some  prairies  are  as 
level  as  a  placid  lake  ;  others  have  a  sort  of  wavy  sur- 
face, in  fact  a  surface  which  resembles  the  sea  when 
covered  with  long  rolling  waves :  hence,  these  latter 
have  taken  the  name  of  rolling  or  undulating  (Latin 
unda,  a  wave)  prairies.  In  some  prairie  States  there 
are  steep,  rugged  bluffs  along  the  rivers,  and  perhaps 
you  might  think  these  were  hills,  but  they  are  not ; 
they  are  only  the  steep  sides  of  valleys  that  have 
been  worn  away  in  the  course  of  ages  by  running 
water. 

3.  Did  you  ever  think  why  it  is  that  there  are  no 
trees  on  the  prairies  ?  It  is  on  account  of  the  great 
hres  that  so  often  sweep  over  the  surface.  When  no 
tires  come,  trees  begin  to  grow  naturally,  and  so  they 
do  when  planted  by  man  and  the  fires  are  hindered. 
All  over  the  West  the  prairies  are  disappearing  by  the 
planting  of  forests  and  the  tilling  of  the  soil.  Still, 
you  may  see  in  many  parts  great  lake-like  expanses  of 
land  covered  with  wild  grass,  on  which  the  buffalo 
loved  to  feed  of  yore ;  and  if  you  see  the  jirairies  in 
spring,  when  many  bright-flowered  plants  dot  their  sur- 
face, you  will  behold  a  very  handsome  sight  indeed. 

II.  Forests  and  ffiountains. 

4.  But  all  the  Western  States  are  not  prairies.  In 
some  States  are  immense  forests.     Tliis  is  the  case  in 


the  northern  tier  of  States,  especially  in  Michigan, 
Wisconsin,  and  Minnesota,  which  wc  may  call  the 
great  timber-belt  of  the  West. 

5.  Other  States  are  too  hilly  to  bo  called  prairie 
States.  Thus,  in  the  southeastern  part  of  Ohio  and 
Kentucky  are  foot-hills  of  the  Alleghany  Mountains. 
Northern  Michigan  is  wild  and  mountainous.  The 
southern  part  of  Missouri  is  brokeu  by  the  rugged 
ridges  anil  peaks  of  the  O'zark  Mountains. 

III.  Climate. 

G.  What  lias  been  learned  about  the  climate  of  the 
Atlantic  States  will  help  us  to  undei-stand  what  kind 
of  climate  the  Western  States  must  have.  Remem- 
bering that  climate  is  in  belts,  according  to  latitude, 
it  is  interesting  to  look  at  the  map  of  the  United 
States  (pages  54,  55)  and  carry  the  eye  along  from 
Maine  and  New  York  westward  to  Michigan,  Wis- 
consin, and  Minnesota ;  then,  in  the  .same  way,  to 
carry  the  eye  from  ^Maryland  and  Virginia  westward 
through  Ohio  and  Kentucky  and  the  prairie  States. 

7.  In  this  way  we  can  make  geography  fur  our- 
selves. Thus,  when  wc  think  of  the  cold  winters 
and  rather  short  summers  of  Maine  and  New  York, 
we  say  that  the  grains  and  fruits  which  farmers  grow 
in  Michigan,  Wisconsin,  and  Minnesota  must  be  much 
the  same  as  are  raised  in  Maine  and  New  York,  that 
is,  wheat,  potatoes,  apples,  etc.  In  like  manner  we 
may  well  suppose  that,  as  not  only  wheat  ami  corn 
are  grown  in  Maryland  and  Virginia,  but  also  tobacco 
and  hemp  and  the  grape,  we  shall  find  all  these  plants 
flourishing  in  the  southern  tier  of  the  Western  States 
from  Ohio  to  Kansas.  We  du  find  that  this  is  the 
case.  And  this  teaches  us  that,  as  nature  decides  what 
man  can  best  grow  in  each  place,  so  geography,  which 
instructs  us  about  all  these  things,  must  be  a  very 
useful  kind  of  knowledge. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  What  of  the  surface  of  tlie  Jl^'estern  Stutes  ? 

The  Western  States  have  a  generally  level  or 
prairie  surface. 

2.  Jf-liat  are  the  prairies  ? 

The  prairies  arc  gi-eat  tracts  of  land  without 
forests,  but  covered  with  wild  grass. 

3.  In  tcliat  part  of  the  West  are  large  forests  ? 

There  are  large  forests  in  Michigan,  Wisconsin, 
and  Minnesota. 

Brtap.  —  (■'■«  J'oy^S?.  &5.)  1.  Vriiat  part  of  Kentucky  is  mountain- 
ous? 2.  What  part  of  Michigan  is  moontainoas?  3.  What  moun- 
tains in  IWissouri? 

4.  JPliat  of  the  climate  of  tM  Western  States  ? 

The  northern  States  of  this  section  have  a  cli- 
mate like  New  England  and  New  York ;  the 
southern  States  of  this  section  have  a  climate  like 
Maryland  and  Virginia. 


8G 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


LESSON    III. 

THE    WESTERN"    STATES    (Coxtinoed). 
[For  Reading.] 

I.  The  Wheat  and  Corn  Belts. 

1.  The  great  business  in  tlie  West  is  farmiup;.  The 
farms  are  very  large  and  the  gTound  is  very  leveL 
Since  the  farms  are  large  and  the  fields  level,  agri- 
culture can  be  carried  on  in  a  very  different  way 
from  what  it  can  in  States  where  farmers  painfully 
cultivate  little  i^atches  of  rugged  and  sterile  land. 
From  the  ploughing  of  the  ground  to  the  thrashing 
of  the  wheat,  all  the  work  is  done  in  tlie  West  by 
improved  machinery,  —  the  steam-plough,  the  reaper, 
the  thrasher,  —  and  it  is  all  done  on  a  great  scale.  In 
the  picture  on  page  81  you  may  see  how  the  reaping 
of  wheat  is  ijuickl}'  and  cheaply  done  by  a  reaper. 
How  different  from  the  old  days  when  there  was  only 
the  hand-sickle  to  gather  in  the  harvest !  And  if  any 
one  thinks  that  agriculture  is  a  small,  dull  business, 
he  will  learn  better  if  he  visits  the  broad  farms  of  tlie 
Great  West. 

2.  The  largest  crop  in  the  West  is  the  corn  crop,  for 
corn  grows  finely  in  all  the  Western  States.  Every 
child  has  seen  a  field  of  corn,  —  the  King  of  Grains, 
as  we  may  call  it.  This  grain  is  a  native  of  America. 
The  Indians  called  it  viahiz,  a  name  which  we  have 
changed  into  maize  ;  and  the  Spaniards  called  it  Indian- 
corn,  because  they  first  saw  it  cultivated  by  the 
American  Indians.  The  quantity  of  corn  grown  in 
the  West  is  enormous.  What  becomes  of  it?  It  is 
eaten  at  home ;  it  is  sent  to  the  Southern  States  and 
to  foreign  countries  ;  it  is  used  for  feeding  hogs,  cat- 
tle, and  horses. 

3.  Wheat  is  another  grain  that  is  raised  very  largely 
in  the  West,  —  especially  in  the  northern  tier  of  States, 
which  may  be  called  the  great  ivheat  belt.  Wheat  is 
perhaps  more  valuable  than  corn  even,  because  it  is 
more  generally  used  throughout  the  world.  It  is  sold 
by  the  farmer  to  those  who  make  it  into  flour  by  grind- 
ing and  bolting,  and  in  this  form  it  is  sent  in  barrels 
to  every  part  'of  the  earth.  This  gi-ain  was  not  known 
in  America  tiU  it  was  brought  here  from  Europe  by  the 
early  settlers  ;  but  now  Europe  is  largely  dependent  on 
us  for  wheat  and  flour. 

II.  Other  Farm-Products. 

4.  Besides  corn  and  wheat,  the  other  grains  and  food- 
plants  of  the  Temperate  Zone — as  oats,  barley,  rye, 
garden  vegetables,  fruits,  hemp,  tobacco  —  are  all 
raised  very  largely  in  the  West.  Great  quantities  of 
hay,  which  is  grass  cut  and  dried  for  the  use  of  cattle 
and  horses,  are  made  and  sent  to  parts  of  the  country 
where  it  is  not  produced.  In  several  of  the  States, 
especially  in  Ohio  and  Missouri,  the  grape  is  cultivated 
for  the  purpose  of  making  wine. 


III.   Animals  for  Food. 

5.  Grazing  is,  next  to  agriculture,  the  most  important 
occujjation  in  the  Western  States.  Before  man  had 
made  his  way  into  the  Western  wilds,  the  grassy  prai- 
ries fed  immense  herds  of  buffalti  and  deer.  Now 
they  feed  vast  numbers  of  cattle,  horses,  and  sheep. 
The  cattle  are  sent  East  to  furnish  beef  and  hides ; 
they  come  from  as  far  west  as  Kansas,  where  stock- 
raising  is  followed  very  large  on  the  Plains. 

C.  Another  animal  whicli  we  must  not  overlook  is 
the  uncomely  but  useful  hog.  It  is  quite  profitable  to 
raise  swine  in  the  West  because  of  the  abundance 
and  cheapness  of  corn,  on  which  they  grow  fat.  Tlio 
traveler  in  the  West  may  see  any  day,  in  Oliio,  In- 
diana, or  Illinois,  great  droves  of  hogs  on  their  way 
to  market.  No  doubt  they  will  be  sent  forward  by 
railroad  to  Cincinnati  or  Chicago,  for  these  are  the 
two  great  centers  for  the  business  of  slaughtering  hogs 
and  for  making  their  flesh  into  pork,  hams,  bacon,  and 
lard. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  is  tlie  principal  occupation  in  the  JVestem  States  ? 
The  principal  occupation  is  agriculture. 

2.  What  are  the  (jrains  most  raised  ? 

Corn  and  wheat  are  the  grains  most  raised. 

3.  Wliat  other  grains  and  jjlants  are  grown  ? 

Oats,  barley,  rye,  potatoes,  and  hay  in  most  of 
the  States ;  and  liemp,  toljacco,  and  grapes  in  some 
of  the  States. 

4.  What  of  grazing  and  stock-raising  ? 

The  raising  of  cattle,  horses,  .sheep,  and  hogs  is 
a  very  important  pursuit  in  the  West,  and  large 
quantities  of  beef,  pork,  bacon,  and  wool  are  ex- 
ported. 


LESSON    IV. 


THE    WESTERN     STATES    (roMiNOED) 


I.  Mining  and  Lumbering. 

1.  The  Western  States  are  rich  in  minerals.  In 
nearly  all  these  States  great  beds  of  coal  are  found. 
Iron  is  most  abundant  in  Michigan  and  Missouri. 
Perhaps  you  liave  heard  of  Iron  Mountain.  This  is 
south  of  the  city  of  St.  Louis  in  Missouri;  it  is, 
what  its  name  indicates,  a  whole  mountain  of  iron-ore. 
In  the  northern  part  of  Michigan,  near  Lake  Superior, 
are  the  richest  copper-mines  in  the  world.  The  lead 
district  includes  the  northern  part  of  Illinois,  the  south- 
ern part  of  Wisconsin,  and  the  eastern  part  of  Iowa. 

2.  In  the  northern  tier  of  the  Western  States  are 
great  forests  of  white-pine.  Owing  to  this  fact  the 
business  of  lumbering  is  followed  by  many  persons  in 
those  States.     The  lumber-men  go  into  the  woods  in 


THE  WESTERN,  OR  CENTRAL   STATES. 


87 


m 


Lumbering  Scene  In  the  West. 


winter,  and 
build  huts  for 
themselv  es. 
First,  tlie  trees 
are  felled ; 
then  they  are 
stripped  of 
their  branches 
and  cut  into 
logs.  These  are 
drawn  over  the  snow-eovered  ground  by  teams  of  oxen 
to  the  banks  of  some  river  ;  and  when  spring  comes 
the  logs  are  floated  down  to  the  saw-mills,  where  they 
are  cut  up  into  boards. 

II.  Manufacturing  and  Commerce. 

3.  Seeing  that  the  Western  people  are  so  very  largely 
engaged  in  farming,  we  may  suppose  that  they  cannot 
be  a  very  great  manufacturing  people.  And  as  a  gen- 
eral rule  this  is  the  case.  Still  in  some  of  the  States, 
and  particularly  in  Ohio  and  Illinois,  manufacturing  is 
a  very  important  business.  The  principal  manufactures 
are  farming- tools  and  machinery,  flour,  iron  castings, 
leather,  boots  and  shoes,  lumber,  furniture,  wagons  and 
carriages,  and  spirituous  and  malt  liquors. 

4.  The  Western  States  have  a  vast  commerce.  In 
what  does  this  commerce  consist?  It  consists  in  ex- 
changing the  corn  and  wheat,  the  beef  and  pork,  raised 
by  the  Western  farmers  for  the  manufactures  of  the 
New  England  and  Middle  States,  and  fur  the  imports 
brought  into  the  Atlantic  coast  cities  from  all  parts  of 
the  world.  Tliis  commerce  is  carried  on  by  means  of 
thousands  of  steamers  which  ply  upon  the  rivers  and 
the  Great  Lakes,  and  by  means  of  a  vast  not-work  of 
railroads  which  connect  the  Valley  of  the  Jlississippi 
with  the  Atlantic  seaboard. 

III.  Cities. 

5.  The  three  largest  cities  in  the  Western  States  are 
Chicago,  in  Illinois  ;  St  Louis,  in  ^Missouri ;  and  Cincin- 
nati, in  Ohio. 

6.  Chicago  is  finely  situated  on  Lake  Michigan,  and 
is  the  "roat  center  of  trade  between  the  East  and  the 


West.  It  is  noted  for  the  beauty 
of  its  streets  and  public  buildings, 
anil  for  the  enterprise  of  its  busy 
population.  Chicago  is  the  greatest 
grain  market  in  the  world.  The 
grain  is  received  and  shipped  in 
bulk.  From  the  railroad  cars  it  is 
lifted  into  elevators  by  buckets  run- 
ning on  an  endless  chain  and  operat- 
ed by  steam-machinery,  and  is  emj)- 
tied  through  spouts  into  the  holds 
of  vessels.  More  business  iu  live- 
stock is   done  in   Chicago  than  in 

the  Hoof.  any  otlier  city  of  the  Union.     It  is 

said  that  every  day  as  many  trains 

of  cars  enter  and  lea\'o  the  city  as  there  are  days  in 

the  year. 

7.  St.  Louis,  on  the  Mississippi  River,  twenty  miles 
south  of  the  mouth  of  the  Missouri,  is  the  great  com- 
mercial center  of  the  Mississip[>i  Valley.  It  is  an  old 
citj',  having  been  founded  by  the  French  nearly  two 
hundred  years  ago.  In  addition  to  the  American  popu- 
lation are  many  descendants  of  the  original  French  set- 
tlers, and  also  gi'eat  numbers  of  Germans.  St.  Louis 
is  very  largely  engaged  in  the  manufacture  of  iron-wore, 
and  is  likely  to  become  the  greatest  iron  city  in  the 
United  States.  The  Mi.ssissippi  at  this  point  is  spanned 
by  a  splendid  steel  bridge.  St  Louis  is  noted  for  its  fine 
schools  and  for  its  literary  and  benevolent  institutions. 

8.  Cincinnati,  on  the  Ohio  River,  is  the  center  of 
trade  for  the  Ohio  Valley.  It  is  one  of  the  most  beau- 
tiful cities  in  the  Union,  and  is  known  as  the  "  Queen 
City  of  the  West."  It  is  surrounded  by  handsome  hills 
on  which  are  many  elegant  residences.  Cincinnati  is 
noted  for  its  many  great  pork-packing  establishments. 
A  fine  suspension  bridge  across  the  Ohio  connects  Cin- 
cinnati with  Covington,  Kentucky. 

UFor  Recitation.] 

1.  What  minerals  are  found  in  the  Western  States  ? 
The  Western  States  are  rich  iu  coal,  iron,  cop- 
per, and  lead. 

2.  IPltat  nf  lumbering  ? 

Lumbering  is  largely  carried  on,  especially  in 
the  great  iorests  of  the  North. 

3.  What  of  mamifacturing  ? 

The  Western  people  are  more  engaged  in  agi-i- 
culture  than  in  manufacturing,  yet  in  Ohio,  Illinois, 
and  some  other  States  this  is  a  great  business. 

4.  In  what  does  the  great  trade  of  the  West  consist  ? 

The  commerce  of  the  West  consists  in  exchang- 
ing corn,  wheat,  tobacco,  beef,  ])ork,  etc.,  for  the 
manufactures  of  the  East  and  for  imported  articles. 

5.  Naitie  the  three  principal  cities  of  the  Jf^est. 

Tiie  three  largest  cities  of  the  West  are  Chicago, 
St.  Louis,  and  Cincinnati. 

Hflgip,  — (Seepages  5?.  SC.)     Give  the  location  of  each  of  these  cities. 


88 


THE   UNITED    STATES. 


SPECIAL  GEOGRAPHY  FOR  WESTERN  CLASSES. 


I. -MAP    STUDIES. 

t^"  These  questions  relate  only  to  the  State  in  which  the  pupils  of 
the  class  reside,  and  are  designed  solely  for  Western  classes. 

Position  and  Area. —  1.  What  is  the  name  of  your  State  ? 
2.  In  what  part  of  this  section  of  the  United  States  is  it  situ- 
ated ?  3.  How  does  your  State  compare  in  size  with  the  other 
States  of  this  section  ?  [&e  table,  ])agc  SO.  ]  4.  Bound  your 
State.  5.  It  is  crossed  by  what  paraUcl  or  parallels  of  latitude  ' 
6.  By  what  meridians  ?  7.  Area  of  your  State  in  srjuare  miles  ? 
8.   Population  ?     [Sec  tabic,  page  89.  ] 

Surface.  —  1.  Is  your  State  a  prairie  State,  or  has  it  any 
niountaiiis  ?  2.  What  is  the  name  of  the  highest  mountain  in 
your  State?  [Ansiccr  by  the  teacher.']  3.  Do  you  know  the 
names  of  any  mountains  not  repre.sented  on  the  map  ? 

Rivers,  —  1.  What  is  the  largest  river  of  this  State  ? 
2.  Where  does  it  rise  and  into  what  does  it  flow  ?  3.  What 
is  the  second  river  in  size  ?  4.  What  boundary  rivers  has  your 
State  ?  5.  Are  there  any  small  rivers  that  you  know  of  not 
represented  on  the  map  ? 

Lakes.  —  1.  If  your  State  borders  on  any  large  lake,  name  it 
and  ti'U  in  wliat  part  of  the  State  it  is.     2.  Name  any  small  lakes. 

Cities.  —  1.  What  is  the  capital  of  this  State  and  where  is  it 
situated  ?  2.  What  is  the  largest  city  ?  3.  Name  any  other 
large  or  important  citie.s.  4.  Name  the  capital  of  each  of  the 
Western  States.  5.  Name  the  largest  city  in  each  Western 
State,  and  tell  something  about  it. 

Counties,  etc.  —  1.  In  what  county  do  you  live  ?  2.  What 
is  the  name  of  the  county  .seat  ?  3,  Wliat  counties  lie  ne.xt  to 
youis  ?  4.  Name  as  many  counties  as  you  can.  5.  Is  the 
name  of  the  place  in  which  you  live  down  on  the  map?  6.  If 
the  place  in  which  you  live  is  not  represented  on  the  map, 
nearSvliat  large  place  do  you  know  it  to  be  ?     7.  Wli.it  railroad 


or  railroads  pass  through  this  city  [or  town]  ?    8.  Do  you  know 
whei'e  the  express  trains  run  to  ? 

History.  —  [To  be  given  hij  teacher.]  1.  At  what  place  was 
your  State  first  settled  ?  2.  In  what  year  i  3.  In  what  year  did 
it  become  a  State  ? 

iJ^="  Pupils  may  now  be  required  to  clraio  on  the  blackboard  an 
outline  map  of  their  State. 


11. -LOCAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

0^^  Questions  exclusively  for  Western  classes. 

1.  What  are  the  principal  farm-products  raised  in  your  State  ? 

2.  Wliat  places  do  you  know  of  that  have  a  large  steamboat 
trade  ? 

3.  What  railroads  cross  your  section  of  the  Western  States  ? 

4.  How  far  do  you  live  from  Chicago,  St.  Louis,  or  Cincinnati? 

5.  Are  there  any  coal,  iron,  lead,  or  copper  mines  near  your 
part  of  the  West  ? 

6.  Do  you  know  of  any  towns  or  cities  near  you  that  have  a 
large  trade  in  grain  or  lumlwr  ? 

7.  Where  is  the  pine  lumber  used  in  your  place  obtained  ? 

8.  Do  you  know  of  any  places  that  have  pork-packing  or  beef- 
packing  establishments  ? 

■   9.  Flouring-mills  or  saw-mills  ? 

10.  Do  you  know  of  any  places  where  any  of  the  following 
articdes  are  manufactured  :  Cotton  cloth  ?  woolen  goods  ?  boots 
and  shoes  ?  leather  ?  furniture  ?  wagons  ?  paper  ?  farming-tools  ? 
a.'ces  ?  scythes  ?  watches  ?  pins  ?  buttons  ?  nails  ?  locomotives  ? 
iron  machinery  ?  stoves  ?  pianos  ?  tin-ware  ?  wooden-ware  ? 

Note  for  Pupils.  —  If  you  cannot  answer  these  questions,  ask 
your  older  brothers  or  sisters,  or  your  parents  ;  and  then,  if  you 
cannot  find  out,  your  teacher  will  tell  you. 


III.      DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  STATES. 

KENTUCKY. 

Descriptive.  —  Kentucky  (Ky.)  hus  a  varied  surface. 
The  t)hiu  lii^'cr  forms  its  northern,  and  the  Mississippi  its 
western  bnundary. 

The  principal  occupations  are  raising  com,  wheat,  to- 
bacco, hemp,  cattle,  sheep,  and  horses,  and  manufactruing 
flour,  hemp,  tobacco,  and  whiskey. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

Louisville,  the  largest  city,  noted  for  its  trade  and  manufactures. 

Covington  and  Newport,  opposite  Cincinnati,  noted  for  tlieir 
manufactures. 

Frankfort,  the  capital. 

OHIO. 

Description.  —  Ohio  (O.)  lies  between  the  Ohio  River 
and  Lake  Erie,  and  has  a  varied  surface. 

Advantages  and  Occupations. — This  State  has  a  fer- 
tile soil  and  rich  mines  of  coal  and  iron.  Agriculture  and 
manufacturing  are  the  principal  occupations. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 


Cincinnati,  the  largest  city,  noted  for  its   extensive  trade  and 
manufactures. 

Columbus,  the  capital,  a  gi-eat  man\ifartnrinc  place. 

Cleveland,  noted 
for  its  lake- trade.  ,-   '  ~^>^ 

Toledo,  largely  -  -  .'^- 

engaged  in  manu- 
facturing and  com- 
merce. , 


■^1= 


INDIANA. 

Description. 

— •  Indiana  (Ind.) 
is  one  of  the  prai- 
rie States. 

The  advan- 
tages of  this 
State  are  its  fertile  soil  and  its  rich  mines  of  coal  and  iron. 

The  principal   occupations   are  agriculture,  mining, 
and  commerce. 

The  chief  cities  are  ; 

Indianapolis,  the  capital  and  largest  city,  noted  for  its  manufac- 
tures and  trade. 


THE   WESTERX,  OU   CENTKAL   STATE.- 


8!) 


EvANSViLLE,  Foi!T  Wayne,  and  Tebbe  Haute,  important  nianu 
facturiiif;  [ilai-fs. 

ILLINOIS. 

Description.  —  llliiinis  (111.),  siliiati'd  bctweeii  Imliaiia 
and  the  Mi.ssissi]i]ii,  is  mainly  a  low  plain,  cillier  lovcl  ur 
luululatin^. 

The  principal  occupations  are  aj^riculture  and  .stock- 

raisiiif,',   workini,' 

"""~°^^'"  tlic  rii-li  mine.';  Ill' 

'•'■aland  lead, and 

ni.inul'arlniin;,'^ 

The  chief  cit- 


-   -'  Lot  ,K  '-'~f^^^^ --'r'  ^'' 


-}^'*Sir.: 


'*   iJ'Jj. 


Chicago, 
ontl  city  in  size,  noti^d  for  its  manufactures  and  lar; 


Chicago,  tlie  lar- 
gest city,  noted  for 
it.s  immense  trade. 

Spkingfield,  the 
I'apital,  abu.syman 
ufaeturin^  and  com- 
mercial city. 

QuiN'cv,  tlie  .sec- 


MICHICAN. 

Description.  —  Michigan  (Mich.)  con.sists  (if  two  penin- 
sula.^, lall'd  the  Upper  Peninsula  and  the  Lower  Peiiin.'iula. 
The  Ui>per  Peninsula  is  rug,^'ed  and  mcjuntainuus,  the  Lower 
is  {generally  Irvil. 

The  advantages  of  this  State  are  its  fertile  soil,  rich 
co]iper  mines,  and  vast  forests. 

The  principal  occupations  are  ai;ri';ulture,  luml«'iinL;, 
and  miiiiuL;. 

The  chief  cities  aie  : 

Di'VPROiT,  the  largest  city,  engaged  in  manufacturing  and  com- 
merce. 

Lansing,  tlie  capital. 

Grand  Rapids,  tlie  second  city  in  .size,  noted  for  its  numul'acture 
of  wooden-ware,  iron-ware,  and  flour. 

WISCONSIN. 

Description.  —  Wisconsin  (Wis.)  consists  of  a  prairie 
rei,'ion  in  the  south,  and  an  undulating  and  hilly  ivijioii  in 
the  nortli. 

Advantages  and  Occupations. —  This  State  is  rich  in 
its  soil,  its  forest.s,  and  its  mines  of  lead  and  iron.  Fanning 
and  stock-raising,  lumlieiing  and  mining,  are  the  chief  pur- 
suits. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

Milwaukee,  the  largest  city  autl  commercial  metropolis. 

Madison,  the  capital. 

Fond-du-Lac,  the  second  city  in  size,  noted  for  its  grain  trade  and 
manufacture  of  wooden-ware. 

IOWA. 

Description.  —  Liwa  (la.),  lying  between  tfic  Mississippi 
and  the  Missciuri,  is  a  prairie  State. 

The  principal  occupations  are  raising  wheat,  corn,  and 
stock,  and  working  the  mines  of  lead  and  iron. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

DrBnjrE,  tlie  largest  city,  noted  for  its  trade  and  manufac- 
tures. 

Bes  Moines,  the  capit.al. 

Davenpout,  the  second  city  in  size,  largely  engaged  in  trailc  ami 
in  iiianufactnring  cotton  and  woolen  goods,  sawed  lumber,  etc. 


MINNESOTA. 

Description.  —  Minnesota  (Min.)  is  a  table-land  in  the 
northern  sc.ction.  and  has  a  jirairie  surface  in  the  soutli. 

The  principal  occupations  are  raising  wheal  and  oats, 
Ininliering,  and  manufacturing  sawed  lumber  and  flour. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

;5T.  I'AL'L,  the  capital  and  largest  city,  noted  for  it*  trade  in  Hour, 
lumber,  and  furs. 

Minneapolis,  the  second  city  in  size,  noted  for  its  great  manu- 
factuiv  of  lumber. 

MISSOURI. 

Description.  —  Missouri  (Mo.)  is  level  or  rolling  in  the 
noil  linn  scctinu,  and  miiuiitainoiis  in  the  southern  section. 

Advajitages  and  Occupations.  —  This  SUite  has  a  fer- 
tile .soil,  ..111(1  is  rich  in 
irnii.     coal,     lead,     and 
other  iiiiiinals.      Agri- 
ciiltuir,      nulling,     and       /: 
maiiufac-turiug   are   the    ,  ,^i,'        .  \ 

The  chief  cities  air  :  w^'  *  i^  ~  ^"^^^^^ 

St.    Loris,    the    largest    Vr^-'  '-i  Z  -  ._.^  '_}-j'.-'y" 

city,    noted    for    its    iron    'tesy'   ^       "•  -. 

manufactures  and  its  great      \J;?i-:'  V^, 

eoninicrcc. 

Jefferson    City,    tlie 

capital. 
Kansas  City,  the  seconil 

city  in  size,  noted  for   its 

large  trade  and  its  great  bcet-iiackiiig  establishments. 

KANSAS. 

Description. —  Kansas  (Kan.)  is  a  great  undulating 
piaiiic.  111'  jilaiii. 

The  principal  occupations  are  agriculture  in  the  eastern 
sectiiiu,  and  stock-raising  mi  the  grassy  ]ilains  of  the  west. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

IjKAVENsworth,  largest  city,  and  jirincipal  trading  and  mjnufac- 
turiiig  place. 

Tope'ka,  the  capit,al. 

Lawrence,  the  second  cil}'  in  size,  a  railro.ad  and  triuling  center. 

NEBRASKA. 

Description. —  Xeluaska  (Neb.),  like  Kaiis;t.s,  is  an  un- 
dulating plain. 

The  principal  occupations  are  the  raising  of  grain, 
fruit,  and  stock. 

The  chief  cities  are  : 

Omaha,  the  largest  city,  and  chief  trading  center. 

Lincoln,  the  capital. 

Nebrask  a  City,  the  second  place  in  size,  carries  on  a  large  river  t  rade. 

AREA   AND   POPULATION   OF  THE  WESTERN   STATES. 


St.  Lonis. 


Names. 

Area  in  square  miles. 

Population  (1870). 

Kentucky 

37.680 

1,321,000 

Ohin 

39,964 

2,665,000 

Indiana 

33,800 

1,680,000 

Illinois 

55,410 

2,539,000 

Michi:.'an 

56,451 

1,184,000 

Wisconsin 

5.3,924 

1,054,000 

Inwa 

55,045 

1,194,000 

Jlinnesot-l 

83,531 

439,000 

Missouri 

65,350 

1,721,000 

Kansas 

81,318 

364,000 

Nebraska 

75,995 

122,000 

90 


THE  PACIFIC  HIGHLANDS  AND  SLOPE. 


91 


THE    PACIFIC    HIGHLANDS    AND    SLOPE. 


LESSON    I. 

THE    PACIFIC  HIGHLANDS. 

CFor  Reading.: 
I.  Settlement. 

1.  The  great  region  between  the  Rocky  Mountains 
and  tliu  Pacific  Ocean  is  naturally  divided  into  two  .sec- 
tions, —  the  Pacific  Highlands,  extending  from  tlie 
Rocky  Mountain.s  to  the  Sierra  Nevada  Range  ;  and  tlie 
Pacific  Slope,  i'ruiu  the  Sierra  Nevada  Range  to  tlie 
Pacific  Ocean. 

2.  Less  than  thirty  years  ago  tlic  Rocky  Mo\intain 
Region  was  a  wilderness,  inhabited  oidy  by  wamlering 
tribes  of  Indians ;  for  of  white  men  only  a  few  very 
(hiring    pioneers    and    ex- 


l)lorers  had  ventured  into 
its  mountain  fastnesses. 
But  ater  the  discovery  of 
gold  in  California,  in  1848, 
men  began  to  search  for 
tlie  precious  metals  in  the 
country  east  of  California. 
After  a  while  mines  of  sil- 
ver were  found  in  Nevada 
richer  than  any  known  in 
tlie  world  before.  Almost 
at  tlie  some  time  great  de- 
posits of  gold  were  dis- 
covered in  Colorado,  in 
the  Rocky  Mountains.  Af- 
ter this  people  went  on 
finding  more  and  more 
gold  and  silver,  which 
brought  many  settlers  to 
tliose  parts ;  and  govern- 
ments called  Territories 
were  formed  throughout  the  whole  section.  Some  of 
these  Territories  have  grown  so  rapidly  that  they  are 
now  States,  and  the  others  will  be  States  when  they 
have  population  enough. 

3.  As  the  States  on  the  Pacific  Coast  grew  in  pros- 
perity, and  mining  towns  sprang  up  in  the  Rocky 
Mountain  Territories,  it  was  thouglit  that  a  railroad 
was  needed  to  connect  the  Pacific  coast  with  the 
Atlantic  States.  Accordingly,  an  iron  track  across  the 
continent,  from  Omaha,  on  the  Missouri  River,  to  San 
Prancisco,  was  begun,  and  in  18(59  this  great  work 
was  completed.  Now  we  may  go  from  New  York  to 
San  Francisco  in  seven  days  ;  and  the  miners  of  the 
Rocky  Mountains  can  easily  ship  their  gold,  and  receive 
in  return  tlie  supplies  they  need. 

4.  The  vast  region  of  the  Pacific  Highlands  is  occu- 
pied by  two  States,  Colorado  and  Nevada,  and  several 
Territories.     Of  the  Territories  you  may  see  on  the  map 


The  Yosemite  Valley. 


a  row  of  tliem  that  are  crossed  by  the  main  cliain  of 
the  Rocky  ^Mountains,  —  namely,  Monta'na,  Wyoming, 
and  New  Mexico.  Then  to  the  west  of  the  main  chain, 
and  in  wliat  is  called  tlie  great  interior  plateau,  you  see 
another  series  of  Territ(U'ies,  —  namely,  I'dalio,  Utah, 
and  Arizo'na.  There  are  two  other  Territories,  lying 
east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  wliich  may  as  well  be 
taken  along  witli  the  Pacific  Highlands.  These  are  the 
Indian  Territory  and  Dako'ta  Territory. 

5.  The  Rocky  M(miitaiiis  are  famous  for  the  grandeur 
(if  their  scenery.  I  am  sure  you  must  have  heard  of 
the  magnificent  peaks  and  "  parks"  of  Colorado.  In 
the  valley  of  the  Madison  River,  one  of  the  head-streams 
of  the  Missouri,  in  Montana,  there  is  a  wonderful  region 
called  the  "  Fire-Hole  Ba- 
~    ■  sin,"  that  contains  many 

hundredsof  boiliiigsprings 
and  spouting  geysers,  far 
exceeding  those  of  Iceland 
-  J     in  size  and  grandeur.    The 

;    -  "  '  grandest    geyser    in    the 

world,  called  the  "  Grand 
Geyser,"  throws  a  stream 
of  hot  water  to  a  lieight 
of  300  feet.  "  Old  Faith- 
ful "  spouts  every  houi-, 
and  throws  up  a  heavy 
body  of  water  IGO  feet 
high. 

6.  The  Canon  [kan\i/oii^ 
of  the  Yellowstone,  in 
Montana,  is  hardly  less 
wonderful.  It  is  a  great 
mountain-rent,  wliich  has 
perpendicular  basaltic 
walls,  from  1,000  to  2,000 
feet  in  height.  For  a  distance  of  2.5  miles  along  this 
mighty  chasm  the  river  rushes  and  dashes  with  fear- 
ful velocity,  making  in  one  place  a  leap  of  450  feet, 
forming  one  of  the  grandest  of  waterfalls.  The  rocks, 
in  many  places  along  the  canon,  are  worn  into  fontastic 
shapes  resembling  ruined  castles  with  minarets  and 
.spires.  A  section  of  this  magnificent  mountain-region, 
nearly  as  large  as  the  State  of  Connecticut,  has  been 
set  apart  by  Congress  as  a  "National  Park."  It  will 
certainly  be  the  grandest  park  in  the  world. 

II.  Resources. 

7.  The  Rocky  Jlountain  region  is  rich  in  gold  and 
silver ;  hence  mining  is  a  leading  occupation  there. 
But  it  is  not  the  only  occupation.  The  greater  part  of 
tlie  eastern  slope  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  is  a  fine 
grazing  region,  and  as  time  passes,  more  and  more 
people  are  taking  to  stock-raising.     In  other  parts,  as 


9-2 


THE  UNITED  STATES. 


in  the  young  and  thriving  State  of  Colorado,  is  excel- 
lent farming  land. 

8.  The  great  plateau  occupied  by  Utah,  Nevada, 
Idalio,  and  Arizona  is  almost  rainless.  The  reason 
of  this  is,  that  the  moisture  in  the  clouds  blowing 
from  the  Pacific  Ocean  is  condensed  by  the  Sierra  Ne- 
vada Mountains,  so  that  the  winds  passing  over  the 
plateau  are  dry  winds,  and  scarcely  any  rain  ever  falls. 
You  may  readily  suppose,  then,  that  vegetation  must 
be  scanty  here.  And  so  it  is.  But  to  make  up  for 
its  poverty  in  this  respect,  nature  has  veined  the  moun- 
tains of  the  plateau  region  with  the  richest  silver  mines 
on  the  globe. 

III.   Indians. 

9.  Tliis  region  is  the  home  of  most  of  the  Indians 
still  found  in  this  country.     A  few  of  the  tribes  are 


Indian  Life  In  the  Rocky  MonnUlna. 


somewhat  civilized,  but  most  of  them  have  the  same 
habits  as  their  ancestors,  and  some  tribes  are  ferocious, 
murdering  savages. 

IV.  Cities. 

10.  Denver,  the  capital  of  Colorado,  is  the  largest 
city  in  the  Rocky  Mountains.  It  is  a  young  city,  but 
has  had  a  wonderful  growth.  Salt  Lake  City  is  the 
capital  of  Utah,  and  the  center  of  the  religion  called 
Mormonism.  This  religion  allows  a  man  to  have  many 
wives,  —  a  practice  which  is  called  polyr/ami/.  Salt 
Lake  City  is  situated  on  the  Jordan  Eiver,  which 
empties  into  Great  Salt  Lake.  The  place  is  large, 
and  beautifully  laid  out.  Trees  line  the  streets,  through 
which  streams  of  water  are  constantly  running,  and 
gardens  surround  the  houses.  Virginia  City  is  the 
largest  place  in  the  State  of  Nevada.  Here  you  may 
visit  some  of  the  greatest  silver  mines  in  the  world. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  States  and  Tcrritnries  are  found  in  the  Pacific 
Hiiildaiids  ? 

The  States  of  Colorado  and  Nevada,  and  tlie 
Territories  of  Montana,  Dakota,  Indian  Territory, 
Wyoming,  New  Mexico,  Idaho,  Utah,  and  Arizona. 

2.  lUiat  are  the  principal  occupations  of  the  inhabitants  ? 


Mining  and  stock-raising  are  the  chief  kinds  of 
business  in  this  region. 

3.   IFluit  are  the  largest  cities  in  tins  section  ? 

The  largest  cities  are  Denver  and  Salt  Lake  City. 

IVIap.— (S«  page  90)  1.  Montana  is  south  of  what  country? 
2.  What  division  south  of  Montana  7  3.  What  State  east  of  Colorado  ? 
4.  What  division  west?  5.  What  country  south  of  New  Mexico? 
G.  Between  what  four  States  or  Territories  is  Idaho  ?  7.  Where  is  Ne- 
vada ?  Utah  7  Arizona  ?  8.  What  large  lake  in  Utah  ?  9.  What  large 
rivers  rise  in  the  Paciflc  Highlands  ? 


LESSON    II. 


THE  PACIFIC  SLOPE. 


I.  Description. 

1.  We  have  learned  about  the  Rocky  Mountain  Re- 
gion, or  Pacific  Highlands ;  and  now  we  are  to  learn 
about  the  Pacific  Slope.  Here  are  the  States  of  Cali- 
fornia and  Oregon,  and  here  is  Washington  Territory. 

2.  Probably  every  person  has  heard  or  read  some- 
thing about  Cslifornia.  We  think  of  it  —  do  we  not  ? 
—  as  a  sunny  land,  a  favored  spot,  rich  in  gold  and 
bright  flowers,  dowered  with  tlie  most  beautiful  climate, 
and  yielding  the  vine  and  the  olive  and  the  orange. 

3.  California  is  the  largest,  wealthiest,  and  most 
pojiulous  of  the  Pacific  States.  It  is  about  twice  as 
large  as  the  New  England  States,  and  a  little  larger 
than  all  the  Middle  States.  The  most  striking  natural 
feature  of  California  is  the  Si'erra  Nevada  Range,  which 
extends  the  whole  length  of  the  State.  That  part  of 
California  which  lies  on  the  eastern  slope  of  the  Sierra 
Nevada  ilountains  is  dry  and  barren.  West  of  the 
Sierra  Nevada  Mountains  is  the  California  Basin,  in- 
cluding the  valleys  of  the  San  Joaquin  [wah-i:een']  and 
Sacramen'to  rivers,  famed  for  their  fertility. 

II.  Climate. 

4.  Tliough  California  is  in  the  Temperate  Zone,  it 
has  only  two  seasons,  the  rainy  and  the  dry,  the  former 
corresponding  to  winter,  the  latter  to  summer.  The 
"  rainy  season  "  begins  in  December  and  ends  in  April. 
During  the  rest  of  the  year  not  a  drop  of  rain  falls  ; 
the  sun  shines  bright  and  hot,  without  any  curtain  of 
clouds  ;  the  heat,  except  along  the  sea-coast,  is  intense, 
and  the  hills  and  valleys  present  a  very  barren  aspect. 
But  in  January,  soon  after  the  first  rains,  the  whole 
face  of  the  country  is  covered  with  green  grass  and  a 
profusion  of  brilliant  wild-flowers. 

III.  Mining. 

5.  It  was  its  gold  that  first  made  California  famous ; 
and,  though  farming  is  now  a  greater  business  than 
mining,  yet  working  the  precious  metals  is  still  an 
important  source  of  wealth.  Besides  the  gold  mines, 
there  are  rich  deposits  of  quicksilver  ore.  At  New 
Almaden  is  a  quicksilver  mine  that  is  said  to  be  the 
most  valuable  of  the  kind  in  the  world. 


THE   PACIFIC    IIKIHLAXD.S   AND    SLOPE. 


'J  3 


IV.  Agriculture. 

6.  If  one  were  to  visit  Calii'ornia  for  the  first  time 
in  the  .summer  season,  when  the  soil  is  all  parched,  he 
would  say  that  it  must  be  very  hard  to  grow  anything 
in  such  barren-looking  ground.  But  what  a  mistake  ! 
For  after  the  .soil  has  been  soaked  by  the  winter  rains 
it  yields  most  abundantly.  All  the  grains  and  fruits 
of  the  Temperate  Zone  flourish  finely,  and  the  common 
vegetables,  such  as  beets,  cabbages,  potatoes,  etc.,  reach 
a  wonderful  size. 

7.  Wheat  is  the  great  crop  raised  for  export.  A  few 
years  ago  every  barrel  of  flour  nscd  in  California  had  to 
be  taken  there.  Xow  California  is  the  foremost  wheat- 
growing  State  in  the  Union.  Wine  is  another  impor- 
tant product  of  the  Golden  State.  Extensive  vineyards 
have  been  planted  in  all  parts  of  the  State,  and  millions 
of  gallons  of  wine  are  exported  to  other  parts  of  the 
United  States  and  to  foreign  countries.  The  southern 
part  yields  not  only  the  vine  and  aU  the  fruits,  gi'ains, 
and  vegetables  of  the  Temperate  Zone,  but  a  variety  of 
semi-tropical  fruits,  as  the  orange,  lemon,  olive,  and  tig. 

V.  Scenery. 

8.  California  is  noted  for  its  grand  scenery.  The 
Yosemite  [i/o-sem'{-(i/]  Valley  and  Falls,  the  Big-Tree 
Groves,  Lake  Tahoe,  and  the  Geyser  Hot  Springs  are 
visited  by  tourists  from  all  countries.  The  Yosemite 
Valley,  in  the  central  part  of  the  Sierra  Nevada  Range, 
is  a  great  cleft,  or  chasm,  in  the  mountains,  several 
miles  long,  with  perpendicular  granite  walls  from  2,000 
to  4,000  feet  in  height.  Over  one  of  these  walls  a 
small  mountain-stream  falls  a  distance  of  1,.300  feet. 

VI.  Cities. 

9.  San  Francisco  is  the  largest  city  and  the  great 
commercial  emporium  of  the  Pacific  Coast.  The  city  is 
situated  on  a  small  peninsula  between  the  Bay  of  San 
Francisco  and  the  Pacific  Ocean.  The  entrance  to  the 
harbor  is  called  the  "  Golden  Gate."  The  inhabitants 
of  San  Francisco  have  been  drawn  from  all  parts  of  the 
world.  One  part  of  the  population  attracts  the  atten- 
tion of  strangers,  —  namely,  the  Chinese,  of  whom  there 
are  several  thousand  in  this  city.  They  are  employed 
as  operatives,  cooks,  and  laundry-men. 

10.  Sacramento,  in  the  central  part  of  the  State,  is 
the  capital.  Oakland,  on  San  Francisco  Bay,  ten  miles 
from  San  Francisco,  is  the  second  city  in  the  State.  It 
is  a  favorite  place  of  residence  for  San-Franciscans,  and 
is  the  pleasantest  city  in  the  State. 

VII.  Description  of  Oregon. 

11.  Do  you  remember  that  the  great  plateau  east  of 
the  Sierra  Nevada  Mountains  is  a  nearly  rainless  region, 
and  why  this  is  so  1  Xow  notice  that  the  greater  })art 
of  Oregon  and  Washington  is  east  of  the  Cascade 
Range,  and  what  will  you  suspect?  That  the  whole  of 
the  eastern  part  of  Oregon  and  Washington  —  which 
includes  rather  the  larger  part  of  each  —  must  be  bar- 
ren ;  because  scanty  rain  always  means  scanty  vegeta- 


tion. The  contrast  between  the  region  east  and  that 
west  of  the  mountains  is  wonderful.  On  the  one  side 
is  desolation,  on  the  other  the  most  exuberant  fertility. 

VIII.  Resources. 

12.  This  is  a  region  of  the  grandest  primeval  forests, 
and  all  the  navies  in  the  world  might  be  built  from  its 
towering  ])iues  and  stout  oaks,  .\lready  the  timber 
and  lumber  interest  is  of  great  importance  in  AVashLng- 
ton  and  Oregon,  but  it  must  largely  increase. 

13.  For  the  Kiising  of  wheat  and  other  cereals  the 
sou  cannot  be  surpa.ssed.  The  Willam'mette  A^alley  in 
Oregon  is  particularly  celebrated  as  an  agricultural  dis- 
trict ;  and  the  people  not  only  produce  grain  enough  for 
themselves,  but  have  a  surplus  to  send  abroad.  JIuch 
attention  is  also  given  to  fruit-raising. 

14.  While  farming  and  lumbering  are  the  principal 
occupations  in  this  region,  the  enterprising  Oregonians 
and  Washiugtonians  arc  fast  liuilding  up  various  kinds 
of  manufactures,  as  those  of  cotton  and  woolen  cloths. 
Hour,  furniture,  boots  and  shoes,  etc.  Those  pupils, 
therefore,  who  live  in  the  older  States  and  think  of  this 
North  Pacific  country  as  a  mere  wilderness, 

"Whore  rolls  tlie  Oregon,  and  liears  no  sound 
Save  Ills  own  dashiiiK»," 
must  learn  that  this  is  no  longer  the  case  ;  for  now  the 
shriek  of  the  steam- whistle  and  the  hum  of  the  factory 
are  heard  throughout  this  busy  and  progressive  land. 

IX.  Cities. 

15.  Portland  is  the  largest  city  of  Oregon.  It  is 
finely  situated  near  the  junction  of  the  Willammette 
with  the  Columbia  (or  Oregon)  River.  A  very  large 
trade  is  carried  on  here.  There  are  no  large  places  yet 
in  Washington  ;  but  thriving  towns,  among  which  are 
Olympia  and  Seattle,  are  growing  up  on  Puget  Sound. 

[For  Recitation.} 

1.  What  two  States  and  om-  Trrritory  arc  found  on  tlu- 
Pacific  Coast  ? 

The  States  of  CalifVirnin  ami  Oregon,  and  Wa,sb- 
iugton  Territory. 

2.  Jn<it  can  you  say  of  California  ? 

California  has  rich  mines  of  gold,  quicksilver, 
and  other  minerals  ;  the  soil  is  fertile,  and  the  chief 
exports  are  gold,  wheat,  wine,  and  wool. 

3.  mat  can  you  say  of  Oryon  and  If'tixhington  Territory.' 
The  valleys  afi'ord  fine  farming  land,  and  the 

great  forests  suppl}'  the  finest  timbei-. 

(yjap, -(5f.  )"<*-•  .''".I  1-  What  ocean  west  of  California,  Oregon, 
.and  Washington?  2.  Meivsure  by  the  sc;de  of  miles  the  length  of 
California.  3.  What  mountains  in  the  east?  4.  In  what  direction 
do  they  extend  ?  5.  What  two  rivers  unite  .and  flow  into  San  Fran- 
cisco Bay?  6.  In  what  part  of  the  State  is  San  Francisco?  7.  On 
what  river  is  the  capital?  8.  Locate  the  following  places:  Oak- 
land ;  -  San  Jose;  —  Stockton  ;  -  San  Diego.  9.  What  mountains  ex- 
tend through  Oregon?  10  What  large  river  between  Oregon  and 
Washington?  11.  Into  what  does  Willammette  River  flow?  12.  Where 
is  Portland?  — Salem?  13.  Bound  W.a3hington  Territory.  14.  What 
sound  on  the  western  coast?  15.  Where  is  Olympia?  16.  Where  is 
Seattle? 


OppiTi£hl.lS7tJ  byTvibou.Blakeman.Taylor  &  Uo.New_York 


Russell  &  StrutheraN.V. 


COUNTllIES   OF   THE  ANDES. 


95 


SOUTH    AMERICA 


§.rf^% 


Scenes  In  tba  Andes 


A  Maracaybo  Villa, 

LESSON 
THE  ANDES   COUNTRIES 

[For  Reading.: 

I.  Description  of  the  Andes. 

1.  If  we  should  sail  around  the 
southern  point  of  South  America 
we  should  see,  just  as  we  passed  from  the  Atlantic 
round  into  the  Pacific  Ocean,  a  dark,  lofty  headland 
of  granite  rock.  It  is  Cape  Horn,  the  southern  end  of 
a  range  of  mighty  mountains  which  extend  northward 
through  the  whole  length  of  South  America.  These 
mountains  would  be  ever  in  view,  on  our  right,  as  we 
sailed  northward,  for  a  distance  of  5,000  miles,  or  until 
we  readied  the  Isthmus  of  Panama,  which  unites  North 
and  South  America.  Some  of  the  sky-piercing  heights 
we  should  see  from  the  ocean  100  miles  olf, — espe- 
cially those  summits  that  are  covered  with  eternal 
snow,  or  those  others  that  blaze  with  fire. 

2.  These  mountaius  are  the  An'des.  Nothing  could 
be  grander  than  the  scenery  of  these  mountains,  with 
their  steep  ascents  and  sharp  cliffs,  their  dangerous 
passes,  and  their  dreadful  gorges  and  chasms,  in  gazing 


Picking  Uio  Coffee  Berries. 

down  which  the  traveler  grows 
dizzy.  Their  loftiest  summit  is 
named  Aconcagua  [ah-coii-ca/i'- 
ffwah].  It  towers  to  more  than 
four  miles  above  the  level  of 
the  sea.  There  are  many  vol- 
-"^^'"  canoes  in  the  Andes,  —  no  feWer 

and  on  the  P«mp»a. 

it  IS  said  than  htty-two.  Some- 
times they  awake  in  terrible  throes,  and  vomit  forth 
smoke  and  ashes  and  lava.  What  a  sight  it  woidd  be 
if,  from  a  ship  at  sea,  one  could  take  in  at  one  view 
the  whole  line  of  beacon-fires  blazing  forth  along  the 
snow-capped  summits  of  the  Andes  !  Two  of  the  great- 
est volcanoes  are  named  Cotopax'i  and  Chiiuboni'zo. 
Cotopaxi  is  the  most  beautiful  of  all  volcanoes.  The 
flames  sometimes  yisk  3,000  feet  above  the  crater. 

3.  The  whole  region  of  the  Andes  is  often  visited  by 
terrific  earthquakes,  which  have  from  time  to  time 
shaken  down  its  cities,  caused  huge  waves  to  flow  over 
the  level  land,  and  destroyed  thousands  of  its  inhab- 
itants. It  is  for  this  reason  that  almost  everywhere  in 
this  region  the  houses  are  built  only  one  .story  high  : 
the  people  dread  that  the  shaking  earth  will  level  their 
habitations  to  the  ground. 


MAP    STUDIES. 


5^=  Al  Ihc  first  rcciialion  teachers  will  alloiu  pupils  to  anstrcr 
qucstiom  loith  open  book:  at  llie  second  recitation  pupils shoidd  be 
required  to  answer  from  the  outline  map,  or  from  memory. 

Boundaries.  —  1.  What  sea  on  the  north  ?  2.  What 
ocean  on  tlie  east  and  south  ?    3.  What  ocean  on  the  west? 

The  Coast-line.  —  1.  What  is  the  most  eastern  cape  ? 
—  the  most  southern  cape  ?  —  the  most  western  cape  ? 
2.  What  isthmus  connects  South  America  with  North 
America  ?  3.  What  is  the  latitude  of  Cape  Horn  ?  —  of 
the  mouth  of  the  Amazon?  —  of  the  Isthmus  of  Panama? 
4.  How  would  you  sail  from  Aspinwall  to  Panama?  5.  On 
this  voyage  what  capes  would  you  pass  ?  6.  At  what  sea- 
ports might  you  stop  ?  7.  What  shorter  way  of  going  from 
Aspinwall  to  Panama  ? 


Mountains.  —  1.  What  long  mountain-chain  along  the 
Pacific  coast  ?  2.  What  shorter  ranges  along  the  Atlantic 
coast  ?    3.  What  mountain-range  in  the  northern  part  ? 

Rivers.  —  1.  What  is  the  largest  river  in  South  Amer- 
ica? 2.  What  two  rivers  form  the  La  Pla'ta  ?  3.  In  what 
part  is  the  Orino'co?  4.  Has  South  America  any  large 
rivers  flowing  into  the  Pacific  ? 

Of  what  country  is  each  of  these  cities 

(  Fio  J.\NE1K0.  La  Paz. 

Carac'cas.  Santia'cc. 

The  Capital?  <.  Bogota'.      .  Bi'f.xos  Ayres  [bo'nus  airs]. 

Qvno  [ke'to].  Montivhie'o. 

I  Lima  [Ic'ma].  AssuNCiox. 


96 


SOUTH   AMERICA. 


II.  Plains  and  Plateaus. 

4.  Ill  many  jslaees  the  Pacific  Ocean  washes  the  foot 
of  the  Andes,  or  huge  spurs  shoot  out  from  the  moun- 
tains ;  in  other  parts  a  narrow  belt  alone  is  left  between 
them  and  the  water  ;  while  in  still  other  parts  there  is 
a  coast  plain  of  many  miles  in  extent.  The  whole  of 
tlie  country  called  Chili  consists  of  a  strip  of  laud  be- 
tween the  Andes  and  the  ocean. 

5.  In  general,  the  western  or  Pacific  side  of  the 
mountains  receives  very  little  rain,  so  that  a  large  part 
of  the  coast  plain  is  barren.  This  is  the  case  along  the 
coast  of  Peni,  where  there  is  a  burning  desert  like  the 
Sahara  of  Africa,  1,.500  miles  in  length.  Over  this 
region  of  dearth  nothing  is  to  be  seen  but  heaps  of 
stone  or  mounds  of  sand,  except  here  and  there  at 
places  where  some  mountain-stream,  fed  by  the  melting 
snows  of  the  lofty  peaks,  finds  its  way  into  the  ocean. 
Perhaps  from  this  description  you  will  wonder  where 
the  people  of  the  countries  of  the  Andes  live.  They 
live  mostly  in  the  elevated  valleys>  or  plateaus  of  the 
mountain-region.  Here  are  vast  fertile  tracts  at  a  height 
of  many  tliousand  feet  above  the  ocean.  Here,  also, 
are  most  of  the  large  cities,  while  on  the  coast  are 
only  small  seaports. 

III.  Climate. 

G.  All  the  countries  of  the  Andes  are  in  the  Torrid 
Zone,  except  Chili,  which  is  in  the  South  Temperate 
Zone.  But  you  will  easily  understand  that,  owing  to 
the  great  ditt'erences  in  height,  there  must  be  great 
diflerences  in  the  climate.  In  the  region  of  the  Andes, 
spring,  summer,  and  winter  are  seated  on  separate 
thrones,  which  they  never  quit.  The  heat  is  always 
scorching  in  the  plains,  and  the  cold  is  ahvays  intense 
among  the  higher  ridges,  while  the  plateaus  between 
the  two  enjoy  a  constant  spring. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  How  do  you  describe  South  America  ? 

South  America  is  the  southern  half  of  the 
Western  Continent,  and  is  joined  to  North 
America  by  the  Isthmus  of   Panama. 

N\ap.  —  (.^"^  page  01,.)  I.  What  ocean  east  of  South  America? 
2.  What  ocean  west?  3,  What  islands  between  South  and  North 
America?    4.  What  isthmus  joins  North  and  South  America? 

2.  Jl'hat  great  mountains  in  the  western  part  of  South 
America  ? 

The  Andes  Mountains. 

Map.  — (■'''C  V"!"^  '■''*)  1-  In  what  direction  do  the  Andes  extend? 
2.  Do  they  consist  of  one  range  or  of  more  than  one  ?  3.  What  ocean 
are  they  near  ? 

3.  Of  what  2)a-rts  docs  the  Andes  region  consist  ? 

The  Andes  region  consists  of  a  coast-plain,  high 
phiteaus,  and  still  higher  ranges. 

4.  IVhat  of  the  climate  ? 

The  climate  is  very  hot  in  the  plains  and  low 
valleys,  temperate  on  the  table-lauds,  and  very 
cold  on  the  hioh  mountains. 


LESSON    II. 

THE    ANDES    COUNTRIES   (Contixued). 

[For  Reading.] 

I.  Vegetation. 

1.  The  lower  valleys  of  the  mountain- region  and 
the  plains  that  slope  to  the  eastward  of  the  Andes  pro- 
duce various  tropical  plants,  —  palms,  tree-ferns,  bana- 
nas, cacao,  indigo,  etc.  On  the  mountain-sides  and 
[ilateaus  are  the  trees,  grains,  and  other  plants  of  the 
Temperate  Zone,  with  many  kinds  of  cactus.  But 
vegetation  grows  scanty  as  a  greater  and  gi'eater  height 
is  reached,  until,  on  the  snow-covered  summits,  nothing 
whatever  grows. 

2.  Three  of  the  most  important  vegetable  products 
of  the  Andes  region  are  cincho'na,  cacao,  and  coca. 
The  cinchona  is  the  tree  from  which  the  medicine 
called  quinme  is  obtained.  It  is  native  to  the  Andes 
region,  and  grows  on  the  mountain  slopes.  About  the 
cacao-tree  you  have  already  learned  in  studying  the 
geography  of  Mexico.  You  remember  that  it  is  the 
tree  that  jdelds  the  bean  from  which  cocoa  and  chocolate 
are  made.  Coca  is  a  shrub  from  six  to  eight  feet  high, 
the  dried  leaves  of  which  are  chewed  by  the  natives, 
just  as  tobacco  is  chewed  in  our  country,  or  opium  in 
China. 

3.  It  is  an  interesting  fact  that  tlie  potato  is  a  native 
of  the  countries  of  the  Andes  ;  and  this  root,  w-hicli  is 
now  grown  and  eaten  so  largely,  was  unknown  till  it 
was  introduced  from  Peru  or  Chili.  When  it  was  first 
taken  to  Europe  nobody  would  eat  it,  and  it  was  de- 
spised and  forgotten  till  the  reign  of  the  French  king, 
Louis  XIV.  The  king  had  large  pieces  of  ground 
planted  with  potatoes,  and  he  went  about  with  tlie 
flower  of  the  potato  in  his  buttonhole.  Nobody 
dared  to  laugh  at  the  king ;  and  when  he  said  potatoes 
were  to  be  eaten,  people  began  to  find  out  how  good 
and  wholesome  they  were.  By  degrees  it  was  more 
and  more  liked,  and  now  there  is  no  common  vegetable 
so  highly  thought  of 

II.  Animals  of  the  Andes. 

4.  The  most  interesting  of  the  animals  found  on 
the  highlands  of  the  Andes  is  the  llama.  It  has  been 
called  the  "  small  camel,"  and  is  greatly  used  as  a  beast 
of  burden.  This  animal  is  about  the  size  of  a  stag ; 
so  it  is  not  large  or  strong  enough  to  carry  a  man  ;  but 
it  can  bear  a  load  of  from  fifty  to  a  hundred  pounds. 
There  are  silver-mines  up  in  the  mountains  ;  and  the 
llama  goes  backwards  and  forwards,  bearing  loads  of 
.silver  ore.  These  animals  move  in  long  files  of  five 
hundred  or  a  thousand,  marching  in  perfect  order  and 
in  obedience  to  the  conductor. 

5.  The  alpaca  is  smaller  than  the  llama,  and  looks 
somewhat  like  a  sheep.  It  has  a  long,  soft,  fine  fleece 
of  a  silky  luster.  A  great  deal  of  this  is  sent  to  our 
country  for  the  manufacture  of  shawls  and  other  deli- 
cate fabrics.     As  related  to  the  alpaca  we  may  also 


COUNTRIES   OF   THE  ANDES. 


97 


name  the  vicuna  [ve-lvoriyah],  a  beautiful,  graceful 
creature,  with  tlie  habits  of  the  antelope.  The  wool  of 
this  animal  is  even  finer  than  that  of  tiie  alpaca,  and  is 
of  greater  value.  Still  another  animal  belonging  to  the 
high  Andes  of  Chili  and  Peru  is  the  ehinchil'la.  It  is 
an  elegant,  active  little  animal,  and  is  covered  with  a 
fur  which  is  very  thick  and  soft  and  of  a  grayish 
color.  This  fur  is  greatly  admired  for  winter  clothing, 
and  is  made  into  muffs,  mantels,  trimming.s,  etc.  On 
the  rocky  heights  of  the  Andes  is  found  a  vast  bird, 
called  the  condor;  it  is  the  largest  of  the  vulture  tribe. 

III.  Mining  and  Transportation. 

6.  The  Andes  Mountains  arc  a  great  treasure-house 
of  minerals.  Hidden  in  their  rocky  ledges  are  veins  of 
silver  and  gold  and  copper.  The  Indians  used  to  work 
the  mines  long  before  the  Spaniards  came.  And  after 
that  they  were  worked  much  more,  for  the  thirst  for 
the  precious  metals  was  the  Spaniards'  passion. 

7.  Carrying  goods  from  the  high  table-lands,  where 
most  of  the  cities  and  people  are,  to  and  from  the  sea- 
I)orts  on  the  Pacific  Ocean,  is  a  great  labor.  The  roads 
are  very  steep,  and  the  traveler  is  safe  only  on  the  back 
of  the  sure-footed  mule  or  of  the  equally  sure-footeil 
Indian.  The  usual  way  of  transporting  goods  is  on  the 
backs  of  pack-mules  or  of  llamas.  In  recent  times, 
however,  the  people  of  the  Andes  have  done  a  good 
deal  to  improve  their  means  of  transportation.  They 
have  been  building  good  roads  and  bridges,  and  rail- 
roads even  have  been  constructed  from  the  sea-coast  to 
the  plateau. 

IV.  The  Republics. 

8.  In  this  mountain  region  are  five  countries,  — 
beginning  with  Colombia  on  the  north,  and  ending 
with  Chili  on  the  south.     You  may  easily  remember 


If  )-4j±'^ 


the  name  of  the  countr\ 
''?"  '  which  IS  directly  south 
of  Colombn  by  thinking 
of  the  Equator,  which  cross- 
es it,  and  remembering 
that  the  Spanish  for  Equa- 
tor is  Ecuador  [(d-q)iah-dor''\.  To  tlie  south  of  Ecuador 
is  Peru,  the  ancient  land  of  the  Iiicas ;  and  to  the  south 
of  Peru  is  Bolivia,  called  after  a  famous  general  named 


A  PeruTian  Scena 


Bolivar,  who  finight  for  the  liberty  of  South  America 
against  the  Spaniards,  many  ycai-s  ago.  Bolivia  joins 
on  to  Chili.  All  the  countries  of  the  Andes  are  repub- 
lics, like  the  United  States. 

V.  Commerce  and  Cities. 

9.  From  Colombia  the  principal  articles  .shipped  by 
way  of  trade  are  coflee,  cotton,  tobacco,  and  dye-woods. 
Tlie  largest  city  in  this  country  is  Bogot;i',  and  the 
principal  seaport  Cartage'na. 

1 0.  From  Ecuador  the  principal  articles  shipped  by 
way  of  trade  are  cacao,  cotton,  and  Peruvian  bark. 
Its  largest  city  is  Quito,  which  is  on  the  Equator.  It 
is  situated  10,000  feet  above  the  ocean,  and  enjoys  con- 
stant spring,  though  the  summits  of  the  Andes  which 
surround  it  are  covered  with  snow  all  the  year  round. 

1 1.  From  I^eru  the  principal  articles  shijiped  by  way 
of  tra<le  are  silver,  saltpeter,  copper,  alpaca  wool,  Peru- 
\ian  bark,  gums  and  drugs,  and  last  and  most  impor- 
tant guano.  This  is  found  on  the  Chincha  Islands,  and 
is  greatly  used  in  our  country  for  fertilizing  the  soil. 
Peru  is  the  largest  city,  and  Callao,  si.x  miles  distant, 
is  the  principal  .seaport. 

12.  From  Bolivia  the  principal  articles  shipped  by 
way  of  trade  are  silver,  Peruvian  bark,  and  hides. 
La  Paz,  the  largest  city,  is  near  the  shores  of  Lake 
Titicaca.  From  Chili  the  principal  articles  shipped  by 
way  of  trade  are  copper,  wheat,  and  hides.  The  capi- 
tal and  largest  city  is  Santiago  [san-te-a/tr/o].  Valpa- 
raiso [val-par-i'zo]  is  the  principal  seapofl  on  the  Pacific 
coast  of  South  America. 

1 3.  The  popiJation  of  all  the  Andes  countries  resem- 
bles that  of  Mexico,  and  consists  of  Creoles,  or  people 
of  Spanish  descent,  of  mixed  races,  and  of  Indians. 
The  Indians  form  the  larger  part  of  the  popiUation. 

CFor  Recitation.] 
1.  Name  the  countries  in  the  rcrjion  of  the  Andes. 
The   Andes    countries    are    Colombia,   Ecuador, 
Peiu,  Bolivia,  and  Chili. 

2  What  are  the  2}''incipal  articles  exported  from   these 
)itTia,  ' 

The  pimcipal  articles  exported  from  these  coun- 
tues  are  silver,  copper,  guano,  Peruvian  bark,  hides, 
cacao,  and  dye-woods. 

3  What  is  the  nature  of  the  government  in  all  these  coun- 
tnei  ' 

All  the  Andes  countries  have  a  republican  gov- 
ernment 

4  What  of  the  populution  ? 

The  population  consists  of  S]ianiards,  Indians, 
and  mixed  breeds. 

n/lap, —(Sec /Mf/cW)  1.  Which  is  the  most  northern  country  in 
the  Andes  ?  2.  Whiit  river  flows  northward  through  Colombia  ?  3.  In 
what  part  is  the  capital,  Bogota  ?  4.  Between  what  two  countries  is 
Ecuador?  5.  What  city  on  the  Equator?  6.  Into  wh.at  great  river  do 
all  the  streams  of  Peru  flow  ?  7.  In  what  part  is  Lima  ?  8,  Between 
whal  countries  is  Bolivia?  9.  Has  thiscountry  any  sea-coast?  10.  What 
tropic  near  the  northern  part  of  Chili  ?  11.  Measure  by  the  scale  of 
miles  the  length  of  Chili. 


98 


SOUTH   AMERICA. 


LESSON    III. 

BRAZIL    AND    THE   AMAZON. 

CFor  Reading.] 

I.  Description  of  the  Amazon. 

1.  Did  you  ever  learn  that  in  South  America  there 
is  a  country  as  large  as  the  whole  of  the  United  States  'I 
This  country  is  named  Brazil,  and  it  occupies  the  valley 
of  the  river  Amazon.  The  Amazon  is  the  largest  river 
in  the  world  ;  and  not  only  is  it  the  largest,  but  it  is 
also  the  most  wonderful  river  on  tlie  globe. 

2.  The  great  Valley  of  the  Amazon  lies  in  the  heart 
of  the  scorching  belt,  for  in  fact  tlie  moutli  of  the  river 
is  exactly  on  the  Equator.  Tlie  climate  of  this  region 
is  therefore  very  hot,  and  we  may  say  that  the  summer 
lasts  through  all  the  year.  But  not  only  is  it  very  hot, 
it  is  also  very  moist  in  this  region.  Hence,  from  what 
you  have  already  learned,  you  will  not  wonder  when 
you  are  told  that  the  Valley  of  the  Amazon  surpasses 
every  other  part  of  the  world  in  wild  luxuriance  of 
tro})ical  vegetation. 

II.  The  Selvas. 

3.  Great  wooded  plains  extend  along  the  Amazon 
for  hundreds  of  miles  on  each  side  of  the  river.  These 
are  called  selvas,  a  Spanish  word  meamug  forests.  And 
forests  of  the  densest  kind  are  these  selvas,  —  forests  of 
gigantic  palms  and  mahogany-trees  and  great  ferns. 
Amid  this  mass  of  forest  vegetation  grows  an  intricate 
tracery  of  lianos  and  sipos,  some  running  round  and 
round  the  trees,  others  hanging  from  branch  to  brancli 
in  rich  festoons,  or  dropping  in  long  lines  to  the  ground. 
Often  they  form  so  dense  a  thicket  that  a  way  must  be 
cleared  with  an  ax  before  one  can  proceed  even  a  short 
distance  from  the  banks  toward  the  inner  recesses  of 
the  forest. 

III.  Animals  of  Brazil. 

4.  The  forests  of  tlie  Amazon  are  filled  with  troops 
of  monkeys,  which  live  among  the  branches  of  tlie 
trees.  Here,  also,  are  found  the  great  boa-constrictor, 
the  largest  of  snakes;  and  the  jaguar,  a  kind  of  tiger, 
one  of  the  most  dangerous  of  wild  beasts.  The  arma- 
dillo, a  small  animal  covered  with  a  liard,  horny  shell, 
rolls  itself  up  into  a  ball  as  a  protection  against  the 
attacks  of  other  animals.  The  tapir  is  the  largest  of 
native  quadrupeds.  The  sloth  can  hardly  crawl  on 
the  ground,  but  it  is  quite  active  in  climbing  among 
the  branches  of  the  trees. 

5.  iSfotliing  can  be  more  brilliant  and  siiarkling  than 
the  insect  world  of  Brazil,  especially  the  butterflies  and 
the  beetles.  But  insects  that  torment  man  are  also 
found  in  countless  numbers,  among  which  are  centi- 
pedes, ants,  chigoes,  and  enormous  spiders.  Whole 
villages  are  deserted  on  the  approach  of  armies  of  lire- 
ants,  as  fierce  as  the  ants  of  Africa.  Mice,  fowls,  dogs, 
cats, — in  fact,   all  living  things, — are  devoured  by 


tlieiu,   and    the    body  of   a  dead    ox   is  reduced   to   a 
shining  skeleton  in  a  few  hours. 

IV.  Products  and  Commerce. 

<).  More  than  one  hundred  ditferent  kinds  of  palms 
are  found  in  the  forests  of  the  Amazon  and  other  tropical 
parts  of  South  America.  These  supply  the  Indian  with 
nearly  aU  lie  wants.  Their  fruit  furnishes  liim  with  an 
abundance  of  food.  He  builds  his  hut  and  floors  it 
with  their  wood,  and  he  thatches  it  with  their  leaves. 
From  the  trunks  of  some  lie  forms  his  canoes  ;  from 
otliers  he  obtains  oil,  wax,  cord,  thread,  mats,  baskets, 
arrows,  and  a  drink  tliat  serves  liim  for  wine.  He  taps 
tlie  cow-tree,  and  he  has  an  excellent  milk  that  costs 
him  nothing. 

7.  Of  the  food-plants  cultivated  by  the  civilized 
Brazilians,  rice  and  maize  hold  the  first  place.  Bana- 
nas and  yams  are  largely  grown,  as  is  also  tapioca, 
wliicli  we  have  all  eaten.  It  is  obtained  from  the  root 
of  the  mandioc  or  tapioca  shrub,  which  is  a  native  of 
Brazil. 

8.  The  principal  articles  wliich  the  Brazilians  pro- 
duce for  sale,  and  which  are  the  chief  source  of  the 
wealth  of  the  country,  are  coflee,  sugar,  cotton,  and 
caoutchouc  [koo'c/wok].  With  the  three  first  articles 
we  are  all  familiar ;  so  I  shall  tell  you  a  little  about 
caoutchouc. 

9.  The  caoutchouc-tree  is  the  hard  nati\'e  name  for 
what  we  call  the  ir.  !:  i  ril  '  ■  r  tree.  It  is  perhaps  the 
most  valuable  of 
all  the  trees  of 
Brazil.  The  in- 
dia-rubber is  ob- 
tained by  tap- 
ping the  trees  and 
inserting  in  the 
gaslies  little  clay 
cups  into  whicli 
the  sap  of  the 
tree  runs.  AVheu 
this  juice  has 
been  thickened 
in  a  peculiar 
way  and  passed 
tlirongh  the 
black  smoke  of  a 
fire  made  of  palm 
nuts,  it  is  ready 
to  be  sold.  We 
have  so  many 
useful  articles  made  of  india-rubber,  that,  if  I  were  to 
name  them  all,  it  would  be  a  very  long  list  indeed. 

10.  Besides  her  vegetable  wealth,  Brazil  is  rich  in 
mines  and  minerals,  especially  in  gold  and  diamonds 
and  other  precious  stones.  The  diamond  mines  are  in 
a  part  of  the  country  called  Diamantina,  and  are  the 
richest  in  the  world.  The  diamonds  are  obtained  by 
washing  ;  that  is,  a  stream   of  water  is  made  to  run 


How  India  rubbi 


Mixur;  SOUTH  American  countkies. 


99 


through  troughs  iuto  which  mud  and  sand  taken  from 
thy  river  are  put,  and  negroes,  under  overseers,  are  em- 
ployed in  searcliing  for  the  precious  stones. 

11.  Our  own  country  has  a  large  trade  with  Brazil. 
It  consists  in  exchanging  our  wheat,  flour,  leather,  cot- 
ton cloth,  and  other  manufactured  articles  for  colfee, 
sugar,  india-rubber,  and  other  products. 

V.  Inhabitants. 

12.  Brazil  was  settled  by  the  Portuguese,  whereas 
all  the  rest  of  South  America  was  settled  by  the  Span- 
iards. Brazil  is  a  monarchy  ruled  by  an  emperor, 
whereas  all  the  Spanish- American  countries  are  repub- 
lics. The  present  inhabitants  of  Brazil  consist  of  the 
descendants  of  the  Portuguese,  of  mixed  races,  of 
negroes,  and  of  Indians,  civilized  or  savage. 

13.  Eio  Janeiro,  the  capital,  is  the  largest  city  in 
South  America.  It  is  situated  on  a  beautiful  bay,  and 
presents  a  very  picturesque  appearance.  It  is  noted 
for  being  the  greatest  coffee  market  in  the  world. 

CFor  Recitation.] 
"1.  How  do  you  describe  Brazil  ? 

Brazil  includes  nearly  half  of  South  America, 
and  is  the  most  important  country  in  tliat  Grand 
Division. 

lyiap,  — (.'?c(' j»a^e  9A.)  1.  What  countries  north  of  Brazil?  2.  What 
mountaina  west?  3.  In  what  direction  and  into  what  ocean  does  the 
Amazon  flow  ?    4.  Name  its  largest  branches. 

2.  IFluit  of  its  climate  and  vegetation  ? 

Brazil  has  a  hot,  moist  climate,  and  its  vegetation 
is  the  richest  of  any  country  in  the  world. 

lyiap,  —  (.Sp«  ixtge  94.)  1  What  part  of  Brazil  is  crossed  by  the 
Equator?    2.  What  part  by  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn? 

3.  What  are  its  principal  exports  ? 

Its  principal  exports  are  coffee,  sugar,  cotton, 
tobacco,  hides,  diamonds,  and  india-rublier. 

n/lap,  —  (Sec  pm/e  94. )  1.  Where  is  the  capital,  Rio  Janeiro  ?  2.  Lo- 
cate the  seaports  of  Bahia  [hahee'ah]  and  Pemambuco  [brm'!;o]. 


LESSON    IV. 
MINOR    SOUTH    AMERICAN     COUNTRIES. 

CFor  Reading  and  Recitation. J 

I.  Venezuela  and  Gtiiana. 

1.  Look  on  the  ma[i  of  South  America  (page  94) 
and  you  will  see  a  great  river  named  the  Orinoco, 
which  flows  eastward  into  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  It  flows 
through  vast  treeless,  grassy  plains,  called  llanos,  a 
Spanish  word  meaning  level  fields.  The  Orinoco  resem- 
bles the  Xile  in  the  fact  that  it  has  a  regular  rise  and 
fall.  During  the  rainy  season,  from  April  to  August, 
it  rises  and  overflows  its  banks;  from  October  to  Feb- 
ruary it  falls.  As  soon  as  the  rainy  season  sets  in,  the 
llanos  are  quickly  covered  with  grass  ;  they  are  then 
the  feeding-places  of  vast  herds  of  cattle,  horses,  and 


sheep.  In  the  dry  season  the  plains  are  cracked  by  the 
intense  heat,  anil  the  rei)tiles  bury  themselves  m  the 
soil,  remaining  torpid  until  the  rains  again  bring  life 
both  to  the  animal  and  the  vegetable  world.  At  this 
time'  the  cattle  have  to  be  driven  elsewhere  for  pastur- 
age. On  the  other  hand,  when  the  floods  are  at  their 
height,  the  ground  is  under  water  for  hundreds  of  miles, 
and  herdsmen  and  cattle  must  flee  to  the  mountains. 

2.  The  plains  of  the  Orinoco  are  occupied  by  a  repub- 
lic called  Venezuela  \yen-ez-we' ki].  This  word  means 
Little  Venice,  and  the  name  was  applied  to  this  region 
by  the  early  Spanish  explorers  who  found,  near  Lake 
Maracaybo,  Indian  villages  built  upon  piles  on  the  flat 
shore,  and  they  thought  these  looked  somewhat  like 
Venice.  Venezuela  exports  sugar,  colfee,  cocoa,  cotton, 
indigo,  hides,  and  cattle. 

3.  Guiana  [<jhe-a}ina\  is  the  only  South  American 
country  now  held  by  European  nations.  It  is  divided 
into  three  colonies,  belonging  to  Britain,  Holland,  and 
France.  The  climate  is  very  hot,  and  most  of  the 
laborers  are  negroes.  The  ex]5orts  are  sugar,  coffee, 
indigo,  rum,  and  cayenne  pepper. 

n.  Countries  of  the  Plata. 

4.  In  the  southern  part  of  South  America  is  a  third 
great  river  basin,  —  the  basin  of  the  Plata  Kiver.  The 
Spanish  name  of  this  stream  is  Kio  de  la  Plata,  which 
means  river  of  silver.  This  is  the  region  of  the  pampas, 
which  are  immense  treeless  plains  covered  with  pampas- 
gra.ss.  Tills  grows  from  ten  to  fifteen  feet  high,  and 
its  wa\dng  seed-plumes  are  very  hand.sonio.  Over  the 
pampas  range  immense  herds  of  horses,  cattle,  and 
sheep.  The  horses  are  killed  for  their  hides,  and  the 
cattle  for  their  hides,  tallow,  and  horns  ;  these  are  sent 
in  great  quantities  to  our  country  and  elsewhere. 

.5.  This  region  is  occupied  by  three  countries,  namely, 
the  two  small  republics  of  Paraguay  and  L^ruguay,  and 
the  large  Argentine  Eepublic  (Latin  argentvm,  silver). 
The  Argentine  Eepubhc  is  the  most  civilized  of  these 
countries.  It  contains  the  city  of  Buenos  Ayres,  wliich 
is,  next  to  Rio,  the  largest  city  of  South  America.  In 
Paraguay  and  Uruguay  the  principal  occupations  of  the 
people  are  stock-raising,  and  cultivating  a  shrub  called 
Paraguay  tea  {i/erhe  mate).  Its  leaves,  dried  and  roast- 
ed, are  used  in  South  America  just  as  we  use  Chinese 
tea. 

6.  The  most  southern  part  of  the  American  Conti- 
nent is  Patagonia.  It  is  a  bleak,  barren  region.  The 
few  native  IncUans  who  hvc  there  subsist  by  hunting 
wild  cattle,  the  guanaco,  and  the  euni,  or  South  Ameri- 
can ostrich.  The  inhabitants  of  Patagonia  were  de- 
scribed by  the  older  voyagers  as  a  race  of  giants,  and 
they  really  are  a  tall  and  muscular  people,  averaging 
about  six"  feet  high.  But  they  are  in  every  respect 
miserable  and  degraded. 

Map.  —  (Sm  fi'Ot  94)  1-  Bound  the  Argentine  Republic.  2.  What 
branches'has  the  Plata  River?  3.  Where  is  Buenos  AjTes?  4.  What 
great  country  north  of  Paraguay  and  Uruguay?  5.  Name  the  capital 
of  each. 


EUROPE. 


101 


EUROPE 


LESSON    I. 


INTRODUCTION. 

CFor  Recitation.J 


1.  What  can  you  say  of  Europe  ? 

Europe  is  the  smallest  of  the  five  Grand  Divis- 
ions, but  it  ranks  first  in  importance,  because  it  is 
the  seat  of  all  the  great  civilized  nations,  except 
the  United  States. 

2.  What  description  of  Europe  can  you  (jive  ? 

Europe  is  much  indented  by  seas,  bays,  and 
gulfs ;  the  northwestern  section  is  a  great  plain, 
and  the  southwestern  part  a  mountainous  region. 

3.  IVliat  of  the  population  ? 

Europe  has  300  millions  of  inhabitants,  mostly 
of  the  Caucasian  race  and  professing  the  Christian 
religion.  Mo.st  of  the  European  nations  are  highly 
civilized  :  they  have,  like  the  United  States,  rail- 
roads, telegraphs,  machinery,  schools,  churches,  and 
well-established  governments. 

4.  What  are  the  principal  nations  of  Europe  ? 

The  principal  nations,  called  the  Great  Powers, 
are  Great  Britain,  Erauce,  Germany,  the  Austro- 
Hungarian  monarchy,  and  Russia. 


LESSON    II. 
THE    BRITISH    ISLES. 

(For  Reading.] 
I.  The  Land  and  the  People. 

1.  We  begin  our  studies  on  Europe  with  a  little 
country  but  a  great  people.  You  have  all  heard  of 
this  country  and  this  people  :  it  is  luiglanil  and  the 
English.  Indeed  there  is  no  part  of  the  world  where 
these  names  are  not  known,  even  to  the  heart  of  Africa, 
the  Steppes  of  Asia,  the  remotest  island  of  the  sea. 
And  the  reason  why  England  is  so  famous  is  because 
the  English  have  always  been  a  stout-hearted  people, 
and  have  loved  to  sail  forth  in  ships  to  distant  lands. 
Sonietnnes  they  have  planted  colonies  of  their  own 
folk  in  unoccupied  regions ;  still  oftener,  with  strong 
hand,  they  have  seized  on  countries  belonging  to  other 
peoples. 

2.  In  the  one  way  or  the  other,  the  English  have, 
in  the  course  of  centuries,  laid  hold  of  so  many  parts  of 
the  world,  that  now  the  queen  of  England  rules  over 
about  one  sixth  of  all  the  dry  land  on  the  face  of  the 
earth.  Her  subjects  number  one  sixth  of  the  popula- 
tion of  the  globe,  or  six  times  as  many  people  as  there 
are  in  the  United  States !  On  the  sea,  too,  the  Eng- 
lish are  very  powerfid.     Perhaps  you  may  have  heard 


MAP   STUDIES. 


^^-  At  l}ic  first  recitation  tcaclicrs  will  allow  pupils  to  ansiixr 
qucUionswith  open  hook  ;  at  tlic  second  recitation  the  pupils  should 
he  required  to  answer  from  the  outline  map  or  from  mc7)iory. 

Boundaries.  —  1.  What  ocean  north  of  Europe?  2.  What 
Grand  Division  east?  —  south?      3.   What  ocean   west? 

4.  What  is  the  boundary  line  between  Africa  and  Europe? 

5.  What   two   mountain-chains  and    two   seas  form  the 
boundary  line  between  Europe  and  Asia? 

Peninsulas.  —  1.  What  two  countries  are  in  the  gi-eat 
southwestern  peninsula  of  Europe  ?  2.  What  Mediterra- 
nean peninsula  next  east  of  this?  3.  What  small  penin- 
sula east  of  Italy  ?  4.  What  small  peninsula  projects  into 
the  Black  Sea?  5.  What  great  peninsula  in  the  north  of 
Europe  ?    6.  What  small  one  north  of  Germany  ? 

The  Coast-line.  —  1.  What  sea  between  the  British 
Isles  and  the  peninsula  of  Denmark  ?  2.  What  sea  east 
of  the  North  Sea  ?  3.  What  gulf  is  an  arm  of  the  Baltic 
Sea  ?  4.  What  sea  is  an  arm  of  the  Arctic  Ocean  ?  5.  What 
three  seas  are  parts  of  the  Mediterr.anean  Sea?  6.  What 
bay  west  of  Europe  ?  7.  What  channel  between  the  island 
of  Great  Britain  and  France  ?  8.  What  channel  between 
Great  Britain  and  Ireland  ?  9.  By  what  is  the  Mediterra- 
nean Sea  connected  with  the  Atlantic  ?  10.  What  inland 
sea  east  of  the  Black  Sea  ?  11.  What  strait  connects  the 
Black  Sea  with  the  Mediterranean  ?  12.  Where  is  North 
Cape  ? 

Mountains.  —  1.    What    mountains    north    of   Italy  ? 


2.  What  mountains  between  France  and  Spain?  3.  What 
mountains  east  of  the  Alps  in  Turkey  ?  4.  What  moun- 
tains in  Austria  ?  5.  What  mountains  in  Sweden  and 
Noi'way  ?  6.  Is  Switzerland  a  mountainous  or  a  level 
country  ?  7.  What  boundary  mountains  between  Europe 
and  Asia  ? 

Rivers.  —  1.  The  largest  river  of  Europe  flows  into  the 
Caspian  Sea  :  what  is  its  name  ?  2.  What  is  the  second 
river  in  size,  and  into  what  does  it  flow?  3.  What  two 
rivers  rise  in  the  Alps,  one  flowing  north,  the  other  south  ? 
4.  Into  what  does  each  flow  ?  5.  What  two  rivers  in  Ger- 
many ?    6.  Name  three  large  rivers  in  France  ? 

Of  what  country  is  each  of  these  cities 

(-London'.  CoN.sr.vNTiNorLK.  Beiin'K  [krji]. 

The         I'Ar.i.s.  Maduid.  Lisbon. 

Capital  ?  \  Vienna.  Rome,  Stock'holm. 

I  Berlin.  Bru.-ssf.ls.  Coi-eniiacen. 

''St.  Peteusbup.g.  THEHAGUE[/i«(V7].  Athens. 

In  what  country  is  each  of  these 

C  London.  Viknna. 

Largest  Cities ? \  Pakis.  I'eih.in. 

'^  CoNSTANTINOrLE.         St.  PETERSBURG. 

Where  is  each  of  these 
Principal     (  London.  Hambl'RG. 

Bordeaux  \boT-do']. 
Marseillf„s  [mar-sale'].   Glasgow. 


Seaports  ?   -j  Liveki'Ool 


i.Oi  ,  .  ., 


EUEOPE. 


of  a  song  wliicli-Englishmen 
',aj-e- ;fliml  <j'f  .sUiging,  and 
wliich  is  called  "  liritannia 
rules  the  Waves."  Now 
this  is  no  longer  true  in  the 
sense  meant  hj  the  song, 
namely,  that  England  by 
her  war-ships  is  mistress  of 
the  sea ;  yet  it  is  true 
that  her  merchant-ships  or 
trading-vessels  sail  over  all 
the  waters  of  the  globe, 
carrying  her  manufactures 
to  every  country,  and  bring- 
ing back  the  products  of 
every  clime. 

II.  Our  Belations  to  England. 

3.  Tliere  arc  strong  rea- 
sons why  we  Americans 
should  be  interested  in 
England.  Many  persons 
living  in  the  United  States 
were  born  in  England, 
Scotland,  or  Ireland,  or  are  the  sons  or  daughters  of 
those  who  were  born  there.  But  even  those  whose 
families  are  oldest  in  this  country  may  still  be  said  to 
be  only  great-great-grandchildren  of  Englishmen.  The 
people  of  our  country,  as  you  know,  are  much  mixed 
in  race,  —  English,  Irish,  Scotch,  Germans,  French, 
Spanish,  Italian,  etc. ;  yet  the  majority  of  our  people 
are  of  English  descent.  Moreover,  ^ye  all  speak  the 
English  language,  and  read  the  same  books  as  the  Eng- 
lish read.  There  is  still  another  reason  why  we  must  be 
interested  in  England.  Our  greatest  trade  is  with  that 
country.     But  of  this  we  shall  learn  forther  on. 

III.  The  English,  at  Home  and  Abroad. 

4.  When  we  speak  of  "  England "  as  the  name  of 
this  great  and  powerful  country,  we  do  not  speak  quite 
exactly.  The  land  called  England  is  really  but  a  part 
of  one  of  two  islands  lying  off  the  west  coast  of 
Europe.  These  are  the  British  Isles.  The  larger  of 
the  two  islands  is  named  Great  Britain ;  the  smaller, 
Ireland.  Now  the  island  of  Great  Britain,  besides 
England,  contains  Scotland  and  Wales.  Scotland  in 
former  times  was  a  kingdom  by  itself,  and  in  like 
manner  Ireland  was  governed  by  its  own  kings.  But 
many  years  ago  Scotland  and  Ireland  were  joined  with 
England  under  one  king,  so  that  now  the  true  name  of 
the  nation  is  "  The  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain 
and  Ireland."  This  is  so  long  a  name,  however,  that 
usually  we  call  the  British  nation  simply  England. 

5.  We  have  already  learned  that  the  English  rule 
over  many  parts  of  the  earth.  Now,  though  all  these 
regions  and  countries  belong  to  the  English,  yet  we  do 
not  speak  of  them  as  parts  of  England  or  of  the  King- 
dom of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland.     They  are  spoken 


the  Thames,  with  St    Paul's  Cathedral,  London. 


of  as  parts  of  the  "  British  Empire,"  —  a  name  which 
includes  the  British  Isles  and  all  the  British  posses- 
sions in  whatever  part  of  the  world.  The  British 
Empire  is  so  vast  that  it  has  been  said  "  the  sun  never 
sets  on  the  Hag  of  England." 

IV.   Nature  of  the  Country. 

6.   The  British  Isles  are  in  the  same  latitude  as  icy, 
barren  Labrador  ;  yet  they  have  a  moderate  climate  all 
the  year  round,  and  their  winters  are  milder  than  those 
of  Virginia.     Why  is  this  1 
It    is    in  a   great    degree 
-'i       owing  to  the  fact   that  a 
t       warm  ocean-cun-ent,  which 
is  called  the  Gulf  Stream 
and  which  begins   in  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico,  flows  past 
the  British  Isles  and  bathes 
them  all  the  year  round  in 
a  soft,  humid  atmosphere. 
Hence  it  is  that  the  coun- 
try is  gxeen  all  the  winter 
through.     In   Ireland   the 
mild    weather    and    great 
amount  of  moisture  keep  the  fields  so  green  all  the  year 
that  this  island  is  generally  called  the  "  Emerald  Isle." 
7.  Though  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  are  among  the 
large  islands  of  the  world,  they  seem  very  small  to  be 
the  seat   of  so  great  and  powerful  a  nation.     In  fact, 
when  we  learn  how  small  the  country  is,  and  yet  how 
many  men,  women,  and  children  inhabit  it,  we  cannot 
help  thinking  that  the  people  must  be  crowded.    There 
are  in  the  United  States  about  40  millions  of  people  ; 
in  the  British  Isles  there  are  over  30  millions,  or  three 
fourths  of  our  whole  number.    And  yet  the  British  Isles 
are  not  as  large  as  the  single  State  of  California,  which 
has  but  little  over  half  a  million  of  population,  and  not 
half  as  large  as  Texas,   which  does  not  contain  one 
million  of  people ! 

[For  Recitation.] 
■  1.   UHiat  can  yoii  say  of  the  British  Isles  ? 

The  British  Isles  consi.st  of  the  islands  of  Great 
Britain  and  Ireland  and  several  neighboring  islands. 
They  are  the  seat  of  the  "  Kingdom  of  Great  Brit- 
ain and  Ireland." 

2.  IFhat  are  the  divisions  of  this  Kingdom  ? 

Its  divisions  are  England,  Scotland,  Wales  (all 
in  the  island  of  Great  Britain),  and  Ireland. 

3.  IVhat  of  the  rank  of  this  country  ? 

England  (or  the  British  Isles)  is  one  of  the 
smallest  countries  of  Europe  ;  bnt  it  ranks  first  in 
wealth,  manufactures,  commerce,  and  naval  power. 

4.  Of  what  does  the  British  Empire  consist  ? 

The  British  Empire  consists  of  the  Kingdom  of 
Great  Britain  and  Ireland,  together  with  colonies 
in  all  parts  of  the  globe.  The  most  important  are 
India,  Australia,  and  the  Dominion  of  Canada. 


THE   BRITISH    ISLES. 


103 


LESSON    III. 

THE    BRITISH    ISLES    (Continheb) 

fFor  Reading.: 

I.  How  the  People  live. 

1.  How  ilo  .s(i  many  people  in  so  .small  a  country 
live  1  We  shall  best  be  able  to  answer  this  (piestion 
if  we  suppose  ourselves  at  one  of  the  great  English 
seaports.  Say  that  we  are  standing  on  one  of  the 
bridges  that  span  the  river  Thames,  at  London,  or  that 
we  are  on  the  docks  at  Liverpool.  We  see  hundreds 
of  ships  unloading  cargoes  from  all  parts  of  the  workl. 
What  do  you  suppose  these  cargoes  are  \     Let  us  see. 

2.  England  has  a  cool  climate  ;  but  a  civilized  people 
like  the  English  require  many  things  that  are  raised 
only  in  hot  climes.  What  is  one  such  article?  Sugar? 
Yes.  Another  %  Another  %  There  is  still  another  ar- 
ticle which  England  needs  very  much  and  which  grows 
in  our  own  land.  This  is  cotton.  And  the  reason 
England  requires  a  large  supply  of  cotton  is  because  she 
is,  a  very  great  manufacturing  country,  and  she  is  a 
great  manufacturing  country  because  nature  has  fur- 
nished England  with  vast  deposits  of  coal  and  iron. 

3.  England  is  a  small  country  with  a  large  popula- 
tion. There  are  not  farms  enough  to  raise  food  for  her 
millions.  You  will  guess,  then,  that  many  vessels  must 
come  to  England  laden  with  wheat  and  corn.  The 
land  in  England  is  too  valuable  to  be  turned  into  gi'az- 
ing-grounds  :  it  is  therefore  needful  that  vessels  bring 
in  beef  and  pork  and  also  wool. 

4.  But  a  people  that  buys  so  many  things  and  so 
much  of  them  must  have  something  with  which  to  pay 
for  all  these  articles.  You  say  with  money  ?  But  no 
nation  ever  could  have  money  enough  to  pay  for  the 
millions  on  millions  of  dollars'  worth  of  goods  which 
England  imports  every  year.  How,  then,  does  Eng- 
land pay  for  what  she  receives  ?  She  makes  things  to 
pay  for  what  she  cannot  grorv.  England  is  the  greatest 
manufacturing  country  in  the  world. 

II.  English  Manufactures. 

5.  We  have  already  learned  that  England  is  rich  in 
coal  and  in  iron-ore.  The  steam-engine  was  invented 
in  Great  Britain  ;  and  ever  since  that  wonderful  in- 
vention was  made,  about  a  hundred  years  ago,  the  peo- 
ple have  gone  on  making  more  and  more  kinds  of  ma- 
chinery that  will  do  all  sorts  of  things  much  quicker  than 
they  could  possibly  be  done  by  hand  ;  and  it  is  coal 
that  furnishes  the  power  to  drive  all  this  machinery. 

6.  One  of  the  most  important  branches  of  manufac- 
ture includes  all  kinds  of  things  made  of  iron  and  steel. 
Such  are  engines,  railroad  iron,  machinery,  and  every 
description  of  hardware  and  cutlery.  Perhaps  you  may 
have  heard  of  Birmingham  :  this  is  the  great  place 
for  making  hardware,  as  Sheffield  is  for  making  cutlery. 

7.  The  manufacture  of  cotton  and  woolen  goods  is  a 
still  larger  industry  than  that  of  iron-ware,  and  in  the 


making  of  these  goods  England  is  the  foremost  countrj' 
in  the  world.  There  are  thou.«ands  of  cotton-mills  and 
woolen-factories,  and  all  these  have  grown  up  since  the 
invention  of  the  steam-engine  and  of  improved  machin- 
ery for  spinning  and  weaving.  At  fii-st  cotton  was 
woven  and  spun  by  hand  ;  but  this  was  <pnte  changed 
by  several  inventions  made  in  the  latter  part  of  last  cen- 
tury. Xow  a  thousand  spindle.s  can  be  managed  by 
a  single  workman,  and  each  spindle  will  spin  many 
times  more  yarn  than  the  old  hand  spinning-wheel. 
It  is  reckoned  that  the  spindles  in  the  mills  of  England 
are  ecjual  to  the  liand  labor  of  thirty  nnllions  of  spin- 
ners! The  greiit  center  of  the  cotton  manufacture  is 
Manchester  ;  of  woolen  goods,  Leeds. 

8.  While  the  chief  manufactures  arc  in  cotton,  wool, 
and  iron,  thou.sands  of  persons  are  employed  in  weaving 
linen  and  silk  or  in  making  pottery  and  ghiss.  Besides, 
manufacturing  is  not  the  only  occupation  of  the  Eng- 
lish. They  are  skillful  farmers,  ami  the  .soil  is  culti- 
vated to  great  perfection.  So,  too,  the  English  raise 
the  linest  breeds  of  cattle,  sheep,  and  horses  ;  and  on 
all  i)arts  of  the  coast  are  villages  or  towns  iu  which 
lisliernieii  live. 

III.  Occupations  of  the  Scotch  and  Irish. 

'J.  The  peojile  in  the  Lowlands  of  Scotland  are 
largely  engaged  in  manufacturing,  for  the  reason  that 
plenty  of  coal  and  iron  is  found  there.  In  Glasgow 
great  ([uantities  of  cotton  and  woolen  cloth  are  made, 
and  more  iron  ships  are  built  there  than  in  any  other 
part  of  the  world.  Earming  in  Scotland  is  confined 
to  the  Lowlands,  and  is  carried  on  with  great  skill. 
In  the  Highlands  little  of  the  land  is  tilled  ;  still  there 
is  good  grass  for  cattle  and  sheep,  and  large  numbere 
of  both  are  raised  there  and  sent  south  for  sale. 

10.  Ireland  is  not  a  manufacturing  country,  like 
England  and  Scotland,  yet  there  is  one  sort  of  manu- 
facturing industry  which  is  quite  largely  carried  on, 
namely,  the  weaving  of  fine  linen  cloth,  muslin,  and 
poplin  ;  these  are  sent  to  all  parts  of  the  world.  But 
if  Ireland  is  not  adapted  to  niaindacturing,  it  is 
finely  fitted  for  farming,  grazing,  and  dairying.  The 
farms  are  generally  small  patches  of  ground  ;  and  pota- 
toes, which  are  so  great  an  article  of  food  in  Ireland, 
are  raised  on  all  these.  Many  persons  are  engaged  in 
tending  the  flax  plant,  which  is  used  in  making  linen. 
Butter  is  sent  from  all  the  ports,  and  the  people  in 
England  and  Scotland  get  also  eggs,  jjotatoes,  pigs, 
pork,  bacon,  and  cattle  from  this  beautiful  island. 

IV.  Inhabitants  and  Government. 

11.  We  generally  speak  of  the  English  as  a  bluft", 
hearty  people,  fond  of  roast  beef  and  fsiir  play,  but  ob- 
stinate and  a  little  conceited  ;  of  the  Scotch  as  indus- 
trious, intelligent,  and  thrifty,  but  thrifty  sometimes  to 
meanness  ;  and  of  the  Irish  as  quick-witted  and  impul- 
sive, though  somewhat  improvident.  However,  those 
wlio    have   seen    most    of  the   worhl   best  know    how 


104 


EUEOPE. 


hard  it  is  to  tell  all  about  any  people  in  a  short  de- 
scription. You  must  therefoi'e  take  these  descriptions, 
not  as  full  portraits,  but  only  as  giving  certain  feaUires 
of  the  people,  and  when  you  are  older  you  wUl  make 
up  your  own  minds  about  the  characters  of  these  dif- 
ferent folk. 

12.  The  government  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  is 
a  monarchy ;  the  present  sovereign  is  Queen  Victoria. 
All  the  laws  are  made  by  a  legislature  called  Parlia- 
ment, which,  like  our  own  Congress,  is  composed  of  two 
branches  ;  in  England  these  are  called  the  House  of 
Lords  and  the  House  of  Commons.  In  regard  to  their 
liberty  and  rights,  the  English  are  nearly  as  well  off  as 
oureelves.  But  there  is  one  marked  difference  between 
society  in  England  and  in  our  own  country.  The  Eng- 
lish have  a  class  separate  from  the  great  body  of  the 
l)eoplc  and  called  the  nobility.  The  members  of  this 
ckiss  are  lords,  dukes,  and  the  like.  The  title  and  the 
family  estates  always  go  to  tlie  eldest  son,  and  in  this 
way  both  land  and  title  descend  from  generation  to 
generation. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  of  the  manufactures  nf  England  .' 

ilnglaiul  has  rich  mines  of  coal  and  iron,  which 
have  made  it  the  greatest  of  manufacturing  coun- 
ti'ies. 

2.  What  of  its  commerce  ? 

Its  commerce  exceeds  that  of  any  other  nation. 
Its  trade  with  our  c'ouutry  consists  in  exchanging 
mauufactured  articles  for  cotton,  grain,  beef,  and 
150vk. 

3.  r/7if(i  is  the  capital  ? 

London,  which  contains  a  population  of  three 
and  a  half  millions,  is  the  capital.  It  is  the  great 
liu.siness  and  commercial  center  of  the  world. 

4.  Name  the  next  largest  cities. 

Liverpool  in  England,  and  Glasgow  in  Scotland, 
have  each  a  population  of  half  a  million.  Liver- 
pool is  the  great  seaport  for  trade  with  the  United 
States.  Glasgow  is  a  manufactxiring  and  .ship- 
building city.  Manchester  and  Birmingham  rank 
next  in  size.  Manchester  manufactures  cotton 
cloth:  Birmingham,  iron- ware.  Dublin,  the  largest 
city  of  Ireland,  is  a  manufacturing  and  literary 
center. 

Map,  — (.Sw  pa{fe  105. )  1.  In  wliat  part  of  the  island  of  Great  Brit- 
ain is  England?  2.  Where  is  Wales?  3  lu  what  direction  from 
England  is  Scotland  ?  4.  In  what  direction  from  Great  Britain  is 
Ireland  ?  5.  What  sea  and  two  channels  between  Great  Britain  and 
Ireland?  6.  What  sea  east  of  Great  Britain?  7  What  sti-ait  and 
channel  between  England  and  France  ?  8.  What  is  the  name  of  the 
southwestern  cape  of  England?  9.  What  part  of  England  is  moun- 
tainous? 10.  Is  Wales  a  mountainous  or  a  level  country  ?  11.  Which 
half  of  Scotland  is  hiUy  ?  12.  On  what  river  is  London?  13.  What 
river  flows  into  the  Bristol  Channel  ?  14.  On  what  river  is  Glasgow  ? 
15.  What  is  the  largest  river  of  Ireland  ?  16.  In  what  part  of  England 
are  these  cities;  London?  —  Liverpool?-  Manchester?  —  Birming- 
ham ?  17.  In  what  part  of  Wales  is  Mer'thyi-  Tydvil  ?  18.  Locate 
these  Scottish  cities  :  Glasgow  ;  —  Edinburgli ;  —  Aberdeen  ;  —  Dun- 
dee.    19.  Locate  these  Irish  cities:  Dublin;  —  Belfiist ; — Cork. 


LESSON-   IV. 


[For  Reading.! 

I.  Natural  Features. 

1.  Crossing  tlie  Strait  Lif  L)over,  we  pass  from  Eng- 
land to  what  is  called  "  the  Continent,"  —  that  is,  the 
mainland  of  Europe.  We  land  at  Calais  \kal-ay''\  and 
are  in  France.      "  Beautiful  France  "  —  la  belle  France 

—  is  what  the  Frenchman  loves  to  call  his  country. 
And  especially  beautiful  is  it  to  him  in  contrast  with 
England,  which  he  thinks  of  only  as  a  land  of  fogs  and 
vapors  ;  he  shivers  when  he  speaks  of  it,  and  wonders 
how  anybody  can  be  happy  there. 

2.  France  is  one  of  the  oldest,  most  powerful,  and 
most  highly  civilized  nations  of  Europe.  Its  territory 
is  about  twice  as  large  as  that  of  Great  Britain  and 
Ireland  taken  together,  yet  it  is  not  as  large  as  our 
State  of  Texas.  France  is  full  of  hills  and  green  val- 
leys. The  highest  mountains  are  in  the  south  and 
east ;  for  the  Pyrenees  separate  it  from  vSpaiii,  the  Alps 
from  Italy,  the  Jura  from  Switzerland,  and  the  Vosges 
[voz/i]  from  part  of  Germany.  If  you  look  at  the  map 
(page  107)  you  \\t11  notice  four  great  rivers  in  France, 

—  the  Seine  [,■!«»«],  the  Loire  [lwar'\,  the  Garonne  [gar- 
on'^,  and  the  Rhone.  The  plains  and  basins  of  these 
rivers  form  the  richest  and  most  fertile  jiarts  of  the 
country. 

II.  Industries. 

.'5.  The  principal  occupation  of  the  French  people  is 
agriculture,  and  four  Frenchmen  out  (jf  every  five  are 
engaged  in  farming  of  some  kind.  Wliat  they  raise 
depends  on  the  part  of  the  country  in  which  they  live. 
In  the  northern  belt  the  principal  objects  of  culture  are 
wheat,  barley,  oats,  rye,  beets  for  making  sugar,  hemp, 
flax,  and  the  common  fruits.  Central  France  is  tlie 
land  of  the  vine.  In  Southern  France  not  only  is  the 
vine  cultivated,  but  also  the  olive,  orange,  and  naul- 
berry-tree,  on  the  leaves  of  which  the  silk-worm  feeds-. 

4.  The  vineyards  in  the  central  and  southern  parts 
of  France  are  exceedingly  beautiful.  The  vines  are  not 
higher  than  you  can  reach  ;  they  are  made  to  grow  on 
stakes  in  long  rows,  with  just  room  enough  to  walk 
between  them.  The  time  of  the  grape-gathering  is 
called  the  vintage.  Then  aU  the  children  turn  out  to 
help  their  fathers  and  mothers  to  gather  the  grapes ; 
and  if  you  can  speak  French,  you  would  laugh  with 
them  at  the  fun  they  make  all  the  day  long.  Every- 
body seems  glad  at  the  time  of  vintage.  Why  is  the 
grape  grown  so  much  in  France  ?  It  is  grown  for  the 
purpose  of  making  wine.  More  wine  is  made  in  France 
than  in  any  other  country.  Bordeaux,  on  the  river 
(liaronne,  is  the  chief  port  near  the  vineyards. 

5.  The  most  important  manufacture  of  France  is  that 
of  silk  fabrics.  French  silks  surpass  those  of  any  other 
country  in  richness  of  material,  brilliancy  of  color,  and 
taste  and  elegance  of  design.     Lyons  is  the  great  place 


106 


ElIKOPE. 


A  vintage  Scene. 


Cathedral  of  Notre  Dame,  Paris. 


where  velvets  and  other  silk  goods  are  made,  and 
nothing  could  be  more  interesting  than  a  visit  to  one 
of  the  factories  in  that  city,  where  you  may  see  the  pro- 
cess of  spinning  silk,  as  shown  in  the  picture  above. 
The  French  broadcloths  are  famous,  as  are  also  the  tine 
cotton  goods,  such  as  muslins  and  cambrics.  But  it 
would  take  a  great  deal  of  room  to  tell  you  all  the 
articles  we  get  from  France ;  so  I  shall  merely  ask  you 
to  remember  that  we  receive  from  the  French  our  best 
gloves,  most  beautiful  embroideries,  finest  jewelry,  and 
choicest  perfumery.  In  fact,  the  French  excel  wherever 
taste  and  ingenuity  are  required. 

III.   People,  Government,  etc. 

6.  The  French  are  distinguished  for  their  gayety, 
their  politeness,  and  their  fondness  for  display  and 
military  glory.  France  has  fine  universities  and  mil- 
itary schools,  but  a  poor  system  of  primary  schools  for 
educating  the  children  of  the  common  people.  The 
peasantry  are  ignorant,  one  half  of  them  being  unable 
to  read  and  write.  France  has  had  many  changes  of 
government  during  this  century  ;  it  is  now  a  republic. 

7.  Paris,  the  capital,  though  not  as  large  as  London, 
is  the  most  famous  and  splendid  city  in  the  world.  It 
is  distinguished  for  its  magnificent  public  buildings, 
its  public  gardens,  and  places  of  amusement.  It  is  also 
famous  for  its  great  libraries,  museums,  art  galleries, 
and  scientific  schools,  and  for  the  manufacture  and  sale 
of  articles  of  taste,  ornament,  and  fashion. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  Holo  do  you  deMfihc  France  ' 

France  is  one  of  the  oldest  and  most  powerful 
nations  of  Europe.  In  commerce  and  manufac- 
tures it  ranks  next  to  Great  Britain. 

2.  IFJiat  of  its  2>roduds  ? 

Great  quantities  of  fine  wines  are  made ;  the 
sugar-beet  is  cultivated  for  making  beet-sugar ; 
wheat,  olive-oil,  silk,  and  dried  fruits  are  impor- 
tant products. 

3.  In  tchat  kinds  of  manufadurinrf  does  France  excel  ? 


France  excels  in  the  manufacture  of  liroadcloths, 
silks,  velvets,  and  all  articles  of  art  and  fashion. 

4.  Name  the  largest  cities  of  France. 

Paris,  the  capital,  is  the  second  largest  city  in 
Eiirope ;  Lyons,  next  in  size  to  Paris,  is  the  seat 
of  the  silk  manufacture ;  Marseilles  is  the  largest 
sea]>ort ;  Bordeaux  is  noted  for  its  wine  trade; 
Havre  is  the  seaport  of  Paris. 

Hflap.  _(.sVf  npposilr  pnijt)  1.  What  waters  north  of  France? 
2,  What  bay  west?  3.  What  mountaina  separate  it  from  Spain? 
4.  From  what  countries  is  it  separated  by  the  Alps?  -  the  Jura?  — 
the  Vosges  ?  5  What  large  river  flows  into  the  English  Channel  1 
—  into  the  Bay  of  Biscay  ?  —  into  the  Mediterranean  Sea  7  6.  On 
what  rivers  are  these  cities :  Paris  7  —  Rouen  ?  —  Bordeaux  7  —  Lyons? 
7.  Where  is  Marseilles? 


LESSON    V. 
GERMANY    AND    AUSTRIA. 

[For  Reading.] 

I.  Description. 

1.  The  middle  part  of  Europe  is  occupied  mainly  by 
two  countries  called  Germany  and  Austria.  These 
countries  are  quite  separate  in  their  government.  Ger- 
many is  ruled  by  the  German  Emperor,  and  Austria  by 
the  Emperor  of  Austria.  Yet  these  two  lands  are  con- 
nected in  many  ways. 

2.  Only  a  few  years  ago  the  great  German-land  con- 
sisted of  many  separate  kingdoms  and  states.  Most  of 
these  were  very  small,  but  had  very  long  names.  You 
may  try  to  say  this  one,  —  Schwartzburg-Sondershausen. 
The  strongest  of  all  the  countries  was  Prussia,  and  in 
the  course  of  time  this  country  became  so  very  powerful 
that  many  of  the  smaller  states  united  with  it,  and  in 
1871  there  was  formed  what  is  called  the  German  Em- 
pire. It  was  easy  for  these  difi'erent  small  countries  to 
come  together,  because  all  the  people  spoke  the  German 
language,  and  most  of  them  had  the  same  way  of 
thinking.  And  it  was  well  that  these  different  king- 
doms and  dukedoms  and  principalities  did  unite,  for  in 


(;l■;l;.\lA.\^    and  AfsTRiA. 


107 


this  way  a  very  great  nation  was  formed,  —  a  nation 
having  as  many  millions  of  people  as  the  United  States. 

3.  The  exact  name  of  Austria  is  tlie  Austro-Ilun- 
garian  Monarchy,  which  means  tliat  the  country  is 
made  up  of  Austria  and  Hungary  ;  but  beside  these, 
various  smaller  states  belong  to  this  kingdom.  Hun- 
gary was  formerly  a  nation  by  itself,  though  now  the 
Emperor  of  Austria  is  also  the  king  of  Hungary.  It 
has  been  stated  that  Austria  and  Germany  are  closely 
connected.  The  Austrians,  properly  so  calleil,  are  in 
fact  true  Germans  and  speak  the  German  language, 
though  their  nation  is  no  part  of  what  in  our  time 
is  called  Gtrnmny.  But  we  have  seen  tliat  Hungary 
also  forms  a  part  of  the  Austro-Hungarian  Monarciiy. 
Xow,  the  Hungarians  are  not  Germans,  but  belong  to 
quite  a  distinct  race  called  the  Magyars,  and  speak  a 
language  very  different  from  the  German.  Still  anotlier 
part  of  this  monarchy  consists  of  a  fragment  of  the  old 
kingdom  of  Poland  ;  and  here  the  people  are  neither 
Germans  nor  Hungarians,  but  are  related  by  blood  and 
speech  to  the  Russians.  Thus  we  see  that  the  Austro- 
Hungarian  Monarchy,  ov,  as  we  may  call  it,  Al'stri.v, 
unites  within  itself  various  peoples  who  ditier  very 
much  in  race,  language,  religion,  manners,  and  customs. 

II.  The  Rhine  and  the  Danube. 

4.  The  most  famous  river  of  Germany  is  the  Khiue, 


which,  issuing  from 
the  Swiss  Al|)s,  flows 
in  a  general  northerly 
direction  into  the 
North  Sea.  The  sun 
ny  slopes  of  its  bank.s 
are  covered  witli  vine- 
yards or  dotted  with 
pretty  hamlets,  while 
on  thetopsof  the  lofty 
rocks  are  .seen  many 
ruins  of  c:astles,  tliat 
were  built  in  oLl 
en  times  when 
people  of  that  in. 
were  always  rol.)bing 
and  fighting  each  oth- 
er. Along  the  Rhine 
are  situated  some  of 
the  m<).-;t  lloitujsiiiii;^ 
(iities  of  ( ierinany  ; 
among  theseare  Stras 
burg,  which  is  strong- 
ly fortified,  and   (,'o- 

,'  1    1        1      1     i-  Scene  on  the  R<.u.e. 

logue,  celebrated  tor 

its  grand  catliedral,  and  li^r  the  manufacture  of  cologne- 
water. 


CENTRAL   EUROPE 

V."      '  SCALE  OF  MILES 


EUROPE. 


5.   Austria  iilso  has  a  famous  rivei-  :  it  is  called  the 
Daiiulie,  and  is,  after  the  Volga,  the  largest  river  in 

. Europe.     It   has   been 

j'^' "";?~I1"  j?'"^^'-  'W'    -    \     sung  by   poets  as  the 
y^\^   '~\'  s  ■'    '■-      ^^^^    /.J    "beautiful   blue    Daii- 
•  r  '  -  -r-"';  _   '  -.  r-     ube,"  but  it  is  neither 

blue  nor  very  beautiful. 
Still,  it  is  of  great  im- 
portance to  Austria,  be- 
ing the  chief  highway 
of  trade  in  that  coun- 
try. You  may  see  on 
the  Danube  large  num- 
bers of  queer-looking 
craft,  con.sisting  of  great 
arks  propelled  by  very 
wide  paddle-wheels  : 
these  are  much  used  for 
transporting  goods  from 
one  jiart  of  the  country  to  another. 


Navigation  on  the  Dannb«. 


III.  Industries. 

G.  Agricultui'e  is  the  principal  occupation  both  of 
the  Germans  and  Austrians,  three  fourths  of  them  being 
engaged  in  tilling  the  soil.  The  grain  most  extensively 
grown  is  rye,  from  w'hich  the  bread  eaten  by  the  com- 
mon people  is  generally  made.  The  vine  grows  along 
the  Ehine,  in  kSouthern  Germany,  and  in  Hungary. 
"Wheat,  barley,  oats,  potatoes,  and  all  kinds  of  vegetables 
and  fruits  grown  in  the  northern  section  of  the  United 
States,  are  cultivated  in  Germany  and  Austria. 

7.  Flax  is  grown  in  Northern  Germany,  and  linen  is 
an  important  article  of  manufacture.  Many  parts  are 
covered  with  forests  of  oak  and  beech,  on  the  mast  of 
which  are  fattened  immense  numbers  of  hogs.  German 
hams  and  sausages  are  celebrated  all  over  the  world. 
On  the  plains  of  Hungary  in  Austria  great  herds  of 
cattle  and  horses  are  raised.  Germany  has  iron,  coal, 
zinc,  lead,  and  copper  mines.  Austria  is  also  rich  in 
all  these  metals  and  minerals,  and  she  has  besides  valu- 
able mines  of  ipiicksilver.  Near  Cracow  are  mines  of 
rock-salt  which  are  the  largest  in  the  world. 

8.  The  principal  manufactures  of  Germany  and  Aus- 
tria are  broadcloths  and  linen  goods,  silk  goods  and 
leather  goods,  fine  China  and  glassware,  toys,  and 
wine  and  beer. 

IV.  Institations  and  People. 

9.  Germany  is  distinguished  for  its  numerous  uni- 
versities, and  for  its  good  system  of  primary  education. 
Parents  are  compelled  by  law  to  send  their  children  to 
school,  between  the  ages  of  five  and  thirteen  years ; 
and  every  young  man  is  forced  to  do  military  duty  for 
a  certain  time,  during  which  he  is  required  to  pursue 
some  study.  These  two  laws  enable  the  government  to 
bring  a  vast  army  of  trained  and  educated  men  into  the 
field  in  case  of  war,  and  make  Germany  the  foremost 
military  power  of  Europe. 


10.  The  land  in  (xermany  is  mostly  owned  l:/y  a  few 
wealthy  nobles.  Hence  the  peasants  and  working 
classes  are  poor.  Great  numbers  of  Germans  come  to 
the  United  States,  where  land  is  cheap  and  wages  are 
high.  Most  of  these  take  up  land  in  the  Western 
States,  where,  on  account  of  their  thrift  and  industry, 
they  are  always  welcome  settlers. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  What  can  you  say  about  Germany  ? 

The  German  Empire  consists  of  states  and  king- 
doms, united  under  one  general  government.  The 
Kingdom  of  Prussia  iis  the  largest  state,  and  the 
King  of  Prussia  is  the  Emperor  of  German)^ 

2.  What  can  you  say  of  Atistria  ? 

Austria  consists  of  several  states  and  provinces, 
of  which  Austria  and  Hungary  are  the  largest, 
united  under  one  government. 

3.  What  of  the  industries  of  Germantj  1 

Germany  is  an  agricultural  country,  producing 
grain,  flax,  and  live-stock.  In  the  mountain-re- 
gions there  are  valuable  mines,  and  along  the 
Ehine  are  e.xtensive  vineyards. 

4.  What  of  the  industries  of  Austria  ? 

Austria  is  largely  engaged  in  agriculture,  pro- 
ducing wheat,  wine,  wool,  silk,  and  live-stock ;  it 
has  also  rich  mines  of  gold,  silver,  (quicksilver, 
iron,  and  rock-salt. 

5.  TFIiat  are  the  capitals  of  these  countries  ? 

Berlin  is  the  capital  of  Germany,  and  Vienna  of 
Austria.     Each  has  about  1,000,000  population. 

IVIap,  ~(.*c;)a(;c  JO?.)  1.  Bound  the  German  Empire.  2.  In  what 
part  is  Prussia?  3.  What  tliree  rivers  flow  into  the  North  Sea? 
4.  What  river  flows  into  the  Baltic  ?  6.  Locate  Berlin  ;  —  Bremen  ;  — 
Hamburg  ;  —  Cologne.  6.  Bound  the  Austro-Hungarian  Monarchy. 
7.  What  mountain-chains  has  it?  8.  What  great  river  flows  east- 
ward?   9.  Locate  Vienna  ;  —  Prague  ;-- Pesth. 


EUSSIA. 


109 


LESSON    VI. 

RUSSIA. 

[For    Reading.] 


I,  Description. 

1.  lUissia  is  larger  tliaii  all  the  other  countries  of 
Europe  put  togctlicr,  and  oi'  cuiirso,  being  so  extensive, 
its  various  parts  diiler  very  much  iu  climate  and  pro- 


JJ"  ^ 


,  \ 


iluctions.  The  northern  part  is  a  great  dreary  region, 
with  a  winter  lasting  for  seven  or  eight  months.  In 
the  central  section  is  a  large  district  covered  with  for- 
ests. Bears,  wolves,  and  other  wild  animals  are  found, 
and  often  not  a  house  is  to  be  seen  for  miles  together. 
The  forests  yield  great  quantities  of  timber  for  ship- 
building ;  and  tar,  pitch,  turpentine,  rosin,  and  pota.sb 
are  largely  made  and  exported.  In  the  plains  of  the 
Volga,  Don,  and  Dneiper  [nee'y^er]  are  excellent  farm- 
lands. Southern  Eussia  is  a  region  of  steppes,  which 
aflbrd  food  to  great  herds  of  half-wild  horses  and  cattle. 

II.  Industries. 

2.  The  people  of  Eussia  are  engaged  chiefly  in  agri- 
culture and  grazing.  They  raise  rye,  wheat,  oats,  flax, 
and  hemp.  Mines  of  gold  and  platinum  are  found  on 
the  Asiatic  side  of  the  Ural  Mountains.  Iron  is  the 
metal  most  extensively  worked  in  Eussia ;  but  the 
country  has  no  coal-beds,  and  hence  Eussia  is  not 
largely  engaged  in  manufectures.  The  only  articles  in 
which  Eussia  can  successfully  compete  with  other  coun- 
tries are  leather,  soap,  sheeting,  cordage,  and  tar. 

3.  Eussia  has  a  large  traffic  with  Central  Asia  and 
China.  This  is  carried  on  by  means  of  sleighs  which 
run  over  the  snow-covered  ground,  and  of  caravans 
which  cross  the  deserts.  Great  quantities  of  tea  are 
brought  in  this  way  from  China  to  Eussia,  for  tea  is  a 
great  national  beverage  among  the  Eussians. 


4.  A  peculiar  feature  of  the  internal  trade  of  Eussia 
are  the  great  fairs  held  at  certain  places.  The  chief  of 
these,  and  also  the  largest  in  the  world,  is  that  of  Kijni 
Novgorod  [nezk'ne  nov-(/o-rod'],  a  city  situated  on  the 
Volga.  They  are  attended  every  year  by  as  many  as 
two  hundred  thousand  people,  drawn  together  from  all 
])arts  of  Kuropo  and  Asia. 

Ill-  Government  and  Civilization. 

5.  Eussia  is  governed  Vjy  an  Emperor,  who  has  the 
sole  power  to  make  laws,  lie  is  called  the  Czar,  a 
corruption  of  the  name  "  Cassar."  During  the  present 
(tcntury  Eussia  has  had  a  number  of  very  able  Czars ; 
iind  as  tlie  Czar  is  all-powerful,  these  rulers  have  been 
able  to  advance  the  country  very  much.  At  the  present 
time  railroads  are  in  proc:ess  of  building,  education  and 
literature  are  taking  root,  and  there  is  a  stir  of  real  life 
and  progress  in  Eiissia.  The  greatness  of  some  nations, 
like  Spain  and  Italy,  is  in  Ihn  past :  the  greatness  of 
Eussia  is  in  the  fiUtcre. 

IV.   Cities. 

6.  St.  Petersburg,  the  capital  of  Eussia,  is  situated  , 
farther  north  than  any  other  great  city  of  the  world. 
It  is  built  on  the  perfectly  flat  banks  of  the  Neva,  near 
where  that  river  falls  into  the  (Julf  of  Finland  by  four 
mouths.  The  islands  thus  formed  arc  covered  with  the 
mansions  and  gardens  of  the  wealthy.  These  islands 
and  the  opposite  sides  of  the  river  are  connected  by 
bridges  of  boats  in  summer,  and  by  the  ice  in  winter. 

7.  Moscow  is  one  of  the  oldest  cities  of  Eussia,  and 
was  the  capital  before  St.  Petersburg  was  built.  From 
the  intermixture  of  palaces  and  huts  Moscow  is  more 
like  an  Asiatic  than  a  European  town.  The  most  strik- 
ing feature  of  the  place  is  its  many-colored  domes  and 
spires.  In  the  center  is  the  Kremlin,  —  a  group  of  ])al- 
aces  and  churches,  monasteries,  arsenals,  and  museums. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  JUiat  of  the  Russian  Empire  ? 

The  Empire  of  Russia  consists  of  European  Pais- 
sia,  together  with  extensive  possessions  in  Asia. 
It  ranks  next  to  the  British  Empire  in  the  extent 
of  its  possessions. 

2.  Describe  European  Russia  ? 

European  Paissia  is  the  largest  country  in  Eurojic. 
It  is  a  low,  level  plain,  thinly  settled,  and  in  the 
north  is  covered  with  forests. 

3.  JVhat  can  you  tell  about  its  resources  and  industries  ? 

Russia  is  au  agricultural  and  stock-raising  coun- 
try. It  exports  great  quantities  of  wheat,  wool, 
liides,  tallow,  leather,  and  hemp.  It  has  also  rich 
mines  of  gold,  silver,  and  platinum. 

I^ap,  —  (,9tT  jmgc  inn.)  i.  What  part  of  Europe  does  Russia  occu- 
py? 2.  N.-une  the  seas  and  gulfs  that  partly  surround  it.  3.  Where 
are  the  Caucisus  Mountains?  4  What  large  lakes  in  the  northwestern 
part?  5.  Into  what  does  the  Volga  flow?  6.  Name  a.  river  flowing 
into  the  Black  Sea;  — into  the  Sea  of  Azov.  7.  On  what  parallel  of 
latitude  is  St.  Petersburg  7  8.  Where  is  Moscow  ?  —  Odessa  ?  —  Arch  ■ 
angel  ? 


110 


EUROPE. 


LESSON    VII. 


SMALLER  COUNTRIES.— 
NORTH  EUROPE. 


[For  Reading  and  Recitatit 


SWISS  cuaiet  in  tue  Alps. 


E:^  The  text  on  the  minor  coun- 
tries of  Europe  being  brief,  the  teach- 
er may  have  it  read  over  at  first,  and 
recited  ou  review. 

I.  Sweden  and  Norway. 

1.  Sweden  and  Norway 
are  two  countries  governed 
by  one  king.  They  occupy 
the  nortliwestern  peninsula 
of  Europe,  a  land  of  mountains  and  lakes,  waterfalls 
and  fiords,  or  deep  bays.  These  countries  are  in  the  cold 
belt  of  Europe,  and  hence  fivrming  is  carried  on  only  in 
the  southern  part.  But  they  are  rich  in  great  pine 
forests,  in  mines  of  the  finest  iron,  and  in  the  boundless 
wealth  of  the  sea.  The  people  are  hardy,  thrifty,  and 
intelligent. 

2.  Stockholm,  the  capital,  contains  many  handsome 
public  buildings,  but  the  streets  are  mostly  narrow, 
crooked,  and  ill-paved.  In  common  with  other  north- 
ern cities,  it  presents  its  gayest  aspect  in  winter,  when 
the  inhabitants  move  about  in  sledges,  and  engage  in 
various  amusements  on  the  ice. 

II.  Denmark. 

3.  In  Denmark  the  air  is  moist,  which  gives  the 
country  green  meadows.  Hence  cattle-raising  and  the 
making  of  butter  and  cheese  are  the  most  important 
occupations.  The  Danes  are  also  very  fond  of  the  sea, 
and  goods  are  often  carried  from  one  country  to  another 
in  Danish  ships.  Copenhagen,  the  capital,  is  a  busy 
commercial  city,  and  is  noted  for  its  fine  palaces,  public 
buildings,  and  museums  of  art. 

III.  Holland  or  the  Netherlands. 

4.  Tlie  name  Holland  means  literally  the  holloio 
land,  just  as  Netherlands  signifies  the  nether  or  under 
land  ;  and  these  names  tell  us  that  the  country  is  low 
and  flat.  In  fact,  much  of  the  land  is  so  depressed 
that  it  was  formerly  overflowed  by  the  ocean  at  high 
tide  ;  but  it  has  been  reclaimed  by  building  great  em- 
bankments called  dikes. 

.5.  Holland  is  a  grazing  rather  than  an  agricultural 
country  :  it  imports  grain,  but  exports  immense  quan- 
tities of  butter  and  cheese.     By  far  the  larger  portion 


of  the  land  is  ilevoted  to  pasturage,  and  dairy  hus- 
bandry, which  is  brought  to  great  perfection,  forms  the 
chief  source  of  the  national  wealth.  The  internal  trade 
is  carried  on  almost  entirely  by  means  of  canals,  which 
in  Holland  serve  the  purpose  of  roads  elsewhere.  They 
run  througli  the  principal  streets  of  the  cities,  and  ex- 
tend in  a  complete  network  over  the  whole  country. 
In  winter  the  people  skate  from  place  to  place  on  the 
ice  wliich  then  covers  the  canals.  The  farmers'  wives 
skate  to  market  with  butter  and  eggs  in  baskets  on 
their  heads,  and  even  the  children  often  skate  to  school. 
Amsterdam  is  the  largest  city  of  Holland. 

IV.  Belgium. 

C.  Belgium,  like  Holland,  is  a  small  and  generally 
level  country.  The  soil  is  fertile,  and  so  highly  culti- 
vated that  Belgium  has  been  called  the  "  Garden  of 
Europe,"  Belgium  is  very  rich  in  coal  and  iron.  The 
most  important  manufactures  are  those  of  woolen  and 
linen  goods,  lace,  carpets,  glass,  etc.  Brussels,  the 
capital,  is  a  kind  of  small  Paris. 

v.   Switzerland. 

7.  In  the  great  mountain  chain  of  the  Alps  is  a 
small  nation,  which  is  interesting  to  us,  because,  like 
our  own  country,  it  is  a  republic.  The  name  of  this 
country  is  Switzerland,  and  doubtless  you  have  read 
something  about  it,  because  it  is  very  famous  for  its 
majestic  mountaips,  lovely  lakes,  and  grand  waterftills. 

8.  The  summits  of  the  Alps  are  always  covered  with 
snow.  In  the  valleys  between  these  lofty  mountains 
the  snow  is  very  deep.  Sometimes  a  mass  of  snow  that 
can  no  longer  cling  to  the  steep  slope  breaks  away,  and, 
getting  larger  as  it  rolls,  comes  down  with  a  loud  noise 
into  the  plain.  The  pine-forest  cannot  stop  this  im- 
mense snow-ball  :  the  tall  trees  snap  like  little  sticks. 
Now  and  then  a  quiet  village  has  been  buried  in  the 
snow.  The  French  call  such  a  falling  mass  an  ava- 
lanche. The  snow  and  ice  of  these  high  valleys  are 
partly  melted  in  the  summer  time,  and  slowly  move, 
like  rivers,  lower  down.  These  ice-rivers  are  named 
glaciers,  and  may  be  seen  in  many  Alpine  valleys. 
They  push  downwards  till  a  warmer  air  turns  all  the 
ice  into  water.  Some  of  the  largest  rivers  in  Europe 
have  their  sources  in  the  glacieiis  of  the  Alps. 

9.  Switzerland  is  chiefly  a  pastoral  country,  and  no- 
where is  the  produce  of  the  dairy  carried  to  greater 
perfection.  The  making  of  watches,  musical-boxes, 
and  jewelry  is  the  favorite  form  taken  by  the  manufac- 
turing skill  of  the  people.  The  Swiss  are  brave,  and 
love  their  country  and  liberty.  They  have  good 
schools,  and  are  generally  well  educated. 

Map, — IScc  page  100.)  1.  What  waters  partly  surround  Norway 
and  Sweden  ?  2.  In  what  direction  do  the  mountains  extend  ?  3.  What 
and  where  is  the  capital  ? 

IVIap.  — (SVc  jwjc  107.)  1.  What  country  south  of  Denmark?  — 
north?  2.  What  sea  west?  3.  What  and  where  is  the  capital? 
4.  Bound  Holland.  6.  Wliat  river  flows  through  it?  6.  What  and 
where  is  the  capital  ?  7.  Bound  Switzerland.  8.  Locate  Berne ;  — 
Geneva ;  —  Basle. 


SOUTHERN    EUKOl'K. 


..ij^uajiT^ri" 


^  ■  ;  .',  e. 


LESSON    VIII. 
SMALLER    COUNTRIES.      SOUTH    EUROPE. 

[For  Reading  and  Recitation.] 

1.  The  Snnny  Lands. 

1.  Tlie  soutlu-rn  sliore  of  Europe  i.s  laved  l.iy  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  and  into  this  sea  jut  three  penin- 
sulas,—(1)  the  Spanish  peninsula,  (2)  Italj-,  (3)  Greece 
and  Turkey.  These  are  sunny  lands,  enjoying  a  most 
beautiful  climate,  and  producing  the  finest  of  fruits. 
Two  of  them  were  the  homes  of  the  most  famous  na- 
tions of  ancient  times,  —  namely,  Greece  the  land  of 
poets  and  orators  and  artists  ;  and  Eome,  which,  by  its 
valor  in  arms,  was,  at  tlie  time  of  the  birth  of  Christ, 
mistress  of  the  whole  civilized  world.  But  things  are 
very  much  changed  now,  for  people  who  were  mere 
barbarians  at  the  time  when  Greece  and  Rome  were  in 
their  glory  are  now  tlie  leaders  in  civilization. 

II.   Spain  and  Portugal. 

2.  The  Spanish  peninsula,  though  one  by  nature,  is 
divided  between  two  nations,  —  Spain  and  Portugal. 
In  the  coast  plains  and  the  river  valleys  of  Spain  are 
vineyards,  mulberry  plantations,  and  groves  of  the  olive, 
orange,  lemon,  and  fig.  The  grapes  are  made  into  the 
sherry  wine  for  which  Spain  is  famous,  and  the  mul- 
berry-leaves are  used  to  feed  the  silk- worm.  In  the 
plains  of  Portugal  grains  and  fnut  abound,  and  from 
this  country  we  receive  port  wine,  so  called  after  the 
town  of  Oporto.  In  the  mountain  land  of  Spain  are 
the  fine-wooled  merino  sheep.  The  mountains  also 
contain  rich  mines  of  quicksilver  and  lead,  but  these 
are  not  much  worked. 

.3.  Spain  suffered  long  from  bad  government ;  Init 
the  country  is  now  a  monarchy,  and  we  .shall  all  be 
glad  to  see  it  become  a  great  nation  as  in  the  olden 
days.  ^Madrid  is  the  capital  and  largest  city  of  Spain  ; 
and  Lisbon  is  the  capital  and  largest  city  of  Portugal. 


III.  Italy. 

4.  The  greater  lumtbcr  of  the  Italians  till  the 
ground,  and  take  care  ol'  their  vineyards  and  olive 
])lantations  and  mtdberry  groves.  Every  pupil  must 
have  heard  how  skilled  the  Italians  arc  in  the  fine  arts, 
especially  in  music  and  painting.  Until  recently,  how- 
ever, they  were  not  a  very  enlightened  people,  and  their 
land  was  cut  up  among  many  small  nations  ;  but  v.-  w 
all  Italy  is  one  country,  and  the  people  are  improving 
in  every  way.  Rome  is  the  capital  of  Italy,  the  home 
of  art,  and  the  residence  of  the  Pope ;  Naples  is  situated 
on  a  beautiful  bay,  on  one  side  of  which  is  the  famous 
volcano  of  Vesuvius  ;  Venice  is  built  on  many  islands, 
and  some  of  its  streets  are  canals,  where  you  may  see 
persons  sailing  about  in  f/<ni(/olas. 

IV.  Greece  and  Turkey. 

5.  Across  the  Adriatic  Sea,  eastward  from  Italy,  is 
the  third  great  peninsula  of  Southern  Europe.  One 
part  is  called  Turkey,  and  the  other  and  smaller,  Greece. 
Greece,  so  powerful  in  oMen  times,  is  now  a  petty  king- 
dom, and  every  kind  of  industry  is  in  a  backward  state. 

"  'T  is  Greece,  but  living  Greece  no  more  ! " 

6.  The  Turks  hold  (piite  a  number  of  countries  in 
the  region  where  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa  meet.  These 
lands  form  together  the  Turkish  Empire.  Turkey 
proper  is  only  the  European  part  ;  but  in  this  part  is 
the  chief  seat  of  Turkish  power,  for  here  is  Constanti- 
nople, where  lives  the  Sultan,  the  ruler  of  all  these 
lands.  It  is  a  very  fertile  country,  but  owing  to  bad 
government  the  people  are  unhappy.  The  Turks  them- 
selves form  only  a  small  jiart  of  the  poj)ulation  of  Tur- 
key. They  came  from  Asia,  and  their  way  of  living 
is  not  like  that  of  any  other  nation  of  Europe. 

ff\^n,  —<,<•::  jm^r  lim)  1.  Between  what  ocean  and  sea  are  Spain 
and  Portugal?  2.  Wliat  connects  these  two  bodies  of  water?  3.  What 
mountain  range  north  ?  4.  Name  and  locate  two  cities  of  Spam  ;  -  - 
of  Portngal  5.  What  is  the  shape  of  Italy  ?  6.  What  mountains  on 
the  north  ?  7.  Name  the  largest  river,  a  Locate  Rome  ;  -  Naples  ; 
-  Gen'oa.  9  Between  what  seas  is  Turkey  ?  10.  What  great  river 
flows  through  it?  U.  What  and  where  is  the  capital?  12.  Bound 
Greece ;  —  locate  Athens. 


OopyrightaSTe.Oylvison.Blalieman.Taylor  >t  Co, New  YoA 


ASIA. 


113 


ASIA. 


LESSON    I, 


INTRODUCTION. 


1.  If'luit  general  dcscripiion  of  Asia  can  yon  give  ? 

Asia  is  the  largest  of  the  (iraiul  Divisions,  con- 
taining one  third  of  the  land  surface  and  one  half 
of  the  inhabitants  of  the  globe. 

2.  What  arc  its  chief  natural  features  ? 

The  northern  part  is  a  vast  plain ;  the  central 
and  southern  parts  consist  of  elevated  table-lands 
crossed  by  lofty  mountain-ranges,  and  of  three 
great  peninsulas,  extending  southward.  In  Asia 
there  are  many  large  rivers ;  and  as  it  extends 
through  three  zones,  it  has  every  variety  of  cli- 
mate, from  torrid  to  frigid. 

3.  Wliat  can  you  tell  about  the  races  and  civilization  of 
Asia  ? 

There  are  three  races  living  in  Asia,  —  the  Mon- 
golian, Malay,  and  Caucasian.  The  inhabitants  are 
not  so  far  advanced  in  civilization  as  the  people  of 
Europe. 

4.  In  xdiat  does  the  commerce  of  Asia  consist  ? 

The  commerce  consists  in  exchanging  tea,  cot- 
ton, silk,  gems,  and  spices  for  manufactured  arti- 
cles and  silver  coin. 


LESSON    II. 

THE    CHINESE    EMPIRE. 
[For  Reading.: 
I.  Situation,  Numbers,  Race,  and  History. 

1.  In  the  ea.stern  ])art  of  Asia  is  a  vast  region,  as 
largo  as  the  whole  of  the  United  States.  This  is  what 
is  called  the  "  Chiiie.se  Empire."  It  contains  several 
countries,  but  tlie  most  interesting  is  China  itself,  or,  <as 
the  Chinese  name  it,  the  "  Central  Flowery  Land."  If 
we  glance  at  the  map  we  shall  see  two  great  rivers  flow- 
ing into  the  Pacilic  Ocean.  These  are  called  the  lloaug- 
Ho,  and  the  Yang-tse-Kiang'.  They  form  immense 
valleys,  nearly  as  large  as  our  gi'cat  Mississippi  Valltiy, 
and  the  region  watered  by  these  rivers  is  the  principal 
part  of  what  is  called  China  Proper. 

2.  The  first  thing  to  be  noticed  about  China  is  the 
vast  number  of  human  beings  that  live  there.  The 
number  of  people  in  China  is  over  400  millions ;  but 
this  is  so  great  a  number  that  no  person  can  realize  it, 
for  it  would  take  one  very  many  years  to  count  400 
millions.  Perhaps,  then,  we  may  get  a  better  idea  of 
the  population  of  China  by  remembering  that  it  is  more 
tlian  ten  times  the  population  of  the  whole  United 
States,  or  that  one  in  three  of  all  the  iidiabitants  of 
the  globe  is  a  sidiject  of  that  Emperor  who  is  stj'Ied 
the  "  Brother  of  the  Sun  and  Moon." 


MAP    STUDIES. 


tS^  .It  the  first  recitation,  Icaclwrs  will  allow  pupils  ti>  an- 
swer questions  with  open  hook  ;  at  the  second  reeitiition  t/ic  pujyils 
should  be  required  to  answer  from  memory  or  from  the  outline 
m/ip. 

Boundaries.  —  1.  What  ocean  north  of  Asia? — east? 
—  south  ?  2.  What  Grand  Divisions  west  ?  3.  What  sea 
between  Asia  and  Africa?  4.  What  seas  between  Asia 
and  Europe  ? 

Peninsulas.  —  1.  What  great  peninsula  in  the  south- 
west ?  2.  What  one  east  or  this  ?  3.  Wliat  one  east  of 
Hindostan'?    4.  What  one  in  the  northeast  ? 

,  The  Coast-line.  —  1.  What  great  sea  between  Arabia 
and  Hindostan  ?  2.  What  bay  between  Hindostan  and 
the  Eastern  Peninsula?  3.  What  sea  north  of  Bor'neo  ? 
4.  What  sea  northeast  of  the  China  Sea?  —  northeast  of 
the  Yellow  Sea?  — northwest  of  the  Japan  Sea?  5.  What 
strait  separates  Asia  from  North  America?  {Sec  vmp  of 
North  Jmcricn,  pnije  J'l.)  6.  What  isthmus  connects  Asia 
with  Africa?    7.  What  cape  south  of  Hindostan? 

Islands.—  1.  What  island  south  of  Hindostan  ?  2.  Wliat 
four  large  islands  between  Australia  and  Asia  ?  3.  Which 
of  these  four  is  the  largest  ?  ''.  Whr  group  of  islands 
east  of  the  mainland  of  Asia  ? 

Mountains.  —  1.   What  are  the  three  most  northern 


ranges  of  mountains  ?  2.  Between  what  countries  are  they  ? 
3.  What  great  mountain-range  north  of  Hindostan  ? 

Rivers.  —  1.  What  three  rivers  flow  into  the  Arctic 
Ocean  ?  2.  What  three  into  the  Paciiic  ?  3.  Into  what 
arm  of  the  Pacific  does  the  Amoor  flow?  —  the  Hoang-Ho  ? 
—  the  Yang-tse-kiang ?  —  the  Mekong?  4.  What  three 
flow  into  the  Bay  of  Bengal  ?  5.  What  one  into  the 
Arabian  Sea  ?  6.  What  one  into  an  arm  of  the  Arabian 
Sea?  7.  In  what  mountains  do  the  rivers  flowing  into  the 
Pacific  Ocean  rise  ?  8.  In  what  mountains  do  the  Indus 
and  Ganges  rise  ? 

Of  what  country  is  each  of  these  cities 
(  Peking.  TiiiiK.n.vx'. 

)    T,i,-Tr.  B.AXOKOK'. 

C,\B001,'. 

In  what  country  is  each  of  these 

f  Peking.  Calcutta. 

ToKio.  Shanghae'. 

Canton.  Nankin. 

Bombay.  Mandf.'lay. 


The  Capital? -    ToKio. 

t  C'ALCUTI'A. 


Largest  Cities  ?. . 


Where  is  each  of  these 

r  BOMIIAY. 

Principal  Seaports  ?    "i  CAicrrrA. 


I    \-ALt 

'-  Sing 


Hong-Kong. 

Shanghae. 

Manila. 


114 


ASIA. 


3.  Next  as  to  the  race.  The  Chinese  belong  to  the 
Mongolian  race,  one  of  the  five  great  divisions  of  the 
human  family.  They  are  of  a  hrownisli  yellow  color, 
are  without  beard,  and  have  ahuorid-sliaped  eyes  set 
obliquely  in  their  heads.  But  it  is  not  needful  to  de- 
scribe this  people  very  closely,  as  there  are  numbers  of 
them  in  our  cities  and  towns,  so  that  most  pupils  have 
seen  a  Chinaman  for  themselves. 

4.  China  is  one  of  the  oldest  of  civilized  nations. 
By  tliis  is  meant  that  several  thousand  years  ago,  when 
the  people  of  Europe  were  still  savages,  tlie  Chinese 
liad  a  regular  government,  and  a  written  language,  and 
a  knowledge  of  many  of  the  mechanical  arts.  They 
had  invented  the  mariner's  compass,  gunpowder,  and 
the  art  of  printing,  many  centuries  before  these  be- 
came known  in  Europe.  But  we  cannot  say  that  the 
Chinese  are  a  civilized  people  according  to  our  standard, 
for  they  are  not  progressive  :  their  way  of  doing  things 
and  thinking  about  things  is  to-day  just  as  we  find  it 
described  in  their  books  to  have  been  2,500  years  ago. 

II.  Chinese  Farming. 

5.  Most  of  the  people  of  China  are  engaged  in  tillin;^ 
the  soil ;  and,  of  course,  as  they  are  so  veiy  numerous, 
each  fivmily  must  occupy  a  very  small  patch  of  ground. 
No  foot  of  land  is  left  unused  :  the  Chinese  farmer  will 
cut  terraces  on  the  side  of  a  hill  one  above  the  other, 
and  grow  his  rice  upon  them,  using  a  water-wheel  to 
force  the  water  up  to  the  highest  ten-aces  ;  or  if  he  has 
no  land  at  all  he  will  build  a  raft  on  the  river,  cover  it 
with  soil,  and  grow  his  vegetables  there. 

6.  What  are  the  plants  most  cultivated  1  First  in  or- 
der are  the  food-plants.  The  grain  most  cultivated  is  rice. 
This  is  the  great  food  of  the  people,  as  bread  is  with 
us.  The  national  beverage  is  tea,  and  both  plant  and 
name  are  Chinese.  From  time  out  of  mind  the  Chinese 
have  been  in  the  habit  of  drinking  tea  ;  but  only  about 
two  hundred  years  ago  it  was  introduced  into  Eurojie. 
Since  then  its  use  has  become  universal  throughout  tlie 


civilized  world.  We  see,  then,  that  the  culture  of  the 
tea-plant  must  be  a  very  important  and  extensive  in- 
dustry in  China.  The  tea-plant  is  an  evergreen  shrub, 
growing  five  or  six  feet  high,  the  leaves  of  which  are 
gathered,  and  dried  in  shallow  pans  placed  over  char- 
coal fires.  Both  black  teas  and  green  teas  are  gatliered 
from  the  same  shrub,  the  difierence  arising  from  differ- 
ent seasons  of  gathering  and  the  various  ways  of  drying. 

7.  The  dress  of  the  common  people  of  China  is 
almost  entirely  of  cotton  cloth.  Hence  we  judge  that 
the  cotton-plant  must  be  largely  grown  in  China  ;  and 
this  is  the  case.  But  the  richer  classes  alwaj's  wear 
lobes  of  silken  stuffs;  and  from  this  we  may  judge 
that  the  manufacture  of  silk  must  be  another  important 
business  in  China.  In  fact,  the  art  «of  rearing  silk- 
worms, which  feed  on  mulberry-leaves,  and  of  unravel- 
ing the  threads  of  cocoons,  was  first  practiced  by  the 
Chinese.  The  houses  of  tlie  common  people  are  gener- 
ally made  of  bamboo  ;  and  not  only  the  houses,  but  the 
furniture  as  well,  and  nearly  everything  else  in  the  house. 
So,  too,  are  the  ordinary  boats,  and,  what  you  might 
not  suppose,  the  very  paper  on  wliich  the  Chinese  write. 

III.  Other  Occupations. 

8.  Fishing  is  quite  an  occupation  in  China.  The 
land  is  too  valuable  to  give  up  to  the  grazing  of  cattle  ; 
hence  the  Chinaman  eats  little  or  no  meat,  but  he 
draws  on  the  wealth  of  the  waters,  for  with  a  little 
fish  added  to  his  rice  he  is  a  happy  man.  The  Chinese 
have  more  ways  than  one  of  catching  fish.  Sometimes 
they  will  dive  into  the  water  and  catch  them  with  their 
hands ;  at  other  times  they  use  a  bird  called  a  cormorant 
which  they  train  to  catch  fish ;  but  the  more  common 
way  is  by  means  of  a  peculiar  net  as  shown  here. 


Chinese  Fistdng. 

9.  The  Chinese  are  a  great  manufacturing  people,  if 
we  use  the  word  manvfactm-iug  in  its  original  sense  of 
making  by  band,  for  almost  all  their  industries  are 
carried  on  in  this  way.  But  when  tve  speak  of  manu- 
facturing, we  mean  making  by  the  use  of  machinery ; 
and  in  this  sense  the  Chinese  are  not  a  manufecturing 
people,  for  improved  machinery  is  unknown  in  China. 


JAPAN. 


115 


10.  The  priucijial  articles  wliieh  China  contributes  to 
the  world's  trade  are  teas  and  silks ;  also  nankeens, 
laces,  porcelain  and  lacquered  ware,  ivory-work,  and 
fire-crackers.  The  Chinese  have  no  railroads  ;  you  may 
ask,  then,  how  goods  are  carried  from  one  place  to  an- 
other. The  rivers  are  mucli  used  for  this  purpose,  as 
are  also  the  numerous  canals.  But,  as  a  general  rule, 
goods  are  carried  susiiendcd  from  bamboo  poles  slung 
across  the  shoulders  of  porters. 

IV.  The  People. 

11.  There  are  very  many  things  that  might  be  .said 
about  the  ways  of  the  Chinese,  but  there  is  room  to 
speak  of  oidy  a  few  hero.  The  men  tie  up  their  hair 
into  a  long  tail  which  hangs  down  over  the  back.  The 
girls  of  the  wealthier  families  are  kept  with  their  feet 
bandaged  from  infancy,  so  that  when  they  grow  up 
their  feet  are  mere  stumps,  on  which  they  can  barely 
hobble  along.  The  Chinese  eat  with  chopsticks,  in 
])laco  of  knives  and  forks.  There  are  schools  for  boys 
in  all  the  villages,  and  almo.st  every  Chinaman  can  read 
and  write,  but  the  girls  are  not  thought  to  be  worth 
educating.  The  Chinese  are  exceedingly  industrious, 
thrifty,  and  imitative  ;  but  they  are  often  treacherous, 
knavish,  and  immoral.     They  are  great  opium-smokers. 

V.  Cities. 

1 2.  There  is  no  country  in  the  world  v.'here  there  are 
so  many  large  cities  as  in  China.  The  capital,  Peking, 
is  in  the  north,  and  has  nearly  as  many  inhabitants  as 
London.  There  are  several  other  cities  with  more  peo- 
ple than  New  York  ;  but  the  seaports  of  Canton  and 
Shanghae  are  better  known  than  most  interior  cities, 
because  till  lately  the  jealous  Chinese  would  not  let 
foreigners  go  into  the  heart  of  their  country.  Hong 
Kong  in  Cliina  belongs  to  the  English. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  Of  what  does  the  Chinese  Empire  consist  ? 

The  Chinese  Empire  consists  of  China  Proper, 
together  with  various  provinces,  all  united  tinder 
one  government,  the  head  of  which  is  the  Emperor 
of  China. 

2.  fFliat  can  yoii,  say  of  China  ? 

China  is  the  oldest  and  most  populous  country 
on  tlie  globe.  It  contains  400  millions  of  inhabi- 
tants, or  one  third  of  all  the  people  in  the  world. 

3.  IVhat  of  its  civilization  ? 

The  Chinese  are  not  a  progressive  people,  having 
made  little  advancement  in  the  arts  and  sciences 
for  3,000  years.  They  make  but  little  use  of  ma- 
chinery, and  railroads  and  telegraphs  are  unknown. 

4.  IFhat  are  the  chief  eoyports  ? 

The  chief  exports  are  tea,  silk,  and  porcelain-ware. 

|yi3p,  —  {^ec -pain  112.)  1.  In  what  zone  is  most  of  China  ?  2.  What 
tiiree  .se.as  east  of  China?  3.  Mantchoo'ria,  Mongo'lia.  and  Thibet'  be- 
loni;  to  the  Chinese  Empire  :  tell  where  each  is.  4.  What  river  rising 
in  the  Peling  Mountains  flows  into  the  Yellow  Sea  ?  5.  Describe  the 
Yangtse-Kiang.  6.  Where  is  the  capital?  7.  Locate  Canton;  — 
Hong  Kong. 


LESSON    III. 


tFor  Reading.: 


I.  Besemblance  to  England. 

1.  Olf  the  western  coast  of  Europe  is  the  island  king- 
dom of  England  ;  olf  the  eastern  coa.st  of  Asia  is  the 
island  kingdom  of  Japan.  We  thus  see  that  there  is  a 
certain  likeness  between  the  situation  of  Japan  and  of 
England.  But  the  resemblance  between  the  two  coun- 
tries goes  farther.  Japan  and  England  are  situated  in 
about  the  same  latitude.  The  two  countries  are  of 
about  the  same  size,  the  island  of  Niphon  corresponding 
to  the  island  of  Great  Britain,  and  Jesso  to  Ireland. 
They  have  nearly  the  same  number  of  inhabitants,  — 
about  3-5  millions  each,  or  only  a  little  less  than  the 
poj)ulation  of  the  United  States. 

II.  Japanese  and  Chinese. 

2.  The  .Japanese  resemble  the  Chinese  in  some. re- 
spects, but  tlilier  widely  from  them  in  others.  Like 
the  Chinese  they  belong  to  the  Mongolian  or  Yellow 
race.  They  are  somewhat  smaller  than  the  Chinese, 
but  are  at  the  same  time  handsomer.  The  Japanese  are 
lithe  and  agile  ;  they  are  polite,  g.ay,  and  talkative,  and 
may  be  called  the  Frenchmen  of  the  Mongolian  race. 
One  curious  point  of  resemblance  and  of  difference  is 
this :  the  Japanese  ivrite  in  the  Chinese  charactere, 
while  their  spoken  language  is  quite  di.ssimilar.  liut 
there  is  a  still  more  curious  point  of  resemblance  and 
dilference. 

3.  Japan,  like  China,  kept  itself  aloof  from  other 
nations  for  ages.  There  was  a  law  punishing  with 
death  all  who  traded  with  foreigners  or  had  anything 
to  do  with  them.  But  a  few  years  ago  the  United 
States  government  sent  a  naval  expedition  to  Japan 
under  Commodore  Perry.  He  persuaded  the  Japanese 
to  open  certain  of  their  ports  for  trade.  Soon  after  this 
a  great  change  came  over  the  Japanese  authorities  and 
people.  The  government  was  reformed,  and  various 
improvements  were  introduced.  More  recently  railroads 
and  telegraphs  have  been  constructed  ;  the  best  Ameri- 
can and  European  engineers  and  teachers  have  been  in- 
vited over,  and  many  Japanese  young  men  are  every 
year  sent  to  be  educated  in  our  colleges.  In  a  word, 
Japan  is  quickly  becoming  a  civilized  country,  thus 
leaving  China  far  behind  ;  and  to-day  the  Japan- 
ese are  altogether  the  most  advanced  and  progressive 
people  of  the  Mongolian  race. 

ni.  Industries. 

4.  The  Japanese  are  skillful  and  diligent  tillers  of 
the  soil.  They  raise  rice,  the  principal  article  of  vege- 
table food,  cotton,  silk,  tobacco,  te^i,  and  all  kinds  of 
fruits  and  vegetables  suited  to  their  climate.  They 
excel  in  horticulture,  floricultiu-e,  and  landscape  gar- 
dening. We  are  indebted  to  them  for  one  of  our  rarest 
flowers,  the  japonica,  and  for  many  varieties  of  beautiful 


116 


ASIA. 


lilies.     Tlifcy  ;u-(!  also  much  engaged  in  tlio  fisheries, 
and  lish  is  with  them  the  chief  article  of  animal  food. 

5.  The  Japanese  maimfacture  tine  porcelain,  lacquered 
ware,  cabinets,  and  boxes.  Their  silks  and  crapes  are 
beautifully  delicate.  They  are  expert  workers  in  steel 
and  bronze,  and  make  a  great  variety  of  paper  goods. 
With  the  introduction  of  improved  machinery  Japanese 
manufiictures  must  take  a  great  stride  forward. 

IV.   Manners  and  Customs. 

G.  Though  the  Japanese  are  rapidly  adopting  mod- 
ern improvements  and  inventions,  they  still  retain 
their  own  manners,  customs,  costume,  etc.  The  Jap- 
anese dress  consists  of  one  or  more  loose  gowns,  with 
long  wide  sleeves,  and  fastened  at  the  waist  with  a 
belt.  The  houses  are  low,  with  large  piazzas  and  pro- 
jecting roofs.  The  people  have  no  chairs  or  beds,  but 
squat  on  straw  mats  and  sleep  on  rugs.  The  general 
mode  of  travelling  is  as  shown  in  this  picture. 


TraveUn^  In  JapajL 
V.   Cities. 

7.  The  capital  of  Japan  is  Tokio,  formerly  called 
Yeddo.  Here  is  the  residence  of  tlie  Mikado,  as  the 
Emperor  of  Japan  is  called.  Tokio  has  nearly  the  same 
number  of  inhabitants  as  New  York,  about  one  million. 
Yokohama,  the  chief  seaport  for  foreign  commerce,  is 
connected  with  Tokio  by  a  straight  road  or  street  sev- 
enteen miles  in  length.  This  street  is  lined  on  both 
sides  with  a  continuous  succession  of  tea-houses,  gar- 
dens, and  shops,  in  which  are  displayed  for  sale  all 
kinds  of  Japanese  wares. 

[For  Recitation.] 

1.  Where  is  the  Empire  of  Japan  ? 

Japan  occupies  a  group  of  islands  east  of  Asia. 

2.  Hoio  does  this  country  rank  ? 

Japan  ranks  as  the  most  progressive  country  of 
Asia.  The  Japanese  are  rapidly  adopting  the  in- 
ventions of  civilized  nations. 

3.  Name  the  chief  exports. 

The  chief  exports  are  tea,  silk,  lacquered  ware, 
and  bronzes. 

Map.  — (Scf  jwffc  il2)  !■  What  is  the  largest  of  the  Japan  Isles? 
2.  What  parallel  of  latitude  crosses  this  island?  3.  What  large 
island  north?  4  What  is  the  name  of  the  southern  island  ?  5.  What 
sea  between  Japan  and  China  ?  6.  In  what  zone  are  the  Japan  Isles 
situated?    7.  What  and  where  is  the  capital ? 


LESSON    IV. 

THE    EAST    INDIES. 

[For  Reading.] 

I.  Divisions. 

1.  It  is  likely  that  most  pupils  have  heard  of  the 
"  East  Indies " ;  but  it  may  be  they  have  not  a  very 
clear  idea  of  what  these  countries  are.  Looking  at  the 
map  of  Asia,  on  page  1 1 2,  we  see  the  great  central  penin- 
sula called  India,  or  Hindostan.  This  is  ruled  by  the 
British ;  and  so  also  is  the  large  island  of  Ceylon.  To 
the  eastward  of  India  is  another  peninsula  in  which  are 
tlie  countries  of  Burmah  and  Siam.  This  is  the  East- 
ern Peuiiisuln,  sometimes  called  Farther  India,  and  con- 
tains Indo-China.  It  contains  several  native  kingdoms; 
but  the  British  have  a  great  deal  to  do  with  all  these 
countries,  for  they  own  most  of  the  west  coast.  Look- 
ing to  the  southward  and  eastward  of  the  Eastern  Penin- 
sula we  see  several  large  and  many  smaller  islands,  and 
we  read  the  names  Sumatra,  Java,  Borneo,  Celebes,  and 
Pliilippine  Islands.  Here  the  Dutch,  the  Spaniards, 
and  the  Portuguese  have  important  possessions.  Now 
we  understand  what  is  meant  by  the  East  Indies ;  for, 
as  we  have  seen,  the  region  includes  India,  the  Eastern 
Peninsula,  and  the  neighboring  islands. 

II.  Kaces  and  Government  of  India. 

2.  Tlie  name  Hindostan  means  literally  the  land  of 
the  Hindoos.  But  who  are  the  Hindoos  and  to  what 
race  do  they  belong?  They  are  a  people  of  a  brownish 
olive  complexion,  but  they  are  not  Mongolians  ;  neither 
are  they  Malays,  like  the  inhabitants  of  the  Eastern 
Peninsula  and  the  islands.  They  are,  in  fact,  Cauca- 
sians, and  hence  belong  to  the  same  branch  of  the 
human  family  to  which  we  belong.  Asia  was  the 
original  home  of  all  the  people  of  Europe,  and  very 
many  centuries  ago  the  ancestors  of  the  Europeans 
dwelt  in  Asia  together  with  the  ancestors  of  the  Per- 
sians and  Hindoos. 

3.  In  India  there  are  more  people  than  in  any  other 
country  in  the  world  except  China.  You  remember 
tliat  China  has  ten  times  as  many  inhabitants  as  the 
United  States  :  India  has  five  times  as  many,  or 
about  200  millions.  India  is  more  than  ten  times  as 
large  as  the  British  Isles,  and  contains  six  times  as 
many  people  ;  and  yet  it  is  ruled  by  the  English.  The 
queen  of  England  sends  out  a  Governor-General  to  In- 
dia, and  by  means  of  a  small  army  he  keeps  the  whole 
country  under  control. 

III.  Nature  of  the  Country. 

4.  India  is  in  the  hot  belt  of  the  earth,  being  much 
nearer  the  Ecpiator  than  China.  In  the  south  is  a 
table-land  called  Deccan,  and  north  of  this  is  a  great 
plain,  including  the  valleys  of  the  two  great  rivers,  the 
Indus  and  the  Ganges.  These  rivers  rise  in  an  im- 
mense mountain-chain  which  forms  a  lofty  wall  across 
the  northern   part  of  India.     The  summits  of  these 


THE   EAST   INDIES. 


Hi 


mountains  an;  always  white  with  snow,  and  hence  the 
natives  call  them  the  Himalay'as,  a  word  which  means 
"  tlie  abode  of  snow."  One  of  the  peaks,  named  Mount 
Everest,  is  the  king  of  mountains,  the  loftiest  summit 
on  the  globe:  it  towers  to  a  height  of  i>},  miles  above 
the  level  of  the  sea.* 

5.  On  account  of  the  hot,  moist  climate,  the  vegetable 
productions  of  India  are  rich,  splendid,  and  varied. 
We  iinil  there  the  immense  banyan-tree,  palms  of  vari- 
ous kinds,  such  as  the  sago  and  the  cocoa-nut  palm,  the 
fragrant  sandal-wood,  the  bamboo,  the  teJk,  and  the 
varnish  trees  ;  while,  under  cultivation,  the  soil  yields 
all  the  tro]ucal  products,  —  cotton,  rice,  oiiium,  sugar, 
indigo,  the  mullierry-tree,  and  the  various  spices.  You 
may  remember  the  description  already  given  of  the 
tliii:kets  of  vegetation  in  the  selvas  of  t".;3  Amazon,  and 
this  will  help  you  to  fancy  the  wild  luxuriance  of  an 
Indian  junffle,  only  we  must  people  the  jungle  with  the 

largest  and  fiercest 
of  wild  animals,  — 
the  tiger,  elephant, 
rhinoceros,  and 
bua-constrictor. 

IV.  Industries. 

G.  The  industry 
of  India  is  chiefly 
agricultural.  The 
grain  most  grown 
is  ric(i,  tlie  princi- 
pal food  of  the  com- 
mon people.  Cot- 
ton is  e.xtensively 
cultivated,  and 
next  to  the  United 
States  India  pro- 
duces more  cotton 
than  any  other 
country.  The  cot- 
ton goes  to  Eng- 
land, and  then  I'e- 
turns  in  the  shape 
of  cotton  goods, 
which  form  the 
common  clothing 
of  the  people.  The 
silk  culture  is  car- 
ried on  to  a  great 
extent.  So,  also, 
is  the  culture  of  the  poppy,  a  plant  from  which  opium 
is  obtained.  Great  quantities  of  this  drug  are  sent  to 
China,  where  opium  smoking  is  the  besetting  vice  of 
the  people.  Among  other  vegetable  products  of  India 
are  coft'ee,  sugar,  indigo,  gums,  resins,  and  balsams. 

7.  Manufacturing  is  not  largely  carried  on.  Still, 
the  Hindoos  make  fine  cotton,  silk,  and  woolen  fabrics. 


The  Opium  Poppy. 


*  Tlie  height  of  Mount  Everest  is  29,002  feet. 


They  were  the  first  teachers  of  the  Europeans  in  the  art 
of  weaving,  and  our  English  word  calico  is  derived 
from  Calicut,  the  name  of  a  town  in  India.  No  doubt 
you  have  heard  of  the  famous  C;ishmerc  shawls  :  these 
are  woven  by  hand,  from  the  wool  or  hair  of  a  goat 
found  in  the  Vale  of  Cashmere,  in  the  Himalaya 
Mountains. 

8.  Tlie  commerce  of  India  consists  principally  in 
sending  out  raw  produce,  —  chiefly  cotton,  rice,  indigo, 
and  opium, — and  in  importing  manufactured  articles. 
The  merchants  of  our  Eastern  States  ship  to  India  car- 
goes of  ice,  and  receive  in  return  gunny-bags,  indigo, 
saltpeter,  and  linseed. 

v.  The  People. 

9.  The  great  mass  of  the  people  belong  to  the  Hin- 
doo race,  and  though  dark-skinned  they  are  Caucasians. 
The  people  for  thousands  of  years  have  been  divided 
into    four   castes,   or 

classes.     These  castes  '..      ^■,' .,,-■., 

are  forbidden  to  inter- 
marry, toeat  together, 
or  to  associate  in  any 
wa}'.  The  highest 
caste  consists  of  the 
Brahmins,  who  are 
the  priests  and  schol- 
ars. The  religion  of 
the  country  is  called 
Brahminism.  Tho 
Hindoos  be.lcvc  that 
after  death  tho  soid 
may  pass  into  tho 
body  of  an  animal :  • '         " 

■'  A  Hindoo  Boy. 

hence    they    kill    no 

animal,  and  will  eat  no  animal  food.  Among  the  higher 
classes  the  dead  are  burned  instead  of  buried,  and  it  is 
thought  the  proper  thing  for  a  widow  to  have  herself 
burned  to  death  on  a  pile  along  with  the  dead  body  of 
her  husband.  The  common  people  of  India  are  poor, 
ignorant,  and  superstitious.  Only  the  wealthier  classes 
are  educated,  and  women  are  not  educated  at  aU. 

VI.  Cities. 

10.  Bombay,  on  tho  Arabian  Sea,  is  the  great  com- 
mercial city  of  India.  It  is  the  cliief  seaport  of  tho 
French  and  English  lines  of  steamers  by  way  of  the 
Suez  Canal.  Calcutta,  on  the  Bay  of  Bengal  [ben-r/aivr], 
is  the  second  commercial  city,  and  the  residence  of 
the  British  Governor-General  of  India. 

VII.  Ceylon. 

11.  To  the  south  of  India  is  the  large  island  of  Cey 
Ion.  It  belongs  to  the  British.  Tigers,  elephants,  and 
other  -wild  animals  live  in  the  jungle  or  long  grass  ;  but 
Ceylon  is  now  being  covered  with  coffee-plantations. 
Along  the  shore  are  millions  of  cocoa-nut  trees,  and 
many  spices  are  brought  from  this  hot,  moist  country. 
Sometimes  their  pleasant  odor  is  smelt  far  off  at  sea. 


lis 


ASIA. 


On  the  western  shore  of  Ceylon'  is  the  Gulf  of  Manaar, 
■whore  pearl-divers  seek  for  pearls  in  the  oysters  at  the 
bottom  of  the  sea.     The  capital  of  Ceylon  is  Colombo. 


LESSON    V. 
PERSIA,   ARABIA,    TURKEY,   ETC. 


VIII.  The  Eastern  Peninsula. 

12.  The  Easti-ru  Peiiuisula  is  east  of  the  Bay  of  Ben-  I.  Divisions, 
gal.  Most  of  the  west  coast  belongs  to  England.  The 
rest  of  the  country  is  divided  among  three  native  states 
or  kingdoms,  namely,  Burmah,  Siam,  and  Anam.  The 
climate  is  very  moist  and  hot.  Among  the  vast  for- 
ests of  the  Eastern  Peninsula  are  found  wild  elephants, 
tierce  tigers,  and  serpents  twenty  feet  long.  Curious 
monkeys  abound,  and  among  them  is  the  orang- 
outang. Most  beautiful  birds  are  also  found,  such  as 
the  peacock,  golden  pheasant,  and  parrot.  The  vege- 
table productions  are  like  those  of  India.  In  addition, 
we  have  in  these  countries  the  tree  from  which  gutta- 
percha, now  so  much  used  in  making  various  articles, 

I  is  obtained.  Bangkok  in  Siam  is  the  largest  city  in 
the  Eastern  Peninsula.  Half  of  the  population  live 
on  floating  bamboo-rafts,  arranged  like  streets. 

IX.  East  India  Islands. 

13.  The  four  great  islands  of  the  East  Indies  are 
Borneo,  Sumatra,  Celebes,  and  Java.  Besides  these 
are  various  smaller  islands  and  groups.  The  principal 
E\iropean  nations  having  settlements  for  trade  ou  these 
islands  are  Holland,  Spain,  and  England. 

1  -1.  S]iices  are  the  most  famous  product  of  the  East 
India  Islands.  The  Moluccas  are  celebrated  for  cloves 
and  nutmegs  ;  Sumatra  and  Java,  for  black  pepper, 
"inj'er,  and  camphor.  Java  is  noted  for  its  coffee  and 
gutta-per>;ha ;  the  Philip])ines,  for  tobacco.  Sugar, 
cotton,  rice,  sago,  and  indigo  are  cultivated  on  all  the 
East  India  Islands.  In  addition  all  kinds  of  tropical 
trees,  plants  and  fruits  grow  luxuriantly,  as  bamboos, 
the  india-rubber  tree,  the  camphor-tree,  the  mangrove- 
tree,  ferns,  magnolias,  ebony,  teak,  sandal-wood,  and 
hundreds  of  varieties  of  cabinet  woods. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  Jrhat  can  ynu  sa'j  of  India,  or  Hindostan  ? 
India  is  a  British  possession,  and  is  inhabits 

by  -200  millions  of  Hindoos,  who  are  partly  civi' 
ized.  The  chief  e.xports  are  cotton,  silk,  iudig 
and  opium. 

2.  JFhat  can  you  say  of  the  Eastern  Peninsula  ? 
The  Eastern  Peninsula  is  principally  occupied 

by  three  countries,  —  Burmah,  Siam,  and  Anam  ; 
but  the  English  have  settlements  on  the  west  coast. 
The  products  are  like  those  of  India. 

3.  IFhat  are  produced  in  the  East  India  Islands  ? 
In  the  East  India  Islands  are  produced  coffee, 

tobacco,  spices,  and  cabinet  woods. 

Hflap.— (.S.-c)«!(7c  JK.)    1.  Wliat   waters    partly   surround  Hindo- 
stan?    2.    What  mountains  north?      3.    Name  its    greatest  rivers. 
4.  Where  is  Bombay?  —  Calcutta?    5,  What  waters  partly  surround 
I      the  Eastern  Peninsula  ?    6.  Name  three  rivers  here.    7.  What  are  the 
principal  divisions ?    8.  Locate Mandelay ;  —  Hue  [hu'u] ;  —  Singapore. 


CFor  Reading.! 


1.  Western  Asia  is  occupied  by  three  countries, — 
Persia,  Arabia,  and  Turkey  in  Asia,  or  the  Asiatic  part 
of  the  Turkish  Empire.  It  is  true  that  between  Hin- 
dostan on  the  east  and  Persia  on  the  west  there  are  two 
other  counU'ies  named  on  our  map,  —  Afghanistan' 
and  Beloochistan'.  But  it  would  make  little  difference 
if  there  were  no  such  names  at  all ;  for  these  countries 
are  not  inhabited  by  civilized  nations.  The  people 
who  live  there  are  fierce,  wandering,  warlike  tribes,  each 
under  its  own  chief,  much  as  our  Indian  tribes  are. 
Their  main  wealth  consists  in  their  herds  of  horses, 
goats,  and  camels.  It  is  different  with  Persia,  Arabia, 
and  Turkey,  —  for  these  are  the  seats  of  settled  nations. 

II.  Persia. 

2.  Persia  is  mostly  a  great  table-land.  The  climate 
is  quite  hot,  and,  as  very  little  rain  falls,  most  of  the 
country  is  a  desert.  Still  there  are  very  delightful 
valleys  in  Persia,  and  the  fruits  that  grow  there  are 
very  fine.  There  are  large  fields  of  roses,  tulips,  and 
other  flowers  ;  and  the  attar  of  roses  comes  from  these 
pleasant  valleys.  Indeed,  wherever  the  people  can  get 
water  to  irrigate  their  soil,  it  is  exceedingly  fertile. 

3.  The  Persians  are  skilled  in  the  manufacture  of 
silk  and  woolen  goods,  as  you  may  have  seen  by  the 
richly  ornamented  shawls  brought  from  that  country. 
They  also  export  dried  fruits,  perfumes,  drags,  and 
gums.  The  Persians  are  mostly  Mohammedans  :  and 
they  generally  wear  the  Oriental  costume,  which  you  see 
in  the  picture  here  given.     The  country  is  governed 

by   a  king,   or   Skah. 
The    chief   towns,    Is- 
WsEi; '  111.*!'%  pahan    and    Teheran, 

are  situated  amid 
groves  and  gardens, 
while  all  around  is  a 
sandy  waste. 


III.  Arabia. 

J        4.    Arabia    is   the 
'   '.'leat   peninsula  lying 
1  let  ween  the  Red  Sea 
jud  Persian  Gulf.     It 
I  is  surroundeil  on  three 
sides    by    the    ocean, 
but    the    country    is 
bordered  by  mountain 
ranges  which  shut  ott' 
the  rain-clouds.     Hence  the  interior  is  mainly  a  high 
barren  plateau,  and  resembles  Africa  in  climate  and 
productions.     The  only  fertile  parts  are  the  coast  val- 
leys and  the  small  oases  of  the  deserts. 


Persian  Costmne. 


PERSIA,  ARABIA,  AND   TURKEY 


119 


5.  There  is  no  central  government  in  Arabia.  A 
strip  along  the  sea-coast  of  the  Red  Sea  belongs  to 
Turkey.  Here  are  two  cities,  Mecca  and  Medina, 
which  are  called  sacred  cities,  because  the  former  was 
the  birthplace  and  tlie  latter  the  burial-place  of  Ma- 
homet, who  founded  the  religion  which  j)revails  not 
onl}'  in  Arabia  but  in  all  Western  Asia.  The  greater 
part  of  Ara1)ia,  however,  is  divided  into  the  pasture 
ranges  of  numerous  tribes,  each  under  its  own  chief  or 
sheik.  The  wealth  of  the  Bedouins  consists  in  their 
herds  of  horses  and  camels,  and  their  flocks  of  sheep. 
The  manners,  customs,  and  dress  of  the  civilized  Arabs 
are  similar  to   tliose   of  the  Turks.      The  exports  of 


The  people  in  these  parts  cultivate  the  soil  and  have 
cities  of  eonsiilerable  size.  But  must  of  Central  Asia 
consists  of  great  plains  called  steppen.  Tlie  people  who 
live  here  are  called  Tartars,  and  there  are  many  tribes 
of  them.  The  Tartars  are  Mongolians,  like  the  Chinese  ; 
but  they  are  not  like  the  Chinese  in  their  habits. 
Tliey  are  very  fierce,  and  love  war  and  fighting,  where- 
as the  Chinaman  is  not  at  all  a  lighter,  but  chooses  to 
live  in  his  own  comfortable  home.  The  Tartars  wander 
aljout  and  live  in  tents  as  our  Red  Men  do.  Their 
wealth  consists  in  their  camels,  sheep,  cattle,  and  wild 
horses. 


Ai ibia  are  coffee,  gum,  spices  Iioims  md  piiK  Du 
you  e\ei  heai  of  Moehx  coIIlc  '  It  comts  lioni  the 
town  of  AIoi  hi  in    Viibii 

IT.  Turkey  in  Asia. 

6.  Turkey  in  Asia  includes  .some  of  the  most  inter- 
esting countries  of  ancient  liistory.  Here  were  Pales- 
tine, or  the  Holy  Land,  Phoenicia,  Syria,  and  Assyria. 
This  region  was  once  densely  populated  and  highly 
cultivated,  and  it  contained  many  great  and  llimrisbing 
cities,  but  now  it  is  thinly  inliabited  and  much  of  it  is 
a  desert.  The  climate  is  generally  warm,  excepting  in 
the  mountain-regions.  Among  the  natural  ]n'oductions 
is  a  variety  of  rich  fruits  ami  very  valuable  plants. 
The  amount  of  foreign  trade  is  considerable.  It  is 
carried  on  chiefly  with  Mii-hiiid  and  other  European 
countries,  from  various  pints  U[)iin  the  coasts  of  Asia 
Minor  and  Syria  ;  and  with  the  countries  to  the  east- 
ward of  Turkey  by  means  of  caravans  which  cross 
the  Syrian  and  Arabian  deserts.  Smyrna,  Treb'izond, 
and  Beyrout  are  the^  principal  seats  of  maritime  trade. 
The  cities  of  Aleppo,  Damascus,  and  Bagdad  are  the 
chief  centers  of  caravan  traffic. 

V.  Central  Asia  and  Siberia. 

7.  Central  Asia  is  a  strange,  wild,  and  little  explored 
region.  In  the  country  which  you  will  find  called 
Turkestan  on  the  map  are  several  settled  states  called 
Khanates,  because  each  is  under  a  ruler  called  a  Khan. 


Tartar  Life  on  th«  Steppes. 

8.  Siberia  is  a  vast  country,  as  large  as  the  whole 
of  the  United  Statics,  but  it  has  not  as  many  inhabi- 
tants as  the  State  of  New  York.  It  lielongs  to  Russia. 
The  climate  is  inten.sely  cold,  and  winter  reigns  for  nine 
or  ten  month.s.  The  natural  productions  are  of  two 
kinds,  —  metals  and  furs,  both  of  great  value.  The 
commerce  of  this  region  is  principally  with  China.  The 
Russian  and  Chinese  traders  meet  at  Kiakbta,  to  the 
south  of  Lake  Baikal. 

[For  Recitation.! 

1.  Give  an  account  of  Persia. 

Persia  is  a  jjlateau  with  fertile  valleys  which 
yield  grain  and  fruits.  It  is  governed  by  a  Shall, 
and  the  capital  is  Teheran. 

2.  Jiliat  can  \iou  my  of  Arabia  ? 

The  west  coast  of  Arabia  belongs  to  Turkey; 
but  most  of  the  country  is  inliabited  by  wandering 
Bedouins. 

3.  What  does  Asiatic  Turkey  iucludc  ' 

A.siatic  Turkey  includes  Asia  Minor,  Syria,  and 
Mesopotamia. 

I^ap,  — (S,,'  pigr.  lis).  1  Boun-l  Persia  and  name  its  capital 
2.  Bound  Arabia.  3.  Where  is  Mecca  ?  4.  What  four  seas  border  on 
Asiatic  Turkey  1    5.  Locate  Jerusalem ;  —  Smyrna. 


AFRICA 


SCAXE    1  Inch  "900  Miles 


12  2         "Wasliiu^^toil 


Ooi.jriKlit.  l«75Tj.vlvison,3JhAeman,  Tujlu.    .t  Co .TS't- iv  York. 


AFEIGA, 


121 


AFRICA. 


LESSON    I. 

INTBODUCTION. 

CFor  Recitation.] 

1.  JFhat  of  the  size  and  rank  of  Africa  ? 

Africa  ranks  next  to  Asia  in  size,  but  it  is  tlie 
least  important 
of  the  Grand 
Divisions,  be- 
cause it  is  tlie 
seat  of  no  great 
civilized  na- 
tions. 

2.  Describe  ih 
outline  and  sur- 
face. 

Tlie  coast- 
line of  Africa  i 
little  broken  1 1  \ 
seas,  bays,  i  <  i 
gulfs.  Itissni 
rounded  by  a 
rim  of  moun- 
tains bordering 
the  oceans,  and 
the  interior  is 
a  table-land  of 
moderate  ele- 
vation. The 
northern  part  is  a  desert  called  the  Sahara. 

3.  ll'hat  are  the  three  great  rivers? 

The  three  great  rivers  are  the  Nile,  the  Niger, 
and  the  Zambezi. 


African  Warfare. 


4.  IP'luU  can  you  say  about  the  climate  of  Africa  ? 

Tlie  greater  part  of  Africa  being  in  the  Torrid 
Zone,  the  climate  is  hot.  The  central  regions  have 
abundant  rains. 

5.  TcU  about  tlie  vcrjetation  and  animals. 

Afri(!a  has  a  scanty  vegetation,  but  is  distin- 

"uished  for  the 


number  and 
isize  of  its  wild 
animals.  The 
most  noted  of 
these  are  the 
elephant,  rhi- 
noceros, hip- 
op  o  t  a  m  u  s , 
giraffe,  lion, 
hyena,  ostrich, 
and  gorilla. 

6.  Uliatof  Afri- 
can commerce  ? 

The  com- 
merce of  Africa 
is  limited.  In  the  north  it  is  carried  on  across  the 
desert  regions  by  means  of  caravans  of  camels. 
The  articles  of  export  are  gold,  ivory,  ostrich-feath- 
ers, dates,  gums,  drugs,  and  negro  slaves. 
7.  Jllio  are  the  inhabitants  of  Africa  ? 
The  greater  part  of  the  inhabitants  belong  to  the 
Negro  race.  In  the  countries  bordering  on  the 
Mediterranean,  and  in  the  extreme  south,  a  few 
millions  belong  to  the  (Jaucasian  race.  These  are 
civilized ;  but  the  negi'o  tribes  are  for  the  most 
part  in  a  barbarous  or  savage  condition. 


MAP    STUDIES. 


^P"  At  tlie  first  recitation,  teachers  will  allow  pupils  to  answer 
questions  v-iih  open  books ;  at  the  second  recitation  pupils  should 
be  required  to  answer  from  the  oatliiic  map  or  from  memory. 

Boundaries.  —  1.  What  sea  and  Grand  Division  on  the 
north?  2.  What  Grand  Division,  sea,  and  ocean  on  the 
east?  3.  What  oceans  on  the  south?  4.  What  ocean 
on  tile  west  ? 

The  Coast-liue.  —  1.  What  two  seas  border  on  Africa? 
2.  What  two  oceans  ?  3.  What  two  gulfs  ?  4.  What  two 
straits  ?  5.  What  channel  ?  6.  What  is  the  most  eastern 
cape  ?  —  the  most  southern ?  —  the  most  western?  7.  How 
is  Africa  connected  with  Asia? 

Mountains.  —  1.   What  mountains  are  in   the  north  ? 

2.  What    mountains    bordering    the    Gulf    of   Guinea  ? 

3.  What  country  in  the  eastern   part  is   mountainous  ? 

4.  V/here  are  the  Snow  Mountains? 


Lakes  and  Rivers.  —  1.  Where  does  the  Nile  rise  and 
into  what  does  it  flow?  2.  Into  what  does  the  Niger 
flow  ?  3.  What  great  river  flows  into  the  Indian  Ocean  ? 
4.  What  lake  in  Central  Africa  ?  5.  What  two  lakes  have 
their  outlet  into  the  Nile  ?  6.  What  lake  south  of  these  ? 
7.  What  lake  flows  into  the  Zambezi?  -8.  What  is  the 
largest  river  of  South  Africa? 


Of  what  country  is  each  of  these  cities 

Ti;nis. 
Ai.niEHs'. 
C.\i'i-;  Tow.v. 


r  C'.viRO  [ki'ro]. 

The  Capital  ? -J   .M.vr.occo. 

t  Tiiir'oLi. 


Where  is  each  of  these 

I  .\LF.x.\Nr)r,iA.  Yt.7,. 

Large  Cities Timbuctoo.  Kiiartoom. 


AFIUCA. 


LESSOr4    II. 


CFor    Reading.: 
I.  History. 

1.  Egypt  is  the  most  interesting  and  important  coun- 
try of  Africa.  It  is  tiie  oldest  nation  of  which  we  have 
any   recorded 


historj',  for  the 
Egyptians  'were 
a  higlily  ci\il- 
ized  people  at 
the  time  of 
Abraham,  moie 
than 2,000  year^ 
before  the  biith 
of  Christ.  Their 
ancient  histoiy 
is  found  cut  in 
stone  or  painted 
on  their  tombs, 
in  a  kind  of 
writing  called 
hieroglyphics.  The  Egyptnns  were  skilled  in  aichi 
tecture  and  in  many  aits.  They  built  the  grandebt 
temples  ever  elected  by  man,  and  the  mighty  struc- 
tures called  the  Pyramids  are  still  the  wonder  of  the 
world. 

2.  Moreover,  the  Egyptians  are  an  interesting  people, 
not  only  on  account  of  what  their  ancestors  did  centu- 
ries ago,  but  because  they  are  now  making  great  ad- 
vances in  many  ways.  For  a  long  time  Egypt  was 
kept  down  by  the  Turks,  but  now  the  country  is 
nearly  independent  of  Turkey,  and  the  sovereign  of 
Egypt,  called  the  Khedive,  has  shown  himself  anxious 
to  improve,  elevate,  and  educate  his  people.  Perhaps 
you  may  have  read  something  about  the  Suez  Canal. 
The  Isthmus  of  Suez  joins  Africa  to  Asia;  in  1869  a 
canal  85  miles  long  was  made  across  this  iienk  of  land 
for  ships  to  go  from  the  Mediterranean  into  the  Eed 
Sea  ;  so  that  now  vessels  may  -sail  from  Europe  to  the 
East  Indies  by  a  much  shorter  way  than  by  going  all 
around  Africa. 

II.  The  Nile. 

3.  The  most  striking  natural  feature  of  Egypt  is  the 
Nile,  which  flows  from  south  to  north  through  a  narrow 
valley,  varying  in  width  from  five  to  twelve  miles. 
About  100  miles  from  the  sea  the  river  divides  into 
two  main  streams,  enclosing  a  low,  fertile  plain  called 
tlie  Delta,  because  it  is  of  the  shape  of  the  Greek  letter 
A,  or  delta.  If  it  were  not  for  the  river  Nile,  the 
whole  of  Egypt  would  be  a  hot  and  arid  desert,  for 
rain  scarcely  ever  falls  there.  The  Nile  rises  every 
summer,  and,  overflowing  its  banks  for  two  or  three 
months,  leaves  on  tlie  surface  a  coating  of  very  fertile 
soil.  The  time  when  the  river  is  rising  is  one  of  great 
anxiety  to  the  people,  for,  should  it  rise  too  high,  their 


mud  villages  would  be  washed  away  and  their  cattle 
drowned ;  while,  if  it  falls  short  of  the  average  rise,  a 
scarcity  or  famine  is  the  result. 

4.  Agriculture  is  the  principal  industry  carried  on  in 
Egypt.  The  people  raise  grains,  cotton,  flax,  hemp, 
and  beans.  These  are  the  staple  products ;  but  to- 
bacco, sugar,  indigo,  and  dates  are  also  largely  grown. 

The  commerce 
is  considerable, 
for,  in  addition 
to  the  products 
of  the  country, 
large  quantities 
of  gold-dust, 
i\ory,  ostrich- 
feathers,  etc., 
are  brought 
from  the  inte- 
rior of  Africa  to 
be  sent  to  Eu- 
rope. 


III.    People 
Cities 


and 


Scenes  In  Cairo 


.'')  Egypt  has 
000,000  in- 
ibitants,  of 
\  liiim  the  great 
'11  ijoiity  belong 
to  the  Arab 
rat  e ,  the  rest 
are  Turks  (the  ruling  race),  Copts,  or  descendants  of 
the  ancient  Egyptians,  Jews,  and  Greeks.  The  pre- 
vailing religion  is  Mohammedanism  ;  and  the  costumes 
and  customs  of  the  people  in  the  cities  of  Egypt  are 
like  those  seen  in  Oriental  cities  generally.  We  see 
grave-looking  men,  bearded  and  turbaned,  and  wearing 
long  loose  robes;  we  see  the  ladies  with  their  faces 
muffled,  riding  on  the  backs  of  donkeys ;  we  see  the 
mosques  and  bazaars  ;  we  see  also  the  streets  lined  with 
little  shops,  where  the  merchants  sit  on  cushions,  with 
their  goods  arranged  on  shelves  behind  them.  Cairo 
and  Alexandria  are  the  principal  cities. 

[For    Recitation.] 

1.  }Vliat  can  you  say  of  Egypt  ? 

Egypt  occupies  the  narrow  but  fertile  valley  of 
the  Nile,  and  is  the  most  progressive  country  of 
Africa. 

2.  JVlmt  of  Egyptian  agriculture  ? 

The  valley  of  the  Nile  is  fertilized  by  the  annual 
overflow  of  the  river,  and  agriculture  is  carried  on 
by  irrigation.  The  chief  products  ate  rice  and 
other  grains,  cotton  and  dates. 

Ma  p.- (*<•;""''!  ^20.)  1.  What  Bea  north  of  Egypt?  2.  What  sea 
east  7  3.  Where  does  the  Nile  rise  ?  4.  In  what  direction  and  into 
what  does  it  flow'!  5.  What  is  the  capital  of  Egypt  ?  6.  Name  the 
principal  seaport. 


THE   BAEBARY   STATES. 


123 


LESSON    III. 

THE    BAEBARY    STATES. 

CFor  Reading.] 

I.  General  Description. 

1.  Tiic  northern  part  of  Africa  is  diviJod  among 
four  countries,  namely,  Marocco,  Algeria,  Tunis,  and 
Tripoli.  These  are  often  called  the  Barhary  /States, 
because  the  native  inhabitants  were  named  Berbers. 
Thougli  an  African  race,  the  Berbers  are  not  negroes. 
And  indeed  in  olde  times  this  part  of  Africa  was  the 
seat  of  several  highly  cultivated  nations.  The  chief 
of  these  was  Cartilage,  the  great  rival  of  Eomc.  The 
ruins  of  tlie  city  of  Carthage  are  still  seen  near  the 
modern  city  of  Tunis. 

2.  The  Atlas  Mountain  range  extends  east  and 
west  through  these  States,  sloping  on  the  north  to  the 
Mediterranean  and  on  the  south  to  the  Great  Desert. 
All  the  grains  and  fruits  of  Southern  Europe  flourish 
here.  The  northern  slopes  of  the  Atlas  Mountains  arc 
covered  with  dense  forests  of  pine,  oak,  cork-oak,  and 
wild  olives  ;  the  southern  slopes,  with  palms  and  gum- 
trees.  The  mountain-slopes  and  valleys  on  the  south 
side  of  the  Atlas  Eange  are  known  by  tiro  name  of 
"  The  Land  of  Dates,"  because  of  the  abundance  of  the 
date-palm,  the  fruit  of  which  is  one  of  the  chief  articles 
of  food  for  the  people. 

II.  People  and  Occupations. 

3.  In  addition  to  the  Berbers  there  are  found  in  the 
Barbary  States  numerous  Arabs,  who  lead  a  wandering 
pastoral  life,  and  also  many  Moors.  The  Moors  are  a 
mixed  race ;  they  live  in  the  cities  and  are  engaged  in 
trade  and  manufactures.  Agriculture  and  raising  horses, 
camels,  and  siieep  are  the  chief  occupations.  The  na- 
tive productions  of  Northern  Africa  include  wool,  gum, 
beeswax,  dates,  olive-oil,  and  goat-skins.  These  are 
exported,  and  the  manufactures  of  Europe  introduced 
in  their  place.  A  very  valuable  leather  calleil  "mo- 
rocco leather "  is  prepared  from  the  skin  of  the  native 
goats. 

4.  !Marocco  is  the  largest  of  these  countries,  and  has 
a  ])opulation  nearly  as  largo  as  that  of  the  State  of 
New  York.  It  is  ruled  by  a  Sultan.  The  largest 
place  is  Marocco,  an  old  Moorish  town,  surrounded  by 
a  wall,  and  having  low,  flat-roofed  houses,  built  with 
courts  and  gardens  in  the  center.  Algeria  belongs  to 
France,  and  the  principal  city,  Algiers,  is  an  important 
seaport.    Both  Tunis  and  Tripoli  are  subject  to  Turkey. 

[For  Recitation. 3 

1.  IVIiat  are  the  Barhary  States  ? 

The  Barbary  States  are  four  countries  west  of 
Egypt,  and  bordering  on  the  Mediterranean  Sea. 
Algeria,  the  most  important,  is  a  possession  of 
France ;  Tripoli  and  Tunis  beloug  to  the  Tui'kish 
Empire  ;  Marocco  is  an  independent  country. 


2.  What  of  the  occupatio7is  and  prothicts  ? 

The  people  of  these  countries  arc  engaged  in 
lierding  cattle,  goats,  sheej),  camels,  and  horses, 
and  in  the  caravan  trade  with  the  negro  tribes  of 
Central  Africa.  The  articles  of  export  are  dates, 
goat-skins,  leather,  wool,  and  articles  from  Central 
Africa,  such  as  gold-dust,  ivory,  and  ostrich-feath- 
ers. 

3.  ]l'hat  arc  the  principal  cities  ? 

The  principal  cities  are  the  capitals  of  these 
countries. 

Map.  —  (Sec pace  ISO.)  1.  Which  of  tho  four  Barbary  States  bor- 
ders partly  on  tlio  Atlantic  Ocean  and  partly  on  the  Mediterranean 
Sea?  2.  What  and  where  is  the  capital?  3.  What  country  east  of 
Marocco  ?  4.  What  mountain-ningo  south  of  Marocco  and  Algeria  ? 
5.  What  and  where  is  tho  capital  of  Algeria?  C.  Locate  Tunis  aud 
name  its  capital.    7.  Locate  Tripoli  and  name  it3  capital. 


LESSON    IV. 

THE  SAHARA  AND  CENTRAL  AFRICA. 

(^^  Tho  following  lesson,  after  being  read  aloud  in  the  class,  may 
bo  assigned  .as  a  composition  exercise. 

I.  The  Sahara. 

1.  To  tho  south  of  the  Atlas  ^Mountains  is  the  Great 
African  Desert.  Sahara  it  is  called  by  the  Arabs,  mean- 
ing "  the  sea  without  water."  And  in  fact  it  resembles 
the  ocean  in  its  waves  of  sand,  in  its  unbroken  horizon, 
in  its  green  oases,  like  islands,  and  in  its  silence  and 
solitude.  The  Sahara  is  tho  most  ])arched,  sandy,  and 
desolate  waste  on  the  face,  of  the  earth.  It  is  of  vast 
extent,  being  nearly  as  large  as  the  whole  of  Europe. 

2.  The  Sahara  forms  between  Northern  and  Central 
Africa  a  barrier  which  it  would  be  utterly  impossible 
for  man  to  cross  without  the  aid  of  the  camel,  that 
useful  animal  of  burden,  justly  termed  the  "ship  of 
the  desert."  There  are  frecjuontly  no  other  traces  of  a 
path  across  the  sandy  waste  than  the  whitened  bones 
of  men  and  camels  that  have  perished  along  the  great 
caravan  routes  of  travel,  from  thirst,  sand-storms,  or 
sickness.  The  oases  are  thickly  covered  with  date- 
palms,  which  offer  their  grateful  shade  and  sweet  fruit 
to  the  weary  caravans,  while  tho  clear  springs  afford 
delicious  draughts  of  water  both  to  thirsty  men  and 
patient  camels.  The  Arabs  say  of  the  date-palm,  that 
"  it  keeps  its  feet  in  water  and  its  head  in  fire." 

II.  Central  Africa. 

3.  "Why  do  men  risk  their  lives  in  crossing  the 
Great  Desert  in  caravans  ?  They  do  so  for  the  .sake  of 
gain.  In  the  middle  part  of  Africa  is  a  region  called 
Soudan,  Negro-land,  or '  Central  Africa.  It  stretches 
from  the  Sahara  southward  to  beyond  the  Equator,  and 
is  almost  as  large  as  our  own  coimtry.  It  has  a  tropi- 
cal climate,  abundant  rains,  a  fertile  soil,  and  a  great 
variety  of  valuable  and  useful  productions.  It  is  to 
obtain  these  products  that  the  caravans  cross  the  Great 
Desert. 


124 


AFEICA. 


4.  The  inhabitants  of  this  region  are  principally 
negroes,  intermixed  with  Arab  and  Moorish  races, 
who  are  for  the  most  part  in  a  condition  of  superior 
social  advancement  to  the  negro  tribes,  and  are  conse- 
quently the  ruling  people.  The  negroes  are  generally 
heathen:  the  remainder  of  the  population,  Mohamme- 
dan. The  negro  populations  of  Central  Africa  are,  at 
best,  but  partially  civilized.     They  Hve  in  villages  and 


village  In  Central  Africa. 


have  settled  habits ;  they  cultivate  their  fields,  weave 
cotton  cloth  and  dye  it  with  bright  colors ;  and  thej' 
maiio  iron  weapons  and  implements.  Many  of  their 
towns  are  of  considerable  size,  and  the  native  kings 
display  a  rude  kind  of  splendor.  The  commercial 
products  are  gold-dust,  ivory,  and  ostrich-feathers,  to- 
gether with  slaves.  The  merchants  engaged  in  the 
trade  of  this  region  are  principally  !Moors,  who  form 
caravans  for  the  purpose  of  crossing  the  Desert. 

5.  The  part  of  Africa  near  the  Equator  is  sometimes 
called  Equatorial  Africa.  Much  of  it  has  never  been 
explored  by  white  men,  because,  though  many  attempts 
have  been  made  to  penetrate  it,  they  have  all  failed. 
In  this  region  are  included  certain  large  lakes,  second 
in  size  only  to  the  Great  Lakes  of  our  own  country. 
You  will  find  on  tlie  map,  Albert  Lake,  Victoria  Lake, 
and  Lake  Tanganyika  \tan-gan-ye' -lca\  all  of  wliich 
have  become  known  to  the  world  only  during  our 
generation. 

6.  These  regions  are  the  haunts  of  three  liugo,  thick- 
skinned  animals,  —  the  elepliant,  the  rhinoceros,  and 
the  hippopotamus.  Elephants  are  found  in  herds  of 
from  one  to  three  hundred,  all  over  the  wooded  regions 
of  Equatorial  Africa.  The  negroes  liunt  them  for  their 
flesh,  and  to  obtain  their  huge  tusks,  which  form  one 
of  the  chief  articles  of  African  barter.  The  rhinoce- 
ros has  a  hide  so  hard  and  thick  that,  like  a  coat  of 
mail,  it  will  flatten  a  rifle-ball.  It  is  hunted  for  its 
hide,  which  is  made  into  sliields  and  harness,  and  for 
its  flesli,  which  is  eaten.  The  teeth  of  the  hippopota- 
mus furnish  very  fine  ivory,  and  its  huga  body  is 
greedily  devoured.  The  beautiful  long-necked  giraffes 
are  eagerly  pursued  for  their  flesh  and  their  hand- 
somely spotted  skins. 


LESSON    V. 

MINOR    COUNTRIES    OP    AFRICA. 

[For  Reading  and  Recitation.: 
I.  Divisions. 

1.  In  addition  to  the  countries  and  regions  of  Africa 
already  described,  there  are  several  minor  states  and 
sections.     These  may  all  be  grouped  in  two  divisions  : 

1.  The  colonies  and  settlements  of  European  nations  ; 

2.  The  petty  native  states. 

II.  The  West  Coast. 

2.  On  the  West  Coast  of  Africa  are  found  the  regions 
named  Seiiegambia,  Upper  Guinea,  and  Lower  Guinea. 
These  are  subdivided  into  numerous  petty  states  and 
kingdoms,  inhabited  by  various  negro  tribes,  who  are 
in  a  condition  of  semi-barbarism  and  are  frequently  at 
war  with  one  another.  Several  Ern'opC'in  nations  have 
trading  stations  along  the  coast.  The  commerce  of 
Western  Africa  consists  in  exchanging  gold-dust,  ivory, 
palm-oil,  gums,  ostrich-plumes,  dyewoods,  and  slaves 
for  guns,  gunpowder,  tobacco,  liquors,  gaudy  cotton 
cloths,  linives,  beads,  iron,  and  copper. 

3.  Sierra  Leone  is  a  settlement  founded  by  the 
British  as  a  place  of  refuge  for  liberated  slaves  taken 
from  captured  slave-ships.  Liberia  is  an  independent 
negro  republic,  founded  by  the  United  States  in  1820 
as  an  asylum  for  negro  slaves  that  became  free  before 
the  general  emancipation  which  resulted  from  the  war 
of  1861  -  65.     Monrovia  is  tho  capital. 

III.  South  Africa. 

4.  South  Africa  is  the  seat  of  two  British  colonies, 
of  two  small  Dutch  republics,  and  of  the  native  terri- 
tory of  Kaifraria.  On  the  West  Coast  it  extends  north 
to  the  Orange  Eiver,  and  on  the  East  Coast  to  the 
Tropic  of  Capricorn. 

5.  The  two  English  colonies  are  Cape  Colony  and 
Natal.  The  principal  occupations  are  the  raising  of 
sheep  and  cattle.  Cape  Town  is  the  principal  city  of 
Cape  Colony.  The  Orange  Republic  and  the  Transvaal 
Eepublic  are  two  small  states  founded  by  settlers  from 
Holland,  and  now  independent. 

IV.  The  Eastern  Coast. 

6.  The  coast  of  Eastern  Africa,  from  tlie  Equator 
soxithward  to  Dclagoa  Bay,  exhibits  a  general  resem- 
l)lance  to  that  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  continent,  — 
that  is,  low,  hot,  and  moist,  plains  along  the  coast, 
backed  by  high  grounds  in  the  interior,  v,'ith  a  luxuri- 
ant vegetation  and  an  unhealthy  climate.  The  native 
population  is  chiefly  negro.  The  commercial  products 
include  gold-dust,  ivory,  gums,  beeswax,  ostrich-feath- 
ers, and  slaves. 

IVJap.  —  (See  jjaje  120.)  1.  In  what  zone  are  SeneRambia,  Upper 
Guine.a,  and  Lower  Guinea?  2.  What  gulf  south  of  Upper  Guinea? 
3  In  what  zone  is  Cape  Colony  ?  4.  Wliat  cape  at  the  extreme  Eouth- 
crn  point  of  Africa?  5.  What  large  river  flows  into  Mozacibique 
Channel?    6.  Where  is  the  city  of  Zanzibar ? 


H'KAMA. 


OCEANIA. 


i 


■;*,Nt  ISLANDS 


"""."""i  is.  ^i 


3.<,sScE?'. 


-V     E    A 


\ 


\fjei^ 


I   S  O  O  T  H  „      I  I 


AUSTHALASIA 

PAND 
OLYNESIA 


^f&MANIA 


1    Inc\    =    1000     i^i/fj 


123         West     from 


THE    ISLAND    'WORLD. 

[For  Reading.) 

I.  General  Description. 

1.  <  )i'eania  i.s  the  name  given  to  the  i.sland  of  Aus- 
tralia and  the  thousands  of  small  islands  in  the  vast 
Pacific  Ocean.  The  name  Australasia  is  sometimes  ap- 
plied to  Australia  and  the  neighboring  islands,  while 
under  the  head  of  Polynesia  (meaning  man;/  Islands) 
are  included  the  numerous  islands  in  the  eastern  part 
of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

II.  Australia. 

2.  Australia,  the  largest  island  on  the  globe,  is  sur- 
rounded by  the  Pacific  Ocean  and  the  Indian  Ocean. 
Tt  is  nearly  as  large  as  Europe,  and  is  sometimes  called 
a  continent.  It  was  discovered  by  the  Dutch  about  the 
time  of  the  settlement  of  the  United  States  by  the  Eng- 
lish, and  was  then  named  New  Holland. 


3.  Australia  resembles  .\friea  in  tlic  general  drjniess 
(if  its  climate,  and  in  liaviiig  few  rivers,  and  no  great 
inland  seas  and  bays.  It  has  a  rim  of  mountains  round 
tlie  coast,  but  the  interior  generally  consists  of  broad 
l)lains.  The  forest  vegetation  is  peculiar.  The  great 
plains  of  the  interior  are  treeless,  or  else  covered  with 


Map  Study.  —  1.  What  tropic  crosses  the  central  part 
of  Australia?  2.  Measure  by  the  scale  of  miles  the 
breadth  of  Australia.  3.  What  island  north  of  Australia? 
4.  What  gulf  in  the  northern  part  ?  5.  What  division  in 
the  eastern  part  ?  6.  Locate  Melbourne  ;  —  Sydney  ;  - 
Adelaide.  7.  What  island  south  of  Australia  ?  8.  Name 
a  town  in  Tasmania.  9.  What  two  large  islands  in  New 
Zealand?  10.  Where  is  Auckland,  the  capital?  11-  In 
what     direction     from     Australia     is     New    Caledonia? 

12.  Near    what     meridian     are     the     Feejee     Islands? 

13.  What  group   of  islands   is   shown    in   the   northeast 
comer  of  the  map  ?     14.  On  what  island  is  Honolulu  ? 


li>6 


OCEANIA. 


hard,  thorny 
shrubs,  heaths, 
ferns,  and  net- 
tles. Thi.'^  vege- 
tation is  known 
as  "  the  bush." 
The  common 
trees  of  the  ea.st- 
ern  and  south- 
ern coasts  are 
the  gum  -  tree 
(E  Ileal  i^p't  us) 
and  the  acacia. 
These  trees  are 
evergreens,with 
hard,  narrow 
leaves,  glossy  on 
both  sides,  and 
turned  edgewise 
to  the  sun,  so 
that  they  cast 
very  little  shade 
and  evaporate 
less      moisture  ^  „ 

The  Kangaroo. 

than  the  broad- 
leaved  vegetation  of  the  tropics.     This  peculiarity   c.f 
the  foliage  gives  a  very  sombre  appearance  to  an  Aus- 
tralian forest. 

4.  The  native  animal  life  of  Australia  is  even  more 
scanty  than  the  vegetation.  The  few  animals  belong 
mostly  to  the  mamqnals,  or  pouched  animals.  The 
kangaroo  is  the  largest  and  most  numerous  animal  of 
this  class.  It  jumps  on  its  hind  legs  ten  or  fifteen  feet 
at  a  bound,  and  leaps  as  fast  as  a  hoi-se  can  run.  The 
emu,  on  the  dry  interior  plains,  corresponds  to  the  os- 
trich of  the  African  deserts.  Among  other  singular 
animals  of  Australia  are  black  swans,  white  eagles, 
and  the  Ornithorhyn' cus.  The  latter  is  a  ^'ery  odd 
animal,  having  the  bill  of  a  duck  with  the  body  of 
au  otter. 

5.  Australia  is  occupied  by  several  British  colonies. 
It  is  rich  in  gold,  and  produces  more  of  the  precious 
metal  than  any  other  country  except  California.  It  is 
also  a  good  country  for  farming,  and  is  particularly  well 
adapted  to  the  raising  of  cattle  and  sheep.  The  trade 
is  carried  on  principally  with  Great  Britain.  Austra- 
lia exports  gold,  copper,  and  wool,  and  receives  in 
exchange  the  cotton  and  woolen  goods,  iron  and  hard- 
ware of  England.  It  has  a  line  of  steamship  communi- 
cation with  San  Francisco,  and  a  line  with  England  by 
way  of  Panama  and  New  York.  Melbourne  is  the 
largest  city  i!i   Australia,  and  a  very  fine  city  it  is. 

in.  New  Zealand. 

6.  About  a  tliousand  miles  from  Australia  are  two 
large  and  mountainous  islands  called  Xew  Zealand. 
They  are  separated  by  Cook's  Strait,  and  are  occupied 
by   several    British    colonies.       Xortli    Island    is   very 


fertile.      The    na- 
tives, called  Mao- 
ries,  are  a  clever 
people,   and  have 
learned  the  use  of 
the     plough     and 
many  other  things 
tiom  the  English. 
Jlany  of  them  can 
lead    quite    well. 
The  sources  of  some 
of  the   rivers   are 
\\  arm  springs ;  and 
the   water  gushes 
fiom   the    ground 
\\  arm    enough    to 
1  oil  au  egg.  Eartli- 
(juxkes  often   o(  cui       South  I^-hnd  has  mountains  so 
loft\  that  glaciers  aie  found  in  its  high  valleys.     The 
British  colonists  of  New  Zealand  are  engaged  in  farming 
and  sheep-raising.     Wool  is  the  chief  article  of  export. 
Auckland  and  Wellington  are  the  large.st  cities  of  the 
northern  island  of  New-  Zealand.     Nelson  is  the  largest 
city  of  the  southern  island. 

IV.  Polynesia. 

7.  The  jji-incipal  groups  of  islands  forming  Polynesia 
are  the  Sandwich,  Society,  Friendly,  Feejee,  Marquesas, 
and  Caroline  Islands.  Some  of  the  islands  are  vol- 
canic and  mountainous,  others  are  of  coral  formation. 
The  people  of  Polynesia  are  light-colored  tribes  belong- 
ing to  the  Malay  race.  Many  of  them  have  been  con- 
verted to  Christianity  by  the  labors  of  American  and 
English  missionaries. 

8.  The  cocoa-nut  palm  is  found  all  over  Polynesia, 
and  is  of  the  greatest  use  to  the  inhabitants.  It  needs 
no  culture,  pruning,  or  attention  of  any  kind,  while  it 
is  the  staff  of  life  to  the  islanders.  They  repose  beneath 
its  shade,  eat  its  fruit,  and  find  a  beverage  in  the  milk 
of  the  nut.  Their  huts  are  thatched  with  the  leaf-stalks, 
of  which  also  they  make  baskets  for  catching  fish,  while 
the  leaves  furnish  bonnets  and  the  leaflets  fans.  The 
larger  nuts,  thinned  and  polished,  supply  drinking-cups, 
the  dry  leaf-stalks  are  used  for  firing ;  and  the  fibrous 
husk  of  the  nut  is  twisted  into  fi.shing-lines,  cords,  and 
uiatting.  The  trunk  itself  is  sawed  into  posts  to  uphold 
their  dwellings,  and  paddles  for  their  canoes  are  made 
of  the  middle  rib  of  the  leaf.  Hardly  less  important  is 
the  bread-fruit  tree,  the  fruit  of  which  supplies  a  nour- 
ishing and  pleasant  food. 

9.  The  Sandwich  Islands  form  the  most  interesting 
of  the  Polynesian  groups.  For  many  yeai-s  past  the 
Sandwich-Islanders  have  been  civilized.  There  is  now 
a  single  monarchical  government,  limited  by  a  legi-slative 
a.sserably.  They  have  convenient  towns,  roads,  a  small 
fleet,  a  wTitten  language,  and  a  regular  business  in  vic- 
tualing ships,  and  in  exporting  odoriferous  sandal-wood, 
coffee,  sugar,  oil,  etc.      Honolu'hi  is  the  cajjital. 


PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY    OF   THE    OCEAN. 


127 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY   OF    THE    OCEAN. 


I.— THE    OCEANS. 

1.  Divisions. — There  arc  three  great  divisions  of 
the  waters  that  surrouiKl  the  globe — the  Pacific,  the 
Atlantic  and  the  Indian  oceans. 

Note. — The  Arctic  Ocean  is  ii  mirtlicrly  coiitimmlion  of  the 
Atlantic,  and  tlie  Antarctic  Occiin  is  a  sontiicrly  continuation  of 
tlie  three  great  oceans. 

2.  Area. — The  Pacific  Ocean  has  an  area  of  70 
million  square  miles,  or  one-third  of  the  entire  sur- 
face of  the  globe ;  the  Atlantic  Ocean  is  half  the  size 
of  the  Pacific,  and  the  Indian  Ocean  is  two-thirds  as 
large  as  the  Atlantic. 

3.  Depth. — The  average  depth  of  the  ocean  is 
estimated  at  from  two  to  three  miles ;  its  greatest 
depth,  at  five  and  one-half  miles — corresponding  to 
the  greatest  height  of  mountains. 

4.  Movements.  —  The  chief  movements  of  the 
waters  of  the  sea  are  waves,  tides  and  currents. 

II.— OCEAN    WAVES. 

5.  Waves. — Waves  are  undulations  of  the  water 
without  progressive  motion.  They  are  caused  by  the 
winds,  and  are  of  all  sizes,  from  a  gentle  ripple  to 
billows  forty  feet  high.  The  apparent  advance  of  waves 
is  owing  to  the  communication  of  an  undulatory 
movement  to  successive  portions  of  water.  The  ap- 
parent advance  of  great  waves  in  heavy  storms  is 
from  50  to  100  miles  an  hour. 

6.  Tides. — The  tides  are  a  regular  rising  and  fall- 
ing of  the  waters  of  the  ocean.  They  are  caused  by 
the  combined  attraction  of  the  sun  and  moon,  to- 
gether with  the  earth's  rotation  on  its  a.xis. 

7.  Ebb  and  Flood  Tides.  —  Flood  tide  is  the 
period  of  rising  water ;  ebh  tide,  the  period  of  falling 
water.  High  water  is  the  high  level  at  the  time  of 
the  close  of  flood  tide ;  low  icaier  is  the  low  level  at 
the  time  of  the  close  of  the  ebb  tide.  There  are  two 
flood  and  two  ebb  tides  every  twenty-four  hours. 

8.  Spring  and  Neap  Tides.— When  the  sun  and 
the  moon  act  together  on  the  earth — that  is,  when  the 
three  bodies  are  in  a  straight  line,  which  happens 
twice  a  month,  at  the  time  of  the  new  and  the  full 


moon — very    high    tides    are    produced.       These    are 
called  spring  tides. 

W^lien  t\u\  sun  and  the  moon  .act  in  opposition — 
that  is,  when  they  arc  so  situated  with  respect  to  the 
earth  that  their  attraction  acts  at  right  angles,  which 
occurs  ill  the  first  and  third  quarters  of  the  moon — the 
flood  tide  is  unusually  low.  These  are  called  niaj} 
tides. 

9.  Highest  and  Lowest  Tides.  -  The  highest 
spring  tides  occur  in  March  and  September,  and  the 
lowest  neaj)  tides  occur  in  June  and  December. 

10.  Time  and  Height  of  Tides. — Were  the  globe 
entirely  covered  with  an  ocean  of  uniform  depth,  the- 
tidal  wave  would  move  round  the  earth  with  unvary- 
ing regularity  in  time,  height  and  velocity  ;  but, 
owing  to  the  shape  of  the  continents  and  the  different 
depths  of  the  ocean,  the  time,  height  and  velocity  of 
the  tides  are  different  at  difl^ercnt  places.  The  height 
of  tide-water  varies  from  a  few  inches  to  thirty  and 
even  seventy  feet. 

III.— OCEAN  CURRENTS. 

1 1 .  Definition. — Marine,  or  oceanic,  currents  are 
deep  and  broad  streams  that  move  regularly  through 
the  sea  in  certain  unchanging  directions. 

12.  Causes. — They  are  produced  by  the  unequal 
temperature  and  density  of  the  ocean  waters  in  the 
equatorial  and  the  polar  regions,  together  with  the 
effect  of  the  trade  winds  and  the  earth's  rotation. 

13.  Warm  and  Cold  Currents.— The  cold  waters 
of  the  polar  regions  are  constantly  flowing  towards 
the  equator,  partly  to  supply  the  deficiency  of  water 
caused  by  the  greater  evaporation  from  the  surface  of 
the  tropical  seas,  and  partly  from  the  tendency  of 
colder  and  heavier  water  to  displace  the  hotter  and 
lighter  water  of  the  equatorial  regions.  The  warm 
waters  of  the  tropics,  as  they  are  displaced  by  the 
deep  cold  currents  from  the  polar  regions,  move  off" 
in  surface  currents  toward  the  poles. 

14.  Classes  of  Currents.  —  Currents  may  be 
divided  into  three  main  classes  —  equatorial,  polar 
and  return  currents. 

15.  Equatorial  Currents. — Then-  arc  three  great 
equatorial  currents-  the  Pacific,  the  Atlantic  and  the 


128 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY    OF   THE    OCEAN. 


Indian,  moving  westward  ar6und  the  globe.  They 
include  the  belt  over  which  the  trade  winds  blow,  a 
zone  of  about  25°  on  each  side  of  the  equator.  They 
take  their  name  from  the  three  great  oceans  through 
which  they  flow.  Their  velocity  is  from  two  to  three 
miles  an  hour. 

16.  Causes  of  Direction. — As  the  polar  currents 
approach  the  tropical  regions,  they  fail  to  partake 
immediately  of  the  increased  velocity  of  the  earth 
near  the  equator,  and  so  fall  behind — that  is,  begin  a 
general  westward  movement,  which  is  increased  by 
the  prevailing  tendency. 

17.  Atlantic  Equatorial. — This  current  begins  off" 
the  western  coast  of  Africa,  and  moves  at  the  rate  of 
two  or  three  miles  an  hour  westward  across  the 
Atlantic,  until  it  strikes  the  eastern  coast  of  South 
America,  near  Cape  St.  Roque.  Here  it  divides,  one 
part  flowing  through  the  Caribbean  Sea  into  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico,  whence  it  emerges  as  the  "  Gulf  Stream," 
a  return  current ;  and  the  other  flowing  southward  as 
far  as  the  mouth  of  the  La  Plata,  where  it  is  turned 
back  and  becomes  a  return  current. 

18.  Pacific  Equatorial. — Beginning  off"  the  west- 
ern coast  of  South  America,  this  grand  current  flows 
westward  for  10,000  miles,  until  it  reaches  the  East 
India  Islands.  There,  one  stream  forces  its  way 
through  into  the  Indian  Ocean,  one  main  branch  turns 
northward  and  becomes  a  return  current  along  the 
Coast  of  Asia,  called  the  Kuro-Siwo  ;  another  branch 
turns  southward  along  the  eastern  coast  of  Australia. 

19.  Indian  Equatorial, —  This  current  moves 
across  the  Indian  Ocean,  flows  southward  along  the 
African  coast  as  for  as  Cape  Agulhas,  and  is  then  de- 
flected easterly  as  a  return  current. 

20.  The  Gulf  Stream.— The  Gulf  Stream  is  the 
northerly  return  ocean-river  of  the  Atlantic  Equa- 
torial Current.  It  is  3,000  miles  long,  and  from  30  to 
120  miles  wide,  and  moves  with  a  velocity  of  from  two 
to  four  miles  an  hour.  Its  heated  waters  flow  out  of  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico,  along  the  eastern  coast  of  the  United 
States.  Near  the  Banks  of  Newfoundland,  it  divides 
into  two  branches,  one  turning  southeasterly  across 
the  Atlantic,  and  the  other  continuing  northeasterly, 

j   flowing  past  the  British  Isles  and  the  coast  of  Norway 
into  the  Arctic  Ocean. 

21.  The  Japan  Current. — The  Japan  Current,  or 
Kuro-Siwo,  is  the  northerly  return  stream  of  the 
warm  waters  of  the  Pacific  Equatorial  Current.  It 
flows  along  the  coast  of  Asia,  past  the  Japan  Islands, 


and  then  divides.  The  northern  branch  flows  through 
Behring  Strait  into  the  Arctic  Ocean.  The  southern 
branch  sweeps  south  of  the  Aleutian  Isles,  along  the 
western  coast  of  North  America,  to  the  southward  of 
California,  and  then  becomes  merged  in  the  Equa- 
torial Current. 

22.  The  Arctic  Current.  —  This  cold  current 
moves  southward  along  the  coast  of  Greenland, 
doubles  Cape  Farewell,  unites  with  the  Baflin  Bay 
Current,  and  continues  southward  until  it  meets  the 
warm  waters  of  the  Gulf  Stream.  One  branch  then 
flows  close  to  the  coast  of  the  New  England  States, 
between  the  Gulf  Stream  and  the  land,  as  for  south 
as  the  latitude  of  New  York ;  the  other  branch  be- 
comes a  deep  under-current,  which  flows  eastward  of 
the  Gulf  Stream,  and  pours  its  euld  waters  into  the 
tropical  seas. 

23.  Antarctic  Currents. — The  currents  from  the 
south  polar  regions  are  less  marked  than  those  from 
the  Arctic  Ocean,  but  there  is  a  general  northward 
drift  of  the  waters  of  the  Antarctic  Ocean. 

The  Peruvian,  or  Humboldt  Current,  moves  north- 
ward along  the  west  coast  of  South  America;  and  the 
Cape  Horn  Current  doubles  Cape  Horn  and  flows 
northeasterly  across  the  Atlantic. 

24.  Smaller  Currents. — Among  the  minor  cur- 
rents are  the  Monsoon  currents  in  the  Indian  Ocean, 
and  many  local  currents  caused  by  the  numerous 
lines  of  islands  and  coral  reefs  that  break  the  regular 
flow  of  the  great  equatorial  currents. 

25.  Uses  of  Currents, — The  great  system  of  cir- 
culation carried  on  by  marine  currents,  preserves  the 
equilibrium,  density  and  purity  of  oceanic  waters. 
The  Salter  and  denser  water  of  one  region  flows  as  an 
under-current  to  one  part  of  the  sea,  while  the  lighter 
and  fresher  flows  back  as  a  surface  current. 

26.  Equalizers  of  Temperature. — The  heated 
waters  of  the  tropical  regions  drift  off  from  the  equa- 
tor, and  raise  the  temperature  of  the  ocean  in  the 
higher  latitudes.  The  cold  streams  from  the  polar 
regions  cool  the  hot  seas  lying  near  the  equator. 

27.  Effect  on  Climate, — The  influence  of  these 
interchanging  currents  extends  to  the  lands  near 
which  they  flow,  softening  the  extremes  of  climate. 
The  Gulf  Stream  renders  the  climate  of  the  British 
Isles  and  the  western  coast  of  Europe  much  warmer 
than  it  would  otherwise  be,  and  the  Kuro-Siwo  pro- 
duces a  similar  effect  on  the  Japan  Isles  and  the 
northwestern  coast  of  America. 


GENEEAL   KEVIEW   QUESTIONS. 


139 


GENERAL  REVIEW  QUESTIONS. 


I. 

[Tfie  answers  mil  be  found  on  pages  37,  38.] 

1.  What  is  the  size  of  North  America  ? 

2.  What  is  the  greatest  mountain-s}-stem  in  North  America  ! 

3.  What  mountain-range  in  the  eastern  part  ? 

4.  What  is  the  Central  Plain  ? 

5.  Name  the  three  largest  rivers  of  North  America. 

6.  What  are  the  five  Great  Lakes  of  North  America  f 

7.  What  of  the  climate  of  North  America  ? 

II. 

\_See2iagcs  40-45.] 

1.  What  country  north  of  the  United  States  ? 

2.  Name  the  pro\-inces  of  Canada. 

3.  Wliat  is  the  largest  city  of  Canada  ? 

4.  What  is  the  capital  of  Canada  ? 

5.  What  can  you  say  of  Newfoundland  ? 

6.  To  whom  does  Greenland  belong  ?  —  Alaska  ? 

III. 

\_See  pages  45  -  50.] 

1 .  .State  the  situation  of  Mexico. 

2.  What  of  its  surface  ? 

3.  What  is  the  goveniment  of  Mexico  ? 

4.  How  is  Central  America  divided  ? 

5.  What  of  the  products  ? 

6.  Of  what  do  the  West  Indies  consist  ? 

7.  Mention   the  principal  commercial  products  of  the  West 

Indies. 

IV. 
[See  pages  53-57.] 

1.  What  part  of  North  A7neric3  does  Our  Country  occupy  ? 

2.  What  are  the  principal  mountains  of  the  United  States  ? 

3.  What  are  the  three  natural  divisions  of  the  United  States  ? 

4.  What  of  agriculture  in  the  United  States  ? 

5.  Where  is  mining  carried  on  ? 

6.  What  art  the  principal  exports  and  imports  of  Our  Coun- 

try ? 

7.  What  are  the  five  sections  of  the  United  States  ? 

V. 

[See  paijes  59-64.] 

1.  Name  the  New  England  States. 

2.  How  does  New  England  compare  in  size  mth  the  other 

sections  ? 

3.  What  of  its  importance  ? 

4    What  are  the  leading  occupations  or  industries  of  New 
Engl.ind  ? 

5.  Name  the  largest  city  in  each  New  England  State. 

6.  Name  the  capital  of  each. 

VI. 

[Seepages  65-73.] 

1.  Name  the  Middle  States. 

2.  What  of  their  farming  ? 


3.  What  of  their  mining  ? 

4.  What  of  their  manufacturing  ? 

5.  What  of  their  commerce  ? 

6.  Give  the  largest  city  in  each  of  the  Middle  State.?. 

7.  Name  the  capital.of  each  of  the  Aliddle  States. 

VII. 

[Sec  pages  76-80.] 

1.  What  of  the  climate  of  the  Southern  States  ? 

2.  What  plant  for  clothing  material  is  largely  grown  ? 

3.  Where  is  rice  grown  ? 

4.  "\\niere  is  the  sugar-cane  cultivated? 

5.  What  articles  are  produced  from  the  forests  ? 
C.  Name  the  largest  city  of  each  Southern  State. 

7.  Name  the  capital  of  each  of  the  Southern  States. 

VIII. 

[Sec  pages  81-89.] 

1.  Name  the  Western  States. 

2.  'Where  is  tliis  section  situated  ? 

3.  For  what  is  it  noted  ? 

4.  What  are  the  principal  gi-ains  raised  ? 

5.  AVhat  of  grazing  and  stock-raising  ? 

(i.   What  minerals  are  found  in  this  section  ? 
7.   Name  the  capital  and  largi'st  city  of  each  of  the  Western 
States. 

IX. 

[Sec  pafjes  02,  93.] 

1.  Name  the  States  and  Territories  of  the  Pacific  Highlands. 

2.  What  are  the  principal  occupations  ? 

3.  Name  the  two  largest  cities. 

4.  What  two  States  and  one  Territory  are  found  on  the  Pacific 

coast  ? 

5.  Give  an  account  of  California. 

6.  What  of  Oregon  and  Wiishington  Territory  ? 

7.  Name  the  largest  city  and  capital  of  California  ;  —  of  Ore- 

gon ;  —  of  Washington  Territory. 

X. 

[See  pages  95-97.] 

1.  How  do  you  describe  South  America  ? 

2.  What  great  mountains  in  the  western  part  ? 

3.  Name  the  countries  of  the  Andes. 

4.  What  are  their  principal  exports  ? 

5.  What  form  of  government  have  they  all  ? 

6.  Name  the  largest  citj-  in  each  of  the  states  of  the  Andes. 

7.  Of  what  does  the  population  consist  ? 

XI. 

[Sec  2'agcs  OS,  99.] 

1.  Give  a  description  of  Brazil. 

2.  Wliat  of  its  vegetation  ? 

3.  What  are  its  leading  exports  ? 

4.  What  is  its  largest  city  and  seaport  ? 

5.  What  large  country  in  the  valley  of  the  Orinoco  ? 


130 


GENERAL   EEVIEW   QUESTIOXS. 


6.  Where  are  the  colonies  of  Guiana  ? 

7.  What  three  countries  in  the  valley  of  the  Plata  ? 

XII. 

[Seepages  lUl-104.] 

1.  How  does  Europe  rank  among  the  Grand  Divisions  as  re- 

gards size  and  importance  ? 

2.  What  are  the  five  principal  nations  of  Europe  ? 

3.  What  kingdom  occupies  the  islands  of  Great  Britain  and 

Ireland  ? 

4.  How  does  England  rank  ? 

5.  What  of  the  manufactures  of  England  ?  —  its  commerce  ? 

6.  What  are  the  occupations  of  the  Scotch  ?  —  the  Irish  ? 

7.  Name  the  largest  city  in  England  ;  —  Scotland  ;  —  Ireland. 

XIII. 

[ScejmgcslOi-lOS.] 

1 .  AVhat  arc  the  leading  products  of  France  ? 

2.  Name  its  four  largest  cities. 

3.  Of  what  does  the  German  Empire  consist  ? 

4.  What  are  the  leading  industries  of  Germany  ? 

5.  Of  what  does  Austria  consist  ? 

6.  What  are  the  leading  industries  of  Austria  ? 

7.  Name  the  capital  of  Germany  ;  —  of  Austria. 

XIV. 

[Srejxigcs  109,  110.] 

1.  Of  what  does  the  Empire  of  Russia  consist  ? 

2.  What  are  the  principal  articles  exported  by  Russia  ? 

3.  What  is  the  capital  of  Russia  ? 

4.  In  what  does  the  wealth  of  Sweden  and  Norway  consist  ? 

5.  What  are  the  principal  occupations  of  the  Danes  ? 

6.  What  does  the  word  Holland  mean  ? 

7.  What  are  the  principal  occupations  of  the  Dutch  ? 

XV. 

[See pctges  no.  111.] 

1.  What  are  the  leading  manufactures  of  Belgium  ! 

2.  How  do  the  S\viss  people  make  their  liWng  ? 

3.  What  are  tlie  three  southern  peninsulas  of  Europe  ? 

4.  What  countries  in  the  western  peninsula  ? 

5.  What  is  the  principal  occupation  of  the  Italians  ? 

6.  What  is  the  capital  of  Italy  ? 

7.  What  two  countries  in  the  eastern  peninsula  of  Europe  ? 

XVI. 

[Se^:pagrs  113,  114.] 
1.   How  much  of  the  land  surface  of  the  globe  is  contained  in 
Asia? 


2.  What  portion  of  all  the  iijiabitants  of  the  globe  live  in 

Asia  ? 

3.  What  three  races  are  found  there  ? 

4.  Of  what  does  the  Chinese  Empire  consist  ? 

5.  What  can  you  tell  about  China  ? 

6.  What  are  the  chief  exports  from  Chiha  ? 

7.  What  is  the  capital  of  the  Chinese  Empire  ? 

XVII. 

[Seepages  116-118.] 

1.  Where  is  Japan  ? 

2.  Is  it  more  or  less  progressive  than  China  ? 

3.  What  are  the  chief  exports  of  Japan  ? 

4.  What  is  the  population  of  Hindostan  ? 

5.  What  country  governs  Hindostan  ? 

6.  What  are  the  chief  products  ? 

7.  Where  is  Calcutta  ?  —  Bombay  ? 

XVIII. 

[Scc2}ages  lis,  119.] 

1.  Name  the  principal  countries  of  the  Eastern  Peninsula. 

2.  Name  the  four  largest  of  the  East  India  Islands. 

3.  For  what  products  are  they  noted  ? 

4.  Under  what  government  is  Persia  ? 

5.  Where  is  Arabia  ? 

6.  What  ancient  countries  are  included  in  Asiatic  Turkey  ? 

7.  What  can  you  tell  about  Siberia  ? 

XIX. 

[See  pages  121-124.] 

1.  What  is  the  most  civilized  country  of  Africa  ? 

2.  Name  the  three  Barbary  States. 

3.  What  is  the  Sahara  ? 

4.  What  can  you  tell  about  the  people  of  Central  Africa  ? 

5.  To  what  nation  does  Cape  Colony  belong  ! 

6.  Name  three  countries  on  the  East  Coast. 

7.  Where  is  Zanguebar  '! 

XX. 

[Seepages  125,  12t;.] 

1.  'WTiere  is  Australia  ? 

2.  What  can  you  say  of  its  vegetation  ? —  of  its  animals  ? 

3.  To  what  country  does  Australia  belong  ? 

4.  What  are  the  principal  products  ? 

5.  Where  is  New  Zealand  ? 

6.  Name  the  principal  groups  of  Polynesia. 

7.  Give  an  account  of  the  Sandwich  Islands. 


131 


APGAK'S    SYSTEM    OF   MAP-DRAWING. 


E.  A.  AND  A.  C.  APGAK. 


SUGGESTIONS  TO  TEACHERS. 

Ix  presenting  geographical  facts  two  mitliuds  arc  c 
ployed.  By  the  use  of  maps  the  form  and  location  of 
geographical  features  are  represented,  and  by  the  use  of 
text  the  featiii-es  thus  represented  are  described.  A  lesson 
in  text  is  committed  to  memory,  and  recited  as  given  by 
the  author.  Maps  should  be  studied  and  recited  in  the 
same  manner.  They  should  be  committed  to  memory,  and 
for  a  recitation  they  should  be  reproduced  as  they  appear 
in  the  book.  As  maps  represent  form,  they  should  be 
studied  as  other  forms  are  studied,  namely,  by  drawing. 
The  practice  of  drawing  maps  will  impress  their  outlines 
and  important  features  upon  the  minds  of  the  pupils  in 
much  less  time  than  is  possible  by  any  other  method,  and 
the  ability  to  draw  them  is  evidence  that  the  desired  ini- 
]iressions  have  been  made.  Map-drawing  is  the  only  true 
method  for  learning  that  part  of  geography  represented 
u]ion  maps. 

Materials.  —  The  materials  needed  for  map-drawing  are 
a  good  lead-pencil  (No.  3  or  4),  an  eraser,  a  ruler,  four 
cakes  of  water-colors,  —  red,  green,  blue,  and  yellow, — 
two  camel-hair  pencils,  —  one  f(uite  small,  —  and  a  cake  of 
India-ink. 

Maps  in  Lead-Pencil. — (1)  Coast-line.  —  Commence 
at  the  northwest  and  draw  in  order  the  northern  and  east- 
ern coasts  ;  then  commence  again  at  the  northwest  and 
draw  the  western  and  southern  coasts.  Make  the  line  uni- 
form in  width,  and  avoid  sharp  angles.  (2)  Rivers.  —  Com- 
mence at  the  source  with  a  light  line,  and  increase  the 
shade  gradually  to  the  mouth.  Give  it  the  irregular 
waved  appearance.  (3)  Mountains.  —  First  draw  the  base 
lines  or  curves,  and  then  the  radiating  lines,  or  the  radi- 
ating lines  may  be  omitted.  Keep  the  pencil  sharp.  (4) 
Boundary-lines.  —  Use  the  ruler  in  drawing  the  straight 
Imuiidary-liues.     Make  the  dots  and  spaces  ec^ual  in  length. 

Maps  in  Lead-Pencil  and  Color.  —  Complete  the 
map  in  lead-pencil,  and  then  color  according  to  one  of  the 
following  methods.  (1)  Outline  Coloring.  —  Rub  one  of 
the  colors  in  a  few  drops  of  water,  on  a  plate  or  piece  of 
glass,  till  the  color  is  cpiite  bright,  but  not  thick.  With 
the  small  camel-hair  pencil  draw  a  bright,  narrow  line 
around  all  the  divisions  that  are  to  receive  the  color  mixed. 
Follow  in  the  same  manner  with  the  other  colors,  being 
careful  to  wash  the  brush  each  time  before  using  a  new 
color.  In  outline  coloring  the  width  of  the  line  of  color 
aroimd  the  map  or  division  should  not  exceed  one  sixteenth 
of  an  inch.  (2)  Surface  Coloring.  —  Mix  the  color  as  be- 
fore, but  make  it  very  light,  so  light  that  a  single  color 
upon  the  paper  is  barely  distinguishable.     Color  the  entire  I 


surface  of  each  division  with  its  proper  tint,  u.sing  the  large 
brnsh.  When  dry,  color  tiie  boundaries  according  to  the 
fii-st  method,  using  for  the  boundary  of  each  division  the 
same  tint  as  that  upon  the  surface.  This  method  need.s 
great  care.  In  imtting  on  the  light  tint  the  brush  must  be 
well  filled  with  color,  and  the  whole  division  must  be  com- 
pletely covered  Ijefore  any  ])i)rtion  is  dry. 

Maps  in  Color  and  India-Ink.  —  CoiTiplete  the  map 
in  lead-]iencil,  making  all  the  lines  very  light,  then  color 
according  to  one  of  the  methods  e.^jjlained,  and  finally 
retrace  every  line  in  lead-i)encil  with  India-ink.  Rub  the 
ink  with  water  in  a  shallow  poi-celain  dish  till  it  is  quite 
black,  and  with  a  fine  sti^el  pen  draw  the  c<>:ist  line,  moun- 
tains, and  river.s. 

Lettering.  —  Lettering  improves  a  niaj)  if  it  is  well 
done,  Imt  it  should  not  be  undertaken  uide.ss  it  om  be 
made  to  resemble  the  lettering  upon  the  printed  map.  A 
map  looks  much  better  without  any  lettering,  unless  it  can 
be  done  with  exceeding  neatness,  care,  and  accuracy. 

Coasting.  —  Coasting,  like  lettering,  recpiires  great  care. 
Each  line  must  be  coinideted  around  the  entire  division 
and  islands  before  the  next  is  commenced.  The  water-lines 
forming  the  coasting  should  cover  about  one  fourth  of  an 
inch  in  width,  and  within  this  space  there  may  be  drawn, 
with  a  hard  and  sharp-]iointed  pencil,  or  with  a  fine  steel 
pen,  about  six  lines. 

Practice.  —  Draw  the  map  several  times  from  the  copy, 
and  then  draw  one  from  memory.  Compare  the  last  draw- 
ing with  the  copy,  and  correct  all  mistakes.  Draw  again 
from  copy,  and  then  from  memory,  and  correct  as  before. 
Repeat  this  alternate  drawing  from  copy  and  from  memory 
until  the  whole  map  can  be  drawn  from  memorj'  with  such 
accuracy  that  neither  the  i)Upil  nor  the  teacher  can  detect 
mistakes. 

While  it  is  well  to  have  pupils  color  some  of  their  maps 
with  care,  too  much  time  should  not  be  expended  in  orna- 
mentation. All  exercises  in  map-drawing  should  be  of  such 
a  nature  as  to  prepare  the  pu])ils  to  draw  rapidly,  accurately, 
and  \vithout  the  copy.  In  drawing  a  continent,  the  pupils 
should  be  taught,  first,  to  construct  the  diagram  accu- 
rately ;  second,  to  draw  the  coast-line,  and  to  describe  all 
the  features  formed  by  it,  such  as  peninsulas,  capes,  bays, 
,i;nlfs,  etc.  ;  and  third,  to  draw  and  describe  the  internal 
features,  such  as  mountains,  lakes,  rivei-s,  and  cities.  It  is 
all  important  that  the  pupils  should  be  able  to  draw  the 
outline  of  a  continent  readily  and  accurately,  before  they 
attempt  to  re])resent  the  internal  features,  for  upon  an  im- 
perfect drawing  of  the  outline,  the  detjiils  must  necessarily 
be  imperfect. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  DRAWING  NORTH  AMERICA. 

Diagram.  —  1.  Draw  a  quarlrant,  and  divide  it  into  four 
equal  parts,  as  represented  in  the  figure.  Through  the  first 
division  at  1,  and  the  right  angle,  draw  the  first  line  of  the 
diagram  the  length  desired  for  the  map. 

2.  From  the  centre  of  this  line,  draw  the  line  C  D  at  right 
an<des  with  it,  and  one  half  its  length.  Connect  A  D  and 
B  D. 

3.  E.xtend  the  line  C  D  toward  E,  making  the  whole 
length  D  E  equal  to  AB  or  B  D,  and  draw  the  lines  A  E 
and  E  B. 

>  4.  Divide  the  line  A  E  into  four  equal  parts,  and  from 
the  upper  division-point  at  G  draw  the  line  G  H  at  right 
angles  to  A  E,  and  equal  to  .B  C  in  length.  Connect  M 
and  H. 

5.  Di\'ide  the  line  E  B  into  two  equal  parts,  and  from 
its  centre,  and  at  right  angles  with  it,  draw  the  line  I  J 
one  half  the  length  of  E  C,  and  connect  E  and  J  and  J 
and  B. 

6.  Divide  the  lines  C  D  and  C  B  each  into  two  equal 
parts,  and  the  lines  A  D  and  D  B  each  into  six  equal  parts. 

7.  Subdivide  the  lower  division  of  the  line  J3  B  into 
three  equal  parts,  and  from  the  division-])oint  at  L  draw 
L  M,  and  from  M  draw  M  N,  and  from  N  draw  NO,  — 
making  the  length  of  each  line  equal  to  two  thirds  of  the 
distance  from  B  to  K,  or  equal  to  the  distance  from  L 
to  K.  ^ 

Points  of  Coincidence.  —  The  position  of  Point  Bar- 
row is  ileterniineil  liy  the  northern  angle  of  the  diagram  ; 
Cape  Charles  by  the  eastern  angle  ;  Port  of  Guatemala  by 


the  southern  angle  ;  Bay  of  San  Francisco  by  the  western 
angle  ;  and  the  western  extremity  of  Alaska  Peninsula  by 
the  northwestern  angle. 

*  Drawing  the  Map.  —  Arctic  Coast.  —  Commence  at 
Point  Barrow.  Make  the  mouth  of  the  Mackenzie  River 
opposite  tlie  first  division  ;  Victoria  Land  on  the  second  ; 
the  mouth  of  Hudson  Bay  between  the  third  and  fourth, 
and  Ungava  Bay  and  Cape  Chidley  near  the  fifth  division. 
The  southern  extremity  of  Hudson  Bay  touches  the  line 
C  D  near  its  centre. 

Atlantic  Coast.  —  Make  the  Peninsula  of  Nova  Scotia 
opposite  the  first  division  ;  Cape  Cod  north  of  the  second, 
and  Cape  Fear  at  the  third.  The  western  shore  of  Florida 
crosses  at  the  fourth  division,  the  mouth  of  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico  is  between  the  fourth  and  fifth,  and  Yucatan  Penin- 
sula extends  as  far  north  as  the  fifth.  The  shore  of  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico  crosses  the  line  C  B  near  its  centre,  and  touches 
the  line  E  B.  The  shore  of  Central  America  and  the  Isth- 
mus of  Panama  follow  closely  the  zigzag  line  from  K  to  0. 

Pacific  Coast.  —  California  Pensinsula  extends  nearly  as 
far  south  as  the  angle  at  /,  and  the  eastern  shore  of  the 
Gulf  of  California  crosses  the  line  /  /  near  its  centre. 

Note.  — It  will  be  observed  that  the  Lake  of  the  Woods  is 
on  the  line  0  D,  miilway  between  its  centre  and  C;  also,  that 
Lake  Erie  is  midway  between  tlie  centres  of  the  lines  C  D 
and  B  D. 


*  In  tliese  dirpi-tions  for  drawing,  some  features  are  referred  to  wliiehare 
not  found  ujion  tlie  accomi>anying  maps.  In  such  cases  it  is  expected  that 
the  jiupil  will  refer  to  the  other  maps  iu  the  boolc. 


MAP  OF 

SOl'TH  AMEIUCA 
Tiyi:.  A.  4  A.  C.  Apgar. 

Scale  lOOOJIiks  to  an  IiKh 


EXPLANATION  OF  SIGNS. 


CITIES  AND  TOWNS. 

Each  Line  represpnts  a    Each    Line    upon    the  i  Each    Line    npnn    the 
.  ..         „  Dot  represents  a  pop-        Dot   and   Cirele  ('«m) 

ulatiou  of  100.000.  represents    1,000,900 

inliabitanls. 


population  of  10,000. 


0 10,000 

+ 20,000 

■H- 30,000 

4t  40,000 

flf  60,000 


100,000 
200.000 
300,000 
.400,000 
500,000 


1.000,000 
2,000,000 
3,000,000 
4,000,000 


MOUNTAIN  RANGES. 
)))))»)))»»)»)»  First  Class  or  Hills.  —  Under  2,000  feet  high. 

'T^^— ^— -'iA  Second  Class.  —  Between  2,000  and  8,000  feet  high,  or 
^^  '^•~^\%t     between  >i  ami  1^  miles  liigh. 

\^\/'\J%y^%mi  Third  Oass.  —  Between  8,000  ami  16,000  feet  high,  or 
'  ?!''*  W  I     between  1%  and  3  miles  high, 

>^^V^AAi'^/VS^4^<''''■'''■  <^".«.  —  Over  16,000  feet  high,  or  over  3  miles 

^^n*wr  '"si'- 

MOUNTAIN  PEAKS. 

''  I  1'    •       'r  one  mile  high  each  Curve  upon  the  right  represents  One 
I  '  "■'  '"■  Klevation  :  for  those  one  mile  high  or  more,  eaeh  Line 

inesents  One  Mile  in  Elev.ation  and  the  Dash  underneath 


r\  >i  of  a  nulehigh. 


A  1. 
A  u 


lile  high, 
miles  high. 


2K  iiiiles  high. 
3 
etc.,  etc. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  DRAWING  SOUTH  AMERICA. 

Diagram.  —  1.  Draw  the  vertical  lino  .1  />  tlii'  leiij,'th 
(le.sireJ  for  tU«  map,  and  divide  it,  into  four  ('(pial  jiart.o. 
From  the  upper  divisioii-])nint  draw  a  horizontal  line  to 
the  right,  one  half  the  length  of  the  fiist  line,  and  divide  it 
into  three  ecpial  parts.  Extend  this  horizontal  line  one 
third  of  its  length  to  the  left. 

2.  Draw  straight  lines  from  G  to  F,  from  /■'  to  A,  from  A 
to  E,  and  from  E  to  B,  and  divide  the  lines  F  A,  A  E,  and 
E  B  each  into  three  equal  parts.  ^_ 

General  Form.  —  South  America  in  its  general  form  is 
wedge-shaped, —  being  wide  toward  the  north  and  narrow 
toward  the  south.  Its  coast-line  is  simple,  and  deviates  hut 
little  from  the  lines  of  the  diagram.  The  length  of  the  Con- 
tinent from  nortli  to  south  is  4,500  mile.s. 

Points  of  Coincidence.  —  The  position  of  the  Penin- 
sula of  Paraguana  is  determined  by  the  northern  angle  of 
the  figure  ;  Cape  St.  Roque  by  the  eastern  angle  ;  Cape 
Pillar  by  the  southern,  and  Cape  Parina  by  tlie  western. 
Opposite  the  second  division-point,  on  the  line  F  A,  is  the 
Isthmus  of  Panama ;  and  opposite  the  second,  on  the  line 
A  E,  is  the  mouth  of  the  Amazon.  Opposite  the  first  divis- 
ion on  the  line  E  B  is  Cape  Frio,  and  opposite  the  second 
I  is  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  de  la  Plata. 


134 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  DRAWING   EUROPE. 

Diagram.  —  Draw  the  liorizoiital  line  A  B  the  lenrjth 
ilesivoil  fnr  the  map.  This  line  connects  the  mouth  of  the 
Douro  TiiviT  -with  Cape  Ajlsheron.  Its  length  is  3,000 
miles.  With  A  and  7?  as  centres,  and  with  a  radius  equal 
to  three  fourths  of  A  7?,  draw  arcs  to  ii  lersect  at  C,  and 
connect  A  and  C,  and' 73  and  C.  Divide  A  C  into  four,  CB 
into  six,  and  .1  B  into  eight  ec^ual  parts.     From  the  first 


division  to  the  riL;ht  of  Q  and  from  the  angle  A  draw  ver- 
tiial  lines,  as  shown  in  the  figure,  each  one  eighth  the  length 
of  .4  7!.  Cip7inect  77  and  7,  and  divide  the  right-hand  half 
of  this  line  into  four  eriual  parts.  From  D  draw  a  jierpen- 
dirular  line  equal  to  two  and  one  half  divisions  on  the  line 
A  I!,  and  hisect  it.  Connect  G  and  F,  and  E  and  B.  From 
K  draw  a  line  in  the  direction  of  the  centre  of  C  73  until  it 
meets  a  vertical  line  drawn  from  the  angle  G, 

Map.  —  Commence  at  G,  on  the  coast  of  Norway,  and 
draw,  in  order,  the  northern  and  eastern  boundaries  ;  then 
conmience  again  at  G  and  draw  the  western  and  southern 
boun<laries.  The  coast  of  Norway  follows  the  line  G  A,  an<I 
extends  south  tci  a  point  about  midway  between  G  and  K. 
The  lines  G  L  and  L  K  will  assist  in  drawing  the  Gulf  of 
Bothnia,  the  Baltic  Sea,  and  the  northwestern  .shores  of 
Germany  and  France.  The  head  of  the  Bay  of  Biscay  is 
near  the  fir.st  division  to  the  right  of  A,  on  the  line  A  B. 
The  Gulfs  of  Lyons  and  Genoa  are  nn  .i|ipM~iic  sidi'<  of  the 
second  division,  and  the  head  of  tln'  .Vliiniir  Sr,i  iinliraics 
the  third  division.  The  fifth  divi^ii■n  marks  th.'  western 
extremity  of  the  Black  Sea  ;  the  Sea  of  Azov  is  north  of  the 
.sixth  division,  and  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  Black  Sea 
is  near  the  seventh.  Italy  resembles  in  outline  the  shape  of 
a  boot.  The  southern  extremity  is  between  the  first  and 
second  divisions  to  the  right  of  J  on  the  line  77  7.  The 
Peninsula  of  Greece  is  situated  between  the  second  and 
third  di\'isions,  and  extends  south  of  this  line  equal  to  cue 
division.  The  Sea  of  Marmora  is  a  little  north  of  I.  The 
British  Isles  are  triangular  in  outline,  and  their  length  north 
and  south  is  equal  to  one  foru'th  of  A  C. 


!:i5 

tCapc 


'^"■^     J-  x\'*"             J7/                                             "!)     ^'^ 

'*  ^V  A    >  V  'i^^     {^  "^^'liiV                                                                   rtf**^^\**!S''^^*^ 

>    >^^^     %'^  f  •   t?^     1^                                              _jl   "^ ' '  •■< '   ^^ 

"t"      ^<s.   f          ^'  1  '  /I               (                                                                    *'"*'^'^ 

j-f     '^^  ^^^^      ^WA     z-'*^^ ^  ^^"'^^              r             TX          ^ 

£^      '       P^iT/^S/r                       V       r^*^^-^-'^^^ 

''^"^'  \    ^^(^^^^.^^^'^-^^-^A^/^"^  s   T   E  yi' 

M  ^A*■v!%iM.^^ 

«  V                      .^^r\.               f>^     ^^           >^    Lu^^                              *-v 

^^            ^%  ifc       r'^'^-^y^^'^l)  ^        ^C#E       !^L       P      / 

t "  ^^%^b--SSTh 

^^^^                        X!^~~'^C"<:«"'-f"^T'*^V"" 

/       II  ^'if"'^!^  ^    .                        v-^  I    N   I)\^    A     (.'^2^'''^\  \  i'  A 

^C            "' "  ^'  ^  ^  ^M ''""''''  ^C  ^  J.  „^  yJ 

1                            "^-^-d                 ^\             *iY        ^\.                  ^^ 

/                                                     ^  1           ^  ^                 >>. 

/                                            \      y    "^  ^'  -■'v  (K^    -^ 

y^                   X//         ^v 

^                                                                  C-C^mo^y^  /S                                        ^ 

^--2;5^                                     /                                      r 

-    ^^---^                  9,^ 

111'' 


pi 


s^ 


;]biM»»*^ 


^'^<^'  / 

[\ 

^^ 

\ 

X, 

*». 

V.L 

"■ 

-+••'"  \   -Vk 

■-■' 

%\  '^ 

K 

J- 

-^-^ 

•» 

'    V 

l>,i(imts(/ie  ,■  >'» 

5J  Zin 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  DRAWING   ASIA. 

Diagram. —  l>iaw  tlir  vritiral  liiir  ,1  P,  a  little-  iimro  than  one  lialf 
tlir  k-iigtli  ili-siivd  lur  the  iiia|i.  iimlli  anil  south.  Diviilc:  it  into  thive 
oiiual  parts,  and  the  upper  third  iutu  two  parts.  From  the  point  B 
draw  the  horizontal  line /i  C  oni'  and  one  sixth  times  the  length  of 
.1  D.  Bisect  it,  and  coiniect  A  and  C.  Trisect  A  0,  then  l>isee,t  the 
middle  division  and  trisect  the  upper.  With  the  iioints  A  and  Cas 
centres,  and  with  a  radius  equal  to  one  and  two  thirds  time.s  the  fii-st 
line,  draw  arcs  to  intersect  at  D.  and  connect  A  and  D,  and  C  and  D. 
Trisect  A  D  and  bisect  the  miiMle  division.  Divide  the  line  CD  into 
four  equal  parts,  and  Insect  lioth  of  the  extreme  divisions.  Draw  the 
lines  E  P  and  N  L  and  hisect  them  ;  also  one  from  0  to  A' atid  trisect 
it.  From  the  lower  trisectint^  ])oint  on  the  line  OK  draw*  a  lino 
toward  J  till  it  meets  the  line  N  L. 

Hap.  —  Commeiice  at  East  Cajie  and  draw  in  oiiler  tlie  eastern,  sontliern,  and 
western  lioundaries,  inchuling  tlie  Black  Sea  ;  then  commence  again  at  Ea-st  Cape 
.and  finish  the  outline.  Tl:e  shore  of  Kameliatka  crosses  at  the  first  division  on 
the  line  D  C ;  tlie  southern  shore  of  tlie  Sea  of  OchotsU  is  at  O  ;  Die  Yellow  Sea 
is  near  the  centre  of  the  line  at  // ;  tlie  Gulf  of  Tonqiiin  is  at  /  ;  and  the  Oult 
of  Siam  is  near  tlie  l.ast  division.  If  we  suii)iose  aline  drawn  from  tliis  division- 
IHiint  parallel  witli  the  line  .1  C,  it  will  assi.st  in  detenniiiin?  the  position  of  the 
Oulf  of  Siam  an.l  the  liav  of  Bcnsial.  Cape  Romania  coincides  with  tlie  aiiirle  at  C, 
and  Tape  fiunorin  with' the  lower  division  on  .the  line  O  A'.  Tin-  head  of  the  Per- 
sian Gulf  is  near  the  centre  of  the  tri.angle  .1  .V  /..  The  Strait  of  TSah-el-Manaeb 
is  at  aV  :  the  Isthmus  of  Suez  between  A  and  ^f :  and  the  Strait  of  liosphorus. 
at  A.  Tlie  Black  Sea  extends  as  far  east  as  the  first  division  on  the  line  .1  C,  and 
th.e  Caspian  Sea  touches  this  line  at  the  second  division.  Tlie  jiosition  of  the  Cas- 
pian Sea,  the  Ural  River,  and  Ural  Mountains  is  determined  by  the  line  E  C. 


"B  Gc&le  1000  Uiles  to  an  Inch 


"    ■'IguUia, 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  DRAWING  AFRICA. 

Diagram.  —  I.  By  iiu-aiis  of  a  quadrant  iliviili-d  into  six 
equal  parts,  a.s  represented  in  the  figure,  draw  tlie  first  line 
of  the  diagram  the  length  desired  for  the  map. 

2.  Divide  this  line  into  two  equal  parts  at  C,  and  the 
upper  lialf  in  four  equal  parts. 

3.  With  the  points  A  and  B  as  centres,  and  with  a  radius 
equal  to  three  fourths  of  the  first  line,  draw  two  arcs  to 
intersect  at  D,  and  draw  the  lines  A  D  and  B  D.  In  the 
same  manner  with  the  points  A  and  C  as  centres,  and  with 
a  radius  equal  to  three  fourths  of  the  line  A  G,  determine 
the  point  E,  and  draw  A  E  and  C  E. 

4.  Divide  the  line  A  D  into  two  cfiual  ^larts,  and  draw 
the  perpendicular  F  H  e(iual  to  one  eighth  of  the  first  line. 
Divide  the  part  F  D  into  two  equal  parts,  and  draw  the 
lines  A  H  and  H  G.  Trisect  each  of  the  lines  A  H,  D  B, 
B  C,  and  G  E. 

General  Form.  —  Africa  resembles  both  North  America 
and  .South  America  in  its  general  form,  being  wide  at  the 
north  and  narrow  toward  the  south.  Its  coast  is  very  regu- 
lar, like  that  of  South  America.  Its  length,  from  Cape 
Spartel  to  Cape  Agulhas,  is  5,000  miles.  Like  South 
America,  it  is  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Equator. 


Points  of  Coincidence.  —  The  position  of  Cape  Spar- 
tel is  determined  by  the  ncirthern  angle  of  the  diagram  ; 
the  Isthmus  of  Suez  by  the  northeastern  angle  ;  Cape  Guar- 
dafui  by  the  eastern  angle  ;  Cape  Agulhas  by  the  southern, 
and  Cape  Eoxo  by  the  western. 

Outline.  —  Commence  at  Cape  Spartel,  and  draw  the 
northern  and  eastern  coasts ;  then,  from  the  same  point, 
draw  the  western  coast.  The  coast  from  Cape  Spartel  to 
Cape  Bon  is  without  the  line  of  the  diagram  ;  then  it  crosses 
the  line,  and  forms  the  Gulf  of  Sidra,  opposite  the  second 
division-point.  The  western  shore  of  the  Bed  Sea  follows 
the  line  H  G,  and  makes  an  inward  curve  between  Gaud  D. 
The  eastern  shore  first  makes  a  small  outward  curve ; 
touches  the  line  at  the  first  division-point,  and  then  makes 
a  umch  larger  bend  without  the  line,  touching  again  at 
Cape  Agulhas.  From  this  point  it  deviates  but  little  from 
the  diagram  till  it  reaches  Cape  Lopez.  Between  this  point 
and  the  first  division  on  the  line  G  E,  there  is  a  large  in- 
ward bend  forming  the  Gulf  of  Guinea.  It  then  bends 
without  the  line  till  we  reach  Cape  Roxo.  From  Cape 
E.OXO  to  Cape  Spartel  the  coast  is  wholly  without  the  line. 
Madagascar  Island  is  situated  opposite  the  middle  third  of 
the  line  D  B. 


137 


PRONUNCIATION    OF   DIFFICULT   GEOGRAPHICAL   NAMES. 

^^  All  marks  usod  to  indicate  pronunciation  arc  the  Bamo  as  arc  employed  In  'Wcbstor's  Dictionary,  last  edition. 
Explanation  of  Marks.  —  ii,  e, !,  o,  u,  y,  /njijr ;  S,  5,  o,  less  prolonged :  S,  E,  I,  0,  H,  y,  short ;  n,  j,  i,  9,  obscure :  cSrc,  Mr,  list,  full,  wliat ; 
there,  veil,  term;  pVqiie,  firm;  done,  ffir,  dn,  w^lr,  r<rod,  fiTot;  fQrl,  rjide,  ptfsli;  e,  j,  o,  silent;  Ii,  sound  of  Ion 'ri;  ij,  similar  to  <■  mher;  U,  like 
the  French  n:  ee,  sound  of  i  in  spirit;  f  ns  b;  fh  ns  sli;  «,  ch,  ns  k;  g  os  j,  g  as  in  go';  s  ns  z;  i  ns  gz;  n  «s  in  linger,  liuk;  t)i  <m  in  thine;  1, 
/i7.e  Hi  t)i  million;  fi,  Hie  ni  in  minion;  s,  nearly  like  z;  u,  similar  to  th  in  this;  n,s<mndof  nermimch;  11,  strongly  aspirated;  ii.,soundof 
German  ch ;  N.  French  nasal  sound ;  i:,  like  rr  in  terror. 


Alienkutii,  n  be-o  ku'ta. 
Ab'er-deen'. 
Abomey,  ab'o-mii'. 
Abonkir,  a-boo-keer'. 


Jl'den. 


MCq; 


,  pron. 


Adij 


n/do-je  ;    ft.   pron. 


i-o'pl. 


3'ae'jl 
AdT-ron'dHck. 
Atlriauople,  ad'rT 
Ad/rT-at'ie. 
JBgfian  (Sea),  e-jee'an. 
Afghanistan,  nf-g3n'is-tnn'. 
Aifulhas.  S-gool'yas. 
Aix-la-Chapelle,  aks  la-shS'- 

peP. 
Ajnccio,  a-yat'cho. 
Al'bans. 
Alamo,  jt'ia-mo. 
Al/be-marlc  (En'^r.). 
APhp-niarle'  (U.S.) 
AlbiiqiiGi-que,   III  boo-kPi:  - 

ka,  or  aPboo-kCrk. 
Alr^intara,  Sl-kan'tii-ra. 
APdgr-ney. 
Alenpon,  a-len'eoii ;    French 

pron.  n'lOx'soiP. 
.\  lep'po. 
Aknitian.    a  lu'shT-an,    or 

Aloutiui,  a-lu'tan. 
Al-Aierj/. 

Alicante,  il-Ie-kau'ta. 
Alleghany,  ai-le-ga'ni. 
Almaden,  aUma-Dgn'. 
Almeida,  al-raa'e-da. 
Alnwick,  or  Alnewick,  an'- 

njk. 
Alsace,  al'sass', 
Altai,  al-tl'. 

Altamaha,  awl 'ta -ma -haw'. 
AI'tQn. 
Ara-boy'. 
Am-boy'na. 
Amiens,  am'T-(;nz;  Fr.pron. 

a'me'GN'. 
Amite,  a-meet'. 
Ara'Qs-lcBag'. 
A-n5m'. 
An'da-man'. 
Andorra,  an-doK'ua. 
An'do-ver. 
An'dros-cog'gin. 
Anglesey,    or    Anglesea, 

ang'gl-se. 
An-go'ta. 

Angostura,  Un-gos-too'ra. 
An-nap'o-lis. 
An-tie'tam. 
Autigua,  an-tc'ga. 
Antilles,  an-teel'"or  5N'teeP. 
Apache,  apa'cha. 
^  Ap'gn-nmcg. 
Ap'pa  la'cbT-an. 
Ap'pa-lacb'T  coMa, 
Ap'po-mat'tox. 
Ar'al. 

Archangel,  ark-an'j61. 
Arequipa,  a^ra-kee'pa. 
Ar^le,  ar-glle'. 
Arica,  a-re'ka. 
Arispe,  5  res'pa. 
Ar-kan'sas,   formerly    pro- 

nounceh,   and    sometimes 

written,  Ar'kan-saw. 
Armagh,  ar-mS'". 
A-roo8'tobk. 

A-shan'tee,  or  Ash'an-tee'. 
A*ih'ta-bn'ia. 

Asia,  a'shT-a ;  often  improp- 
erly pronounced  a'zhi-a. 
As'piu-wall. 


A-ta-oa/ma. 
Xt-ba'ra. 

Atcbafalaya,  atch-af-a-lT'a. 
Augg'burg ;    German  pron 

"  OWGR'bdbRG. 

Augustine,  St.,  sgnt-aw'guf 

teen'. 
An  Sable,  6-sa■bla^ 
Aus'ter-Iitz,  -lits  ;    G'erma 

pron.  ows'tgr-lits. 
Avignon,  a/veu'yoX'. 
X'vTMa. 

Avon,  av'On,  or  ii 
Az'of. 
Azores,  a-zorz',  ( 

Bab'el  man'deb. 
Baden,  bUMgn,  or 


/von. 


;il. 


,  ciR'-wa'wa. 

rhip'pe-wa. 
!'■;     Sp.    Chile 


H.(r'''. 

^ 

Bur'g 

n-dy. 

Bushi 

e,  boo-sheer' 

Butte, 

but. 

■?in-;]:.-f.a, 


Bang'kok' 

Bangor  (Eng.\  baug'ggr. 

Ban'g6r(U.S.). 

Barbados,  or  Barbadoes,  bar- 
ba'doz. 

Bar-ce-lo'na,  or  baR-tha-lo''- 
na. 

Bar'nc-gat'. 

Barn'stJi  ble. 

Basle,  bal. 

Bayou  la  Fourche,  bl'oo  lA 
fi/rsh. 

Baton  Rouge,  bat'un  roozh. 

Bayonnc,  ba'yon'. 

Beaufort  ( British  Domin- 
ions), bo'furt. 

Beaufort  (S.  C),  bii'furt. 

Behring  (Strait),  beer'ing. 

Bt-l-fast'  (Ireland). 

BfPfast  (Maine). 

Bcllcfontaine  (France),  beP- 
tux'tan'. 

Bellefontaine    (U.  S.),   b61- 

Belle  Isle,  or  BcllisIe.bel-lP. 
Belloochistan,  bel-loo'nhis- 
Benares,  ben-a'rBs.       [tan'. 
Bengal,  ben-gawP. 
Benguela,  ben-ga'lU. 
Berbera,  b5r'be-ra. 
Bi^rg/en(U.S.).  ~ 
BPr'lin;  Ger.pron.h^K-]een^. 
Ber-mn'dag.orBer-moo'thes. 
B?rne  ;    Fr.  and  Ger.  pro7). 

bi-Rn  or  beRn. 
Ber  nard',  Saint, 
Berwick  (Eng.),  bCr'rik. 
Ber'wick  (U.  S.)- 
Bexar;    Sp.  pron.  ba-HaR'; 

often  pron.  by  the  Texans 

lieh-har',  or  bar. 
Biloxi,  be-loks'I. 
Binsrhamton,  bing'ura-tun. 
Birmingham,  bTr/ming-um. 
Blanc  (Mont),  raoN  blQN,  or 

Mount  Blanc. 
Bogota,  bo-go-ta'. 
Boise,  bwa-za'. 
Bokhara,  bo-Ka'ra. 
Bologna,  bo-lCu'ya. 
Bom-bay'. 
Bordeaux,  boR'do'. 

Borgne,  born.  ,<_  nenango 

Bos'po-rus,  or  Bos'pho-rus.jChin'cha. 
Boulogne,  boo-lon';   jFrencftlChemun'g, 

pron.  boo'loii',  I  Che-raw'. 


Calais   kiPiss ;    Fr.  pron. 

kil'lrP. 
Calcasieu,    kaPka-shjj,    or 

kQl'ka^sIm. 
Callao,  kaPia'o,  orkUl-yU'o 
Cauipeaehy,    kam-pee'cbe; 

Mex.  prvn.  kam-pa'cha. 
Canandaigua.kan'an-da'gwa 


■  Kandahar. 


CardL'ua.s,  kar-da'uUs. 
Car'ib-be'an  Sea. 
Carleruhe?  or   Karlsruhe, 

karls'roo. 
Ca-rGn'df-lBt. 
Cartagena,  kar'tft-je'na;  Sp 

pron.  kaR-ta-Ha'na." 
cash -me  re'. 
Caspe,  kas'pa. 
Cas'sgl. 

Castile,  kas-teel'. 
Castine,  kas-teen'. 
Ca-taw'ba. 

Cat'e-gat,  or  Kattegat. 
Catoehe,  ka-to'cha. 
Cat'ta-rau'gus. 
Cau'ca-sus. 
Caxias,  kn  sbe'aR._ 
Cayembe,  kl-am'ba. 
Cayenne.  kUen'. 
Cayes,  ka. 
Cayuga,  ka-yoo'ga. 
Celebes,  cePe-biz." 
Cen'is,  or  se'ne'. 
Ceuta,  su'ta;  5p. pron.  tha'- 

oo-ta. 
Cevenncs,  sa-ven'. 
Ceylon,  see'lon,  or  sT-lon'. 
Chagres,  cha'grSs. 
Chaleur,  shU-loor'. 
Chamouny,  sha'moo'ne'. 
Chandeleur,  shan-de-loor'. 
Chapultepec,     cha-pool-ta- 

pek'. 
Cbir'T-tQU. 
Chat'ta-hoo'che. 
Cliat'ta-noo'ga. 
Chautauqua,   *sha-taw'kwa : 

formerly  written  Chautau- 

que. 
Chelsea,  chePse. 


Dus'sei  dorf:    Ger.  Dussel- 

dorf,  diis'stldouf . 
DwT'na;  ^M^s.pron.dvee'na. 

E'bro;  Sp.pron.  ii'hvo. 
Ecuador,  ek-wa-duR'. 
Edinburgh,  ctPin-bur-ruh. 
Elbe,  clb ;  Ger.  pron.  ePbgh. 
El-boorz',orEI-brooz';wnY- 
ten  also  Elburz  tfElbrouz, 
El-mPra. 

Kngbmd,  ing'gland. 
Kntf'  Uios,  en'tra  rce'Ss. 
i  I  '      dirge, r-Kts'gft-beeR'ga 
Cs'kc-rno. 


'  ta 


Cim;ti 
Civita 

vBk'ke-a. 
Cobija,  ko-bee'Ha 
( 'ocbabamba,  ko-cha-bam'bn 
Co'cliin  Chi'na. 
Cobahuila,  ko-a-wee'ia. 
Cohoes,  or  Cahoos,  ko  hoz', 
('o-ini'l)ra,  or  ko-eem'bra. 
Colinia.  kn  I.-. 'nia. 
('ol(>t,'iie,  k<>  Inii'  :   Fr.pron. 


1(1  ur; 


.  BSS' 


I'ra. 


ko'b. 


Knln. 


Colorado,  kul'o  riUiMo 
Uomayagua,  ko-mia'gwa. 
Com'o-rm. 
Conecocheague,   kon'e-ko- 

cheeg'. 
Congo,  cong'go,    or  ZaVre, 

za-eer'. 
Connaught.  kon'nawt. 
Co'pgn-ha'^gn :     Dan.  Kjo- 

benhavn,  kyo  ben-hown'. 
Cor'do-va,  or  Cordoba. 
Corea,  ko-re'a. 
Corfu,  kor-foo',  or  kor'fu. 
Costa  Rica,  kfis'ta  re'ka. 
Cotopaxi,  ko'to-paks'e ;  Sp. 

pron.  ko-to-paii'iie. 
Cracow,  kra'ko. 
CrT-mo'a. 
Croix  (St.),  kroi. 
Csaba,  du'b'G. 

nca,  kweu'ka. 
Cumana,  kjj-ma-na'. 
Curapoa,  ku'ra-so'. 
Cuyahoga,  kPa-ho'ga. 
Cuzco,  koos'ko. 

Dahlonega,  dalOn'e-ga. 
Dahomey,    or   Dahomay, 

dah-ho'mn'. 
Dardanelles,  dar'da-nelz'. 
Darien  (Ga.),  da're"§n. 
Darien  (Isthmus  of),  ri3-re- 

6n'. 
De-ca'tur. 

Delhi  (Hindostan),  del'lee. 
Delhi  (U.  S.),  del'hi. 
Deraerara,  dem'gr-a'ra. 
Des  Moines,  de-moin',  or 

des  moinz. 
Dhawalaghiri,      da-wol'a- 


ger're. 

)ieppe,  dyep,  or  de-ep'. 
Dijon,  de'zhuX'. 
Dnieper,  nee'pgr ;    Russian 

pron.  dnyup'gr. 
Dniester,  nees'tgr;  JRussian 

pron.  dnyfis'tgr. 
Dominica,  dom'e-nee'ka. 
Dongola.  dong'^o-la.    -" 

o'vre-n-eld' ;  Norw.  Daa^ 

vrefjeld,  do'vrg-fycld'. 
Drontheim,dronl'im,  Norw, 

Troudjcm,  trond'yem. 
Dubuque,  du-b(5bk'. 
Duluth.  dii-liith'. 
Dumfries,  dum-frees'. 
Dun-dee'. 
Duquesne,  du-kan'. 


Etienne,Saint.  saxt  ct'e-en'. 
Et'o  wab. 
Euba'a^u-bij'a. 
Eufaula,  fi-fji'la. 
Euxine,  yjjx'in. 

Faroe,  fa'ro. 
Fauquier,  faw-keer'. 
Fayal,  fi-awP;   Port.  pron. 

flap. 

Feejee,  f^'je. 

Fernanriiu'i.  fPr  nan-de'na. 
Ferrara,  fri;  ita'ra. 
Ferrol,  fPit-RoP. 
Fezzan,  I'cz'zan'. 
Finisterre  (Cape),  (in-is-tSr'; 
Sp.  Finistierra,  fee-niate- 
Fijud  du  Lac.  [6R'Ra. 


fri' 


For-mo' 
Freiburg,'  frPburj 

bdbRG. 
Frio,  free'o. 
Fu'ca. 

Fuegos,  rji-a'goee, 
Funchal,  foon-shiU'. 
Fuuen,  fu'nen. 
Fusiyama,  ra-sT-yE-ma'. 

Gairdnor,  gfird'ner. 

Galapagos,  gaPa-pa'gus. 

Ga-le'na. 

Gallinas,  gal-e'na*. 

GaPves-t^n. 

Galway,  gawl'wn. 

Garonne,  ga-rou'. 

Gas'co-n,f. 

Gaspe,  ghs'pS'. 

('ieu'o-a;lt.GenovaJen'o-va- 

Oeyser~s^  gi'serz. 

(Jhent, gent;  Fr.Gand,g6x. 

Giessen,  geea'sgu. 

Gila,  iie'la. 

Gironde,  je-rond';  Fr.pron. 

zhu'roNd'. 
Gloucester,  glos'tgr, 
(Jobi,  go'be. 
Gon'dar. 

Gtiteborg,  yo-ta-boRg'. 
Gotha,  go'ia. 

Gtittinw'en,  or  Goettingen, 
■t'ting-gn,  or  got'ting-gn. 
Granada,  gra  na'da ;    Span. 

pron.  grU-u5'na. 

reenwich.  grln'Tj. 
Guadalajara,  or  Guadalaxa- 

^wa-na  la-Ha'ra. 

Guadaioupe,  gaw'dg-loop', 

or  ga'da-loop'. 
Guadalquivir,         gaw'dal- 

kwiv'er ;   Sp,  pron.  gw^a- 

nai-kevecR'. 
Guadiana,    gaw'de-&'na,    or 

gwa'ne-a'na. 
Guauahani,  gwa-naha'nee. 
(iuanajuato,orGuanaxiiato, 

gwa-nll-ilwa'to. 
Guardafui,   gwar'da-fwee', 

or  gar'da  f%ve'. 


138 


PEONUNCIATION    OP    DIFFICULT   GEOGRAPHICAL   NAMES. 


Guatemala,  gaw'te-m&'la,  or 

gwU-te-mU'Ia. 
Oiiaviimn.  cwi-n'ma. 

iHi  iN.iMinl.     wi-U-keel'. 


Guyaudott,  gi-an-dot'. 

Hague,  liaig. 
Hakodadi,  ha-ko-dn'dee 
HanVburg;  Ger.prmi.h^m^- 

booHG. 
Han'o-vcr;  Ger.Han-no'vcr. 
Haverhill  (Eng-.).  Iiav'cr-il. 
Haverhill  (Mass.),  lia'ver-il. 
Havre  de  Grace,  liav-er  de 


Leipsic,  llp^sik; 

zig,  lip/tsio. 
Leitii.  liitli. 


Ifh 


Fr. 


Hawaii,  hS-wI'ee. 
Hayti,  or  Haiti,  ha'tl 

pron.  a/e'te'. 
Hebrides,  heb,'ri-dez. 
He-le'iia,  St. 
Helena '(Ark.),  hel'B-ua. 
Hel'go-laud,    or   Hel'i-go 

land. 


He 


i'ko. 


ss«  Cas'ssl. 

Uim-a-la'y.i ;  Sanskritproil. 
hi-ma'la-ya, 

Hin-do-stan'? 

Ho-ang'ho,  pronounced  al- 
most wliang'ho'. 

Ho'bo-keu. 

Holstein,  liol'stln. 

Honduras,  hon-doo'ras, 

Honolulu,  ho-uo-loo'^0. 

Houston,  liyoos'tuu. 

Hu^,  hoo-a'. 

Iberville,  i'ber*vil. 
lUimani,  eel-'va-nm'nee. 
Illinois,  il  ll-uoiec',  ornoi'. 
Indiauola,  lu-di-.a-no'la. 
Indies,  in'dlz. 
I'o-wa. 

Isle  Ifoyale,  eel-riia  yal. 
Ismailia,  Ts-ma-el'ya. 
Itasca  (Lake),  T-tas'ka. 
Ith'a-ca.  : 
I-u'%. 

Iztaccihuatl,        es-tak-se- 
hwat'l'. 

Jalapa,  Ha-m'pJI. 

Jalisco,  orXalisco,  iiS-lees'- 

ko.  or  Ha-lis'ko. 
Jeu'a;    Ger.proii.  ya'nJl. 
Joliet,  jul'le-et. 
Ju'au  Fer-nan'dPz;    Sp.  pr. 

Hoo-an'  f6R-uau'deth. 
Ju'au,  Saint;  Sp.  San  Juan, 

siln  Koo-an,  or  6an  Hw^u. 
Jungffrau,  ydbng'frow. 
Ju'ni-at'a. 

Kal'a-ma-zoo'. 

Kam-cbat'ka. 
Kanawha,  ka-naWwa. 
Kankakee,  kank'a-kee'. 
Karakorum,  ka-ra-ko'rQm. 
Ka-tahMiu. 
Kearney,  kUr'nT, 
Kearsarge,  ker'slirj'. 
Kennebec,  kCn-ne-bek'. 
Kenosha,  kSn-o'sha. 
Ke'o-kuk'. 
Khiva,  Kee'va. 
Kiakhta,  ke-SK'ta. 
Kief,  ke-ef,  or  K!-ev'. 
ICiel,  keel. 
Klamath,  klara'at. 
Kilimanjaro,     kil-g-mUn-jJi- 

ro'. 
Kil-Iar/ney. 
Kit'ta-ttn'ny. 
Kuni^'sber^,  ken'igz-berg. 
Kordofan,  kor-do-ian'." 
Kurile,  kub'ril. 

Lab^ra-dor'. 
La  Fayette,  laf-a-et'. 
La  Fourche,  la  foorsh. 
La  Guayra,  la  gwi'ra. 
Laon,  la'oN'. 
Lancaster,  laug'kas-tgr. 
La  iJochellc,  la  ro-shll'. 
Lausanne,  lo'zan'. 
Leicester,  k-s'ter. 
Leinster,  lin'ster,  or  leen' 
ster. 


/  >  . 


,  leej;  Fr.pron.  le-azli'. 
,isic,  Icel. 

Lima  (Peru),  loe'ma. 
-       a(r.S.),  IVma. 

iri,  hp-'a-re  or  lee/p!i-ree. 
Llanos,  lya'nos. 
Lodi  (Italy),  lo'dee. 
Lodi{lT.  S.),  lo'dl. 
Lo-fo'clcn. 
,  IwXli. 
bar-dy. 
Lomond    (Loch),    loK    lo'- 
mund. 

08  Aiiireles,  loce  Sn/jel-Cz. 
Louisville,   loo'is-vil;  for- 
merly jyron.  loo'T-vil. 
Lucca;  i^  ;)rojj,.  look'ka. 
Lupata,  lu-pii'tri. 
Luzon,  loo-zon'. 
Ly-cSm'ing-. 
Ly'ons;  Fr.  Lyon,  le'ux'. 


.  ma-9a/e-ra? 


Ma->i  .1  .-  n,  ,.     !  .   ;  ,. 
M;r_'  ■'  ■■:     1. 1  :    !  . 

Mak....iM.  i.i..  ju,,  k..  k,.  I  1. 
Mal'n  Iku-'. 

Mal'a-L:a,  or  mU'in-gn. 
MaltTi,'  hiawl'ta;    //.  pr 

miil'ta. 
Mandaleh,  mau-da'le 
Mauistie,  ma-nis'te. 
Manitoba,  nihu-T-to'ba. 
Manitouwoc,     man^c-toc 

ok'. 
Maracaybo,  ma-ra-ki/bo. 


zh'nr 

Nismes,  neem. 
Norwich  (Eng.),  nor'nj. 
Norwich  (U.   S.),  nor'ricb, 

or  nor'wich. 
Nov'go-rod'. 
Nueces,  nwa'ses. 
Nyassa,  n6-Us'a. 

Oahu,  wUh'hoo. 

Obi,  o'be. 

Ock'lo-ko'nee. 

0-co'nee^ 

Odcnse.  o'dgn-seh. 

O'dcr. 

Oise,   oiz;    Fr.  pron.  wSz, 

almost  wTz^ 
Oii^eechee,  o-ijec'chee. 
Okefenokoe,  u-k(/-fsn-o'ke, 
Okhotsk,  o-Kotsk'. 


'  )!i  "I'i  lu'a,  on'un-daw'ga. 

Orizaba,  o-re-sa'ba. 
Oude,  owd. 
O^vidfN.Y.). 
O-zark'. 

Padni-a. 

Padiica,  pa-du'ka. 

Panama,  jKln/ama';  Sp.pr. 

p;i-n;t-ma'. 
Para,  pn-r3'. 
Parnf.'-uay,    pU-rU-gwa',    or 


:  ;   Fr.  pron. 
she-loo',     or 


ra'do. 

o  del  Norte,  ri'o  del  nort; 

Sj).pr.  ree'o  d61  noR^S. 
Rio    Grande    (Texas),    ri'o 

rand. 
Rib    Grande    (S,  A.),    re'o- 

Gran'da. 

io  Janeiro,  rt'o  ja-nee'ro, 

or  ree'o  ja-na'ro. 
Rivoli,  riv'6-Ie,  or  ree'vo-le. 
Ro'a-n.  •    ■ 
Rouen. 


r:\'. 


n\Mi ;     Fr.  pr 


Sabine,  sa-been'. 
Saco,  saw'ko. 
Saguenay,  sag'sh-na'. 
Sahara,  sa-ha'ra,  or  sah/hi- 

ra. 

Said,  sa-eed'. 

Saltillo.  s:il-t.'<'I'yo;  tyulffti 


Sangamon,  sang'ga-mon. 
Santa    Cruz,    san'ta  kroos; 

Sp.  pron.  san'ta  krooth. 
Sanaa  Fc;   ,Sp.  iJron.  san^a 

Santiago  de  Cuba,  san-te-U'- 
I  de  ku/ba,  or  da  koo-'ba. 
Sas-katrh'a-uan'. 


r-bo. 


M.i:  -.111    .  [M  , 

MartJiii^iiK,  111  M  I,  ii..>.k'. 
Ma-tan'zas,  or  ma-tan'thiis. 
Mat'a-pan'. 
Mauch-Chunk,        mawk- 

chHnk/. 
Maz'.^it-lan',  or  mS-sat-lSin/. 
Medina  ( Arabia),  mc-dee/na. 
Medina  (U.  S.),  me-di'na.  " 
Me-her'rio.  _    " 

Monai,m&n'iormen'a  (Str.) 
Slendociuo,  m2n-do-see'no. 
Mersey,  mer'zT. 
Merthyr  Tydvil,  or  Tydfil, 

mer'tligr  tid'vil. 
Messina,  mC'S-sec/ua. 
Miami,  ml-a'mi. 
Milan,  niTl'an  (Italy);  mi'lan 

(U.S.).    " 
Miramachi,  mir'a-ma-shee'. 
Mod'e-ua,  or  mod'a-nli. 
Mohave,"  mo-hSv'. 
Mo-luc'cag. 
Mo-nad'nock. 
Mo-non'ga-he'la- 
Mont  Blanc,  rn'oN  blGN,  or 

Mount  BiaQC. 
Mont  Cenis,  moN  Bgh-ne',  or 

soh-ness'. 
Mon^e-vid'e-o,    or  mon-tS- 

vee''da-o. 
Mont-pe'lT-er. 
Mos''co\v;      Russ.  Moskwa 

mosk-wS'. 
Mozambique, mo-zam-book', 
Munich,  mu'nik:  Ger.  Miiu 

chen,  miin/Gon. 
Muscatine,  mus'ka-teen'. 
Muskingum, mu8-Ictug'gum. 
Mysore,  mi-sor'. 

Nantes,    nants;    Fr.  pron. 

noNt. 
Nan -tuck 'gt. 
Natal,  na-taP. 
Natch'i-toch'es ;    sometimes 

pron.  nak'e-tush'. 
Neufchatel,  nush'a'teP. 
Newfoundland,     nu'fund 

land'. 
New  Or/le-ang;    o/teji,  but 


ko. 
Pesth,  pest ;    Hitng.  pron. 

pesht. 
PhiPip-pTne. 
Piacenza,  pe-a-chen'za. 
Pierre    (Saint),    sent   peer; 

Fr.  pron.  sSn  pe-SR', 
Piqua,  pik'wa. 
Pisa,  pee'sa." 
Pis-cat  ■'a-qua. 
Plaquemine,  plak'men'. 
Plata  (Rio  de  la),  re'o  da  la 

piaaa. 
Po'CQ-tal'i-cg. 
Pompeii,  pom-pa'yee, 
Pont'char- train'. 
Pon'tT-ac. 
Po-po-cat'a-p5tP. 
Port-an-Prince,        port-o- 

prTnss  ;  Fr.  pron.  poRt- 

o-pr3Nss. 
Porto  Rico,  por'to  ree'ko 

Sp.  Puerto  Rico,  pwSR'to 

ree'ko. 
Potosi,  po-to-see',  or  po-to'- 

Poughkeepsie,  po-kip'sT. 
Prague,    prag;    Ger.    Prag 

prac. 
Prairie  du  Chien,  pra'rT  djj 

sheen. 
Puebla,  pwSb'ia. 
Pyrenees,  pir'e-nez. 

Queretaro,  ka-ra-ta'ro. 
Quesada,  k5-sa'Da. 
Quiloa,  kee'lo-a. 
Quin'e-baug'. 
Quito,  kee'to. 

Racine,  ^as-seen^ 
Rahway,  raw'wa. 
Raleigh,  raw'li. 
Rangoon,  rang-goon'. 
Rap'id-an',  or  Rap'id  Ann. 
Raritan,  rir'it-un. 
Reading,  r<5d'ing. 


Terre-Haute,     tgr/reh-hot  ; 

Fr.   pron.    t5l:/hCt',     or 

t5r'r(;h-hot. 
Thames,  t6mz. 
Thibadeauville,  tib'a-do'vil. 
Thibet,  tib'et,  or  tt-bct'. 
Tim-buk'too. 
Titicaca,  tit-e-ka'ka. 
Tivoli,  tiv'o-le,  ortee'vodee. 
To-pe'ka. 
Toulon,"too'15N'. 
Toulouse,  too'looz'. 
Tours,  toou. 

TraPal-gar',  or  TrafSPgar. 
Triest,  or  Trieste,  tre-5st', 

or  tre-Gs'ta. 
Trin'Tdad'. 
Truxillo,  or  Trujillo,  troo- 

HccPyo. 
Tu'rin,  or  tu-rtn'. 
Tyr'Ql  ;  Gcj'.  7)7-on.  te-roP. 

Ulm  ;  Ger.  pron.  dblm. 

Um-ba/gog. 

Upernavik,  oo-pSR'na-vik. 

Up'sal,  or  Upsala,  up-sa'la. 

Urug'uay,  u'roo-gwa'  or  oo- 

roo-gwP. 
Utah,  yoo'ta. 
Utrecht,  u'tr^kt ;  Dntchpr. 

U'treivt. 

Valdai,  vapdi. 
VaPl.a-do-lid';    Span,  pi'on. 

val-"ya-i'i->-loi'ii'. 
Valpar;n-  .  ^:il  W^  n'M.._ 

Sp.'jn'.    ,•,:!,  'lli'u  ,  ki'' 
Vera  ("m/.  \  ;'i:i  kr.m-;. 
Verde,  verd. 
V^rgennes,  ver-jenz'. 
Versailles, vgr-salz' ;  Fr.pr. 

vBR'sal',  or  vfiR-say". 
Vienna,  ve-en'na;  Ger.Wien, 

ween,  almost  veen. 
Vienna  (U.  S.),  vl-eu'n.i. 
Vincennes,    vin-86nz';"  Fr. 

pron.  vaN'sBn'. 
Vosges,  vozh. 


S.-1i' 


Schuylkill,  skool'kil. 
Scinde,  sTnd. 
Scituate,  sit'u-at. 
Seine,  san. 

Seville,  sev'il,  or  ee-viP. 
Seychelles,  sa'sheP. 
Shawangunk,  shong'gum. 
She-boy'gan ;  formerly  lorit- 

ten  Cheboygan. 
Shcn'an-do'ah, 
Sierra,  se-eR'Ra. 
Sierra     Madre,      se-eu'ita 

raan'ra. 
Sierra  Nevada,  se-eR'Ra  na- 

va'DU. 
Sim'plon;    Fr.  pron.  saN'- 

pl6N'. 
Singapore,  sing'ga-por'. 
Sioux,  800. 
Sisal,  Bc-sSP, 
Skag'ggr  Rack. 
Skaneateles,  skan'e-at'les. 


So-i 


I'ra. 


Sorata,  so-ra'ta. 

Steubenville,  stu'bgn-vil. 

Stock'holm. 

Stutt'gart ;   Gei\  pr.  stdbt'- 

gaRt. 
Sucre,  soo'kra. 
Suez,   soo'ez ;    Arab,  pron 

soo-ez'. 
Sumatra,  soo-raa'tra. 
Surinam,  soo-rl-nam'. 
Su-Wji'nee. 
Swansea,  swon'se. 
Szegedin,85g'ed'en',  or  seg'- 

ed'in'. 

Tahiti,  ta-hPte. 
Talequah,  ta'lg-kwa. 
TaPla-has'see. 
Tamaqua,  ta-maw'kwa. 
Tampico,  lam-pee'ko. 
Taos,  tS'os ;  almost  towss. 
Taunton  (Eng.),  tawn'tgn. 
Taunton  (Mass.),  tUu'tijn. 
Teche,  tfsh. 

Tehuantepec,  ta-wan-ta-pek' 
Teneriffe,  teu'er-iP. 


wirk     [  .  S.),   wor'vvik, 
■  wor'rik. 
Washita,  07*  Ouachita,  w5sh'- 

T-taw'. 
Watervliet,  wa'tgr-vleet'. 
Wau-ke'gau. 

We/ggr;  (5er.  pron.  wa/zgr. 
Wieliczka,  weditch'k5. 
Wilkesbarre,  wilks'b3r-rT. 
Willamette,  wilda'raet;  wr. 

a/so  Walabmutte. 
Win'ne-ba'go. 
Win-ng-pg-sau'kee. 
Woolwich,     wdb  Pitch,     or 

wo^oPij. 
Worcester,  wdbs'ter 
Wiirtemberg,  wQr'tgm-berg; 

Ger.pr.  wiiR'tgm-bgRG'. 
Wy'an-dot'. 
Wy  o'ming. 

Xapeco,    or   Chapeco,   sha- 
Xarayes,  sha-rPSs.     [pa-'ko. 
Xenia,  zee'nT-a. 
Xeres;  Span.'pron.  ut-r^^' ; 

Port.  pron.  shfir-Ss'. 
Xoa,  sho'a. 

Yakootsk,  ya-kootsk'. 
Yang-tse-kiang,     yang'tse- 

ke-ang'. 
Ya-zoo'. 
Yera'en. 
Yenisei,  yen'e-sa'e,  or  yeu- 

e  sa';  or  Enisei,  en'e-sa'e. 
Yo-ko-ha'ma. 
Yo-sem'i-te. 

Youghiogheny,yCh'hQ-ga'nI 
Yp/sMan'li. 
Yu'ca-tau',  or  yoo'kS-tan'. 

Zacatecas,  zak-a-ta'kas. 

Zam-beze',  or  zam-ba'zg. 

Zauguebar,  zang'ga-bar'. 

Zan'te. 

Zan'zi-bar'.  [tsii'riK. 

Zurich,  zu'rik:    Ger.  pron. 

Zuyder  {or  Zuider)  Zee,  zP- 

dgr   zee,  or  zoo'der  zee ; 

Dutch  pron.  zoi'der  za. 


131 


APGAR'S    SYSTEM    OF   MAP-DRAWING. 


E.  A.  AND  A.  C.  APGAR. 


SUGGESTIONS    TO    TEACHERS. 

In  presenting  geographical  facts  two  niethmls  are  em- 
ployed. By  the  use  of  maps  the  fonii  and  location  of 
geographical  features  are  represented,  and  by  the  use  of 
text  the  features  thus  represented  are  described.  A  lesson 
in  text  is  committed  to  memory,  and  recited  as  given  by 
the  author.  Maps  should  be  studied  and  recited  in  the 
same  manner.  They  should  be  committed  to  memory,  and 
for  a  recitatioti  they  should  be  reproduced  as  they  appear 
in  the  book.  As  maps  represent  form,  they  should  be 
studied  as  other  forms  are  studied,  namely,  by  drawing. 
The  practice  of  drawing  maps  will  impress  their  outlines 
and  important  features  upon  the  minds  of  the  pu]>ils  in 
much  less  time  than  is  possible  by  any  other  method,  and 
the  ability  to  draw  them  is  evidence  that  the  desired  im- 
]iressious  have  been  made.  Map-dra\ving  is  the  only  true 
method  for  learning  that  part  of  geography  represented 
upon  maps. 

Materials.  —  The  materials  needed  for  map-drawing  are 
a  g(iod  lead-pencil  (No.  3  or  4),  an  eraser,  a  ruler,  four 
cakes  of  water-colors,  —  red,  green,  blue,  and  yellow, — 
two  camel-hair  pencils,  —  one  quite  small,  —  and  a  c.ike  of 
India-ink. 

Maps  in  Lead-Pencil.  —  (1)  Coast-line.  —  Commence 
at  the  northwest  and  draw  in  order  the  northern  and  east- 
ern coasts  ;  then  commence  again  at  the  northwest  and 
draw  the  western  and  southern  coasts.  Make  the  line  uni- 
form in  width,  and  avoid  sharp  angles.  (2)  Rivers.  —  Com- 
mence at  the  source  with  a  light  line,  and  increase  the 
shade  gradually  to  the  mouth.  Give  it  the  irregular 
waved  appearance.  (3)  Mountains.  —  First  draw  the  base 
lines  or  curves,  and  then  the  radiating  lines,  or  the  radi- 
ating lines  may  be  omitted.  Keep  the  pencil  sharp.  (4) 
Boundary-lines.  —  Use  the  ntler  in  drawing  the  straight 
boundary-lines.     Make  the  dots  and  spaces  equal  in  length. 

Maps  in  Lead-Pencil  and  Color.  —  Complete  the 
map  in  lead-pencil,  and  then  color  according  to  one  of  the 
following  methods.  (1)  Outliiie  Coloring.  —  Rub  one  of 
the  colors  in  a  few  drops  of  water,  on  a  plate  or  piece  of 
glass,  till  the  color  is  quite  bright,  but  not  thick.  With 
the  small  camel-hair  pencil  draw  a  bright,  narrow  line 
around  all  the  divisions  that  are  to  receive  the  color  mixed. 
Follow  in  the  same  manner  with  the  other  colors,  lieing 
careful  to  wa.sh  the  brush  each  time  before  using  a  new 
color.  In  outline  coloring  the  width  of  the  line  of  color 
aroiuid  the  map  or  division  should  not  exceed  one  sixteenth 
of  an  inch.  (2)  Surface  Coloring.  —  Mix  the  color  as  be- 
fore, but  make  it  very  light,  so  light  that  a  single  color 
upon  the  paper  is  barely  distinguishable.     Color  the  entire 


surface  of  each  division  with  its  proper  tint,  using  the  large 
brush.  When  dry,  color  tlu'  boundaries  according  to  the 
first  method,  using  lor  tlie  boundary  of  each  divi.sion  the 
.same  tint  as  that  upon  the  surface.  This  method  needs 
great  care.  In  putting  on  the  light  tint  the  brush  must  be 
well  filled  with  color,  and  the  whole  division  must  be  com- 
pletely covered  before  any  yiortion  is  dry. 

Maps  in  Color  and  India-Ink.  —  Complete  the  map 
in  lead-pencil,  ni.ikiug  all  the  lines  very  light,  then  color 
according  to  one  of  the  methods  explained,  and  finally 
retrace  every  line  in  lead-pencil  with  India-ink.  Rub  the 
ink  with  water  in  a  shallow  purcelain  dish  till  it  is  (piite 
black,  and  with  a  fine  steel  pen  draw  the  coast  line,  moun- 
tains, and  ri\'ers. 

Lettering.  —  LettiM'ing  improves  a  map  if  it  is  well 
dime,  l)Ut  it  should  not  be  nndcM'taken  unless  it  c;in  be 
matle  to  resembh'  the  lettering  upon  the  printed  map.  A 
map  looks  much  better  without  any  lettering,  unless  it  can 
l)e  done  with  exceeding  neatness,  care,  and  accuracy. 

Coasting.  —  Coasting,  like  lettering,  recpiires  great  care. 
Each  line  must  be  completed  around  the  entire  division 
and  islands  before  tlie  next  is  commenced.  The  water-lines 
forming  the  coasting  should  cover  about  one  fourth  of  an 
inch  in  width,  and  within  this  space  there  may  be  dra«Ti, 
with  a  hard  and  sharp-pointed  pencil,  or  with  a  fine  steel 
pen,  about  six  lines. 

Practice.  —  Draw  the  inaji  several  times  from  the  copy, 
and  then  draw  one  from  memory.  Compare  the  last  draw- 
ing with  the  copy,  and  con-ect  all  mistakes.  Draw  ;»gain 
from  copy,  and  then  from  memory,  and  correct  as  before. 
Repeat  this  alternate  drawing  from  copy  and  from  memory 
until  the  whole  map  can  be  drawn  fiom  memorj'  with  such 
accuracy  that  neither  the  ]ni]iil  nor  the  teacher  can  detect 
mistakes. 

While  it  is  well  to  have  pupils  color  some  of  their  maps 
with  ciire,  too  much  time  should  not  be  expended  in  orna- 
mentation. All  exercises  in  nuip-drawing  should  be  of  such 
a  nature  as  to  prepare  the  pupils  to  draw  rapidly,  accurately, 
and  without  the  co)iy.  In  drawing  a  continent,  the  pupils 
should  be  taught,  first,  to  construct  the  diagram  accu- 
rately ;  second,  to  draw  the  coast-line,  and  to  de,scribe  all 
the  features  formed  by  it,  such  as  peninsulas,  capes,  bays, 
gulfs,  etc.  ;  and  third,  to  draw  and  describe  the  internal 
features,  such  as  mountains,  lakes,  rivers,  and  cities.  It  is 
all  important  that  the  pupils  should  be  able  to  draw  the 
outline  of  a  continent  readily  and  accur.ately,  before  they 
attempt  to  re])resent  the  internal  features,  for  upon  an  im- 
perfect drawing  of  the  outline,  the  details  must  necessiirily 
be  imperfect. 


MAP  OP 

NORTH  AJSIERICA 

By  E.  A.  *  A.  0.  AlgBT. 
Scale  XOOO  MiJ€s  to  an  Incli. 


SOUTH 

AMERICA 


DIRECTIONS  FOE  DRAWING  NORTH  AMERICA. 

Diagram.  —  1.  Draw  a  quadrant,  and  divide  it  into  four 
equal  parts,  as  represented  in  the  figure.  Through  the  first 
division  at  1,  and  the  riglit  angle,  draw  the  first  line  of  the 
diagram  the  length  desired  for  the  map. 

2.  From  the  centre  of  this  line,  draw  the  line  C  D  at  right 
angles  with  it,  and  one  half  its  length.  Connei-t  A  D  and 
B  I). 

3.  Extend  the  line  C  D  toward  E,  making  the  whole 
length  D  E  eijual  to  A  D  or  B  D,  and  draw  the  lines  A  E 
ami  EB. 

)  4.  Divide  the  line  A  E  into  four  equal  parts,  and  from 
the  upper  division-point  at  G  draw  the  line  G  H  at  right 
angles  to  A  E,  and  equal  to  E  C  in  length.  Connect  A 
and  H. 

5.  Div-ide  the  line  E  B  into  two  equal  parts,  and  from 
its  centre,  and  at  right  angles  with  it,  draw  tlie  line  /  J 
one  half  the  length  of  E  G,  and  connect  E  and  J  and  J 
and  B. 

6.  Divide  the  lines  C  D  and  C  B  each  into  two  equal 
parts,  and  the  lines  A  D  and  D  B  each  into  six  ecpial  parts. 

7.  Subdivide  the  lower  division  of  the  line  D  B  into 
tliree  equal  parts,  and  from  the  di\'ision-point  at  L  draw 
L  M,  and  from  M  draw  M  N,  and  from  JV  draw  N  0,  — 
making  the  length  of  each  line  equal  to  two  thirds  of  the 
distance  from  li  to  K,  or  equal  to  the  distance  from  L 
to  K.  (__ 

Points  of  Coincidence.  —  The  position  of  Point  Bar- 
row is  determined  liy  the  northern  angle  of  the  diagram  ; 
Cape  Charles  by  the  eastern  angle  ;  Port  of  Guatemala  by 


the  southern  angle  ;  Bay  of  San  Francisco  by  the  western 
angle  ;  and  the  western  extremity  of  Alaska  Peninsula  by 
the  northwestern  angle. 

*  Drawing  the  Map.  —  Arctic  Coast.  —  Commence  at 
Point  Barnjw.  Make  the  mouth  of  the  Mackenzie  River 
ojjposite  the  first  di\ision  ;  Victoria  Land  on  the  second  ; 
the  mouth  of  Hudson  Bay  between  the  third  and  fourth, 
and  Ungava  Bay  and  Cape  Chidley  near  the  fifth  division. 
The  southern  extremity  of  Hudson  Bay  touches  the  line 
G  D  near  its  centre. 

Atlantic  Coast.  —  Make  the  Peninsula  of  Nova  Scotia 
opposite  the  first  division  ;  Cape  Cod  north  of  the  second, 
and  Cape  Fear  at  the  third.  The  western  shore  of  Florida 
crosses  at  the  fourth  division,  the  mouth  of  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico  is  between  the  fourth  and  fifth,  and  Yucatan  Penin- 
sula extends  as  far  north  as  the  fifth.  The  shore  of  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico  crosses  the  line  G  B  near  its  centre,  and  touches 
the  line  E  B.  The  shore  of  Central  America  and  the  Isth- 
mus of  Panama  follow  closely  the  zigzag  line  from  K  to  0. 

Pacific  Coast.  —  California'  Pensinsnla  extends  nearly  as 
far  smith  as  the  angle  at  J,  and  the  eastern  shore  of  the 
Gulf  of  California  crosses  the  line  I J  near  its  centre. 

Note.  —  It  will  be  observed  that  the  Lake  of  the  Woods  is 
on  the  Hne  C  D,  midway  between  its  centae  and  C  ;  also,  that 
Lake  Erie  is  midway  between  the  centres  of  the  lines  C  D 
and  B  D. 


*  In  these  direetions  for  drawing,  some  features  a 
not  found  u]>on  the  acconii'anying  maps.  In  snchc 
the  pupil  will  refer  to  the  other  maps  in  the  book. 


Scale  1000  SUITS  to  «n  Inch 


EXPLANATION  OF  SIGNS. 


CITIES  AND  TOWNS. 
Each  Line  represents  a    E;icli    Line    upon 
populution  of  10,000. 


o  10,000 

+ 20,000 

■if 30,000 

tt 40,000 

^  50,000 


'.noh  Line  npnn  the 
n..t  anrt  Circle  ('.«) 
represents  1,000,000 
irili.abit.-ints. 


etc.,  etc 


100,000 
200,000 
300,000 
..400,000 
300,000 


1,000,000 
2,000,000 
3,000,000 


# 4,000,000 

etc.,  etc. 


MOUNTAIN  RANGES. 
)))))))))));»»)»)  First  Class  or  Hilk.  —  Under  2,000  feet  hi-b. 
^v-v^^— i^^^Jaj.  Second  ansa.  —  Between  2,000  anil  8,000  feet  bi?b,  or 
'"''    ^^'^TT5'%     between  K  "'"I  IK  niiles  high. 

4  Third  auss.  —  Between  8,000  and  16,000  feet  high,  or 
J\|     between  IK  and  3  miles  high. 

,^^,^<^^v'^JA>S>^M^'""""'  '^"w.  —  Over  16,000  feet  high,  or  over  3  miles 


MOUNTAIN  PEAKS. 
For  Peal;s  under  one  mile  bigli  each  Curve  Ujion  the  right  represents  One 
F'.urtli  of  a  Mile  Elev.ation  :  for  those  one  mile  higli  or  Tiiore.  each  Line 
right  represents  One  Mile  in  Elevation  anil  the  Dasli  underncatli 


One  n.alf  a  Mile. 
/^  >4'  of  a  mile  high. 


A   1  mile  high. 
A   IJi  miles  high. 
A   2 


A  2}J  miles  high. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  DRAWING  SOUTH  AMERICA. 

Diagram. —  1.  Draw  the  vertical  line  A  B  the  length 
desired  fur  the  map,  and  di\'ide  it  into  Ibnr  ecjual  parts. 
From  the  upper  division-point  draw  a  liorizontal  line  to 
the  ri<^ht,  one  half  the  length  of  the  fii-st  line,  and  tlivide  it 
into  three  equal  ])arts.  E.vtcnd  llii.-;  horizontal  line  mie 
third  of  its  length  to  the  left. 

2.  Draw  straight  lines  from  C  to  F,  from  F  to  A,  from  A 
to  E,  and  from  E  to  B,  and  divide  the  lines  F  A,  A  E,  and 
E  B  each  into  tliree  equal  parts.  >__ 

General  Form.  —  South  America  in  its  general  form  is 
wcdgi'-shaped,  —  being  wide  toward  the  north  anil  narrow 
toward  the  south.  Its  coast-line  is  simple,  and  deviates  but 
little  from  the  lines  of  the  diagram.  The  length  of  the  Con- 
tinent from  north  to  south  is  4,500  miles. 

Points  of  Coincidence.  —  The  position  of  the  Penin- 
sula of  Paraguana  is  determined  by  the  northern  angle  of 
the  figure  ;  Cape  St.  Ro(pie  by  the  eastern  angle  ;  Cape 
Pillar  by  the  southern,  and  Cape  Farina  by  the  western. 
Ojiposite  the  second  division-point,  on  the  line  FA,  is  the 
Isthmus  of  Panama ;  and  opposite  the  second,  on  the  line 
A  E,  is  the  mouth  of  the  Amazon.  Opposite  the  first  divis- 
ion on  the  line  E  B  is  Cape  Frio,  and  opposite  the  second 
is  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  de  la  Plata, 


134 


EUEOPE 


JijE  A.  4,4.  C.  ipgar. 


.  0»«4* 


V( 


xA  tr  s/t  r  I 


f^ 

r 

Wj! 

± 

>iJ 

^ 

-+1U 

S 

^ 

""1/4 

R   K 

ji 

A 

C 

X 

^ 

^^ 

-< 

) 

'      \ 

4 

4. 

P-^ 

JS 

Z) 

J- 

'< 

^^ 

A 

K- 

1 

CONSTANTINOPLE 

^ 

/ 

\ 

1  \j» 

Siat»^ 





^ 

X. 

f-fe- 

x^ 

>!>> 

\ 

r 

p 

fS 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  DRAWING   EUROPE. 

Diagram.  —  Draw  the  horizontal  line  A  B  the  length 
ilesireil  fnr  Ihe  map.  Thi.s  line  connects  the  mouth  of  the 
Douro  Pviver  with  Cape  Apsheron.  Its  length  is  3,000 
miles.  With  .4  and  B  as  centres,  and  with  a  radius  equal 
to  three  fourths  of  A  B,  draw  arcs  to  ii  lersect  at  C,  and 
connect  A  and  C,  and  B  and  C.  Divide  A  C  into  four,  C B 
into  six,  and  A  B  into  eight  equal  parts.     From  the  first 


division  to  the  rii,dit  of  G  and  from  the  angle  A  draw  ver- 
tical lines,  as  shown  in  the  figure,  each  one  eighth  the  length 
of  .4  B.  Connect  H  and  I,  and  divide  the  right-hand  lialf 
of  this  line  into  four  equal  parts.  From  D  draw  a  perpen- 
dicular line  equal  to  two  and  one  half  divisions  on  the  line 
A  B,  and  liisect  it.  Connect  C  and  F,  and  E  and  B.  From 
K  draw  a  line  in  the  direction  of  the  centre  oi  C  B  until  it 
meets  a  vertical  line  drawai  from  the  angle  G. 

Map.  —  Commence  at  G,  on  the  coast  of  Norway,  and 
draw,  in  order,  the  northern  and  eastern  boundaries  ;  then 
commence  again  at  G  and  draw  the  western  and  southern 
boundaries.  The  coast  of  Norway  follows  the  line  G  A,  and 
extends  south  to  a  point  about  nudway  between  C  and  A''. 
Tlie  lines  G  L  and  L  K  will  assist  in  drawing  the  Gulf  of 
Bothnia,  the  Baltic  Sea,  and  the  northwestern  shores  of 
Germany  and  France.  The  head  of  the  Bay  of  Biscay  is 
near  the  first  division  to  the  right  of  A,  on  the  line  A  B. 
The  Gull's  of  Lyons  and  Genoa  are  on  opposite  sides  of  the 
second  division.' and  the  lieail  of  Ihe  Adriatic  Sea  embraces 
the  third  division.  The  fifth  division  marks  the  western 
extremity  of'the  Black  Sea  ;  the  Sea  of  Azov  is  north  of  the 
sixth  division,  and  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  Black  Sea 
is  near  the  seventh.  Italy  resembles  in  outline  the  shape  of 
a  boot.  Tlie  southern  extremity  is  between  the  first  and 
second  divisions  to  the  right  of  /  on  the  line  H  I.  The 
Peninsula  of  Greece  is  situated  between  the  second  and 
third  divisions,  and  extends  south  of  this  line  equal  to  one 
division.  The  Sea  of  Marmora  is  a  little  north  of  I.  The 
British  Lsles  are  triangular  in  outline,  and  their  length  north 
and  south  is  equal  to  one  fourth  oi  A  G. 


135 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  DRAWING  ASIA. 

Diagram. —  I'kiw  tlic  vritir:il  line  .1  /;  :i  liItU:  luoi-o  tli.m  one  half 
the  leiigtLi  (k'sired  fov  the  ]iia]>.  iiortli  and  soiith.  Divide  it  into  three 
criual  ])arts,  and  tlie  upper  IhiVd  into  two  parts.  From  the  point  li 
draw  the  horizontal  line  B  G  one  .and  one  sixth  times  the  length  of 
.1  />.  Bisect  it,  and  connect  A  and  C.  Trisect  A  C,  then  bisect  the 
middle  division  and  trisect  the  upper.  With  the  points  A  .and  C  as 
centres,  and  with  a  radius  eipial  to  one  and  two  thirds  times  the  first 
line,  dr.-nv  .arcs  to  intersect  at  A  ami  connect  A  and  /),  and  C  and  D. 
Trisect  .1  D  and  bisect  the  niicMlc  division.  Divide  the  line  CD  into 
t'nnr  ei^u.il  parts,  and  bisect  lioth  of  the  extreme  di\nsions.  Draw  the 
lines  E  P  .and  -Vi  and  bisect  them  ;  also  one  from  0  to  AT  and  tri.sect 
it.  From  the  lower  trisecting  point  on  the  line  0  K  draw  a  line 
toward  J  till  it  meets  the  line  A"  L. 

Map.  —  Commence  at  Ea.>;t  Cape  and  ilraw  in  onler  the  eastern,  southern,  and 
western  bnunilaries,  inchidiiig  tlie  Bl.ack  .'iea  ;  then  commence  .-isiain  at  Ea.st  Cape 
and  linisli  the  outline.  Tl'.e  sliore  of  Kamcliatka  crosse.s  at  the  fii-st  ilivision  on 
tlie  line  D  C  :  the  snntlicrn  shore  of  the  Sea  of  Ochotsk  is  at  G ;  the  Yellow  Sea 
is  ne.ar  the  centre  of  the  line  at  // ;  the  Gulf  of  Tonqnin  is  at  /  ;  and  the  Gull 
of  Si.am  is  near  the  last  division.  If  we  suppose  aline  drami  from  this  division- 
point  parallel  with  the  line  .1  C.  it  will  .assist  in  deterniinins  the  position  of  the 
Gulf  of  Siani  and  the  Ilav  of  Bcn^'al.  Cape  Romania  coincides  with  the  angle  at  C, 
and  Cape  ConMrin  with  the  lower  division  on  the  line  0  K.  The  he.id  of  the  Per- 
sian Gulf  is  near  the  centre  of  the  trian^de  .-I  .V  /,.  The  Strait  of  Bab-el-M.andeb 
is  at  X  ;  the  Isthmus  of  Suez  between  A  and  .1/ ;  anrl  tlie  Strait  of  Bosphonis, 
.at  A .  The  Bl.ack  Sea  extends  as  far  east  as  the  first  division  on  the  line  A  C,  and 
tl'.e  Caspian  Sea  touches  this  line  at  the  second  di\  ision.  Tlie  jiosition  of  the  Cas- 
pian Sea,  the  Ural  River,  and  Ural  Mountains  is  determined  by  the  line  E  C. 


136 


Tropic  of  Capricorn 
MAP  OF 

AFRICA 

By  E.  A.  &  A.  C.  Apgar. 


2J  Scalfi  1000  Miles  to  an  Inch 


-^     ■-'sullia. 


DIRECTIONS  FOB  DRAWING  AFRICA. 
Diagram.  —  1.  By  means  of  a  quadrant  ilivideil  into  six 
equal  parts,  a.s  represented  in  the  figure,  draw  the  first  line 
of  the  diagram  the  length  desired  for  the  map. 

2.  Divide  this  line  into  two  equal  parts  at  C,  and  tlie 
upper  Iialf  in  four  equal  jiarts. 

3.  With  the  points  A  and  B  a.s  centres,  and  with  a  radius 
equal  to  three  fourths  of  the  first  line,  draw  two  arcs  to 
intersect  at  1),  and  draw  the  lines  A  D  and  B  D.  In  the 
same  manner  w^ith  the  points  A  and  C  as  centres,  and  with 
a  radius  equal  to  three  fourths  of  the  line  A  C,  determine 
the  point  E,  and  draw  A  E  and  C  E. 

4.  Di\'ide  the  line  A  D  into  two  equal  jiarts,  and  draw 
the  perpendicular  F  H  ei^waX  to  one  eightli  of  the  first  line. 
Divide  the  part  F  D  into  two  equal  parts,  and  draw  the 
lines  A  iland  H  G.  Trisect  each  of  the  lines  A  H,  D  B, 
B  C,  and  C  E. 

General  Form.  —  Africa  resembles  both  North  America 
and  South  America  in  its  general  form,  being  wide  at  the 
north  and  narrow  toward  the  south.  Its  coast  is  very  regu- 
lar, like  that  of  South  America.  Its  length,  from  Cape 
Spartel  to  Cape  Agulhas,  is  5,000  miles.  Like  South 
America,  it  is  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Equator. 


Points  of  Coincidence.  —  The  position  of  Cape  Spar- 
tel is  determined  by  tlie  northern  angle  of  the  diagram  ; 
the  Isthmus  of  Suez  by  the  northeastern  angle  ;  Cape  Guar- 
<lafui  by  the  eastern  angle  ;  Cape  Agulhas  by  the  southern, 
and  Cape  Eo.xo  by  the  western. 

Outline.  —  Commence  at  Cape  Spartel,  and  draw  the 
northern  and  eastern  coasts;  then,  from  the  same  point, 
draw  the  -western  coast.  The  coast  from  Cape  Spartel  to 
Cape  Bon  is  without  the  line  of  the  diagram  ;  then  it  crosses 
the  line,  and  forms  the  Gulf  of  Sidra,  opposite  the  second 
ilivision-point.  The  western  shore  of  the  Red  Sea  follows 
the  line  R  G,  and  makes  an  inward  curve  between  (7  and  D. 
The  eastern  shore  first  makes  a  small  outward  curve ; 
touches  the  line  at  the  first  division-point,  and  then  makes 
a  much  larger  bend  without  the  line,  touching  again  at 
Cape  Agulhas.  From  this  point  it  deviates  but  little  from 
the  diagram  till  it  reaches  Cape  Lopez.  Between  this  point 
and  the  first  division  on  the  line  C  E,  there  is  a  large  in- 
ward bend  forming'  the  Gulf  of  Guinea.  It  then  bends 
without  the  line  till  we  reach  Cape  Roxo.  From  Cape 
Roxo  to  Cape  Spartel  the  coast  is  wholly  without  the  line. 
Madagascar  Island  is  situated  opposite  the  middle  third  of 
the  line  D  B. 


137 


PRONUNCIATION   OF   DIFFICULT   GEOGRAPHICAL   NAMES. 


1^^  All  marks  used  to  iiidicatn  pronnnciation  are  the  Bamn  as  arc  employed  in  TVebstcr*9  Dictionary,  last  edition. 
FCxiM, A  NATION  (>F  MARKS. —  Ti,  (".  I,  o,  u,  >',  Io7iff  ;  a,  c,  u,  kss  profoiif/ctl :  H,  C-,  T,  o,  tt,  y,  short:  3,  g,  I,  q^  obscure;  care,  f^r,  list,  fall,  whgit ; 
there,  voil,  term;  pVquc,  ftrm;  d5ne,  for,  (Iq,  w^lf,  ftjGd,  fdbt;  fQrl,  njde,  pysh;  e,  i,  o,  silent;  a,  sound  of  louf/M;  ii,  similar  to  e  in  Iior;  u,  Wt*' 
theFrnicUn:  ee,  sound  of  i  in  spirit;  f  ksb;  fh  as  sh;  c,  ch,  ns  k;  &(tsj,%as  in  get;  gasz;  jrwgz;  q  «/;$  t'/t  linger,  liyk;  tli  a^  ih  thine;  I, 
/i7:e  Hi  in  million ;  n,  like  ni  in  minion ;  s,  nearly  like  z ;  n,  similar  to  th  in  this ;  o,  sound  of  Oeirman  ch ;  11,  strongly  aspirated ;  k,  sound  of 
German  ch  ;  X,  French  naital  sound  ;  n,  like  rr  in  terror. 


Abookut;!,  n  be-okii'ta. 
.\h/er-dcen'. 
Ahomov.  nh'o-niS'. 
Aliniikir,  rt  ti.io  keer/. 

.\c  ijHiliM,  -,  I  \   ixioVko. 

Arh  .-,,  ..■■■   \irl,-een/. 
Aruur:i;:u:u  A  k.-n-klUgw-n. 
Acri',  IVkcr,  o?-  a'ker. 
Aden,  SMiju;    Arab.  pron. 

n'di'n. 
AdipT*".   il'de-je  ;     ft.   ;jroj?. 


\i    I -1,11,    "ii  LTiin'is-tSn'. 

A.-nlli  ;    ,    I''vri8. 

Ai.\-l,i  <  li:iiull.,aks-ia-sha'- 

pel'. 
Ajaccio,  a  ytlt'eho. 
Al'bans. 
.4lamo,  U'la-mo. 
Al'be-nmrle  (Eng.). 
Al'be-marle'(U.S.) 
Albuquerque,   nl  boo-k5i'/- 

ka,  or  al'boo-kCrk. 
Alcantara,  al-kan'ta-m. 
Al'dt-r-ney. 
Alenfon,  a-lcn'sQn ;    French 

pron.  a45N'son'. 
A  lep'po. 


Alnwick,  or  Alncwick,  an'- 

nik. 
Alsace,  al'sass'. 
Altai,  al  ti'. 

Altamaha,  awl'ta-ma-haw'. 
Al'tQn. 
Am -boy'. 
Am-boy'na. 
Amiens,  a?n'!-suz;  Fr.pron. 

a'me'GN'. 
Amite,  a-meet', 
Am'9S-k6ag'. 
A-n5m'. 
An'da-man'. 
Andorra,  an-doR'ua. 
An'do-vgr. 
An'dros-cog'gin. 
Anglesey,    or    Anglesea, 

ang'gUse. 
An-go'la. 

Angostura,  Hn-gos-too'ra, 
An-nap'o-lis. 
An-tie'tam. 
Antigua'  an-te'ga. 
Antilles,  tin  teer'or  ("jN'teel', 
Apache,  a  pa'chu. 
Ap'en-nlne!;. 
Ap/pa  la'cIiT-an, 
Ap'pa-lach'T  co'la. 
Ap'po-mat't5x. 
Ar'al. 

Archangel,  ark-an'j51. 
Arequipa,  a-ra-kee'pa. 
At^Xg,  ar-gile'. 
Arica,  a-re'ka. 
Arispe,  H-res'pa. 
Ar-kan'sas,   formerly    pro 

nounce'd,    and    sometimes 

written,  Ar'kan-saw. 
Armagli,  ar-ma', 
A-roos'tobk. 

A-shan'tee,  or  Xsh'an-tee'. 
Asb'ta-bu'ia. 
Asia,  a'shT-a  ;  often  improp 

erly  pronounced  ix'zht-a. 
As'pin-wall. 


Xs'sani. 
As-sin'ui-boin'. 

Aseuan,    or    Assouan,   Us 

swan'. 
Asuncion,  a-sijn/ge-on. 
X-ta-ca'ma. 
At-ba'ra. 

Atchafalaya,  ateli-af-a-lT'a. 
Augg'bur^;    German  pron 

"  OWGS'booRO. 

Augustine,  St.,  sent-avv'gu; 

teen'. 
Au  Sable,  o-sablS'. 
Aus'tgr-litz,  -lit! 


il  ,/'--;■/ j'ro».bra-zecl'. 
>s,  bra'/.ys,orbra's.-ss 
I't-n,  or  bra'men  (Ktir  , 
non  fU.  S.).     " 

>ii  Cap-').  I. fit  nil. 


I  Cherbourg,    slier'bur; 
UHr'-      shPR'booR'. 
jches'a-peak*'. 


'pron.  ows'tcr-lits. 

liiir'i 

im-ily. 

■Vviguon,  il'vCii'vuS'. 

KUNh 

ro.  boo-sherr'. 

<'vil-la. 

Butte 

,  liut. 

Avon,  Sv'Sn,  or  S'von. 

Az'of. 

(Ti'di 

i:  Sp.prnn.  kS'iirth 

Azores,  a-zorz',  or  a-zo 

rcz. 

Caen 

IDus'Hel-dorf;    Ger.  DUssel- 
I     dorf,  dus'si'l-doRf. 
DwI'ua;  Jinss.pronA\cc'vi&, 

lE'bro;  .S'/».  prf>».  ii'bro. 
I  Ecuador,  ek-wU-doii'. 
I  Edinburgh,  etl'in-bur-mh. 
I  p;ibc,  clb ;  Ger.  ~pron.  el'bijh. 
;EI-boorz',  orEl-brooz';icnY- 
I    tfn  also  KIburz  tj*  Elbrouz. 

I-n-Ianil*  in -'-land, 

.  1.1. Ill'  III..-   runrarce^Gs. 
1. 1.-  ■   i';i  .■   ■■  i:i-''ga-beci:'g3 


Bab'el  man'dcb. 

Baden,  ba'den,  or  bad'gn. 

Ba-ha'ma£.  " 

Babia,  bU-e'a. 

Baikal,  bl'kal'. 

BaUe-ar'ic  (Islands). 

Balize,  bU-Ieez'. 

Balkan,  b:il-kan'. 

Bnl-mOr'al. 

Bang'koli'. 

Bangor  fEng.),  bang'ggr. 

Bau'g6r(U.S.). 

Barbados,  or  Barbadoes,  bar 

ba'doz. 
Bar-ce-lo'na,  or  baR-tha-lo' 

na. 
Bar'ne-gat'. 
Barn'sta  ble. 
Basle,  bai. 
Bayou  la  Fourche,  bi'oo  l\ 

fjirsh. 
Baton  Rouge,  bat'un  roozh. 
Bayonue,  ba'yon'. 
Beaufort     (British     Domin- 
ions), bo'fiirt. 
Beaufort  (S.  C),  bu'furt. 
Behring  (Strait),  beer'ing. 
Bel-fast'  (Ireland). 
BeVfast  (Maine). 
Bellefontaine  (France),  bel'- 

fOx'tan'. 
Bellefontaine    (U.   S.),    bM- 

fCn'tgn. 
Belle  Isle,  or  Bellisle,bel  Tl'. 
Belloochistan,  bel-Ioo'chis- 
Benares,  ben-a'r6s,       [tan'. 
Bengal,  ben-gawl'. 
Benguela,  ben-ga'lU. 
Berbera,  b5r'be-ra. 
BPrg'en  (U.  S,). 
Bur'lin:  (7er.pron. b6R-Ieen'. 
Ber-mu'dag,orBer-moo'thes. 
BCrne:    Fr.  and  Ger.  pron- 

bt-Rn  or  beini. 
Bernard',  Saint. 
Berwick  (Eng.),  bC-r'rik. 
Ber'wick(U.  S.). 
Bexar  ;    Sp.  pron.  ba-HaR': 

often  pron.  by  the  Texans 

bgh-har',  or  bar. 
Biloxi,  be-loks't. 
Binghamton,  bing'nra-tun. 
Birmingham,  bTr'ming-um. 
Blane  (Mont),  m5N  blgx,  or 

Mount  Blanc. 
Bogota,  bo-go-ta'. 
Boise,  bwa-za'. 
Bokhara,  bo-Ka'ra. 
Bologna,  bo-15n'ya. 
Bom-bay'. 
Bordeaux,  boR'do'. 
Borgne,  born. 
Bos'po-rus,  or  Bos'plio-ru 
Boulogne,  boo-lon 

pron.  boo'loii'. 


isieu,    kai'ka-shj),    or 
'ka-shji. 

...  kal  la'o.  ..rkiil-Va'O. 


,  ka  rri'kas 


Sp. 


Carden.as.  kar-dfi'nas. 
Car'ib-be'an  Sea. 
CarlsruheJ'  or   Karlsruhe, 

karls'roo. 
Ca-r?in'di:I5t. 
Cartagena,  kar'ta-je'na;  Sp, 

pron.  kaR-ta-Ha'na." 
cash -mere'. 
Caspe,  kas'pii. 
Cas'sgl. 

Castile,  kas-teel'. 
Castine,  kas-tcen'. 
Ca-taw'ba. 

Cat'e-gat.  or  Kattegat. 
Catoehe,  kato'cha. 
Cat'ta-rau'gus. 
Cau'ca-sus. 
Caxias,  kashe'aR._ 
Cayembe,  kl-am'ba. 
Cayenne,  kl-en'. 
Cayes,  k.a. 
Cayuga,  ka-yoo'ga. 
Celebes,  cel'e-biz." 
Ccn'is,  or  se'nc', 
Ceuta,  sii'ta ;  Sp.pron.  tha'- 

00-ta. 


rii 


■  sT-Ion'. 


^rii.nii'aiiiv.  >Itri'raoo'ne'. 
jChaiidclour,  sban-dg-loor'. 

Chapultepec,     cha-pool-t3- 

pek'. 
Irbar'T-tgn. 
jChat'ta-hoo'che. 
jChat'ta-noo'ga. 

Chautauqua,   "sha-taw'kwa; 
I    formerly  written  Chautau- 

■que 


iiVent'A  Chemung,  she-mSu 


Kstreniailura,     es-tr3-ma- 

Doo'ra. 
Etienne,Saint,  siNt  et'e-en'. 
Et'0-1    ■ 


(  ivita   Vrcchia,  chee'vetU 

vf:-k'ke-a. 
Cobija,  ko-bee'Ha. 

Cochabaniba,ko-cha-bam'ba'  Euboeai"  u-be'S. 
Co'chin  Chi'na.  Eufaula,  H  fa'Ia. 

Cohabuila,  ko-a-wee'ia.         jEu.xIne,  yjix'in. 
Cohoes,  or  Cahoos,  koho: 
Co-im'bra,  or  ko-eem'bra. 
Colima,  Ic 


Colo- 
ko'Io 


.  ko-lon'  :  Fr.pron 


Ge 


Kiiln 


cong 


ZaVi 


Congi 
za-i 

Connau-ht,  kon'nawt. 
Co'pen-h.a'ge":     t)«n.  Kjci- 

benhavn,kyo  ben-bown'. 
Cor'do-va,  or  Cordoba. 
Corea,  kn-re'a. 
Corfu,  kor-foo',  or  kor'fu. 
Costa  Rica,  kus'ta  re'ka. 
Cotopaxi,  ko'to-paks'c ;  Sp. 

pron.  ko-to-paii'ne. 
Cracow,  kr.a'ko. 
Cri-rae'a. 
Croix  (St.),  kroi. 
Csaba,  chf>b'5. 
Cuenca,  kwen'ka. 
Curaana,  kj]-ma  na'. 
Cura^oa,  ku'ra-so'. 
Cuyahoga,  ki'a-ho'ga. 
Cuzco,  koos'ko. 

Dahlonega,  dalfln'e-ga. 
Dahomey,    or    Dahomay, 

dab-ho'mn'. 
Dardanelles,  dar'da-nelz'. 
Darien  (<ia.),  da're'gn. 
Darien  (Isthmus  of),  da-re- 

en'. 
De-ca'tur. 

Delhi  (Hindostan),  del'lee. 
Delhi  (i:.  S.),  del'bi. 
Demerara,  dem'^r-a'ra. 
Des  Sloines,  de-moiu',  or 

defi  moinz. 
Dbawalagliiri,      da-wol'a- 

ger're. 
Dieppe,  dyep,  or  de-ep'. 
Dijon,  cle'zhox'. 
Dnieper,   nee'pj;r;    Russian 

pron.  dnyep'jjr. 
Dniester,  nees'ter ;  Russian 

pron.  dnyCs'tcr. 
Dominica,  dom'e-nce'ka, 
Dongola,  dong'go-la. 
Do'vre-a  eld' ;  Norw.  Daa- 

vrefjeld,  do'vri'-fyeld'. 
Drontbeim,dront'im,  Norw. 

Trondjem,  trond'yem. 
Dubuque.  du-b(5t)k'. 
Duluth,  dii-Iiith'. 
Dumfries,  dum-frecs'. 
Dun-dee'. 
Duquesne,  du-kan'.  | 


Faroe,  fa'ro. 
Fauquier,  faw  keer'. 
Fayal,  firawl';    Port.  pron. 

nai'. 

Fcejee,  f?'je. 

Fernandin-i.  fCr-nan-de'na. 
Ferrara,  feRita'ra. 
Ferrol,  fGR-Uol'. 
Fezzan,  i'Cz'zan'. 
Finisterre  ( Cape),  fiu-is-t5r'; 

Sp.  Finisticrra,  fee-nis-te- 
FSnd  du  Lac.  [fiR'Ra. 

For- mo' Ma. 
Freiburg,*  fri'burg,  or  fri' 

bdbRG. 
Frio,  frec'o. 

Fu'ca. 

Fuegos,fn-a'goee. 
Fuuchal,  foon-shal'. 
Funen,  fu'ngn. 
Fusiyaraa,  fu-sl-ya-ma'. 

Gairdner,  gard'ner. 

Galapagos,  gal'.vpa'gus. 

Ga-le'na. 

Gallinas,  gaUe'nas. 

(ial'ves-lyn. 

Galway,  gawl'wa. 

Garonne,  ga-rou'. 

Gas'co-nj;'. 

Gaspe,  ghs'pS'. 

rten'oa;  It.GenovaJen'o-va 

Geysers,  gi'egrz. 

Ghent,  gent;  Fr.Gand,g5>'. 

Giesscn,  gees'sgn. 

Gila,  He'la. 

Girondc.  je-rond';  Fr.pron. 

zhC'roNd'. 
Gloucester,  glos'tgr, 
Gobi,  go'be. 
Gon'dar. 

Gtiteborg,  yo-ta-boRg'. 
Gotha,  go'ta. 
Gottiugeu,    or  Goettingen, 

get'ting-en,argot'ting-gu. 
Granada,  graua'da;    Span. 

pron.  grU-na'na. 
Greenwich.  grTn'Ij. 
Guadalajara,  or  Guadalaxa- 

ra,  gwa-i>a  la-iia'ra. 

Guadaloupe,  gaw'da-loop', 

_3'da-loop'. 
Guadalquivir,         gaw'dal- 
kwiv'gr ;   Sp.  pron.  gw"a- 


ual-ke  veeR'. 

Iliad): 


r'de-i'i 


or 


138 


PRONUNCIAT 


14  DAY  USE 

TO_DESK  FROM  WHICH  BO, 


Guatemala,  gaw'te-m&'la,  or 

gwa-te-ttiU'la. 
Guayama,  gwI-il'mS.  ^ — 
Guayaquil,  gwi-U-kecl'. 
Guayraas,  gwT'mas. 
Guiaua,  ge-ii-'na,  or  Guyana. 
Guinea,  giu'c.  " 
Guyaudott,  gl-an-dof . 

Hague,  haig. 
Hakodadi,  nJl-ko-dil'dee. 
Ham'burg;  Ger.pron.h'^wi'- 

boouG. 
Han'o-ver;  Ger.Han-no'vcr. 
Haverhill  (Eng-.),  hav'or-il. 
Haverliill  (Mass.),  ba'ver-il. 
Havre  de  Grace,  hav-er  de 

grSss. 
Hawaii,  liU-wi'ee. 
Havti,  or  Haiti,  ba^I;    Fr. 


Leipsic,  lip'sik 
zig,  lip'tsiG. 

Leith,  loeth. 

LC-om/iu-ster  (J 

Leominster  {V 

Le'ou :  ^p.pi 
e  Sueur.  so< 
leh  swL'it. 

--i%e,  leej;i^r 

Lisle,  Iccl. 

Lima  (Peru),  I 

-  (f. 

...,„.i,lil 

Llano 


pre 


'.'tG'. 


Hebrides,  lieb'ri-dez. 
Hg-le'ua,  St. 
Helena  (Ark.))  I»ei'g-na. 
Hel'go-land,    or    Hel/j-go- 

land. 
Hel'siug-fors'. 
Hen-lo'pen. 
Heu-rFko. 
Hes8e  Cas'sgl. 
Him-a-la'ya ;  Sanskrit pron. 

hi-mtl'la-ya. 
Hin-dQ-stau'. 
Ho-ang'bo,  pronounced  ah 

most  wliaug'ho'. 
Ho'bo-ks^n. 
Holsteiu,  hol'stlu. 
Honduras,  hon-doo'ras. 
Honolulu,  ho  no-Ioo'loo. 
Houston,  Iiyoos'tun. 
Hue,  hoo-ii/. 

Iberville,  T'bgr-vil. 

lUimani,  eel-yri-mn'nee. 

Hliuois,  il-lT-noicc'',  omoi'. 

Indianola,  in-dl-a-no'la. 

Indies,  iu'dlz. 

I'o-wa. 

Isle  ifoyale,  eel-rUa  yal. 


I-uiCa." 
Iztaccihuatl, 
hwat'l'. 


ko, 


jiil-lees' 


Gf 


.pron.  ya'uu. 
Joliel,  jul'le-et. 
Ju'an  Fer  nau'dCz ;    Sp.  pv. 

Hoo-an'  Ifu-unu'deth. 
Ju'au,  Saint;   Sp.  San  Juan 

s^n  Kooan,  or  snn  HWJiu, 
Juugfrau,  ycTong'frow. 
Ju'ul-at'.a. 

Kal/a-ma-zoo'. 
Kam"-chat'ka. 
Kanawha,  ka-uaw'wa. 
Kankakee,  kank'.j-kee'. 
Karakorum,  ka-ra-ko'rttm. 
Ka-taVdin. 
Kearney,  kiir^ni. 
Kearsarge,  ker'sUrj'. 
Kennebec,  ken-nC  bek'. 
Kenosha,  kSn-o'sha. 
Ke'o-kuk/. 
Khiva,  Kee'va. 
Kiakhta,  ke-SK'ta. 
Kief,  ke-ef,  or  Ki-ev'. 
Kiel,  keel. 
Klamath,  klnra'at. 
Kilimanjaro,    kil-g-man-jil- 

ro'. 
Kil-lar'ney. 
Kit'ta-tin'ny, 
Konigsber"',  ken'igz-bgrg. 
Kordofan,  kor-do-fiin' . 
Kurile,  koti'rU. 

l.ab'ra-dor'. 
La  Fayette,  laf-a-ef . 
La  Fourche,  1^  foorsh. 
La  Guayra,  la  gwi'ra. 
Laon,  la'oN'. 
Lancaster,  ISng^kas-ter. 
La  liochelle,  la  ro-shSl'. 
Lausanne,  16'zan'. 
Leicester,  les'ter, 
Leinster,  lin'ster,  or  leen'- 
ster. 


^.,  ,  ,     UBRARV 

This  book  IS  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed.  ' 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall 


LD  2l-50m-6.'60 
(Bl321sl0)476 


mal'ta.  II  11       TT 

Mandalch,n    JUL    G 
Manistie,  " 

Slauitoba, 
Manitouwo( 

wok'. 
Maracaybo, 
Mar'mo-ra. 
Marquesas, 
Marquette, 
Marseilles, 

Marseille' 
Martinique 
Ma-tan'zas 
Blat'a-pan' 
Mauch-Chi 

chtink'. 

az'at-lan 
Medina  (A 
Medina  (U. 
Me-her'rin. 
Menaijmenl  or  men'a  (Str.) 
Mendocino,  m5n-do-see'no. 
Mersey,  mgr'zT. 
Merthyr  Tydvil.  or  Tydfil, 

mer'thgr  tid'vil. 
Messina,  mt'S-.<ee'na. 
Miami,  mi-a'ml. 
Milan, mll'an  (Italy);  mi'lan 

(U.S.).   " 
Miramachi,  niTr'a-ma-shee'. 
Mod'e-na,  or  mod'a-nli. 
Mohave, "mo-hilv/. 
Mo-luc'eaj. 
Mo-nad'nnck. 
Mo-non/ga-he'l.a. 
Mont  Blanc,  nioN  blfis,  or 

Mount  Blinc. 
Mont  Cenis,  mox  seh-ne',  or 

seh-ness'. 
Mon'te-vid'e-o,   or  mon-tS- 

vee'da-o. 
Mont-pe'lT-er. 
Mos'cow;   "Kuss.  Moskwa, 

mosk-wa'. 
Mozambique,  mo-zam-beek'. 
Munich,  mii^nik;  Ger.  Miin 

chen,  miin'Gen. 
Muscatine,  mus'ka-teen'. 
Mu  skin  gum,  mus-king' gum. 
Mysore,  mi-sqr'. 

Nantes,    nants;    Fr.  pron. 

n6Nt. 
Nan-tuck'et. 
Natal,  na-tal/. 
Natch'i-toch'es ;    sometimes 

pron.  nak'e-tush'. 
Neufchat«l,  uusU'a'tel'. 
Newfoundland,      nu'fund- 

land' . 
New  Orae-aus;    often,  b 


Pierre    (Saint),    sent   peer; 

Fr.pron.  sSx  pe-SR'. 
Piqua,  pik'wa. 
Pisa,  pee'sa. " 
■cat'a-qua. 
Plaquemine,"  plak'men'. 
Plata  (Rio  de  la),  re'o  da  la 

pia^ta. 
Po'cQ-taPi-CQ. 
Pompeii,  pom-pa'yee. 
Pont'char-traiu', 
Pon'ti-ac. 
Po-po-cat'a-pBtP. 
Port-au-Pnnce,        port-o- 

prinss  ;  Fr.  pron.  pORt- 

o-praxss. 
Porto  Rico,  por'to   ree'ko; 

Sp.  Puerto  Rico,  pw^R'to 

ree'ko. 
Potosi,  po-to-see',  or  po-to'- 

see. 
Poughkeepsie,  po-kip'sT. 
PragTie,    prag;    Ger.    Prag, 

prao. 
Prairie  du  Chien,  pra'rT  du 


Queretaro,  ka-ra-ta'ro. 
Quesada,  kS-sa'Da. 
(^uiloa,  kce'lo-a. 
Quiu'e-baug'. 
Quito,  kee'to. 

Racine,  ras-seen'. 
Rahway,  raw'wa. 
Raleigh,  raw'li. 
Rangoon,  raug-goon'. 
Rap'id-an',  or  Rap'id  Ann. 
Raritan,  rar'it-un. 
Reading,  r5d'ing. 


.  General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


ten  Cheboygan. 
Shen'an-do'an. 
Sierra,  8e-eR"/Ra. 
Sierra     Madre,      se-eR'Ra 

mSD'ra. 

ierra  Nevada,  se-eR'Ra  na- 

va'Da. 

Sim'plon;    Fr.  pron.  saN'- 

pl5N'. 
Singapore,  sing'ga-por'. 
Sioux,  soo. 
Sisal,  se-saP. 
Skag'ggr  Rack. 
Skaneat<'les,  skau'e-at'les. 
So-no'ra. 
Sorata,  so-ra'ta. 
Steubenville,  stu'bgn-viL 
Stock'holm. 
Stutt'gart ;   Ger.  pr.  stdbt'- 

gaRt. 
Sucre,  aoo'kra. 
Suez,   soo'^ez;    Arab,  pron 

soo-ez'. 
Sumatra,  soo-ma'tra. 
Surinam,  soo-ri-nam'. 
Su-wa'nee. 
Swansea,  swon'se. 
Szegedin,s6g'ed'en',  or  seg' 

ed'in'. 

Tahiti,  ta-hl'te. 
Talequah,  tS'ls-kwa. 
TaPla-has'see. 
Tamaqua,  ta-maw'kwa. 
Tampico,  lam-pee'ko. 
Taos,  tS'os ;  almost  towss. 
Taunton  (EngOi  tawn'tgn. 
Taunton  (Mass.),  tan'tQU. 
Teche,  t6sh. 

Tehuantepec,  ta-wan-ta-pek' 
Teneriflfe,  ten'er-ir. 


Terre-Haute,     ter'rgh-hot ; 

Fr.   jtron.    t6R'hot',     or 

tr-r'reh-hot. 
Thames,  tfimz. 
Thibadeauville,  tib'S-do'vil. 
Thih.'t,  tib'et,  or  tt- bet'. 
Tim  buk'too. 
Titi.aca,  tit-e-ka'ka. 
Tivoli,  tiv/o-le,  ortee'vo-lee. 
Tu-i.wka. 
Teuton,  too'lSN'. 
Toulouse,  too'looz'. 
Tours,  tooR. 

Trafalgar',  or  Tra-mi'gar. 
Triest,  or  Trieste,  tre-est', 

or  tre-Gs'ta. 
Trin'i-dad'. 
Truxillo,  or  Trujillo,  troo- 

iiecl'yo. 
Tu'rin,  or  tu-rin'. 
Tyr/Qli  Ger.j}7-on.to-xdU. 

Ulm  ;  Ger.  pi-mi.  oolm, 

Um-ba'gog. 

Upernavik,  oo-pBR'na-vik. 

Up'sal,  or  Upsala,  up-sU'la. 

Uruguay,  u'roo-gwa'  or  00- 

roo-gwl'. 
.'tab,  yoo'ta. 
Utrecht,  u'trSkt ;  Dutclipr. 

u'trBKt. 

Valdai,  val'dT. 
Val'la-do-lid';    Span.  pron. 

val-Va-Do-leeD'. 
ValpaVaisn,  val-pa-ri'so. 
Venezuela,     ven'e  zwee'Ia  ; 

Sp.  pron.  Vf^n-eth-wa'laT 
Vera  Cruz,  v.a'ra-kroos. 
Verde,  v5rd. 
Vergennes,  vt-r-jenz', 
Versailles, versnlz^  Fr.pr. 

V^R'Sl'll'      ."'   \  .'i;    -;iv''. 

.   ■.    M_,     L  ,,   :     Wi..|i, 


Vincennes,    ^tn-sf-n/y ;     /'>. 

pron.  vaN's6n'. 
Vosges,  vozh. 

Wachusett,  wa-chij/sgt. 
Wahsatch,  wa-sach'. 
Wijp'sT-pTn'e-CQn. 

ck  (Eng.).  wor'rik. 
Warwick  (U.  S.),  wor'wik, 

or  wor'rik. 
Washita,  or  Ouachita,w58h'- 

T  taw'. 
Watervliet,  wS'ter-vleet'. 
Wfiu-ke'gau. 
We'gsir :  Ger.  pron.  wa'zgr. 
Wieliczka,  we-litch'kS. 
Wilkesbarre,  wTlks'bar-rT. 
Willamette,  vvil-la'met;  wr. 

also  Walahmutte. 
Win'ne-ba'go. 
Win-ne-pg-sau'kee. 
Woolwich,     wdbl'itch,     or 

WQ-ol'ij. 
Worcester,  wdbs'tgr. 
Wiirtembcrg,  wfir'tgm-berg; 

Ger.pr.  wUu'tem-beRG'. 
Wy'an-dot'. 
Wy-o'ming. 

Xapeco,    or    Chapeco,    sha- 
Xarayes,  sha-ri'Ss.     [pa'ko. 
Xenia,  zee'ni-a. 
Xeres;  Span.'pron.  H5-r6s'; 

Port.  pron.  sh6r-B8'. 
Xoa,  sho'a. 


ke-ang'. 
Yazoo'. 
Yera'eu. 
Yenisei,  yen'e-sa'e,  or  yen- 

e  so';  or  Enisei,  en'e-sa'e. 
Yo-ko-ha'ma. 
Yo-sem'i-te. 

Youghiogheuy,y6h'h5-ga'nT 
Yp'si-iau'ti. 
Yji'ca-tau',  or  yeo'ka-tan'. 

Zacatecas,  zak-a-ta'kas. 

Zam-beze',  or  zara-ba'ze. 

Zangxiebar,  zang'ga-bar'. 

Zan'te. 

Zan'zT-bar'.  [tsU'riK. 

Ziirich,  zu'rik;    Ger.  pron. 

Zuyder  {or  Zuider)  Zee,  zV- 

der    zee,   or  zoo'der  zee; 

Dutch  pron.  zoi'der  za. 


VE  0697 


o 


5J!6  73 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


^ 

^ 


